JP7843503B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common practice to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information obtained after the start conditions are met, and then to execute a game performance (variation performance) according to the result of that judgment.

In such gaming machines, there are also known systems that use predetermined performance devices (performance buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) to execute performances (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-033816

However, in gaming machines, there is always a desire to improve the enjoyment of the game. For example, considerations include implementing visual effects that leave a stronger impression on players, and adjusting the game duration appropriately without diminishing players' motivation.

This invention was made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Examples of application]
To solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention includes: a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game; a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game's performance based on signals from the main control means; a first light-emitting means (panel lamp) provided in a first region and capable of performing a light-emitting display based on signals from the secondary control means; and a second light-emitting means provided in a second region different from the first region and capable of performing a light-emitting display based on signals from the secondary control means. The game includes means (frame lamp) and operating means that can be operated by the player (effect buttons, operating lever, sword handle unit 135, effect operation stick 136, launch handle device 103), and has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (advantageous game state, specific game state) that is more advantageous than the first game state, and acquires judgment information based on the fulfillment of starting conditions (ball entering the first starting opening 112, winning special 1, or ball entering the second starting opening 115, winning special 2), and makes a judgment based on the said judgment information. The game includes a game execution means that executes changes in the performance symbols, and when the changes reach a predetermined state, a special game can be executed. The game can be controlled to activate a specific function (complete function) at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value given and used reaches a predetermined value (95000). The display means can execute specific character displays, specific performances where the performance symbols are enlarged, or instruction performances (right-hand shooting image displays) that instruct the player to perform specific operations. When the changes are not executed, a customer waiting performance or a customer waiting demo display can be executed. The game includes a rainbow performance means that includes a plurality of light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The rainbow performance means is a light-emitting means that includes the first light-emitting means, the second light-emitting means, or the display means, and can execute the rainbow light display using one or more of the light-emitting means. The rainbow performance means can use the plurality of light-emitting means to display a rainbow to the player. The system can perform a first effect in which the rainbow light display is shown in a specific manner that appears as a color (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the panel lamp work together), and a second effect in which the rainbow effect means performs the rainbow light display in a predetermined manner that appears as a different rainbow color from the first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the panel lamp each have different light-emitting modes such as flashing or moving), and the system can perform the rainbow effect means in such a way that the number of light-emitting patterns of the rainbow light display differs depending on whether it is a first state (a win at 2) when the effect symbol stops at a first stop symbol and the next variation starts, or a second state (a win at 7) when the effect symbol stops at a second stop symbol and the next variation starts, and the effect symbol can be displayed in a first manner (a normal effect symbol) when the variation starts, and can be displayed in a second manner that is smaller than the first manner (for example, a small effect symbol displayed during an SPSP reach) during a reach effect , and the system can perform the specific effect (for example, an effect symbol when announcing a jackpot) In the performance that displays the performance symbols, the performance symbols can be displayed larger than in the first embodiment , the specific performance is performed when it indicates that the special game will be performed, and an enlargement performance can be performed in which at least one of the multiple performance symbols is enlarged and occupies a larger area in the image display area by the display means than the other performance symbols, the rainbow light display can be performed when the specific performance is performed , a volume adjustment image (sound adjustment image OC) that indicates the volume status can be displayed in the customer waiting performance, the rainbow light display is not performed when the volume adjustment image corresponding to the operation of the operation means (performance operation stick 136, etc.) is displayed in the customer waiting performance, the rainbow light display is not performed, the volume adjustment image (sound adjustment image OC) can be displayed during the variation, while the rainbow light display can be performed when the volume adjustment image corresponding to the operation of the operation means during the variation is displayed .

According to this invention, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

This is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment. This is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 open relative to the outer frame 160. This is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. This is a diagram illustrating the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. This figure shows an example of a jackpot/win determination table T1. This figure shows an example of a pattern determination table T2. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. This is a block diagram showing the details of the performance control board 320. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. This diagram explains the transitions between game states. This is an explanatory diagram showing the general flow of processing performed by the main control board 300. This is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the performance control board 320. This is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop process, which is one of the processes performed on the main control board 300. This flowchart explains the process for determining the transition to a shortened game mode and the process for determining the end of the shortened game mode. This diagram illustrates the end of the time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4. This is a diagram illustrating the details of the information display unit 302c. This diagram illustrates a specific example of the counting period for base value B. This diagram shows examples of display effects for each performance mode. This diagram shows an example of how the number of pending items will be displayed. This diagram illustrates the time-saving gameplay transition animation performed when transitioning to time-saving gameplay state 1 and time-saving gameplay state 2, as well as the display animation performed before the end of time-saving gameplay state 1 and time-saving gameplay state 2. This diagram illustrates the display effects that are executed before and after transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4. This diagram explains the display effects at the end of each of the time-saving game modes 1 to 4. This diagram illustrates the changes in the state of the gaming machine 100 after the fluctuations have stopped and the general display mode of the main display device 131. This diagram illustrates the general outline of the demo performance while customers are waiting. This is a timing chart (1) for when the variation animation in normal gameplay ends and the game enters a waiting state for customers. This figure shows examples of performances at various timings, as shown in Figure 7-1. This figure shows examples of performances at various timings, as shown in Figure 7-1. This figure shows an example of the animation that plays when a prize is won while the machine is waiting for customers. This figure shows an example of the effect when the sword hilt unit is operated while the display is fluctuating. This is a timing chart for when the variation animation in time-saving game state 3 ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. This figure shows examples of performances at various timings, as shown in Figure 8-1. This figure shows examples of performances at various timings, as shown in Figure 8-1. This is a timing chart (2) for when the variation animation in normal gameplay ends and the game enters a waiting state for customers. Figure 9-1 shows examples of performances at various timings. This figure shows examples of presentations in other embodiments. This diagram shows a concrete example of a rainbow-colored effect. This diagram shows a concrete example of a rainbow-colored effect. This diagram shows a concrete example of a rainbow-colored effect. This diagram shows an example of a rainbow-colored visual effect used while waiting for customers. This diagram shows an example of a rainbow-colored visual effect used while waiting for customers. This diagram shows an example of a rainbow-colored visual effect used while waiting for customers. This figure shows an example of the rainbow-colored effect displayed during volume control display and other operations. This diagram shows an example of the rainbow-colored effect during a variation animation. This diagram shows an example of the animations that occur during a spin when a jackpot is achieved after a reach. This diagram shows an example of the animations that occur during a spin when a jackpot is achieved after a reach. This figure shows an example of a lighting effect when the pattern enlargement effect is executed. This diagram shows an example of a lighting effect when the sword hilt unit is operated. This diagram shows examples of lighting effects when a jackpot is guaranteed and when it is not a jackpot (a miss). This diagram shows an example of a rainbow-colored animation that appears after a jackpot game has started. This diagram shows an example of the initial operation animation when the main board is powered on. This figure shows examples of rainbow-colored animation patterns during the customer waiting period, during the variation animation, and during the jackpot game in the first animation sequence. This figure shows an example of the execution rate of the rainbow color effect pattern after the final effect. This figure shows examples of combination patterns for the main display device and the frame lamp's rainbow color effect. This figure shows the change over time in the number of light-emitting devices that perform the rainbow effect after the final animation. This diagram shows examples of rainbow-colored animation patterns while waiting for customers and during jackpot gameplay. This figure shows examples of rainbow-colored animation patterns under different starting conditions for normal gameplay and specific gameplay states. This is a diagram showing a specific example of the staging. This is a diagram showing a specific example of the staging. This diagram shows the percentage of performance achieved through color effects. This diagram shows the execution rate of zone-based effects. This figure shows the execution rate of the change notification sound effect. This diagram shows the execution rate of the hold icon change animation. This diagram shows the execution rate of the lamp change effect. This figure shows the execution rate of the operation of the first movable member. This figure shows a modified example of the first example of the performance. This diagram shows the execution rate of the light guide plate display effect. This diagram shows the timing chart for the normal gameplay state in the second example of the presentation. This diagram shows the normal gameplay state in example 2 of the presentation. This diagram shows the timing chart for a specific game state in the second example of the performance. This is a diagram showing a specific game state in example 2 of the performance. This is a diagram showing example 3 of the staging. This is a diagram showing example 3 of the staging. This is a diagram showing the relationship between the time of variation. This diagram shows the percentage of preparatory actions performed. This figure shows the percentage of executions for stopping operations. This figure shows the execution rate of the variable stop pattern. This figure shows the execution rate of each variation start pattern. This is a diagram showing example 4 of the staging. This diagram shows the execution rate of the change in the appearance of the animation symbols. This diagram shows the execution rate of the animation that changes the display size of the animation symbols. This figure shows the execution rate of the display size change effect during the reach animation. This diagram shows the timing chart for specific example 5 of the performance. This is a diagram showing example 5 of the staging. This is a diagram showing example 6 of the staging. This figure shows the percentage of times notification effects were implemented. This figure shows the execution rate of vibration effects. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between RAM clearing operations and specific functions. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of error notification priority. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate during normal gameplay, and the rainbow-colored effect. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate in a specific game state, and the rainbow-colored effect produced by the effect. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting gate in a specific game state, and the rainbow-colored effect produced by the effect. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot during normal gameplay, and the rainbow-colored display using the hold icon. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot in a specific game state, and the rainbow-colored effect displayed by the hold icon. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the pre-notification of the activation of a specific function based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting slot in a specific game state, and the rainbow-colored effect displayed by the hold icon. This is an explanatory diagram showing the control flow based on the differences in game state when a specific function activation flag is set. This is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each animation from the time the specific function activation flag is set until the image indicating that the specific function is activated is displayed. This is an explanatory diagram showing what happens when power is restored after an interruption while a specific function is not operating. This is an explanatory diagram showing what happens when power is restored after an interruption while a specific function is operating. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the process from power-on to the start of fluctuations. This is a timing chart showing an example of a variation in the game's presentation. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation in the animation shown in Figure 73. This is a timing chart showing the case where a specific function is activated, as illustrated in example 1 of the variable animation. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation effect in Figure 75. This is a timing chart showing the case where a specific function is activated, as is the second example of a variable animation. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation effect in Figure 77 (Part 2). This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the movement of movable parts and specific functions. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation in the normal game state. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation in the normal game state, following Figure 80. This timing chart shows examples of variation effects based on winning a prize in the first starting slot during normal gameplay. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation in gameplay based on a ball entering the first starting slot during normal gameplay. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation in gameplay based on winning a prize in the second starting gate during a specific game state. This is a timing chart showing when a ball enters the first starting gate in a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram showing what happens when a ball enters the first starting gate in a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating how a specific function is activated when a ball enters the first starting slot during normal gameplay. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating how a specific function is activated when a ball enters the second starting slot during a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating how a specific function is activated when a ball enters the first starting slot during a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a specific function pre-notification triggered by a ball entering the first starting slot during normal gameplay. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a specific function pre-notification triggered by a win in the first starting gate during a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a specific function pre-notification triggered by a win in the second starting gate during a specific game state.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings as appropriate, a gaming machine 100 as one embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the embodiments described below are not limiting to the present invention, and not all of the elements and combinations described in the embodiments are necessarily essential to the solution of the present invention.

[Explanation of Gaming Machine 100]
Referring to Figures 1 and 2, the configuration of the first embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine 100, will be described first. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. Figure 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100, showing the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 open relative to the outer frame 160. The gaming machine 100 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches game balls based on the player's launch operation, and when a game ball enters a specific prize pocket, it pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on that prize.

In the following explanation, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "X direction," specifically the rightward direction of the gaming machine 100 as the "+X direction," and the leftward direction as the "-X direction." Furthermore, the up-down direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "Y direction," specifically the upward direction as the "+Y direction," and the downward direction as the "-Y direction." Additionally, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "Z direction," specifically the direction towards the back of the gaming machine 100 as the "+Z direction," and the direction towards the front of the gaming machine 100 as the "-Z direction."

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 comprises an outer frame 160 attached to the island equipment of a gaming parlor, an inner frame 170 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 160, and a glass frame 150 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is detachably attached to the glass frame 150 from its back side. Furthermore, a locking unit 190 is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150 to allow the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 160, and to allow the upper unit 180 to be detachably attached. Additionally, a glass frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150 to detect when the glass frame 150 is open, and an inner frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the inner frame 170 to detect when the inner frame 170 is open.

The inner frame 170 houses the main mechanisms, various components, and circuit boards that constitute the gaming machine 100, and the gaming board unit 102 is detachably mounted within it. A gaming area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the gaming board unit 102. This gaming area 106 includes a gaming ball flow area where the gaming balls flow and a display screen area for the main display device 131.

The game board unit 102 consists of a game board 102A that constitutes the game area 106, a feature unit 102B equipped with various movable features, a main display device 131, a performance control board unit 102C equipped with a performance control board 320, and a main control board unit 102D equipped with a main control board 300. The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is positioned in this opening 102AZ. This makes the main display device 131 easily visible to the player. Furthermore, in the game board unit 102, the side facing the player is also called the front side, and the side facing the back (opposite the front side) is also called the back side.

A performance control unit (BSU) is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150. The BSU includes a sword handle unit 135 and a performance control stick 136. A tray 128 is provided at the rear of the BSU, and a firing handle device 103 is provided to the lower right of the BSU. Furthermore, an upper unit 180, which performs predetermined related operations when a predetermined game state is reached, is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150, covering a portion of the upper part of the glass frame 150. The upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and is configured to engage with the glass frame 150. Finally, a first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided on both the left and right sides of the glass frame 150 for displaying performance information during gameplay and non-gameplay.

The upper tray 128 is a tray for storing game balls to be launched into the game area 106. The game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led to a launch rail (not shown), and are guided by the launch handle device 103 with a predetermined launch strength to a guide rail (not shown) via the launch rail, and launched into the game area 106 (game ball flow area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the launch handle device 103, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 will pass through either the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball flow area included in the game area 106. Specifically, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 with relatively strong force, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the right-hand route 106b.

At the center of the performance control unit BSU is a sword hilt unit 135, which mimics the shape of the handle of a sword. The sword hilt unit 135 includes a sword hilt button for performing decisions (operation input) during gameplay, a sword hilt button detection switch 137 for detecting the operation of the sword hilt button, a button drive device equipped with a button drive motor for changing the sword hilt button between a normal state and a protruding state positioned above the normal state, and a button vibration motor for changing the sword hilt button between a normal state and a vibrating state that vibrates in a predetermined manner, and a button light-emitting LED for changing the sword hilt button between an off state and an illuminated state that illuminates in a predetermined manner. This allows the player to input predetermined information to the game machine 100. Furthermore, on the left side of the performance control unit BSU is a performance control stick 136, which is a joystick used by the player to adjust the volume and other settings of the game machine 100.

The game area 106 is provided with an upper mechanism unit 154 at the rear of the upper section, a lower mechanism unit 156 at the bottom of the game ball flow area, and a light guide panel unit 181, which is positioned between these units and the game board 102A and has a light guide panel that covers these movable mechanisms and the main display device 131.

The upper and lower gimmick units 154 and 156 are movable gimmicks (so-called mechanisms) provided in the gimmick unit 102B, and are designed to perform various types of effects through predetermined operation and movement in accordance with the progress of the game. The light guide panel unit 181 comprises a transparent light guide panel made of resin such as acrylic, and a light-emitting unit for illuminating the light guide panel. The light guide panel unit 181 allows the effects displayed on the main display device 131 to be visible through the light guide panel, and also allows for the display of patterns and other elements by illuminating a portion of the panel with light incident from the light-emitting unit. In this embodiment, "movable gimmick" is interpreted to mean a moving mechanism, and "gimmick" is interpreted broadly to include both movable and immovable mechanisms.

In the area approximately below the center of the game area 106, there is a first starting opening 112 having a starting area into which game balls can enter. This first starting opening 112 is a general prize-winning type opening. When a game ball enters, a jackpot random number is obtained, a jackpot determination is made, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) are dispensed. Above the first starting opening 112, there is a stage 140 that allows game balls to "warp" through the left-hand route 106a of the game ball flow area, without passing between the pins, making it easier for them to enter the first starting opening 112. Note that game balls that enter the stage 140 may remain there for a while before returning to the game ball flow area through a predetermined notch in the stage 140.

Furthermore, a second starting port 115 is provided in the lower right region of the game area 106, which has a starting area into which game balls can enter. The second starting port 115 is a so-called attacker-type electric mechanism, and a starting port is provided at its lower part. A movable piece 115b is provided above the starting port, and this movable piece 115b is movablely controlled to either protrude from the game board 102A or be retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, it guides the game ball from the starting port into the second starting port 115, making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the starting port, and the game ball will not be able to win a prize in the second starting port 115. In other words, in the second starting opening 115, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding position, there is no opportunity for a game ball to enter, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted position, the opportunity for a game ball to enter increases. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 115, a jackpot random number is obtained and a jackpot determination is made, similar to the first starting opening 112, and the same number of prize balls (3 balls) as in the first starting opening 112 are dispensed.

Furthermore, the area to the right of the game area 106 is provided with a normal symbol activation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first large prize slot 117 into which game balls can enter, and a second large prize slot 127 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number and a normal symbol random number are acquired, and a win determination is performed. However, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, no prize balls are paid out based on that passage.

The first large prize slot 117 is a so-called attacker-type electric mechanism, and has an opening at its lower part, with a movable piece 117b on the upper side of the opening. Similar to the movable piece 115b of the second start slot 115, this movable piece 117b is controlled to move between a protruding state, where it extends out from the game board 102A, and a retracted state, where it is pulled into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is in the retracted state, it guides the game ball from the opening into the first large prize slot 117, making it possible for the game ball to enter the first large prize slot 117 (this state is also called "open" or "open state"). When a game ball enters the first large prize slot 117, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are dispensed. Conversely, if the movable piece 117b protrudes, the game ball will not enter the opening, and the game ball will not be able to enter the first large prize slot 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state").

The second large prize slot 127 is a so-called attacker-type electric mechanism, and has an opening at its lower part, with a movable piece 127b on the upper side of the opening. Similar to the movable piece 115b of the second start slot 115 and the movable piece 117b of the first large prize slot 117, this movable piece 127b is controlled to move between a protruding state, where it protrudes from the game board 102A, preventing game balls from entering the second large prize slot 127, and a retracted state, where it is pulled back into the game board 102A, allowing game balls to enter the second large prize slot 127. When a game ball enters the second large prize slot 127, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) are dispensed. In addition, a prize-entry assist device (not shown) is provided above the second large prize slot 127. This prize-winning assist device is designed so that when multiple game balls pass through the right-side route 106b of the game area 106 and then pass over the closed movable piece 127b, they remain on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time. At predetermined intervals, the movable piece 127b is opened, allowing the multiple game balls to enter the second large prize-winning opening 127 all at once, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, at the bottom of the game area 106, there is an outlet 111 for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the first start opening 112, second start opening 115, first large prize opening 117, or second large prize opening 127. Also, in the right-hand area of the game area 106, there is a cover 116 that covers the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second start opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, and the second large prize opening 127 from the front. This cover 116 has a guide portion that protrudes toward the game board 102A to guide game balls toward the second start opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, and the second large prize opening 127.

A main display device 131, consisting of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) or the like, is provided in the approximate center of the game area 106. This main display device 131 displays images when the game is not in play and displays images according to the progress of the game. In particular, based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 112 and the second start port 115, multiple performance symbols for notifying the jackpot determination result are displayed in a variable manner, and when a specific combination of performance symbols (for example, 777, etc.) stops and is displayed as a confirmed stop, the jackpot determination result is notified. In other words, when game balls enter the first start port 112 and the second start port 115, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122, which will be described later, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, they are displayed in accordance with the stop display of special symbols. In other words, the timing of the display of the changing symbols on the main display device 131 and the display of the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 are synchronized. Furthermore, during the display of the changing symbols, various images and characters are displayed, or pre-announcement effects related to the special symbols are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation that they may win a jackpot. In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display, an organic EL display, or a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or rotating drum display device may also be used.

The main display device 131 is positioned approximately in the center of the game board unit 102. Three performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and various performances are shown. These performances displayed on the main display device 131 are executed based on performance patterns described later. Hereafter, the performances displayed on the main display device 131 will also be simply referred to as "display performances." In the display performances on the main display device 131, if a win occurs in the jackpot determination (described later), the three performance symbols are stopped at the end to display a jackpot symbol arrangement (for example, a sequence of identical numbers such as "7,7,7"). Conversely, in the display performances, if a loss occurs in the jackpot determination (described later), the three performance symbols are stopped at the end to display a losing symbol arrangement (for example, a sequence of random numbers such as "2,5,1"). This allows the player to recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

A display unit 125 is provided in the lower left of the game area 106. The display unit 125 includes a regular symbol display unit 118, a regular symbol hold display unit 119, a first special symbol display unit 120, a second special symbol display unit 122, a first special symbol hold display unit 123, and a second special symbol hold display unit 124. Details of the display unit 125 will be described later.

When a player performs what is known as "left-handed shooting," maintaining a small rotation angle on the launch handle device 103, the game ball is launched with relatively weak force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side of the game area 106. On the other hand, when a player performs what is known as "right-handed shooting," maintaining a large rotation angle on the launch handle device 103, the game ball is launched with relatively strong force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side of the game area 106. Therefore, "right-handed shooting" is necessary when aiming to enter the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second starting opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, or the second large prize opening 127.

The first start opening 112 is a start opening that is always open. On the other hand, the second start opening 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second start opening 115 based on the result of a hit determination condition that a game ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In this case, a state is created in which it is easy for a game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the first start opening 112 or the second start opening 115, a jackpot random number, various symbol random numbers (jackpot symbol random number, minor hit symbol random number, time-saving symbol random number), reach random number, and variation pattern random number are obtained, and the following three determinations may be performed: (1) Determination of whether or not to perform a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot determination). (2) In the display unit 125, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) is made (hereinafter also referred to as symbol determination). (3) In the display effects on the main display device 131, the determination of whether or not a reach will occur (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination), and the determination of which of the multiple variation patterns to use (hereinafter also referred to as variation pattern determination).

Here, "Big Win Game" refers to a special game consisting of multiple rounds (for example, 10 rounds), in which the first or second big prize slot 117 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) in each round. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the first or second big prize slot 117. Also, "Small Win Game" refers to a game in which the first or second big prize slot 117 is opened for a time (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which game balls can enter. Furthermore, "Reach" refers to a state in which, in the main display device 131, two of the three fluctuating display symbols stop, and these two symbols constitute two of the three symbols that make up the big win symbol arrangement. For example, in the main display device 131, this refers to a situation where two of the three fluctuating display symbols stop, and these two symbols are in the same state. In this case, the symbols that make up two of the three symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol arrangement are also called "reach symbols." Furthermore, in the following explanation, the judgment performed upon the entry of a game ball through the first start opening 112 will also be referred to as "Special 1 Jackpot Judgment" or "1st Special Symbol Judgment," and the judgment performed upon the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 115 will also be referred to as "Special 2 Jackpot Judgment" or "2nd Special Symbol Judgment."

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the movable piece 115b of the second start opening 115. Hereafter, the determination performed based on the passage of a game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b will also be referred to as the "winning determination" or "normal symbol determination." In the game machine 100 of this embodiment, the probability of a win in the normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining whether to open the movable piece 115b, is specified to change depending on the game state of the game machine 100.

The first large prize slot 117 opens via a movable piece 117b depending on the result of the jackpot determination. Normally, the first large prize slot 117 is closed by this movable piece 117b. However, if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is activated to open the first large prize slot 117. Therefore, by performing a "right-handed shot" during a jackpot game, the player can obtain more prize balls compared to when a jackpot game is not being played. The second large prize slot 127 opens via a movable piece 127b in much the same manner as the first large prize slot 117, during a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot determination result.

(Explanation of display unit 125)
The display unit 125 primarily displays information related to jackpot symbol determination and regular symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display unit 120, a second special symbol display unit 122, a first special symbol hold display unit 123, a second special symbol hold display unit 124, a regular symbol display unit 118, and a regular symbol hold display unit 119. Although not specifically illustrated, the display unit 125 is composed of multiple LEDs and has a display that makes it easy to identify which of the above-mentioned displays corresponds to the first special symbol display unit 120.

The first special symbol display unit 120, upon determining the first special symbol, displays a special symbol that has fluctuated and then stopped. The stopped special symbol indicates the result of the jackpot determination in the first special symbol determination. The first special symbol display unit 120 will either display a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot, or a losing symbol indicating a loss in the first special symbol determination.

The second special symbol display unit 122, upon determining the second special symbol, displays a special symbol that has fluctuated and then stopped. The stopped special symbol indicates the result of the jackpot determination in the second special symbol determination. The second special symbol display unit 122 will either display a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot, or a losing symbol indicating a loss in the second special symbol determination.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured not to immediately execute the first special symbol judgment and symbol variation display triggered by a new game ball entering the first start port 112, such as during the display of special symbol variation related to special symbol judgment or during a jackpot game. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a hold function that holds the first special symbol judgment and stores the four random number information for the first special symbol judgment as a set of hold information. The first special symbol hold indicator 123 displays the number of hold information for the first special symbol judgment (first hold number) that has been stored in this way. Similarly, the gaming machine 100 also has a hold function that holds the second special symbol judgment and stores the four random number information for the second special symbol judgment as a set of hold information when a new game ball enters the second start port 115, such as during the display of special symbol variation related to special symbol judgment or during a jackpot game. The second special symbol hold indicator 124 displays the number of hold information (second hold number) stored in this manner for determining the second special symbol.

The regular symbol display unit 118, upon determining a regular symbol, displays the regular symbol in a variable state, then stops it, and the stopped regular symbol indicates the result of the winning determination. However, even when a game ball passes through the regular symbol activation gate 113b, such as while the regular symbol is being displayed in a variable state on the regular symbol display unit 118, the regular symbol determination and the variable display of the regular symbol related to the determination are not immediately executed. Therefore, the game machine 100 has a hold function that holds the regular symbol determination and stores the information of the regular symbol random number for that determination as hold information. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 119 displays the number of hold information for regular symbol determinations that has been stored in this manner.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is equipped with a right-hand shooting lamp (not shown) and a round lamp (not shown). The right-hand shooting lamp lights up during the jackpot game state (described later) and the time-saving game state (described later), encouraging the player to shoot to the right (details described later). The round lamp consists of two or more lamps and changes from an off state to an on state during a jackpot. The lighting of the round lamp indicates the number of round games depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if there are two round lamps, the lighting of one round lamp indicates that three round games will be played (i.e., it indicates a 3R jackpot), and the lighting of the other round lamp indicates that ten round games will be played (i.e., it indicates a 10R jackpot).

(Internal configuration of gaming machine 100)
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, a performance control board 320, an image/sound control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a launch control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

As shown in Figure 3-1, the main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 includes a one-chip microcontroller 301. The one-chip microcontroller 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also includes input and output ports (not shown) for main control.

This main control input port is connected to the following: a gate detection switch 303 that detects when a game ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b; a first start port detection switch 304 that detects when a game ball enters the first start port 112; a second start port detection switch 305 that detects when a game ball enters the second start port 115; a first prize port detection switch 306a that detects when a game ball enters the first large prize port 117; a second prize port detection switch 306b that detects when a game ball enters the second large prize port 127; and a payout control board 310. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 via this main control input port.

Furthermore, the output port for main control is connected to symbol indicators 118, 120, and 122 that display special and normal symbols that open and close the movable piece 115b, etc., symbol hold indicators 119, 123, and 124 that display the number of hold information for special symbol determination and the number of hold information for normal symbol determination, a game information output terminal board 309 that outputs external information signals, a payout control board 310, and a performance control board 320. Various signals are output from the main control board 300 via this output port for main control.

The game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting external information signals generated by the main control board 300 to the arcade's hall computer, etc. The game information output terminal board 309 is wired and connected to the main control board 300, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting to the arcade's hall computer, etc.

In the one-chip microcontroller 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads the program stored in the main ROM 301b based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, performs calculations, directly controls each device, or sends commands to other boards according to the results of the calculations.

Furthermore, the front surface of the main control board 300 is equipped with an RWM (RAM) clear switch 302a for inputting signals to clear the contents of the main RAM 301c or update the setting value of the game's advantage level (the probability of being judged as a jackpot), a setting key switch 302b for inputting signals to switch to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (described later), an information display 302c for displaying the base value B and setting values that allow the actual performance of the game machine to be understood, and other electronic components.

The information display unit 302c, as will be described in detail later, consists of four 7-segment displays (302ca to 302cd) arranged horizontally. These four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd display the setting values and the base value B in the normal game state, as will be described later. When displaying the base value B, dynamic lighting is used, while when displaying the two-digit setting value, static lighting is used on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd from the right.

The payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 is equipped with a one-chip microcontroller consisting of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 in a bidirectional manner. The payout CPU reads a program stored in the payout ROM and performs calculation processing based on input signals from the payout ball measurement switch 311, the door open switch 312, and the timer, which detect whether or not game balls have been dispensed, and transmits the corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on this processing. In addition, a payout motor 313 for a prize ball dispensing device, which dispenses a predetermined number of prize balls to the player from the game ball storage unit, is connected to the output side of the payout control board 310. The payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on a payout quantity specification command transmitted from the main control board 300, performs calculations, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to dispense a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the calculations performed by the payout CPU.

The performance control board 320 primarily controls various display effects during gameplay and standby. This performance control board 320 is equipped with a sub-CPU 320a, a sub-ROM 320b, and a sub-RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 via unidirectional communication. The sub-CPU 320a reads the program stored in the sub-ROM 320b and performs calculations based on input signals from various commands, units, the performance operation stick 136, the sword handle button detection switch 137, and the timer received from the main control board 300. Based on this processing, it transmits corresponding data to the image/sound control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. The performance control board 320 is also equipped with a changeover switch 22 for switching adjustment modes related to the volume of performance sounds output from the sound output device 331 and the light intensity of display devices (main display device, first side display device, second side display device, etc.) and various lighting devices (performance lighting devices, etc.).

For example, when the sub-CPU 320a receives a variation start command from the main control board 300, it determines a performance pattern for the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper mechanism unit 154, the lower mechanism unit 156, the mechanism mechanism 158, the light guide plate panel unit 181, and the performance lighting device 342, etc., to execute the game performance, and sends a performance pattern specification command to the image/audio control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 to execute the performance pattern. Details of this performance pattern determination will be described later. In addition, the sub-ROM 320b stores programs for performance control, data necessary for determining various games, and multiple tables. Details of these tables will be described later. Furthermore, the sub-RAM 320c functions as a data work area during the calculation processing of the sub-CPU 320a, and stores game status, performance patterns, performance symbols, counting counter, and launch operation information. The sub-RAM 320c is provided with multiple memory areas. Details of these memory areas will be described later.

The image and sound control board 330 includes an image CPU (not shown), control ROM, control RAM, CGROM, VRAM, and VDP for controlling the image display of the main display device 131, as well as an audio CPU, audio ROM, and audio RAM. This image and sound control board 330 is connected to the performance control board 320 via bidirectional communication, and the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the audio output device 331 are connected to its output side. The image CPU controls the VDP to display a predetermined image based on commands received from the performance control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area during the image CPU's calculations and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM also stores the image CPU's control processing program, animation patterns for displaying animations based on performance patterns, and animation scene information. The CGROM stores a large amount of image data, such as animation patterns and backgrounds, to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc. The image CPU reads a predetermined program based on an animation pattern specification command transmitted from the animation control board 320, expands the predetermined image data stored in the CGROM into the VRAM, and controls the display of the image data expanded in the VRAM on the main display device 131, etc., thereby realizing the animation. The audio ROM stores a large amount of audio data for output from the audio output device 331. The audio CPU reads a predetermined program based on an animation pattern specification command transmitted from the animation control board 320, and controls the audio output of the audio output device 331, such as speakers provided in the glass frame 150, the first side display device 132, and the second side display device 133, thereby realizing the audio animation.

The lamp control board 340 controls various movable parts (LEDs, etc.), the sword handle unit 135 (button drive device, button light-emitting LED), and the light guide plate panel unit 181, as well as the performance lighting devices 342, such as the lamp built into the firing handle device 103 and the lamps of decorative members provided on the glass frame 150. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 drives and controls the motors provided in each of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper part unit 154, the lower part unit 156, and the part mechanism section 158 to realize the movement of the parts by the movable parts (movable bodies) of the units. In addition, the lamp control board 340 realizes the light-emitting effects by the light guide plate panel by controlling the light-emitting LEDs of various movable parts and the light-emitting parts of the light guide plate panel unit 181, and realizes the lighting effects by the performance lighting devices 342 by controlling the on/off/flashing of the performance lighting devices 342. The lamp control board 340 is connected to the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180, etc., so that it can receive predetermined signals.

The launch control board 350 receives touch signals from the touch sensor 351 provided on the launch handle device 103 and controls the energization of the launch solenoid 353 and the ball feed solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the launch volume 352. The touch sensor 351 is a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes the change in capacitance caused by the player touching the launch handle device 103. When it detects that the player has touched the launch handle device 103, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control board 350 that permits the energization of the launch solenoid 353. The launch volume 352 is a variable resistor that divides a constant voltage (e.g., 5V) applied to the launch volume 352 and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control board 350. Here, the rotation speed of the launch solenoid 353 is set to approximately 99.9 (revolutions/minute) based on the frequency derived from the output period of a crystal oscillator provided on the launch control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute), since one ball is launched each time the launch solenoid rotates. In other words, one game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds. The touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the launch volume 352 are input to the performance control board 320. This allows the performance control board 320 to detect the launch of game balls.

The power supply board 360 is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of capacitors and supplies power voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, it supplies power voltage to the main control board 300, the payout control board 310, the performance control board 320, and the launch control board 350. It also monitors the power voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100 and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power outage detection signal is high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operational, and when the power outage detection signal is low level, the main CPU 301a becomes inoperable. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to capacitors; for example, it could be a battery, or a combination of capacitors and batteries may be used.

(Electrical configuration of the main control board 300)
The electrical configuration of the main control board 300 will be explained with reference to Figures 3-2 to 3-5. Figure 3-2 is a diagram illustrating the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. Figure 3-3 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot/win determination table T1. Figure 3-4 is a diagram showing an example of the pattern determination table T2. Figure 3-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300.

As shown in Figure 3-2, the main ROM 301b stores programs for game control and tables necessary for various games. For example, it stores a jackpot/win determination table T1, a symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5.

The jackpot/win determination table T1 is a table for determining jackpots based on jackpot random numbers. It includes Special Jackpot Determination Table 1 T1A, which is referenced when determining whether the stopping result of the special symbol fluctuations in the first special symbol display 120 is a jackpot, a minor win, a time-saving mode 4 (time-saving game state 4) described later, or a loss (jackpot lottery); Special Jackpot Determination Table 2 T1B, which is referenced when determining the stopping result of the special symbol fluctuations in the second special symbol display 122; and Win Determination Table T1C, which is referenced in the win determination when determining whether the stopping result of the normal symbol fluctuations is a win or not. Note that Special Jackpot Determination Table 1 T1A and Special Jackpot Determination Table 2 T1B in the jackpot/win determination table T1 have different jackpot random numbers set according to multiple setting values, and are configured so that the probability of being determined to be a jackpot differs for each setting value. Specifically, for example, in the Special 1 Jackpot Judgment Table T1A, the setting value is set to one of four levels, from "1" to "4". When the setting value is "1", the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/300; when the setting value is "2", it's approximately 1/290; when the setting value is "3", it's approximately 1/280; and when the setting value is "4", it's approximately 1/270. Similarly, in the Special 2 Jackpot Judgment Table T1B, the setting value is also set to one of four levels, from "1" to "4". When the setting value is "1", the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/30; when the setting value is "2", it's approximately 1/29; when the setting value is "3", it's approximately 1/28; and when the setting value is "4", it's approximately 1/27. When these setting values are displayed on the information display unit 302c, they will be displayed as "01" to "04" on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd.

The symbol determination table T2 is a table referenced when determining the stopping symbols, such as special symbols, on the symbol display 125, based on random numbers for jackpot symbols, minor jackpot symbols, time-saving symbols, and normal symbols. It includes a jackpot symbol determination table, a minor jackpot symbol determination table, a losing symbol determination table, a time-saving symbol determination table, and a normal symbol determination table. Details of these determination tables will be described later.

The Reach Judgment Table T3 is a table referenced when making a reach judgment based on a reach judgment random number. The Reach Judgment Table T3 includes various tables that can be selected depending on the game state and the type of special symbol, such as the Special 1 Normal Reach Judgment Table and the Special 2 Time-Saving Reach Judgment Table. Specifically, for example, the Special 1 Normal Reach Judgment Table is a table used to select whether or not to execute a reach in the display animation based on ball entry into the first start port 112 during normal gameplay, and the Special 2 Time-Saving Reach Judgment Table is a table used to select whether or not to execute a reach in the display animation based on ball entry into the second start port 115 during time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2. Details of the various game states, such as non-probability change game state and probability change game state, will be described later.

The first variation pattern table T4 is a table for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number, and is selected when the average variation time (average performance time) is shorter than that of the second variation pattern table T5, and the acquisition hold order information described later is "3" or "4". The first variation pattern table T4 includes four variation pattern tables, namely, the first special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A, the first special 1 probability variation variation pattern table T4B, the first special 2 normal variation pattern table T4C, and the first special 2 probability variation variation pattern table T4D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected depending on the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the first special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on ball entry into the first start opening 112 in a non-probability variation game state. The first special symbol variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 112 during a probability variation game state. The first special symbol variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 115 during a non-probability variation game state. The first special symbol variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 115 during a probability variation game state.

The second variation pattern table T5 is a table for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number, and is selected when the average variation time is longer than that of the first variation pattern table T4, and the acquisition hold order information described later is "1" or "2". The second variation pattern table T5 includes four variation pattern tables, namely, the second special 1 normal variation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 probability variation variation pattern table T5B, the second special 2 normal variation pattern table T5C, and the second special 2 probability variation variation pattern table T5D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected depending on the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first start opening 112 in a non-probability variation game state. The second special symbol variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 112 during a probability variation game state. The second special symbol variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 115 during a non-probability variation game state. The second special symbol variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 115 during a probability variation game state.

Furthermore, when determining a variation pattern, only one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected at a time; they are never selected simultaneously. The first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 contain various variation patterns. Specifically, these are variation patterns that combine various effects such as pseudo-consecutive effects, normal miss effects, normal reach (miss or hit) effects, SP reach (miss or hit) effects (developmental effects after the execution of the reach formation effect), SPSP reach (miss or hit) effects (developmental effects after the execution of the SP reach effect), SPSP reach revival (hit) effects, effects where a losing symbol arrangement is formed, and effects where a jackpot symbol arrangement is formed with specific symbols. Here, a pseudo-consecutive effect (or pseudo-continuous variation effect) is an effect in which, during the variation display of special symbols, the effect symbol is displayed in a variation state, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, and then displayed in a variation state again, thereby pseudo-repeating the variation display of the effect symbol. In this case, the pseudo-consecutive reel display temporarily stops the display symbols, but this is not the only option. Alternatively, the display symbols may be slowed down without being temporarily stopped, and then displayed in a variable state.

Here, the various game states in this embodiment will be explained. First, regarding the state related to jackpot determination, there are "low probability state (non-probability change game state)" and "high probability state (probability change game state)." Regarding the state related to the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second start port 115, there are "non-time-saving game state" and "time-saving game state." Therefore, in this embodiment, there are "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)," which is both a low probability state and a time-saving game state; "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 2/time-saving game state 3/time-saving game state 4)," which is both a low probability state and a time-saving game state; and "high probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)," which is both a high probability state and a time-saving state. Details will be described later. Note that the initial game state of the game machine 100 is set to "normal game state," and it remains set to "normal game state" even during a jackpot game. However, because a jackpot game is being played, it is a different game state from the normal game state.

First, the "low probability state (non-probability change game state)" refers to a game state where, for example, if the setting value (jackpot probability), which indicates the degree of advantage in the game, is "1" as described above, the jackpot determination, which is performed when a game ball enters the first start port 112 or the second start port 115, is set to a low probability of approximately 1/300. In contrast, the "high probability state (probability change game state)" refers to a game state where, as described above, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability is set to a high probability of approximately 1/30, making it more advantageous for the player compared to the low probability state. Note that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which, in the normal symbol judgment performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the probability of winning is set low at 1/20, the average display time of the normal symbols is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start port 115 in the case of a win is set to 0.180 seconds. In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player because, compared to the "non-time-saving game state," the probability of winning in the normal symbol judgment is set high at 19/20, the average display time of the normal symbols is set to approximately 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start port 115 in the case of a win is set to 3 to 6 seconds, making it easier for game balls to enter the second start port 115, thus reducing the consumption of game balls. While the "Shortened Play Mode" is set to be more favorable in terms of the average reel spin time, the opening time of the second start gate 115, and the probability of winning compared to the "Non-Shortened Play Mode," it is also possible to set it so that only one of these is more favorable. Furthermore, although the probability of winning in the "Non-Shortened Play Mode" is 1/20, it is also possible to set the probability of winning to 0/20 so that no win is detected. In such a case, auxiliary play will not be performed in the "Non-Shortened Play Mode," and no game balls will enter (win) the second start gate 115.

As shown in Figure 3-3(a-1), the special jackpot determination table T1A sets the values of the jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot determination results (jackpot, minor win, time-saving mode 4, miss) in each low-probability state and high-probability state based on the ball entering the first start opening 112. As will be explained in detail later, for example, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination, a jackpot symbol (special symbol A1, etc.) is displayed; if a minor win is won, a minor win symbol (special symbol K) is displayed; if time-saving mode 4 is won, a time-saving mode symbol (special symbol J1) indicating a transition to time-saving mode 4 (described later) is displayed; and if it is a miss, a miss symbol (special symbol H) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 3-3(a-2), the Special 2 Big Win Judgment Table T1B sets the values of the big win random numbers corresponding to the big win judgment results (big win, small win, time-saving mode 4, miss) in each low-probability state and high-probability state based on ball entry into the second start port 115. Note that while the probability of winning a big win is the same for big win judgments based on ball entry into the first start port 112 and big win judgments based on ball entry into the second start port 115, the probability of winning a small win and the probability of winning time-saving mode 4 differ. Furthermore, in the Special 1 Big Win Judgment Table T1A and the Special 2 Big Win Judgment Table T1B, time-saving mode 4 can be won in the low-probability state, but not in the high-probability state.

Here, we will explain the jackpot determination process using the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1A and the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1B. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment refers to the game state (low probability state or high probability state) at the time the game ball enters the target area and selects the table corresponding to each game state in the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1A and the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1B. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the jackpot random number (random number range is from the numerical value "0" to "598") obtained when the game ball enters the first start opening 112 or the second start opening 115, as described above, with the settings in the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1A or the Special Jackpot Determination Table T1B. If they match, it is determined that a jackpot, minor win, or time-saving mode 4 has been won. If they do not match, it is determined that it is a miss. Furthermore, in jackpot determinations that refer to Special Jackpot Determination Table T1A and Special Jackpot Determination Table T1B, the probability of winning a minor jackpot and the probability of winning Time-Saving Mode 4 are the same regardless of whether the aforementioned setting value is "1" to "4".

As shown in Figure 3-3(b), the hit determination table T1C contains values for random numbers corresponding to the hit determination results (hit or miss) in both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. Here, we will explain the hit determination using the hit determination table T1C. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment refers to the game state at the time the game ball enters (non-time-saving game state or time-saving game state) and selects the table in the hit determination table T1C corresponding to each game state. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the random number obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b (the random number range is from "0" to "19") with the setting in the hit determination table T1C, and determines a hit or miss if they match.

As shown in Figure 3-4, the symbol determination table T2 includes a jackpot symbol determination table referenced when determining the stopping symbols (jackpot symbols) when a jackpot is determined; a minor win symbol determination table referenced when determining the stopping symbols (minor win symbols) when a minor win is determined; a losing symbol determination table referenced when determining the stopping symbols (losing symbols) when a jackpot is determined to be a miss; and a time-saving symbol determination table referenced when determining the stopping symbols (time-saving symbols) when a time-saving mode 4 is determined in the jackpot. It also includes a normal symbol determination table X referenced when determining the stopping symbols (long-opening symbols, short-opening symbols) when a win is determined; and a normal symbol determination table Y referenced when determining the stopping symbols (losing symbols) when a win is determined.

As shown in Figure 3-4(a-1), the jackpot symbol determination table has two sets of tables: one for the first special symbol, which is referenced when a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the first start port 112, and another for the second special symbol, which is referenced when a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the second start port 115. Now, let's explain the symbol determination that references the jackpot symbol determination table. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment selects either the first special symbol table or the second special symbol table in the jackpot symbol determination table in response to a game ball entering the first start port 112 or the second start port 115. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the jackpot symbol random number (random number range is from the value "0" to "99") obtained when a game ball enters the first start port 112 or the second start port 115, as described above, with the settings in the jackpot symbol determination table. Furthermore, the main CPU 301a generates a symbol specification command that can identify the stopping symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of the special symbol variation.

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot judgment and the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the ball enters the first start gate 112 is between "0" and "59", the main CPU 301a decides "01 (special symbol A1)" as the stop symbol, causing special symbol A1 to be displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and generating the performance symbol specification commands "E0H" and "01H". Also, for example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot judgment and the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the ball enters the second start gate 115 is between "70" and "99", the main CPU 301a decides "05 (special symbol B2)" as the stop symbol, causing special symbol B2 to be displayed on the second special symbol display 122, and generating the performance symbol specification commands "E1H" and "02H". Thus, after a special symbol is displayed on the display unit 125, a jackpot game corresponding to each special symbol begins, such as the first probability-changing long jackpot, the first probability-changing short jackpot, the first normal long jackpot, the second probability-changing long jackpot, or the second normal long jackpot. As mentioned above, a jackpot game consists of multiple rounds, and a long jackpot (e.g., 10 rounds) consists of more rounds than a short jackpot (e.g., 3 rounds), and the total opening time of the first or second large prize slot 117 is longer.

As shown in Figure 3-4(a-2), the minor prize symbol determination table has two sets of tables: one for the first special symbol, which is referenced when a minor prize is determined in the big prize determination based on a ball entering the first start port 112, and another for the second special symbol, which is referenced when a minor prize is determined in the big prize determination based on a ball entering the second start port 115. Here, the symbol determination that references the minor prize symbol determination table will be explained. First, the main CPU 301a of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment selects either the table for the first special symbol or the table for the second special symbol in the minor prize symbol determination table in response to a game ball entering the first start port 112 or the second start port 115. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the minor prize symbol random number (random number range is the numerical value "0" to "99") obtained when a game ball enters the first start port 112 or the second start port 115, as described above, with the settings in the big prize symbol determination table. Furthermore, the main CPU 301a generates a symbol specification command that can identify the stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of the special symbol variation. Specifically, for example, if a minor win is determined in the jackpot judgment, and the minor win symbol random number obtained when the ball enters the first start slot 112 is any value between "0" and "99", the main CPU 301a will determine "11 (special symbol K)" as the stop symbol. This will cause special symbol K to be displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and the symbols "E0H" and "0AH" will be generated as symbol specification commands. In this way, after the special symbol is displayed on the display 125, the minor win game begins.

As shown in Figure 3-4(a-3), the losing symbol determination table has two sets of tables: one for the first special symbol, which is referenced when the jackpot determination based on ball entry into the first start port 112 is determined to be a loss, and another for the second special symbol, which is referenced when the jackpot determination based on ball entry into the second start port 115 is determined to be a loss. Now, let's explain the symbol determination that references the losing symbol determination table. First, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301a selects either the table for the first special symbol or the table for the second special symbol in the losing symbol determination table in response to a game ball entering the first start port 112 or the second start port 115, and determines the stopping symbol. The main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol specification command that can identify the stopping symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of the special symbol variation. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 112 is determined to be a miss, the main CPU 301a decides on "00 (special symbol H)" as the stop symbol, causing special symbol K to be displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and generating the performance symbol specification commands "E0H" and "00H".

As shown in Figure 3-4(a-4), in the time-saving symbol determination table, the table referenced when time-saving mode 4 is determined in the jackpot determination based on ball entry into the first start port 112 and the second start port 115 is set in common for both the first start port 112 and the second start port 115. Here, the symbol determination that refers to the time-saving symbol determination table will be explained. In this embodiment, the main CPU 301a determines the stop symbol in correspondence with the time-saving symbol random number (random number range is numerical value "0" to "99") obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 112 or the second start port 115. The main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol specification command that can specify the stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of the special symbol variation. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot determination is set to time-saving mode 4, and the random number for the jackpot symbol obtained when the ball enters the first starting opening 112 is between "0" and "70", the main CPU 301a determines "21 (special symbol J1)" as the stopping symbol. This causes special symbol J1 to be displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and the symbols "E0H" and "11H" are generated as performance symbol specification commands. In this way, after the special symbol is displayed on the display 125, the game state transitions to time-saving game state 4, as described later, and time-saving gameplay begins.

More specifically, for example, the first special symbol display 120 may display a variable symbol for approximately 40,000 ms, and the main display device 131 may notify the transition to time-saving game state 4 after the execution of the normal reach animation described later, or the main display device 131 may transition to time-saving game state 4 after the execution of a predetermined time-saving transition animation (an animation that notifies the transition to time-saving game state 4) for approximately 40,000 ms. Alternatively, for example, the first special symbol display 120 may display a variable symbol for approximately 60,000 ms, and the main display device 131 may notify the transition to time-saving game state 4 after the execution of the normal reach animation and the SP reach animation (miss) described later, or the main display device 131 may transition to time-saving game state 4 after the execution of a predetermined time-saving transition animation (an animation that notifies the transition to time-saving game state 4) for approximately 60,000 ms.

As shown in Figures 3-4(b-1) and (b-2), the normal symbol determination table X is set to be referenced when a win is determined based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and the normal symbol determination table Y is set to be referenced when a loss is determined based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. These normal symbol determination tables are common to various game states. Now, the symbol determination that references the normal symbol determination tables will be explained. In this embodiment, the main CPU 301a selects either the normal symbol determination table X or the normal symbol determination table Y in response to the determination result in the win determination, and determines the stopping symbol by comparing it with the normal symbol random number (random number range is the value "0" to "10") obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. Furthermore, the main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol specification command that can identify the stop symbol data (type of special symbol) when the special symbol variation begins. Specifically, for example, if a win is determined in the win detection and the normal symbol random number obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b is between "2" and "10", the main CPU 301a determines "02 (short open symbol)" as the stop symbol, causing the short open symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 118, and generating the performance symbol specification commands "E8H" and "02H". In this way, after the special symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol, losing symbol) are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the opening or closing of the second start gate 115 corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Note that "long opening" (for example, 6 seconds) refers to a state where the second start port 115 is open for a longer period of time compared to "short opening" (for example, 3 seconds), while "failure" refers to a state where the second start port 115 does not open.

As shown in Figure 3-5(A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during the calculation processing of the main CPU 301a and has multiple storage areas, including, for example, a hold information storage area 301cx (described later) and a hold information determination area 301cy, which is a determination area where symbol determination is performed based on the hold information. The main RAM 301c also has a storage area (not shown) where various flags (high probability flag, time reduction flag, and jackpot flag, etc., described later) and various recorded values are stored.

As shown in Figure 3-5(B), the hold information storage area 301cx is provided with four hold information areas (first hold information area, second hold information area, third hold information area, fourth hold information area) that can store hold information related to the first start port 112 and hold information related to the order of acquisition of hold information, and four hold information areas (first hold information area, second hold information area, third hold information area, fourth hold information area) that can store hold information related to the second start port 115. In the hold information area of the hold information storage area 301cx corresponding to the first special symbol, the priority for storing hold information is such that the first hold information area is given the highest priority for storage, and if hold information is stored in the first hold information area, then the second hold information area is given priority for storage, then the third hold information area is given priority for storage, and finally the fourth hold information area is selected as the storage target. The same applies to the hold information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In addition, regarding the presence or absence of stored hold information, a "○" is indicated for hold information areas where hold information is stored, and a "－" is indicated for hold information areas where hold information is not stored. Furthermore, the hold order information at the time of acquisition stored in the hold information area of the hold information storage area 301cx represents the hold order when the hold information was acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area in which the hold information is stored when the hold information is acquired. For example, when hold information is acquired and the hold information is stored only in the first hold information area, the hold information will be stored in the second hold information area, so the hold order information at the time of acquisition will be "2". When hold information is acquired and the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information will be stored in the fourth hold information area, so the hold order information at the time of acquisition will be "4". In other words, Figure 3-5(B) shows that when the third pending information is acquired, pending information is already stored in the second and third pending information areas, the third pending information is stored in the first pending information area, and the fourth pending information is stored in the fourth pending information area.

(Electrical configuration of the performance control board 320)
The electrical configuration of the performance control board 320 will be described with reference to Figures 3-6 and 3-7. Figure 3-6 is a block diagram showing the details of the performance control board 320. Figure 3-7 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The performance control board 320 determines a performance pattern based on commands (including fluctuation patterns, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 300 and transmits performance pattern specification commands based on the performance pattern to the image/sound control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. As described above, the main display device 131, etc., is electrically connected to the image/sound control board 330, and the sword handle unit 135, etc., is electrically connected to the lamp control board 340. With this configuration, the image/sound control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 can execute display performances, sound performances, lighting performances, and moving prop performances based on the performance pattern specification commands transmitted from the performance control board 320.

As shown in Figure 3-6, the sub-ROM 320b stores the core display effect designation table TS1, the effect symbol determination table TS2, and the chance-up determination table TS3. The core display effect designation table TS1 is a table for designating one of the above-mentioned effects, such as the normal miss effect, normal reach (miss or hit) effect, SP reach (miss or hit) effect, SPSP reach (miss or hit) effect, and SPSP reach revival (hit) effect, as the core effect in the display effect (hereinafter also referred to as the core display effect), based on the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300. In this embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the core display effect. Alternatively, multiple core display effects may be associated with a fluctuation pattern, and the sub-CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select a core display effect by lottery. In this way, the content of the effect can be changed even with the same fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, a single core display animation may be assigned to multiple variation patterns. The animation symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining the combination of animation symbols to be displayed as temporary stop or confirmed stop symbols, and the reach symbols when a reach is executed, in the display animation based on the animation pattern. The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up animation in the display animation. Here, a chance-up animation is an animation that performs a display animation in a manner different from the normal animation, thereby increasing the expectation of a big win compared to the normal animation.

As shown in Figure 3-7, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a hold storage area 320c1 and a pre-determination information storage area 320c3. The sub-RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) where predetermined flags (such as a continuous execution performance flag and a pseudo-continuous performance execution flag) are stored. The hold storage area 320c1 is divided into eight areas: a first hold area, a second hold area, a third hold area, and a fourth hold area corresponding to the first special symbol, and a first hold area, a second hold area, a third hold area, and a fourth hold area corresponding to the second special symbol, with each area capable of storing one hold flag. In the hold storage area 320c1 corresponding to the first special symbol, the priority for storing the hold flag is as follows: the first hold storage area is given the highest priority, and if the hold flag is already stored in the first hold storage area, then the second hold storage area is given priority, then the third hold storage area is given priority, and finally the fourth hold storage area is selected as the storage target. The same applies to the hold storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the performance control board 320 receives a hold command from the main control board 300, it identifies the hold storage area in the hold storage area 320c1 where the hold flag is stored and stores the hold flag in the next most priority hold storage area. However, if the hold flag is already stored in the fourth hold storage area when the hold command is received, the hold flag is not stored. Furthermore, the priority order for erasing the hold flag is the reverse of the priority order for storing it; that is, the fourth hold area is given the highest priority for erasure. If no hold flag is stored in the fourth hold area, then the third hold area is given priority for erasure, followed by the second hold area, and finally the first hold area is selected as the target for erasure. When the performance control board 320 receives a symbol confirmation command from the main control board 300, it identifies the hold area in the hold storage area 320c1 where the hold flag is stored and erases the hold flag in the hold area that should be erased first. Note that if no hold flag is stored in the first hold area, no erasure process is performed.

The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing pre-determination information (special symbols for pre-determination, pre-determination variation patterns, and acquisition-time hold order information). It has four storage areas (first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area) corresponding to the type of special symbol. Each storage area contains a jackpot determination information field for storing jackpot determination information based on the pre-determination special symbol, a jackpot symbol information field for storing jackpot symbol information based on the pre-determination symbol, a variation pattern information field for storing variation pattern information based on the pre-determination variation pattern, an acquisition-time hold order information field for storing acquisition-time hold order information, and a continuous performance presence/absence information field for storing continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether a continuous performance is activated or not. The continuous performance presence/absence information includes continuous performance activation information and continuous performance non-activation information.

The hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (special symbols for pre-determination, variable patterns for pre-determination, and information on the order of hold at the time of acquisition). This pre-determination information is stored in association with the pre-determination information storage area 320c3. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing pre-determination information is as follows: the first storage area is given the highest priority, and if pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area, then the second storage area is given priority, then the third storage area is given priority, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as the storage target. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, when pre-determination information for the first special symbol is already stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, and new pre-determination information for the first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, acquisition-time hold order information "4") is to be stored (see Figure 3-7), then information representing "4" is stored in the acquisition-time hold order information field of the fourth storage area, information representing "variation pattern 7B" is stored in the variation pattern information field of the fourth storage area, information representing "specific symbol A" is stored in the jackpot symbol information field of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information field of the fourth storage area.

In Figure 3-7, the pre-determination information for the first storage area related to the first special symbol includes "Miss" in the jackpot determination information field, "None" in the jackpot symbol information field, "Variation Pattern 1" in the variation pattern information field, and "3" in the acquisition-time hold order information field. The pre-determination information for the second storage area includes "Miss" in the jackpot determination information field, "None" in the jackpot symbol information field, "Variation Pattern 2AX" in the variation pattern information field, and "1" in the acquisition-time hold order information field. The pre-determination information for the third storage area includes "Miss" in the jackpot determination information field, "None" in the jackpot symbol information field, "Variation Pattern 4BX" in the variation pattern information field, and "2" in the acquisition-time hold order information field. In addition, the continuous performance presence/absence information field stores continuous performance activation information indicating whether or not to execute the continuous performance in the pre-reading process described later. Furthermore, in the continuous performance information column corresponding to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol, "〇" is displayed as continuous performance activation information, indicating that the continuous performance has been activated. In the other storage areas, "－" is displayed as continuous performance non-activation information, indicating that the continuous performance will not be activated.

(Explanation of game status)
Referring to Figure 4-1, the transitions in game states during gameplay will now be explained. Figure 4-1 is a diagram illustrating the transitions in game states.

As shown in Figure 4-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, similar to conventional gaming machines, there are cases where the game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "short-time game state (short-time game state 1)" via the "jackpot game" ((a) → (d)), and cases where, in the "short-time game state (short-time game state 1 or short-time game state 2)", if the jackpot determination process determines that a jackpot has been won, the game executes the "jackpot game" ((c)), while on the other hand, if the game does not determine that a jackpot has been won, the game transitions to the "normal game state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, if the "predetermined conditions are met" in the "normal game state", the game can transition to the "short-time game state (short-time game state 3 or short-time game state 4)" ((b)) without going through the jackpot game. Furthermore, when transitioning from "normal gameplay" to "short-time gameplay" via "jackpot gameplay," the number of playable rounds in "high-probability short-time gameplay (short-time gameplay 1)" is "100," and the number of playable rounds in "low-probability short-time gameplay (short-time gameplay 2)" is also "100." On the other hand, when transitioning from "normal gameplay" to "low-probability short-time gameplay (short-time gameplay 3 or short-time gameplay 4)" without going through "jackpot gameplay," the number of playable rounds is "700." In other words, the number of playable rounds in "short-time gameplay" is greater when transitioning from "normal gameplay" to "short-time gameplay" by "fulfillment of predetermined conditions" without going through "jackpot gameplay" than when transitioning from "normal gameplay" to "short-time gameplay" via "jackpot gameplay." For example, in this embodiment, the number of playable spins in the time-saving play state 3 and time-saving play state 4 may be set to "700 spins" such that the probability of hitting a jackpot in the normal play state is approximately 3.8 times or less the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the setting value is "1").

Furthermore, the number of playable rounds in "Time-Saving Game State 4" may be set differently depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are displayed. For example, if the time-saving symbols are displayed in "Time-Saving Game State," the number of playable rounds may be set to be greater than if they were displayed in "Normal Game State," or conversely, to be set to be fewer.

Here, "fulfillment of predetermined conditions" means that in this embodiment, a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are set. The first predetermined condition is when the cumulative count "n", which is the number of times the special symbol variation display has been executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with a region for counting and storing the cumulative count "n", which is the number of times the special symbol variation display has been executed in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)". When the cumulative count "n" counted and stored in this region reaches a predetermined number, the game transitions from the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3)". The second predetermined condition is when the game stops on a pre-set "time-saving symbol (a specific losing symbol)". In this case, the game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 4)". The ratio in which the "time-saving symbol" is determined may be any ratio. For example, the probability may be the same as or approximately the probability of a jackpot being determined for each set value, or it may be a probability that is more difficult to determine than the probability of a jackpot being determined for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine. Furthermore, "the fulfillment of the predetermined conditions" may be limited to fulfilling only one of the first and second predetermined conditions, or both conditions, or conditions other than these may also be fulfilled.

Furthermore, the predetermined number of times in the first predetermined condition can be set to any number corresponding to the probability of a jackpot being determined for each set value. For example, in this embodiment, the predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" such that the probability of a jackpot being determined in the normal game state is approximately 2.5 times or more and approximately 3.0 times or less the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the set value is "4"). Furthermore, the "starting point" can be set to, for example, the time when a "jackpot game" ends, or the time when a RAM clear is performed, such as when the settings are changed as described above. In other words, in the area of the main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative count "n", the initialization process for the cumulative count "n" is executed when transitioning to a "jackpot game", when a "jackpot game" ends, or when a RAM clear is performed. Also, as the "time-saving symbols" in the second predetermined condition, multiple types of symbols may be pre-set, and the number of playable times in time-saving game state 4 may be set differently for each type of "time-saving symbol".

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, reducing the number of players who play aimlessly. Furthermore, if the predetermined number of spins is around 800, for example, it allows for a remedial measure to be taken for players who haven't hit a jackpot for a long time, thus preventing them from abandoning the game. Additionally, when transitioning to a "time-saving game state" upon "fulfillment of predetermined conditions," the number of available spins in the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4)" is greater than when transitioning to a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 2)" after a "jackpot." This encourages players to actively play in the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)," thereby improving the machine's utilization.

Here, we will explain the counting process for the cumulative count "n" in the area of the main RAM 301c that stores the number of times the special symbols have been displayed. Specifically, for example, when a "starting point" is reached, such as at the end of a "jackpot game", the main CPU 301a initializes the cumulative count "n" to "800", and performs a subtraction process of "1" from the cumulative count "n (800)" each time the display of the special symbols in a low-probability game state such as "time-saving game state 2" or "normal game state" ends. When the cumulative count "n" becomes "0", the main CPU 301a determines that the first predetermined condition has been met, and performs a transition process to "time-saving game state 3" for the game state. Even after the game state transitions to "Shortened Game State 3," the main CPU 301a continues to execute the subtraction process. However, unless it becomes a "starting point" again and updates the cumulative count "n" to "800," it will not execute the transition process to "Shortened Game State 3" based on the second fulfillment of the first predetermined condition. Furthermore, in the jackpot determination, the subtraction process is also executed when the special symbol variation display, which results in a minor win or Shortened Game State 4 determination, ends. With this type of subtraction process, even if the special symbol variation display is executed 800 or more times in the low-probability game state, the cumulative count "n" will not be updated unless it becomes a "starting point," thus suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the main RAM 301c and the control capacity of the main CPU 301a.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned first or second predetermined condition is met while in the "Shortened Time Game State 2 (Low Probability Shortened Time Game State)" state, the game may be controlled to transition to "Shortened Time Game State 3" or "Shortened Time Game State 4" while in "Shortened Time Game State 2". With such a game machine, "Shortened Time Game State 3" or "Shortened Time Game State 4" will continue even while in "Shortened Time Game State 2," allowing for continued gameplay in the "Shortened Time Game State," thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, even if the first or second predetermined condition is met while in "Shortened Time Game State 2," the game may be controlled to remain in "Shortened Time Game State 2" and not transition to "Shortened Time Game State 3" or "Shortened Time Game State 4." Such a game machine prevents the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

Furthermore, if the second predetermined condition described above is met while the game is in "Shortened Time Game State 3 (Low Probability Shortened Time Game State)," the game may be controlled to transition to "Shortened Time Game State 4" while in "Shortened Time Game State 3." Even with such a game machine, as described above, the game can continue to be played in the "Shortened Time Game State," further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, even if the second predetermined condition is met while in "Shortened Time Game State 3," the game may be controlled to remain in "Shortened Time Game State 3" and not transition to "Shortened Time Game State 4." Even with such a game machine, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage. Note that, as described above, there is no case where the first predetermined condition is met while in "Shortened Time Game State 3," so the game will not be controlled to transition to "Shortened Time Game State 3" while in "Shortened Time Game State 3."

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned first predetermined condition or second predetermined condition is met while the game is in "Shortened Game State 4," the game may be controlled to transition from "Shortened Game State 4" to "Shortened Game State 3" or "Shortened Game State 4." Specifically, for example, if the first predetermined condition is met when 600 special symbol variations are displayed while in "Shortened Game State 4," the game may not terminate "Shortened Game State 4" and transition to "Shortened Game State 3" from the 601st special symbol variation display. Instead, the game may remain in "Shortened Game State 4" and "Shortened Game State 4" until the 700th special symbol variation display, and then transition to only "Shortened Game State 3" from the 701st display. Even with such a game machine, it is possible to continue playing in the "Shortened Game State" as described above, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, even if the first or second predetermined condition is met while in "Shortened Play State 4," the system may be controlled to remain in "Shortened Play State 4" and not transition to "Shortened Play State 3" or "Shortened Play State 4." Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage, as described above.

(List of processes performed on the main control board 300)
Referring to Figure 4-2, the processes performed by the main control board 300 will now be explained. Figure 4-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of the processes performed by the main control board 300.

As shown in Figure 4-2, when power is supplied, the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 executes main processing based on the program stored in the main ROM 301b. As main processing, the main CPU 301a executes power recovery processing to restore the game state to what it was before the power was cut off, setting change processing to change (update) the setting value of the level of advantage in the game (the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment) based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b, RAM clear processing to initialize the main RAM 301c based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 302a, and setting confirmation processing to display the setting value saved in the memory area of the main RAM 301c on the information display 302c based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b, and also updates the initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers). Furthermore, during the execution of the main process, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, switch processing, special symbol processing, normal symbol processing, big prize device opening control processing, payout processing, command transmission processing) at regular intervals (for example, every 4 milliseconds). The various processes are described below.

The setting change process involves transitioning to the setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for 2 seconds or more), displaying the current setting value on the information display 302c, and changing the setting value in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b during the setting change mode (e.g., pressing for 1 second or less). Furthermore, during the setting change process, it is also possible to terminate the setting change mode and set the changed setting value by a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b during the setting change mode (e.g., pressing for 2 seconds or more). Additionally, the setting confirmation process involves transitioning to the setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for 1 second or less) while not in the setting change mode, displaying the current setting value on the information display 302c, and terminating the setting confirmation mode and the display of the setting value on the information display 302c in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b during the setting confirmation mode (e.g., pressing for 1 second or less).

The random number update process updates various random values, including jackpot random numbers, winning random numbers, reach random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, minor win symbol random numbers, time-saving symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers. The switch process is executed when detection signals are input from each switch. It includes a start-out switch process that acquires jackpot random numbers, etc., and stores them as pending information when a ball enters the first start-out 112 or the second start-out 115; a gate switch process that acquires and stores normal symbol random numbers when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b; and a jackpot device switch process that detects game balls that have entered the first jackpot entry 117 or the second jackpot entry 127 during jackpot gameplay (jackpot game state). The start-out switch process includes a pre-determination process that performs jackpot determination and jackpot symbol determination based on the pending information.

The special symbol processing is a process related to special symbols that corresponds to the processing results in the above-mentioned switch processing (first start port 112, second start port 115) and the special symbol special electric processing data described later. When the display of the special symbol variation ends, the process includes a hold information shifting process that shifts the hold information and the acquisition-time hold order information in the hold information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c, a jackpot determination process that performs a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number of the hold information shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy in the hold information shifting process and the hit/jackpot determination table T1, and a jackpot determination result. This process includes: a jackpot symbol determination process that determines the jackpot symbol (special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number included in the pending information and the symbol determination table T2 in the event of a win; a reach determination process that performs a reach determination based on the reach random number included in the pending information and the reach determination table T3; a variation pattern setting process that sets the variation pattern based on the variation pattern table and the variation pattern random number in the pending information; and a special symbol stop process that stops the variation display of the first special symbol display unit 120 or the second special symbol display unit 122 (details will be described later).

The normal symbol processing is a process related to normal symbols that corresponds to the processing result in the switch processing (normal symbol activation gate 113b), and includes: a hit determination process that performs a hit determination based on a hit random number and a hit/jackpot determination table T1; a normal symbol determination process that determines the normal symbol based on a normal symbol random number and a normal symbol determination table T6 when there is normal symbol hold information; an operation pattern setting process that sets the operation pattern of the movable piece 115b when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination; and an opening/closing member control process that controls the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second start opening 115 based on the operation pattern set in the operation pattern setting process.

The jackpot opening control process is a process related to the opening and closing control of the first jackpot opening 117 and the second jackpot opening 127 based on the special feature special electrical processing data described later. It includes an opening pattern setting process that sets an opening pattern during the opening sequence at the beginning of a jackpot game, and a game state setting process that, when the ending sequence at the end of a jackpot game finishes, turns off the jackpot game flag, turns on a high probability game flag indicating a high probability game state, and turns on time-saving game state 1/time-saving game state 2 flags, and sets the number of possible time-saving game plays to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

The payout process controls the payout of prize balls according to the detection result (winning a game ball) from the switch process. The command transmission process transmits information necessary to determine the various commands and performance content generated in the above process to the performance control board 320.

(List of processes on the performance control board 320)
Referring to Figure 4-3, the processes executed by the performance control board 320 will now be explained. Figure 4-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the performance control board 320.

As shown in Figure 4-3, when power is supplied, the sub-CPU 320a of the performance control board 320 executes the main performance processing based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 320b. As part of the main performance processing, the sub-CPU 320a executes a power recovery notification process corresponding to the power recovery process executed by the main control board 300, a setting change notification process corresponding to the setting change process executed by the main control board 300, a RAM clear notification process corresponding to the RAM clear process executed by the main control board 300, and a setting confirmation notification process corresponding to the setting confirmation process executed by the main control board 300. Furthermore, during the execution of the main performance processing, the sub-CPU 320a repeatedly executes performance timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, command reception processing, performance button processing, command transmission processing, etc.) at regular intervals (e.g., every 2 milliseconds). The various processes are described below.

The power restoration notification process is a process that, while the power restoration process is being executed on the main control board 300, performs power restoration notifications such as displaying a power restoration screen on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage, fully illuminating the performance lighting device 342 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from the power outage).

The RAM clear notification process is a process that performs power-on notifications while the RAM clear process is being executed on the main control board 300. These notifications include displaying the initial power-on screen (background image and initial animation symbols "135") on the main display device 131 to indicate that the game control state has been initialized, fully illuminating the animation lighting device 342 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that the memory area has been initialized.

The setting change notification process is performed while the setting change process is running on the main control board 300 and the system is in setting change mode. This process includes displaying a "setting change in progress" screen on the main display device 131, etc., indicating that the setting value is being changed; fully illuminating the performance lighting device 342 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) during the setting change; and outputting a setting change notification sound ("Settings are being changed") from the audio output device 331. The setting confirmation notification process is performed while the setting confirmation process is running on the main control board 300 and the system is in setting confirmation mode. This process includes displaying a "setting confirmation in progress" screen on the main display device 131, etc., indicating that the setting is being confirmed; fully illuminating the performance lighting device 342 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation; and outputting a setting confirmation notification sound ("Setting values are being confirmed") from the audio output device 331.

The random number update process is the process of updating various random numbers used in the effects (for example, random numbers for determining the effect symbols, random numbers for increasing chances). The command reception process includes a game state setting process that sets the game state based on game state specification commands, etc., described later, a pre-reading process that determines whether or not to perform continuous effects, pseudo-continuous effects, icon change effects, etc., based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 300, based on the hold command, an effect pattern determination process that determines the effect pattern based on the main display effect specification table TS1, the effect symbol determination table TS2, and the chance-up determination table TS3, and when a hold command is received, a hold flag is stored in the hold storage area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c and a hold table for displaying the hold on the main display device 131 is stored. The process includes: a hold process for setting a display command; a pre-determination information shift process that executes a shift process for pre-determination information in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub-RAM 320c when a variation start command is received; a normal symbol effect process that performs an effect on the main display device 131 corresponding to the variation of the normal symbols according to the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment; a symbol confirmation process that confirms and stops the variation of the effect symbols on the main display device 131 based on the symbol confirmation command; and a jackpot process that executes an opening effect, ending effect, and round effect corresponding to the opening specification command in a jackpot game. The effect button process is a process that detects input via the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button detection switch 137) and the effect operation stick 136 and performs a predetermined effect. The command transmission process is a process that transmits the various commands generated by the above various processes to the image/sound control board 330 and the lamp control board 340.

Here, a continuous performance is a performance that can be executed on the main display device 131, and can be executed during the start of a variation performance across multiple variation displays of the special symbol. This continuous performance may consist of only one type of performance, or it may include multiple types of performances. If the continuous performance includes multiple types of performances, one of the multiple types of performances may be selected and executed. Also, the continuous performance may be executed during a single variation display of the special symbol. Furthermore, a pseudo-consecutive performance may consist of only one type of performance, or it may include multiple types of performances. If the pseudo-consecutive performance includes multiple types of performances, one of the multiple types of performances may be selected and executed. In addition, an icon change performance is a performance that suggests the expectation (possibility) that a special game will be executed by displaying the hold icon or the icon on the main display device 131 in a special display mode (special icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Special display modes (special icons) come in various forms in terms of color, size, and shape. For example, while regular icons are white, special icons can be blue, green, red, gold, etc., with the expected value increasing in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold.

Furthermore, as the main processing for the performance, the sub-CPU 320a performs performance mode update processing in addition to the processing described above. Specifically, it determines whether the update conditions (change in game state, winning the mode update lottery, execution of an SP/SPSP reach performance that results in a loss, etc.) for the performance mode (performance stage) in which the performance elements (background image, performance image, BGM, etc.) in the audio output device 331, main display device 131, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, etc. are defined have been met, and if the update conditions are met, it performs processing to update the performance mode to one of the multiple performance modes. Here, the "performance modes" include performance modes A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), performance mode D set in the time-saving game state 1 (high probability time-saving game state) described later, performance mode E set in the time-saving game state 2 (low probability time-saving game state) described later, and performance mode F set in the time-saving game state 3 (low probability time-saving game state). Furthermore, when the machine is controlled to the normal game state upon power-on (for example, after a setting change, RWM clear, or setting confirmation), the initial performance mode is always performance mode A. Regarding background music (BGM), there are also variable BGM 1-3 output during the variation display of performance modes A-C in the normal game state, variable BGM 4 output during the variation display of performance mode D in time-saving game state 1, variable BGM 5 output during the variation display of performance mode E in time-saving game state 2, and variable BGM 6 output during the variation display of performance mode F in time-saving game state 3. Additionally, BGM such as normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM, and SPSP reach BGM are provided as BGM output during the execution of various reach animations. Note that, as described later, the variable BGM can be changed according to the player's operation; for example, it is possible to set the machine to output variable BGM 4 when performance mode A is active.

(Explanation of special symbol stopping process)
Referring to Figures 4-4 and 4-5, the transition to time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4 in the game state will now be explained. Figure 4-4 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop process, which is one of the processes performed by the main control board 300 described above. Figure 4-5 is a flowchart illustrating the transition determination process to the time-saving game state and the termination determination process to the time-saving game state, where (a) is a flowchart illustrating the transition determination process to time-saving state 3, (b) is a flowchart illustrating the transition determination process to time-saving state 4, and (c) is a flowchart illustrating the termination determination process to the time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 4-4, immediately after the special symbol display stops, the main CPU 301a first executes a time-saving game state 3 transition determination process (S231) to determine whether the game state has transitioned to time-saving game state 3, and then executes a time-saving game state 4 transition determination process (S232) to determine whether the game state has transitioned to time-saving game state 4. Details of these time-saving game state 3 transition determination processes and time-saving game state 4 transition determination processes will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 301a determines whether the display wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (S233). If it determines that the display wait period has not ended (NO in S233), it waits until it determines that it has ended. On the other hand, if it determines that the display wait period has ended (YES in S233), it executes the next step. The display wait period is a period set aside to allow the player to recognize the stop display of the special symbols in that game. In other words, the display of the special symbols changing (start of changing) in the next game is prohibited until the display wait period has ended.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a time-saving game termination determination process to determine whether the time-saving game has ended or not (S234). Details of the time-saving game termination determination process will be described later. Next, the main CPU 301a sets a game state specification command corresponding to the game state of the game in question in the main RAM 301c's performance transmission data storage area (S235), determines whether the special symbol that stopped in the game is a jackpot symbol or not (S236), and if it is determined to be a jackpot symbol (YES in S236), sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot device opening control processing) (S237). Here, the special symbol processing data refers to data used in the big prize device opening control processing to control the operation of the first special symbol display 120, the second special symbol display 122, and the movable pieces 117b and 127b of the big prize opening. For example, in the case of "3," the movable pieces 117b, etc., are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern for the big prize game state after the execution of the opening sequence of the big prize game. In the case of "4," the movable pieces 117b, etc., are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern for the small prize game after the execution of the opening sequence of the small prize game. In the case of "0," the movable pieces 117b, etc., are not opened.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot initialization process (S238) to initialize various information. In this jackpot initialization process, for example, the high probability flag, which is ON in the high probability game state, is changed to OFF, and the game transitions to the low probability game state; or the time-saving flag, which is ON in the time-saving game state, is changed to OFF, and the game transitions to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, an initialization process is executed to initialize the cumulative count "n" mentioned above to "800 (times)"; and an initialization process is executed to initialize the remaining playable count "M", which indicates the (remaining) number of plays that can be continued in the time-saving game state, to "0". Furthermore, the time-saving flags consist of a first time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 1, a second time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 2, a third time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 3, and a fourth time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 4. During the jackpot initialization process, all time-saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Additionally, the number of playable rounds "M" corresponds to each time-saving game state: "M1" in time-saving game state 1, "M3" in time-saving game state 2, "M4" in time-saving game state 3, "M4" in time-saving game state 4, and so on. During the jackpot initialization process, all playable rounds "M" are initialized.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot start preparation process (S239) to determine the pattern for opening the movable piece 117b of the first jackpot opening 117 and the movable piece 127b of the second jackpot opening 127 in a jackpot game according to the special symbol (type of jackpot), sets an opening specification command according to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S240), sets an opening time according to the type of jackpot (S241), and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S236 above that the special symbol that stopped in the game is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S236), it determines whether the stopped special symbol is a minor jackpot symbol (S242), and if it determines that it is a minor jackpot symbol (YES in S242), it sets the special symbol special electrical processing data to "4" (jackpot opening control processing) (S243), and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S232 that the special symbol that stopped during the game is not a minor win symbol (NO in S242), it sets the special symbol special electrical processing data to "0" (S243) and terminates the special symbol stop processing.

Furthermore, in step S233 of the special symbol stop processing described above, the display wait period when transitioning to all time-saving game states is assumed to be constant, but this is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible. For example, the display wait period when a time-saving symbol (special symbol J1, etc.) is displayed may be longer than the normal display wait period. More specifically, the display wait period when a time-saving symbol is displayed may be the same as the ending period of a jackpot game. Also, during the display wait period when a time-saving symbol is displayed, a time-saving game state entry animation may be performed, which is an animation that suggests a transition to time-saving game state 4, or the transition to time-saving game state 4 may be performed after the end of the display wait period. Moreover, when a time-saving game state entry animation is performed when transitioning to time-saving game state 4 after the end of the display wait period, the animation symbols and sub-symbols described later may or may not be displayed during the display wait period.

As shown in Figure 4-5(a), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process, it first determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in the game (S261). If it determines that a jackpot has been won (YES in S261), it terminates the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S261 that a jackpot has not been won (NO in S261), it determines whether or not the game is in a low-probability game state (normal game state or time-saving game state 2) (S262). If it determines that the game is not in a low-probability game state (NO in S262), it terminates the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S262 that the game is in a low-probability state (YES in S262), it subtracts "1" from the cumulative count "n" (S263), determines whether the cumulative count "n" has become "0" for the first time after the update (after the execution of the jackpot initialization process or RAM clear process in S238) (S264), and if it determines that it is not "0" for the first time after the update (NO in S264), it terminates the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S264 that the cumulative count "n" has become "0" for the first time after the update (YES in S264), it sets the remaining number of games M3 in time-saving mode 3 to an initial value of "700" (S265), updates the time-saving mode 3 flag to the ON state (S266), and terminates the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process.

Thus, if the time-saving mode 3 transition determination process is executed immediately after the special symbols are stopped on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, and if a jackpot is not won and the game is in a low-probability play state, the cumulative count "n" will be deducted. Furthermore, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clear process is executed, the game will transition to time-saving mode 3 only once, and will not transition to time-saving mode 3 more than once. The main CPU 301c may also send a time-saving mode 3 remaining count command indicating the number of playable counts "M3" to the performance control board 320 when the number of playable counts "M3" is set to its initial value, or it may send a time-saving mode 3 remaining count command and a time-saving mode 3 cumulative count command indicating the cumulative count "n" when the game ends or starts. With this configuration, for example, even if the number of playable rounds "M3" or the cumulative round count "n" is erased on the performance control board 320, the performance control board 320 can still refer to the periodically received commands for the remaining 3 rounds of the time-saving feature and the cumulative round count of the time-saving feature.

As shown in Figure 4-5(b), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time-saving mode 4 transition determination process, it first determines whether the current game is in a low-probability non-time-saving game state (S281). If it determines that it is not in a low-probability non-time-saving game state (NO in S281), it terminates the time-saving mode 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S281 that it is in a low-probability non-time-saving game state (YES in S261), it determines whether the time-saving symbol J1 has stopped and been displayed on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 (S282). If it determines that the time-saving symbol J1 has stopped and been displayed (YES in S282), it sets the initial value "100" for the number of playable rounds "M4" in time-saving game state 4 (S283), updates the time-saving mode 4 flag to the ON state (S286), and terminates the time-saving mode 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S282 that the time-saving symbol J1 is not displayed as stopped (NO in S282), it determines whether the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 is displayed as stopped (S284). If it determines that the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as stopped (YES in S284), it sets the initial value "700" to the number of playable rounds "M4" in time-saving game state 4 (S285), and in step S286, it updates the time-saving 4 flag to the ON state and terminates the time-saving 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S284 that the time-saving symbol J2 is not displayed as stopped (NO in S284), it terminates the time-saving 4 transition determination process as is.

Thus, when the Time-Saving Mode 4 transition determination process is executed immediately after the special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, if the special symbol stops on the Time-Saving Mode symbol J1, the game transitions to Time-Saving Mode 4 with 100 playable rounds. If the special symbol stops on the Time-Saving Mode symbol J2, the game transitions to Time-Saving Mode 4 with 700 playable rounds. Therefore, with this configuration, the enjoyment of the game for the player can be increased compared to a Time-Saving Mode 4 with a fixed number of playable rounds. Furthermore, similar to the Time-Saving Mode 3 transition determination process described above, the main CPU 301c may send a Time-Saving Mode 4 remaining rounds command indicating the number of playable rounds "M4" to the performance control board 320 when the number of playable rounds "M4" is set to an initial value, or when the game ends or starts.

As shown in Figure 4-5(c), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time-saving termination determination process, it first determines whether the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is ON (S301). If it determines that the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is OFF (NO in S301), it determines whether the time-saving 3 flag is ON (S305). If it determines that the time-saving 3 flag is OFF (NO in S305), it determines whether the time-saving 4 flag is ON (S309). If it determines that the time-saving 4 flag is OFF (NO in S309), it terminates the time-saving termination determination process. In other words, if the game state is not a time-saving game state, the time-saving termination determination process is not executed. As mentioned above, if a jackpot game begins during the special symbol stop process, the jackpot initialization process changes all time-saving flags—time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, and time-saving 4 flag—to the OFF state (S238 in Figure 4-4). Therefore, the main CPU 301c does not execute the time-saving end determination process during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S301 that the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is ON (YES in S301), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of playable rounds "M1" for time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2 (S302), determines whether the number of playable rounds "M1" is "0" or not (S303), and if it determines that the number of playable rounds "M1" is "0" (YES in S303), it sets the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag to OFF (S304) and proceeds to step S305. Also, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S303 that the number of playable rounds "M1" is not "0" (NO in S303), it proceeds to step S305. As a result of the execution of steps S301 through S304, unless a jackpot is won, the time-saving gameplay in time-saving gameplay state 1 and time-saving gameplay state 2 can be continued for a maximum of 100 times, as indicated by the initial value "100" of "M1" for the number of playable rounds in time-saving gameplay state 1 and time-saving gameplay state 2.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S305 that the time-saving 3 flag is ON (YES in S305), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of playable rounds "M3" in time-saving game state 3 (S306), determines whether the number of playable rounds "M3" is "0" or not (S307), and if it determines that the number of playable rounds "M3" is "0" (YES in S307), it turns the time-saving 3 flag OFF (S308) and proceeds to step S309. Also, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S307 that the number of playable rounds "M3" is not "0" (NO in S307), it proceeds to step S309. As a result of the execution of steps S305 through S308, unless a jackpot is won, the time-saving game mode in time-saving game mode 3 can be continued for a maximum of 700 times, as indicated by the initial value of "700" for the number of playable rounds "M1" in time-saving game mode 3.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S309 that the time-saving 4 flag is ON (YES in S309), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of playable rounds "M4" in time-saving game state 4 (S310), determines whether the number of playable rounds "M4" is "0" or not (S311), and if it determines that the number of playable rounds "M4" is "0" (YES in S311), it turns the time-saving 4 flag OFF (S312) and terminates the time-saving end determination process. Also, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S311 that the number of playable rounds "M4" is not "0" (NO in S311), it terminates the time-saving end determination process. As a result of the execution of steps S309 through S312, unless a jackpot is won, the time-saving game mode in time-saving game mode 4 can be continued for a maximum of 700 times, as indicated by the initial value of "700" for the number of playable rounds "M1" in time-saving game mode 4.

In this way, during the time-saving mode termination determination process, if the trigger for termination of a time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1, time-saving game state 2, time-saving game state 3, time-saving game state 4) is met, the time-saving flags corresponding to that time-saving game state (time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, time-saving 4 flag) are changed to the OFF state, thereby terminating the time-saving game state. Furthermore, during the time-saving mode termination determination process, each time the display of the variation stops on either the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, the number of playable rounds "M (M1, M2, M3, M4)" is deducted.

Furthermore, in the above-described time-saving game termination determination process, each time-saving game state is terminated when the number of playable rounds "M (M1, M2, M3, M4)" becomes "0", or when the total number of fluctuation displays on the so-called first special symbol display 120 and second special symbol display 122 reaches a predetermined initial value. However, this is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible. For example, each time-saving game state may be terminated at the first of the following triggers: when the total number of fluctuation displays on the first special symbol display 120 and second special symbol display 122 reaches 50, when the number of fluctuation displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 5, or when a minor win is achieved for the first time. Also, the triggers for termination may differ for each time-saving game state. For example, the time-saving game state 1 ends when the total number of fluctuations in the first special symbol display unit 120 and the second special symbol display unit 122 reaches 50, when the number of fluctuations in the second special symbol display unit 122 reaches 5, and when a small win is achieved for the first time. The time-saving game state 3 ends when the total number of fluctuations in the first special symbol display unit 120 and the second special symbol display unit 122 reaches 500, and the second special symbol The game ends when the number of fluctuations on display unit 122 reaches 20, or when a minor win occurs 4 times, whichever occurs first. Alternatively, the time-saving game state 4 may end when the total number of fluctuations on the first special symbol display unit 120 and the second special symbol display unit 122 reaches 30, when the number of fluctuations on the second special symbol display unit 122 reaches 6, or when a minor win occurs 3 times, whichever occurs first.

Referring to Figure 4-6, the termination of the aforementioned time-saving game states 3 and 4 will now be explained. Figure 4-6 illustrates the termination of time-saving game states 3 and 4. (a) illustrates the case where a jackpot occurs during time-saving game state 3, ending time-saving game state 3, and (b) illustrates the case where a jackpot occurs during time-saving game state 4, ending time-saving game state 4. Figure 4-6 illustrates the duration of the jackpot game (including the opening and ending periods), the operating periods of time-saving game states 1, 3, and 4, and the number of playable rounds "M1," "M3," and "M4."

As shown in Figure 4-6(a), when a jackpot game begins at time tb1 during the time-saving game state 3, the jackpot initialization process is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the number of playable rounds "M3" in time-saving game state 3 at time tb1, which is "500," is updated to "0," and time-saving game state 3 ends. Furthermore, at time tb2, when the jackpot game ends, the number of playable rounds "M1" in time-saving game state 1 is set to the initial value of "100," and the game transitions to time-saving game state 1; time-saving game state 3 is not restarted. Thus, when a jackpot is won during time-saving game state 3, time-saving game state 3 may end without restarting after the jackpot game, allowing the maximum number of playable rounds "700" to be used.

As shown in Figure 4-6(b), when a jackpot game begins at time tc1 during the time-saving game state 4, the jackpot initialization process is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the number of playable rounds "M4" in time-saving game state 4, which is "10" at time tc1, is updated to "0," and time-saving game state 4 ends. Furthermore, at time tc2, when the jackpot game ends, the number of playable rounds "M1" in time-saving game state 1 is set to the initial value of "100," and the game transitions to time-saving game state 1; time-saving game state 4 is not restarted. Thus, even when a jackpot is won during time-saving game state 4, time-saving game state 4 may end without restarting after the jackpot game, allowing the maximum number of playable rounds "700" to be used.

(Explanation of information display unit 302c)
Referring to Figures 4-7 and 4-8, the information display unit 302c of this embodiment will now be described. Figure 4-7 is a diagram illustrating the details of the information display unit 302c. Figure 4-8 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counting period for the base value B. Here, the base value B is a numerical value calculated by dividing the number of outs (total number of game balls shot) by the total number of prize balls dispensed in a specific section of the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state). The number of outs is the number of game balls detected by an out ball detection switch (not shown), and is, for example, the number of game balls that entered the out opening 111, or starting openings such as the first starting opening 112, or winning openings such as the first major winning opening 117, or general winning openings (not shown), and which were detected by the out ball detection switch.

As shown in Figure 4-7(a), first, the various counters provided in the main RAM 301c (base calculation out counter, base calculation prize ball counter, total out counter) are used to control the display of the base value B in the information display unit 302c. The base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. For example, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch, the value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter. The base calculation prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls in a specific section. For example, when a game ball enters a general prize pocket, the value "10" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. When a game ball enters a prize pocket such as the first major prize pocket 117, the value "15" is added. When a ball enters a start pocket such as the first start pocket 112, the value "3" is added. The total out counter counts the number of outs since the power was first turned on (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total outs"). The main CPU 301a calculates the base value B for a specific interval by dividing the value of the base calculation prize ball counter by the value of the base calculation output counter and multiplying the result by the value "100". It also stores (saves) the base value B for each predetermined interval after it has ended. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved each time the number of outputs reaches 60,000. Specifically, the main CPU 301a calculates and saves the base value B from the current values of the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation output counter each time the value "60,000" is added to the total output counter, and the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation output counter are initialized. In this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation output counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are incremented is referred to as the "counting period," and periods other than the counting period are referred to as the "non-counting period."

As shown in Figure 4-7(b), the display on the information display 302c will now be explained when 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60,000 outs are counted in the following section 2, then 60,000 outs are counted in the following section 1, and then section L (where the number of outs is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999)) begins. Here, the base value B for section 3 is set to "B3", the base value B for section 2 is set to "B2", the base value for section 1 is set to "B1", and the base value B for section L is set to "BL". In the information display 302c in such a section L, the base value BL for section L (real time), the base value B1 for section 1, the base value B2 for section 2, and the base value B3 for section 3 are displayed in this order, switching approximately every 5 seconds. Furthermore, when the number of outs in section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B of the most recent section, the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B of the next most recent section, the base value B2 of section 2 is stored as the base value B of the third most recent section, and the base value B3 of the oldest section 3 is discarded. In other words, when a section ends (60,000 outs are counted), the base value B of that section is saved as the base value B of the previous section, and the base value B of the oldest section is discarded. In this embodiment, these base values B are continuously displayed on the information display 302c, including the period during which the game can be played.

As shown in Figure 4-7(c), the information display unit 302c is composed of four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd. In the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, as described above, the two-digit base value B is displayed in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3, switching approximately every 5 seconds. If the base value B is greater than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed (the dot display lights up). In addition, in the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb, identification information "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" is displayed, corresponding to the base value B displayed in the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, allowing identification of which section of base value B is being displayed. Specifically, in the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb of the information display unit 302c, the identification information "bL" is displayed during the period when the base value BL of interval L is displayed; the identification information "b1" is displayed during the period when the base value B1 of interval 1 is displayed; the identification information "b2" is displayed during the period when the base value B2 of interval 2 is displayed; and the identification information "b3" is displayed during the period when the base value B3 of interval 3 is displayed.

Here, the display patterns on the information display unit 302c in each section L to section 3 will be explained in more detail. For example, when the total number of outputs is less than 60,000, the base value B may not be calculated during the period when the identification information "b1", "b2", and "b3" are displayed. In this case, when the total number of outputs is less than 60,000, the identification information is blinked on the 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb, and the special symbol "--" is lit on the 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd. Also, when the total number of outputs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, the base value B1 is calculated, but the base value B2 for identification information "b2" and the base value B3 for identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this case, if the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period when identification information "b1" is displayed, the identification information will be lit up and the base value B1 will be lit up. However, during the period when identification information "b2" and "b3" are displayed, each identification information will blink and the special symbol "--" will be lit up. Furthermore, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the base value B1 and base value B2 will be calculated, but the base value B3 of identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this case, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, during the period when identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed, the identification information will be lit up and the base value B1 or base value B2 will be lit up. However, during the period when identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information will blink and the special symbol "--" will be lit up. As described above, in this embodiment, while the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period when the identification information "bL" is displayed, it may be difficult to calculate the accurate (original) base value B if the number of normal outs in section L is not sufficiently large. In such cases, for example, if the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" may be displayed with a blinking light, and if the number of normal outs is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL" may be displayed with a solid light. With such a display mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 100 can evaluate the base value B after considering whether the number of normal outs in section L is sufficient, as it is substantially communicated whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficient.

Incidentally, before a player actually plays, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is usually checked by the administrator. This check includes verifying whether the game balls are properly detected by various detection switches (such as the out-ball detection switch). When such an operation check is performed, for example, in a configuration where the base calculation prize ball counter and base calculation out counter are added immediately after the initial power-on of the gaming machine 100, the base value B calculated immediately after the initial power-on may differ from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played. In such cases, in this embodiment, the base calculation prize ball counter and base calculation out counter may be prevented from being added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the value "300"). This prevents discrepancies in the base value immediately after the initial power-on.

Here, we will specifically explain the counting process, which is one of the processes executed in the main processing of the main control board 300 and is a process that counts the number of prize balls and the number of outs in order to calculate the base value B in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), and the base display process, which is a process that displays the base value B on the information display unit 302c. When the counting process is executed, the main CPU 301a adds the value "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening) to the prize ball counter for base calculation in the normal game state when a game ball enters the general prize opening and is detected by the general prize opening detection switch, adds the value "3" when a game ball is detected by the first start opening detection switch 304 or the second start opening detection switch 305, and adds the value "15" when a game ball is detected by the first prize opening detection switch 306a or the second prize opening detection switch 306b. Furthermore, the main CPU 301a adds the value "1" to the base calculation out counter when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch during normal gameplay. Note that in gameplay states other than normal gameplay, no values are added to the base calculation prize ball counter or the base calculation out counter. After performing the counting process, the main CPU 301a calculates the base value from the normal prize ball count and normal out count calculated in the above counting process, and then performs a base display process, which displays the identification information and base value B on the information display unit 302c. As a result of this base display process, the identification information and base value B are displayed on the information display unit 302c in the manner described above.

Referring to Figure 4-8, the following will explain specific examples of the counting period, which is the period during which the counting process necessary for displaying the base value B in the information display unit 302c described above is performed. First, Figure 4-8(a) is a diagram illustrating specific examples of the counting period before and after transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state) to the time-saving game state 3. Figure 4-8(b) is a diagram illustrating specific examples of the counting period before and after transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state) to the time-saving game state 4. Furthermore, Figure 4-8(c) is a diagram illustrating other specific examples of the counting period before and after transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state) to the time-saving game state 4. Note that in the following explanation, the counting period refers to the period during which the above-mentioned counting process is performed, while the non-counting period refers to the period during which the counting process is not performed.

As shown in Figure 4-8(a), this section describes a case where the 800th game (display of special symbols) in the low probability, non-time-saving game state starts at time tn1, and a losing symbol is displayed during the 800th game, and at time tn2, the losing symbol is displayed and the cumulative count "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0". In such a case, the low probability, non-time-saving game state before time tn2 becomes the counting period, and the time-saving game state 3 after time tn2 becomes the non-counting period. Furthermore, this section describes a case where, in the time-saving game state 3, no jackpot is won, and the final game in time-saving game state 3 (display of special symbols on the 700th turn) starts at time tn3, and at time tn4, a losing symbol is displayed during the final game, and the number of playable rounds becomes "0 (rounds)". In such cases, the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving game state from time TN4 onward, and the counting period resumes from time TN4. Note that, as mentioned above, the start of the non-counting period when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 was set as time TN2, but it could also be set as time TN1. Furthermore, the restart point of the counting period when transitioning to the low-probability, non-time-saving game state after the end of time-saving game state 3 was set as time TN4, but it could also be set as time TN3.

As shown in Figure 4-8(b), this section describes the case where a game in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stops at time to 1, and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stops at time to 2. In this case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state before time to 2 becomes the counting period, and the time-saving game state 4 from time to 2 onward becomes the non-counting period. Furthermore, this section describes the case where, in the time-saving game state 4, the player does not win a jackpot, and the final game in time-saving game state 4 (the 700th special symbol variation display) starts at time to 3, and at time to 4, the losing symbol for the final game is displayed, and the number of playable rounds becomes "0". Note that in this case, the cumulative count "n" of the first predetermined condition is not "0". In this case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state begins from time to 4, and the counting period resumes from time to 4. Furthermore, for example, if the time-saving symbol J1 or similar is displayed during the final round of the time-saving game state 4, the counting period may be restarted in the same way as when a losing symbol is displayed, as described above. Also, if a minor win symbol is displayed during the final round of the time-saving game state 4, the counting period may be restarted after the minor win game has ended. Additionally, while the start of the non-counting period upon transitioning to time-saving game state 4 was set to time 2 above, it may be set to time 1. Furthermore, while the restart of the counting period upon transitioning to a low-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of time-saving game state 4 was set to time 4, it may be set to time 3.

As shown in Figure 4-8(c), this section describes the case where a game in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state where the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stops at time tp1, and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stops at time tp2. In this case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state before time tp2 becomes the counting period, and the time-saving game state 4 from time tp2 onward becomes the non-counting period. Furthermore, this section describes the case where, in the time-saving game state 4, the player does not win a jackpot, and the final game of the time-saving game state 4 (the 700th special symbol variation display) starts at time tp3, and at time tp4, the losing symbol for the final game is displayed, and the number of playable rounds becomes "0". At this time, the cumulative count "n" of the first predetermined condition is assumed to be "0". In this case, since the time-saving game state 3 begins from time tp4 onward, the non-counting period continues from time tp4 onward. Furthermore, if the cumulative count "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0" during the final round of the time-saving game state 4, the non-counting period will continue even if a time-saving symbol J1 or a minor win symbol is displayed during that round.

(Examples of display effects for each effect mode)
Referring to Figures 5-1 and 5-2, examples of performance displays for each performance mode on the main display device 131 (pre-change operation, pre-stop operation, etc.) and examples of performance displays for the number of reserved balls will be explained. Figure 5-1 is a diagram showing examples of performance displays for each performance mode on the main display device 131 (pre-change operation, pre-stop operation, etc.), and Figure 5-2 is a diagram showing an example of performance displays for the number of reserved balls on the main display device 131.

As shown in Figures 5-1 and 5-2, the main display device 131 displays various effects according to the progress of the game. These effects include a demo effect that is displayed when the special symbol variation display is not in progress, a variation effect that is displayed with the variation display of the effect symbol 50a (pre-variation action, update variation) in progress when the special symbol variation display is in progress, a variation display of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) (update variation) in progress when the special symbol variation display is in progress, and a jackpot effect that is displayed when a jackpot game is in progress. The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 131 has a variation display area for displaying the three effect symbols 50a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a mode display area for indicating the effect mode related to the execution of the variation effect. Furthermore, the main display device 131 includes a first reserve icon display area 50b for displaying a number of first reserve icons (first reserve information) corresponding to the first reserve number in normal gameplay, a second reserve icon display area 50d (not shown) for displaying a number of second reserve icons (second reserve information) corresponding to the second reserve number in time-saving gameplay, an icon display area 50c for displaying an icon (execution information) indicating that a variation effect is being executed, a first reserve number display area SA for displaying the first reserve number numerically, and a second reserve number display area SB for displaying the second reserve number numerically, etc.

The performance symbols 50a are composed of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9," for example, and begin displaying a variation in response to the start of the variation display of special symbols performed by the first special symbol display unit 120 and the second special symbol display unit 122, and stop displaying in response to the stop of the variation display of special symbols. Furthermore, the performance symbols 50a are set to stop displaying for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (miss pattern, jackpot pattern). The jackpot pattern is a combination of the same performance symbols 50a, such as "777" or "555," while the miss pattern is any other pattern. The variation display of the performance symbols 50a is shown as vertical scrolling, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch or rotate (rotate) in place. Furthermore, during the display of the 50a symbols (variation animation), various animation images and movies, such as background images and characters, are displayed on the main display device 131, etc., depending on the result of the jackpot determination. This is intended to increase the player's anticipation of the jackpot game (special game) being played.

The first hold icon display area 50b is divided into the first display section 50b1 (first area), the second display section 50b2 (second area), the third display section 50b3 (third area), and the fourth display section 50b4 (fourth area), starting from the side closest to the icon display area 50c. The first hold icons, corresponding to the first hold count, are displayed in the first to fourth display sections 50b1 to 50b4. Specifically, the first display unit 50b1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed first; the second display unit 50b2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed second; the third display unit 50b3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed third; and the fourth display unit 50b4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed fourth. The second hold icon display area 50d is divided into sections 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4, starting from the side closest to the icon display area 50c. The first to fourth display units 50d1 to 50d4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number.

The icon display area 50c is larger than the display units of the first reserved icon display area 50b in order to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 50b and the second reserved icon display area 50d. The icons displayed in this area are also larger than those of the first reserved icons. Specifically, for example, as the variation display of the first special symbol (performance symbol 50a) begins, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b move (shift) one by one towards the icon display area 50c. The first reserved icons displayed in the first display unit 50b1 move (shift) to the icon display area 50c, becoming the icons in question. At the end of the variation display of the first special symbol (performance symbol 50a), these icons disappear (erase) (an icon disappearance effect (erasure effect)). Note that the icons may also disappear during the variation display of the first special symbol (performance symbol 50a).

As shown in Figure 5-1(a), in performance mode A (normal game state), the Mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image), and the cumulative count image RK, which indicates the number of games played corresponding to the cumulative count "n" mentioned above, is displayed. The performance symbol 50a in the first form performs a downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) during the fluctuation performance, but as a pre-flux action that suggests the start of this scrolling display, it is displayed as floating upward from the symbol stop position for 0.75 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that suggests the end of this scrolling display, the character image CG is displayed as shaking its head at the symbol stop position for 0.9 seconds. Furthermore, in the icon display area (first held icon display area 50b, said icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the first form (hexagon). The normal icon in the first form constantly repeats a swaying motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 2 seconds, starting from a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, then a second posture tilted to the right, and finally returning to the first posture. Also, during the variation display in performance mode A, variation BGM 1 is output. Furthermore, the cumulative count image RK is hidden until the cumulative count "n" in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 780 times). It begins to be displayed after the predetermined number is reached, and is updated with an image of the number "1" added each time a game in the normal game state ends (stopped with a losing symbol, etc.).

As shown in Figure 5-1(b), in performance mode B (normal gameplay state), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbols 50a are displayed in a second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image), and the cumulative count image RK in the same form as performance mode A described above is displayed. Furthermore, the performance symbols 50a in the second form perform downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the fluctuation performance, but as a pre-flux action before starting this scrolling display (update action), the performance symbols 50a are displayed in a reduced state for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop action before ending this scrolling display (update action), the performance symbols 50a are displayed in a reduced state → normal state for 0.5 seconds at the symbol stop position. Furthermore, in the icon display area (first held icon display area 50b, said icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second mode constantly repeats a swaying motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 131, moving from a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, to a second posture tilted to the right, and then back to the first posture. Additionally, during the fluctuation display in performance mode B, the fluctuation BGM 2 is output.

As shown in Figure 5-1(c), in performance mode C (normal gameplay state), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a third form (a rectangular base image BG with rounded edges, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image with rounded edges), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image), and the cumulative count image RK in the same form as performance mode A described above is displayed. The performance symbol 50a in the third form performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variation performance, but as a pre-variation operation before starting this scrolling display (update variation), the performance symbol 50a is displayed enlarged for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation before ending this scrolling display (update variation), the performance symbol 50a is displayed rotated at the symbol stop position for 0.7 seconds. Furthermore, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, and the icon display area 50c), normal icons are displayed in the third form (star shape). The normal icon in the third form constantly repeats a rotational movement (performance movement) every 3 seconds, starting from a first posture (initial posture) where a specific vertex is positioned at the top, rotating through a second posture where the specific vertex moves, and returning to the first posture. Additionally, during the variation display in performance mode C, variation BGM 3 is output.

Furthermore, while the cumulative count image RK is a common design in the above-mentioned performance modes A to C, it may be a different design depending on the performance mode. For example, the font or size of the characters may differ. Also, while the cumulative count image RK is displayed starting after the cumulative count in normal gameplay reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 790 times), it may be displayed continuously during normal gameplay. Moreover, while the cumulative count image RK is shown as the number of games played corresponding to the cumulative count "n" mentioned above, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed in a way that shows the number of games played until transitioning to the time-saving game state 3. Specifically, it may also be displayed with text that anticipates a transition to time-saving game state 3, such as "20 more games until playtime begins (transition to time-saving game state 3)!!"

As shown in Figure 5-1(d), in performance mode D (time-saving game state 1), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a fourth form (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image), the remaining number image JK which indicates the remaining number of plays that can be played in time-saving game state 1 (corresponding to the number of plays that can be played "M1") is displayed, and the right-hand play image MG which indicates right-hand play is displayed. Furthermore, the performance symbol 50a in the fourth form performs a downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the fluctuation performance, but as a pre-flux action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, a floating display is performed for 0.4 seconds, where the symbol floats upward from its stopping position, and as a pre-stop action that indicates the end of this scrolling display, a bouncing display is performed for 0.4 seconds, where the symbol floats upward from its stopping position and then descends. Furthermore, the bounce display as a pre-stop action is similar in presentation to the float display as a pre-variation action, but the bounce display has a faster movement speed of the animation symbol 50a and a lower float height. In addition, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (circular). The normal icon in the fourth form is designed to rotate from a first position (initial position) where the black dot inside is located at the top, to a second position where the black dot moves, and then back to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance action) every 3 seconds. Also, during the variation display in performance mode D, variation BGM 4 is output. Furthermore, in the remaining number image JK, each time a game in time-saving game state 1 ends (stop display with a losing symbol, etc.), the image is updated to a number with "1" subtracted. Furthermore, the right-hand shooting image MG is displayed when the right-hand shooting lamp is lit, and hidden when the right-hand shooting lamp is off.

As shown in Figure 5-1(e), in performance mode E (time-saving game state 2), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image), the remaining number image JK which indicates the remaining number of plays that can be played in time-saving game state 2 (corresponding to the number of plays that can be played "M2") is displayed, and the right-hand shooting image MG which indicates shooting to the right is displayed. Furthermore, the performance symbol 50a in the fourth form performs a downward scrolling display (updated fluctuation) in the fluctuation performance, but as a pre-flux action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, it is displayed floating upward from the symbol stop position for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that indicates the end of this scrolling display, the performance symbol 50a is displayed rotating (small) at the symbol stop position for 0.4 seconds. Furthermore, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, and the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (circular). The normal icon in the fourth form constantly repeats a rotational movement (performance movement) every 3 seconds, starting from a first position (initial position) where the internal black dot is located at the top, then rotating to a second position where the black dot moves, and returning to the first position. Also, during the variation display in performance mode E, variation BGM 5 is output. Furthermore, in the remaining spins image JK, each time a spin in time-saving game state 2 ends (stopped with a losing symbol, etc.), the image is updated with a value reduced by "1". Finally, the right-hand shooting image MG is displayed when the right-hand shooting lamp is lit and hidden when the right-hand shooting lamp is off.

As shown in Figure 5-1(f), in performance mode F (time-saving game state 3), the background image of mode F is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (performance action), the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a fourth form (rectangular base image, numerical image), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (numerical image), the remaining number image JK which indicates the remaining number of plays that can be played in time-saving game state 3 (corresponding to the number of plays that can be played "M3") is displayed, and the right-hand shooting image MG which indicates shooting to the right is displayed. Furthermore, the performance symbol 50a in the fourth form performs a downward scrolling display (updated fluctuation) in the fluctuation performance, but as a pre-flux action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that indicates the end of this scrolling display, a small bounce display that floats upward from the symbol's stopping position is performed for 0.4 seconds. Furthermore, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, and the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth form constantly repeats a rotational movement (performance movement) every 3 seconds, starting from a first position (initial position) where a specific vertex is located at the top, rotating to a second position where the specific vertex moves, and then returning to the first position. Also, during the variation display in performance mode F, variation BGM 6 is output. Furthermore, in the remaining number image JK, each time a game in time-saving game state 3 ends (stopped with a losing symbol, etc.), the image is updated with a value reduced by "1". Finally, the right-hand shooting image MG is displayed when the right-hand shooting lamp is lit and hidden when the right-hand shooting lamp is off.

In addition, even if the reel symbol 50a performs any of the multiple types of pre-reel actions (floating display, enlarged display, shrinking display) in the reel animation, the starting order of the pre-reel actions and scrolling displays (update animations) of the three reel symbols 50a is set to be the same (left → middle → right). However, the starting order of the pre-reel actions and scrolling displays (update animations) of the three reel symbols 50a may be made different depending on the type of pre-reel action (floating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, shrinking display: right → middle → left, etc.). Furthermore, multiple types of pre-reel actions for the reel symbols 50a may be provided for each animation mode so that the probability of winning a jackpot differs. Furthermore, in the variable animation, even if the animation symbol 50a performs any of the multiple pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrink → normal display, rotation display, bounce display, small rotation display, small bounce display), the order of the pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three animation symbols 50a is kept the same (left → right → center). However, the order of the pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three animation symbols 50a may be made different depending on the type of pre-stop action (head shaking display: left → right → center, rotation display: left → center → right, etc.). Also, multiple types of pre-stop actions for the animation symbols 50a may be provided for each animation mode, so that the probability of a big win differs.

Furthermore, although the details of the performance mode corresponding to the time-saving game state 4 are not explained, it may be the same as performance mode F corresponding to time-saving game state 3, or it may be a different form from the performance modes A to F described above. For example, performance mode G may be a form in which the background image and BGM of performance mode F are composed of a background image and BGM 7 of mode G. Also, the form of the performance symbols 50a in time-saving game states 1 to 4 may be different for each state. In this way, since the background image and BGM etc. are different for each time-saving game state 1 to 4, the player can easily recognize the type of time-saving game state they are currently in after transitioning to time-saving game states 1 to 4. In addition, although the performance modes are different for each time-saving game state 1 to 4 described above, the game is executed with the same performance mode during each time-saving game. However, the performance mode may be changed according to the number of times the game can be played during each time-saving game. For example, in the time-saving game state 3, when the number of playable rounds "M3" reaches "100" (after 600 rounds of gameplay in time-saving game state 2), the game may switch from performance mode F to a different performance mode.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned performance modes D to F, etc. (time-saving game states 1 to 4), the remaining number of plays image JK is set to a common form, but it may be set to a different form depending on the performance mode. For example, the font may be different, or the size may be different. Also, depending on the aforementioned performance modes D to F, etc. (time-saving game states 1 to 4), it may be set that the remaining number of plays image JK is displayed and that it is not displayed. Furthermore, the remaining number of plays image JK may be displayed at all times during each time-saving game state, or it may be displayed only until a predetermined number of games are played after transitioning to each time-saving game state, or after the number of playable games "M" reaches a predetermined number, or only for a predetermined period during the time-saving game state. For example, the remaining number of plays image JK may be displayed in time-saving game state 1 (performance mode D) and time-saving game state 2 (performance mode E), but not in the initial stages of gameplay after transitioning to time-saving game state 3 (performance mode F), etc. The remaining number of plays image JK may then be displayed only after the number of plays available in time-saving game state 3, "M3," has been reduced to "100."

Furthermore, while the first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second reserved icon display area 50d described above are common to each performance mode, they may also be different for each performance mode, for example, with different colors, decorations, or shapes. Also, in performance modes D to F described above, displays indicating the current game state may be shown, for example, "Shortened Time Mode 1," "Shortened Time Mode 2," and "Shortened Time Mode 3" may be displayed at the top of the main display device 131. Moreover, while the display positions of the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ described above are different for performance modes A to C and performance modes D to F, they may also be displayed in the same position, for example, in the lower right or lower left corner of the main display device 131.

Here, we will describe the time-saving performance symbols, which correspond to the time-saving symbols and consist of three predetermined performance symbols 50a. As described above (see Figure 3-4 (a-4)), the time-saving symbols include a special symbol J1 that corresponds to the transition to time-saving game state 4, where the number of playable rounds is 100, and a special symbol J2 that corresponds to the transition to time-saving game state 4, where the number of playable rounds is 700. The time-saving performance symbols corresponding to these special symbols J1 and J2 may, for example, consist of the same performance symbol 50a (e.g., "151"), or they may consist of different performance symbols 50a (e.g., "151" and "515"), or there may be multiple types of time-saving performance symbols corresponding to each special symbol.

Furthermore, the time-saving effect symbols are mainly composed of effect symbols 50a consisting of symbols that represent numbers, but are not limited to this and may be in various forms. For example, the time-saving effect symbols may be configured to include a special symbol consisting mainly of the words "time-saving". Specifically, the time-saving effect symbols may consist of an effect symbol 50a of "1", a special symbol of "time-saving", and another effect symbol 50a of "1". In particular, during a variation effect using effect symbols 50a, the special symbol of "time-saving" may temporarily stop after the two effect symbols 50a of "1" have temporarily stopped. In such a configuration, when playing with a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed, the special symbol may not be included in the effect symbols 50a displayed during the variation period when the reach effect is not performed, and the special symbol may be displayed after the reach effect is performed. Furthermore, in games where the time-saving animation symbols do not stop (games where the jackpot determination process does not result in a win in time-saving mode 4), the temporarily stopped special symbol may change to a normal animation symbol 50a. In this configuration, even in games where the time-saving symbols do not stop, the expectation of transitioning to time-saving game state 4 can be increased by the display of the time-saving symbols. Moreover, in the transition to time-saving game state 3 based on the cumulative number of plays, the stopping display of the animation symbol 50a may be such that a symbol similar to the aforementioned special symbol (a symbol different from the time-saving animation symbols or the animation symbols 50a corresponding to jackpots/minor wins, for example, a symbol composed of the words "Time-saving game start!") stops and is displayed during the transition.

As shown in Figure 5-2(a), when the number of reserved seats is "0" and the system is in a waiting state, no icons are displayed in the first reserved seat icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved seat number display area SA and the second reserved seat number display area SB, respectively.

As shown in Figure 5-2(b), when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112 and the first reserve count becomes "1", the reserve icon HI in its normal display mode is added (increased) to the first display section of the first reserve icon display area 50b, and the reserve number in the first reserve count display area SA is updated (increased) to "1". At this time, the reserve icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the performance action (shaking action) begins from there.

As shown in Figure 5-2(c), when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b is shifted (decreased display, changed display) toward the same icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated to "0" (decreased display). At this time, the reserved icon HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(d), when the shift display of the hold icon HI finishes, the hold icon HI is displayed as icon TI, which is larger and opaque than the hold icon HI, and the performance (shaking motion) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(e), when a game ball enters the first starting slot 112 and the first reserve count becomes "1", the first display section of the first reserve icon display area 50b begins to display (increase) the reserve icon HI in its normal display mode, and the reserve number in the first reserve count display area SA is updated (increased) to "1". At this time, the additionally displayed reserve icon HI begins to perform a performance action (shaking action) in synchronization with other icons in their normal display modes (in this case, the icon TI), and is displayed enlarged from a semi-transparent, extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image. In other words, when the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating state, the reserve icon HI may not start displaying from its first position (initial position).

As shown in Figure 5-2(f), after the additional display (increase display) of the normally displayed Hold Icon HI is completed, the additionally displayed Hold Icon HI in the normally displayed mode will be displayed at its normal size and opaque, and the performance (shaking motion) will continue.

As shown in Figure 5-2(g), when a game ball enters the first starting slot 112 and the first reserve count becomes "2," and it is determined that the icon change effect will be executed, the second display section of the first reserve icon display area 50b begins to display (increase) the reserve icon HI in the first special display mode (blue), and the reserve number in the first reserve count display area SA is updated (increased) to "2." At this time, the additionally displayed reserve icon HI starts an effect movement (rotation movement) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (in this case, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) where a specific part is positioned at the top, and is displayed enlarged from a semi-transparent, extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in Figure 5-2(h), when the additional display (increase display) of the first special display mode (blue) of the hold icon HI is completed, the additionally displayed first special display mode (blue) of the hold icon HI is displayed at its normal size and opaque, and the performance action (rotation action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(i), when the variation display of the first special symbol ends and stops, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins. At this time, the disappearing icon TI gradually increases in transparency accompanied by an effect image before disappearing, but the performance action (shaking action) continues even while the disappearance display is active.

As shown in Figure 5-2(j), when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b begin to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decrease) to "1". At this time, the two reserved icons HI change from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance actions (shaking and rotating) continue.

As shown in Figure 5-2(k), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI is completed, the hold icon HI in its normal display mode, which was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 50b, is displayed as icon TI, which is larger and opaque than the hold icon HI, and the performance action (shaking motion) continues. Also, the hold icon HI in its first special mode, which was displayed in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 50b, is displayed in the first display section at its normal size and opaque. Consequently, the icon change effect changes it to the second special display mode (red), but the performance action (rotation motion) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(l), when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112 and the first reserve number becomes "2", the second display section of the first reserve icon display area 50b starts displaying (increasing) the reserve icon HI in its normal display mode, and the reserve number in the first reserve number display area SA is updated (increased) to "2". At this time, the additionally displayed reserve icon HI starts performing a performance action (shaking action) in synchronization with other icons in their normal display modes (in this case, the icon TI), and is displayed enlarged from a semi-transparent, extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in Figure 5-2(m), after the additional display (increase display) of the normally displayed Hold Icon HI is completed, the additionally displayed Hold Icon HI in the normally displayed mode will be displayed at its normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) will continue.

As shown in Figure 5-2(n), when the variation display of the first special symbol ends and stops, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins. At this time, the disappearing icon TI gradually increases in transparency accompanied by an effect image before disappearing, but the performance action (shaking action) continues even during the disappearance display.

As shown in Figure 5-2(o), when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the two reserved icons HI that were displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreased). At this time, the two reserved icons HI change from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance (shaking motion, rotation motion) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(p), if, for example, the conditions for switching from performance mode A to performance mode B are met, the main display device 131 displays an obscuring image (blackout image BO, whiteout image WO, etc.) across the entire screen. While the reserved numbers in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB remain visible, the visibility of the icons in the first reserved icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c is restricted.

As shown in Figure 5-2(q), in the layer behind the occluded image, the display mode and performance (rotation) of icon TI are maintained, while the held icon HI is switched to the normal display mode of held icon HI corresponding to performance mode B. At this time, the held icon HI is displayed in a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the performance (shaking) begins from that position.

As shown in Figure 5-2(r), once the occluded image is cleared, the normally displayed hold icon HI in the first hold icon display area 50b and the second special display icon TI in the icon display area 50c become visible.

Furthermore, when two or more hold icons are displayed in their normal display mode, the system synchronizes the performance actions of multiple hold icons in their normal display mode, just as it synchronizes the performance actions of two or more hold icons in their normal display mode. While this explanation primarily describes the hold display example in performance mode A, other performance modes will basically display the same number of hold icons (including the display when switching performance modes), only the display mode and performance actions of the hold icons will differ. Additionally, the timing of the start of the decrease in the hold number display may precede the timing of the start of the change display of the hold icon to the target icon (the shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon), and the timing of the completion of the decrease in the hold number display may precede the timing of the completion of the change display of the hold icon to the target icon (the shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon). Furthermore, the timing of the start and end of the increase display of the hold number may precede the timing of the start and end of the increase display of the hold icon. Also, instead of just differentiating the transparency at the start and after the increase display is completed, the shape or other characteristics of the hold icon may be different.

Furthermore, regarding the timing at which the animation of the hold icon, displayed in its normal display mode based on a newly triggered win, synchronizes with the animation of other hold icons, it may be at the start of display, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display. Also, if the animation of the hold icon is to resume after the shift display, the hold icon may resume its animation from its initial position at the position after the shift display (hold icon display area, the icon display area).

Furthermore, even when a special symbol (performance symbol) stops and the corresponding icon disappears, the icon continues to perform its performance action. However, the performance action may be terminated when the special symbol (performance symbol) stops. Also, while multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (reserved icons with each other, reserved icons with the icon in question) perform their performance actions in sync, they do not need to be perfectly synchronized; they may be approximately synchronized. Regarding the timing at which the performance action of a reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode, based on a newly started winning combination, becomes approximately synchronized with the performance action of other reserved icons, this may be at the start of display, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

(Examples of display effects for each time-saving game state)
Referring to Figures 5-3 to 5-5, specific examples of display effects in time-saving game states 1 to 4 will now be explained. Figure 5-3 is a diagram illustrating the time-saving game state entry effect performed when transitioning to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, and the display effects performed before the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2. (a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing examples of the display effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 1, etc., (a-3) is a diagram showing an example of the display effects before the end of time-saving game state 1, etc., and (b) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 1, etc. Figure 5-4 is a diagram illustrating the display effects performed before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4, where (a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing examples of display modes for the display effects before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 3, (b-1) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 3, and (b-2) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 4. Figure 5-5 is a diagram illustrating the display effects at the end of time-saving game states 1 to 4, where (a) is a diagram showing examples of display modes at the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, (b-1) is a diagram illustrating display modes before and after the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, (b-2) is a diagram illustrating display modes before and after the end of time-saving game state 3, and (b-3) is a diagram illustrating display modes before and after the end of time-saving game state 4.

As shown in Figures 5-3 (a-1) and (a-2), when a state ends and the game transitions to time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, a time-saving game state entry animation is performed to indicate the start of time-saving game state 1, etc. During the time-saving game state entry animation for time-saving game state 1, etc., the main display device 131 displays, for example, a background image corresponding to the time-saving game state entry animation, along with an entry image CT that notifies the transition to time-saving game state 1, a prevention image CH that warns against forgetting to remove the game card inserted into the game device, and a right-hand shooting image MG that suggests shooting to the right. Afterward, the prevention image CH is replaced by a warning image nh that warns of game addiction. Note that the right-hand shooting image MG is displayed from the start of the jackpot game through to the jackpot game, and continues to be displayed after the transition to time-saving game state 1, etc.

As shown in Figure 5-3(a-3), before the end of the time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, the main display device 131 displays a remaining number image GJ, which is an image that notifies the remaining number of plays (corresponding to the number of plays "M1" / "M2") that can be played in time-saving game state 1, etc. Furthermore, the remaining number image GJ is displayed when the number of plays that can be played falls below a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and each time a play in time-saving game state 1, etc. ends (stopped by a losing symbol, etc.), the count is reduced by "1" and then notified. At this time, since the main display device 131 is in the time-saving game state 1, the following are displayed as described above (see Figure 5-1(d)): the Mode D background image, the remaining spins image JK, the performance symbols 50a (variation display or stop display), the special symbols TZ, the reserved spins display area (first reserved spins display area SA, second reserved spins display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved spins icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. The remaining spins image GJ is displayed prominently in front of the performance symbols 50a, approximately in the center of the main display device 131. Note that in the final spin of time-saving game state 1, etc., the remaining spins image GJ may be displayed in the form of "LAST". Furthermore, although the remaining spins image GJ is displayed before the end of time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, it may also be displayed in a similar manner before the end of time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4.

As shown in Figure 5-3(b), before and after transitioning to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, the display effects are executed in the order of jackpot effect → time-saving entry effect → time-saving effect. Here, time th1 is the time when the round period in the jackpot game ends and the ending period begins, and time th2 is the time when the ending period ends. First, during the round period of the jackpot game before time th1, the effect symbols 50a, entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are hidden, and the jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot effect is displayed, and the jackpot effect, which consists of a predetermined type of video, is executed. Next, during the period from time th1 to time th2, the effect symbols 50a are hidden, and the entry background image is displayed, and the time-saving entry effect is executed such that the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are displayed (see Figures 5-3(a-1) and (a-2)). However, during the period in question, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are not displayed simultaneously. For example, only the prevention image CH is displayed for a predetermined period from the start, and then, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the prevention image CH is hidden and replaced by the warning image nh. During the period of the first time-saving game state after the time-saving th2, the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are hidden, and a time-saving background image such as the Mode D background is displayed. At the same time, the variation display by the fourth type of performance symbol 50a is displayed, and a time-saving performance consisting of a predetermined type of video is executed. The period during which the prevention image CH and warning image nh are displayed is not limited to the period described above, but may be various periods. For example, the warning image nh may also be displayed for at least a portion of the period during which the prevention image CH is displayed. In addition, the prevention image CH and warning image nh may be displayed at the start of the execution of the time-saving performance or immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state. Furthermore, during the period from time th1 to th2, the main display device 131 may, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period, display the Mode D background image, the fourth type of performance symbols 50a, etc., and then display a right-hand play start image, such as "Please start playing to the right!", which is large enough to cover almost all of the three performance symbols 50a. Additionally, when the right-hand play start image is displayed, an audio instructing the player to start playing to the right may also be output.

As shown in Figure 5-4(a-1), before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, the main display device 131 displays an accumulated count image AK, which is an image that notifies the cumulative number of games played in the normal game state, etc. (corresponding to the accumulated count "n"). The accumulated count image AK also notifies the number of games remaining until transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, and is displayed when the accumulated count reaches a predetermined number (for example, 795 times), and each time a game in the normal game state, etc. ends (stopped with a losing symbol, etc.), the count is reduced by "1" and then notified. At this time, since the game is in a normal game state, the main display device 131 displays the Mode A background image, the cumulative count image RK, the performance symbols 50a (variation display or stop display), the special symbols TZ, the number of reserved symbols display area (first reserved symbol display area SA, second reserved symbol display area SB), the icon display area (first reserved symbol icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc., as described above (see Figure 5-1(a)). The cumulative count image AK is displayed prominently in front of the performance symbols 50a, approximately in the center of the main display device 131. The cumulative count image AK is displayed immediately after the start of the game and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a time shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time). With this display time for the cumulative count image AK, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the cumulative count image AK displayed in the game being displayed again in the next game. Furthermore, the cumulative count image AK may display "LAST" during the game immediately preceding the transition to the time-saving game state 3, or it may also display phrases that suggest an upcoming transition to the time-saving game state 3, such as "Two more turns until Chance Time."

As shown in Figure 5-4(a-2), when the normal game state ends and the game transitions to the time-saving game state 3, a time-saving game state entry animation is performed to indicate that the time-saving game state 3 is about to begin. In the time-saving game state 3 entry animation, the main display device 131 displays, for example, an entry background image corresponding to the time-saving game state entry animation as a background image, as well as an entry image CT, which is an image that notifies the player that the game is transitioning to the time-saving game state 3. At this time, the main display device 131 displays the following in order to transition to the time-saving game state 3: the fourth type of performance symbol 50a (variation display or stop display), the right-hand shooting image MG, the special symbol TZ, the number of reserved balls display area (first reserved balls display area SA, second reserved balls display area SB), the icon display area (first reserved ball icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. The entry image CT is displayed largely in front of the main display device 131, overlapping the performance symbol 50a, approximately in the center of the main display device 131. While the entry image CT is displayed during the time-saving game state 3 transition, it may also be displayed in a similar manner during the time-saving game state 4 transition.

As shown in Figure 5-4(b-1), before and after the transition to the time-saving game state 3, the display effects are executed in the order of normal game effects → time-saving game entry effects → time-saving game effects, as shown in Figure 5-4(a-1) above. Here, time ti1 is the time when the game transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3. First, in the normal game state before time ti1, the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed, and the first type of effect symbol 50a (variation display or stop display), cumulative count image AK (for a predetermined period as described above), cumulative count image RK, special symbol TZ, reserved count display area (first reserved count display area SA, second reserved count display area SB), icon display area (first reserved icon display area 50b, said icon display area 50c), said icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, during the period from time ti1 onward, the time-saving mode entry sequence is performed first, and for example, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are hidden, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the entry background image, with the entry image CT, the fourth mode's performance symbols 50a (switched from the first mode, etc.), special symbols TZ, the number of reserved symbols display area (first number of reserved symbols display area SA, second number of reserved symbols display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. then, the time-saving mode entry sequence ends, and the time-saving mode sequence is performed, and for example, the prevention image CH and warning image nh remain hidden, the entry image CT is hidden, and the background image changes from the entry background image to the time-saving mode background image (mode F background), with the fourth mode's performance symbols 50a, special symbols TZ,
The following are displayed: the number of reserved balls display area (first number of reserved balls display area SA, second number of reserved balls display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. The time-saving mode entry animation is performed regardless of whether the first game after transitioning to time-saving game state 3 is executed (whether there are reserved balls when transitioning to time-saving game state 3). Furthermore, if there are reserved balls when transitioning to time-saving game state 3, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable state at the time of the transition, as well as a variable display of the animation symbol 50a, the background image of the time-saving mode animation may be set to the time-saving background image (mode F background). In addition, in the time-saving mode entry animation, the main display device 131 may, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period, display the mode D background image, the fourth type of animation symbol 50a, etc., and then display a right-hand play start image that suggests starting right-hand play, such as "Please start right-hand play!", in a size that covers almost all of the three animation symbols 50a. Furthermore, when the image indicating the start of right-handed play is displayed, an audio message instructing the player to begin right-handed play may also be output.

Furthermore, in the display of the first special symbol indicator 120 during the transition to the time-saving game state 3 as described above (the display of the game's fluctuations when the cumulative count "n" becomes "0"), the fluctuation time is neither longer nor shorter than usual, and no special fluctuation time is set specifically for the transition to time-saving game state 3. On the other hand, after transitioning to time-saving game state 3, a special fluctuation time may be set for the game in time-saving game state 3, such as a fluctuation time that is longer or shorter than usual for the second special symbol indicator 122. Specifically, when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 after RAM clear processing, no special fluctuation time may be set for time-saving game state 3, while when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 after a jackpot state, a special fluctuation time may be set for time-saving game state 3.

As shown in Figure 5-4(b-2), before and after the transition to the time-saving game state 4, the display effects are executed in the following order: normal gameplay effect (time-saving transition effect) where the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed → time-saving entry effect → time-saving gameplay effect. Here, time tj1 is the point in time when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the previous game, and the game transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 4. First, in the normal game state before time tj1, the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed, and the effect symbols 50a of the first form, etc. (variation display, stop display, stop display with time-saving symbols), cumulative count image RK, special symbol TZ, reserve count display area (first reserve count display area SA, second reserve count display area SB), icon display area (first reserve icon display area 50b, said icon display area 50c), said icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, during the period from time tj1 onward, a time-saving mode entry sequence is performed first. For example, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are hidden, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the entry background image. Then, the entry image CT, the fourth mode's sequence symbols 50a (switched from the first mode, etc.), special symbols TZ, the number of reserved symbols display area (first number of reserved symbols display area SA, second number of reserved symbols display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved symbol icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Then, when the time-saving mode entry sequence ends, the time-saving mode sequence is executed. For example, the prevention image CH and warning image nh remain hidden, the entry image CT is hidden, and the background image changes from the entry background image to the time-saving mode background image (mode F background). In this state, the fourth type of sequence symbols 50a, special symbols TZ, the number of reserved symbols display area (first number of reserved symbols display area SA, second number of reserved symbols display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved symbol icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc., are displayed. The time-saving mode entry sequence is executed regardless of whether the first game after transitioning to time-saving mode 4 is executed (whether there are reserved symbols at the time of transitioning to time-saving mode 4). Furthermore, if there are reserved symbols at the time of transitioning to time-saving mode 4, and the special symbols are displayed in a variable state at the time of transition, and the sequence symbols 50a are also displayed in a variable state, the background image of the time-saving mode sequence may be the time-saving mode background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving mode entry sequence, the main display device 131 may, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period, display the Mode D background image, the fourth type of performance symbol 50a, etc., and then display a right-hand play start image, such as "Please start playing to the right!", which is large enough to cover almost all of the three performance symbols 50a. Additionally, when the right-hand play start image is displayed, an audio instructing the player to start playing to the right may also be output.

Furthermore, in the normal gameplay sequence before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 (see Figure 5-4 (a-1)), the icon display area is displayed even while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed, allowing the display animation for the reserve change to be executed. Here, for example, the execution of the reserve change display animation may be restricted while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed during the normal gameplay sequence before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3. In such a normal gameplay sequence before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of games until transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 by looking at the cumulative count image AK, without having to pay attention to the reserve change animation. Alternatively, in the normal gameplay sequence before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 where the execution of the reserve change display animation is restricted while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed, only the cumulative count image JK may be displayed instead. Even in such a normal gameplay sequence before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of games until transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 by looking at the cumulative count image JK, without having to pay attention to the reserve change animation.

Here, we compare the time-saving game state entry animations when transitioning to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state entry animations when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4. First, in the time-saving game state entry animation when transitioning to time-saving game state 1, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are displayed, but the performance symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, and the reserve count display area are hidden. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state entry animation when transitioning to time-saving game state 3, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are hidden, but the performance symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, and the reserve count display area are displayed. This is because, in the time-saving game state entry animation when transitioning to time-saving game state 1, etc., which is performed during the ending period of a jackpot game, the player does not need to check the result of the jackpot determination using the performance symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, and the reserve count display area, and instead the need for warnings from the prevention image CH and warning image nh is increased. On the other hand, during the transition to the time-saving game state 3, which occurs outside the ending period of a jackpot game, the player does not need to be alerted by the prevention image CH and warning image nh, and instead has a greater need to confirm the jackpot result using the performance symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, and the reserve count display area. Furthermore, by hiding the prevention image CH and warning image nh, which are of low importance to the player, during the transition to the time-saving game state 3, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking important information due to the excessive image information displayed on the main display device 131. Additionally, during the transition to the time-saving game state 3, the performance symbol 50a may be hidden, but the special symbol TZ may be displayed. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking important information due to the excessive image information displayed on the main display device 131.

Furthermore, while the above-mentioned transition to time-saving game states 1-4 primarily involved the display of a transition image (CT) to allow players to recognize the transition, the system is not limited to this configuration and may employ various other methods as long as the player can recognize the transition. For example, the special symbol TZ could always be displayed during the transition to any of the time-saving game states 1-4. More specifically, the transition to time-saving game state 1 or 2 would display a stop indicator of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the winning symbol, the transition to time-saving game state 3 would display a stop indicator of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the losing symbol, and the transition to time-saving game state 4 would display a stop indicator of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the time-saving symbol. In this configuration, players can easily recognize the type of time-saving game state they have transitioned to based on the display of the special symbol TZ during the transition to time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned time-saving game state 3 transition entry animation, the entry image CT was displayed so as to cover the performance symbol 50a while the performance symbol 50a, right-hand play image MG, special symbol TZ, icon display area, and the icon TI were displayed. However, it is also acceptable to display the entry image CT with only the performance symbol 50a hidden from these displayed images. In such an arrangement, the difference between the time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2 transition entry animation (see Figure 5-3 (a-1), etc.) where the special symbol TZ and icon display area are not displayed, and the time-saving game state 3 transition entry animation, makes it easier for the player to recognize the type of time-saving game state to which they have transitioned. Also, in each of the above-mentioned time-saving game state 1 to 4 transition entry animations, any arrangement is acceptable as long as it makes it easy for the player to recognize the type of time-saving game state. For example, in the time-saving game state 3 transition sequence, at least one element from the following may be displayed: the animation symbol 50a, the right-hand shooting image MG, the special symbol TZ, the icon display area, the icon TI, etc. Similarly, in the time-saving game state 4 transition sequence, different elements may be displayed compared to those shown in time-saving game state 3. In such configurations, although the entry image CT is displayed in the time-saving game state transition sequence for each time-saving game state, the elements displayed other than the entry image CT will differ, allowing the player to easily recognize the type of time-saving game state after the transition.

As shown in Figure 5-5(a), at the end of the time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, the main display device 131 displays a result image GP, which is an image that displays information about the profits obtained during the period such as the jackpot game state and time-saving game state 1. The result image GP also displays the number of jackpot games (for example, 3 times) and the total number of prize balls paid out during the period from the first jackpot win to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (advantageous period). At this time, the main display device 131 will display the result image GP, which will cover the performance symbols 50a, thus hiding them. The result background image will then be displayed, along with the result image GP, the right-hand shooting image MG, the special symbol TZ, the reserve count display area (first reserve count display area SA, second reserve count display area SB), the icon display area (second reserve icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. Note that the total number of prize balls in the result image GP includes prize balls awarded for winning into the first large prize pocket 117 and other large prize pockets, but does not include prize balls dispensed for winning into the first start pocket 112 and other start pockets, or general prize pockets. However, the total number of prize balls in the result image GP may include prize balls dispensed for winning into general prize pockets.

As shown in Figure 5-5(b-1), at the end of the time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, the game normally transitions from time-saving game state 1, etc., to a low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state). Here, time tk1 is the time when the last game of time-saving game state 1, etc. (the game that was judged as a miss in the jackpot judgment) begins, time tk2 is the time when the end of the last game is indicated (the performance symbol 50a temporarily stops with a miss symbol), and time tk3 is the time when time-saving game state 1, etc. ends and the game transitions to a low probability non-time-saving game state. First, at time tk1, the result image GP is not displayed, and the time-saving game state 1 performance, etc., including the variation display by the performance symbol 50a of the fourth form, is displayed. Next, at time tk2, the result image GP is displayed as described above. Then, at time tk3, the result image GP is hidden, and a left-handed play start image, suggesting the start of left-handed play with a message like "Please return to left-handed play!", is displayed, large enough to cover almost all of the three performance symbols 50a, along with normal gameplay effects such as the normal game state. In other words, the result image GP is displayed from the middle of the last game in time-saving game state 1 until its end. Furthermore, the left-handed play start image is displayed after transitioning from time-saving game state 1, etc., to a low-probability non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the first game is executed or not (regardless of the number of reserved balls). In addition, when the left-handed play start image is displayed, an audio message instructing the player to start left-handed play may also be output.

As shown in Figures 5-5 (b-2) and (b-3), at the end of the time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4, the game normally transitions from time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4 to the low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state). Here, time tl is the point in time when time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4 ends and the game transitions to the low probability non-time-saving game state. Around time tl, the result image GP is not displayed, so in time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4, the left-hand shooting start image is displayed at the end, but the result image GP is not displayed. Also, as described above, the left-hand shooting start image is displayed after the transition from time-saving game state 3, etc. to the low probability non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the first game is executed or not (regardless of the number of reserved balls). In addition, when the left-hand shooting start image is displayed, an audio instructing the player to start playing left-hand may also be output. Here, unlike Time-Saving Game State 1, Time-Saving Game State 3 and Time-Saving Game State 4 are not states transitioned to after a jackpot game. Therefore, during Time-Saving Game State 3 and Time-Saving Game State 4, no jackpots such as the first jackpot winning slot 117 are entered. Consequently, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP will be "0," and the total number of prize balls will be "0." In other words, at the end of Time-Saving Game State 3 and Time-Saving Game State 4, the result image GP showing "0" jackpot games and "0" prize balls is not displayed. This prevents the potential for discouragement of the player from continuing the game, which could occur if such a result image GP were displayed. Furthermore, at the end of Time-Saving Game State 3 and Time-Saving Game State 4, the main display device 131 may display an image such as "Time-Saving Game Ended" to indicate the end of Time-Saving Game State 3, etc.

Furthermore, although the result image GP is not displayed at the end of the above-mentioned time-saving game states 3 and 4, it may be displayed. In this way, when the result image GP is displayed at the end of time-saving game states 3 and 4, showing that the number of big wins is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0", the player can easily recognize that time-saving game state 3, etc. has ended. Also, although the result image GP displayed at the end of time-saving game state 1, etc. is displayed for a predetermined period as described above, this predetermined period may be any other period. For example, the result image GP may be displayed starting at the end of the last game in time-saving game states (time-saving game states 1 to 4), and then the result image GP may be hidden after the second reserve count is reduced to "0" and the fluctuation display on the second special symbol display 122 stops. In other words, after transitioning to a low-probability, non-time-saving game state, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variation display on the first special symbol display unit 120 becomes available. Furthermore, although the left-hand shooting start image described above is displayed regardless of whether the first game in the low-probability, non-time-saving game state is executed, it is not limited to this configuration and various other configurations are possible. For example, on the condition that the first game after transitioning from a time-saving game state (time-saving game states 1-4) to a low-probability, non-time-saving game state is executed, the left-hand shooting start image may be displayed along with an audio output instructing the player to start left-hand shooting.

Here, we will explain what happens after the end of the time-saving game state 3, such as when the number of playable rounds "M3" becomes "0" without winning a jackpot during the time-saving game state 3. As mentioned above, during the period from the end of a jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, unless a RAM clear process is performed, the system will only transition to time-saving game state 3 once, and will not transition to time-saving game state 3 more than once. Therefore, for example, after the end of time-saving game state 3, the system may be configured to notify the player that time-saving game state 3 has already ended, and in such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that time-saving game state 3 has ended. Specifically, during the low probability non-time-saving game state after the end of time-saving game state 3, the system may be configured to notify the player that time-saving game state 3 has already ended by displaying a cumulative count image RK displayed on the main display device 131 that exceeds "800 rounds". Furthermore, after the end of the time-saving game state 3, the main display device 131 may display a transition notification image such as "Time-saving 3 completed" to indicate that the game has transitioned to and ended the time-saving game state 3, thereby notifying the user that the time-saving game state 3 has already ended. The cumulative count image RK and the transition notification image displayed after the end of the time-saving game state 3 may be kept on display until a RAM clear process is performed or a jackpot game is played. The cumulative count image RK and the transition notification image displayed after the end of the time-saving game state 3 may also be kept on the main display device 131 even if the power is cut off and then restored while they are being displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the time-saving game state 3, if the power is cut off and then restored, the main display device 131 may display a transition notification image large enough to cover the entire screen, or provide notification by sound or other means. Furthermore, in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state 3, the normal gameplay may be performed using a different presentation mode (for example, a presentation mode specific to the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state 3) than the presentation modes A to C used in the normal game state before transitioning to the time-saving game state 3. This configuration prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state 3.

[Overview of the display mode on the main display device 131 after the fluctuation stops]
Referring to Figures 6-1 and 6-2, an overview of the changes in the state of the gaming machine 100 after the fluctuations stop and the display patterns of the main display device 131 will be explained. Figure 6-1 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the changes in the state of the gaming machine 100 after the fluctuations stop and the display patterns of the main display device 131. Figure 6-2 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in Figure 6-1, when the special symbol display stops and, for example, the number of reserved balls such as the first reserved ball is "0" and no game balls enter the first start opening 112, the system enters a customer waiting state, and the demo waiting period B1 and customer waiting demo period B2 alternate, repeating as follows: demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds) → second customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) →... Demo waiting period B1 is the period during which the three performance symbols 50a are displayed in a stopped state on the main display device 131, and is the period during which the system is in a waiting state for the display of the customer waiting demo performance, which will be described later. Customer waiting demo period B2 is the period during which the customer waiting demo performance is displayed on the main display device 131. Note that the duration of the demo waiting period B1 is such that the first demo waiting period B1 is longer than the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1, while the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1 are of the same length. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo period B2 is the same length for both the first customer waiting demo period B2 and subsequent customer waiting demo periods B2.

As shown in Figure 6-1(a), first, during the variation of the special symbol, the main display device 131 displays a background image, such as a Mode A background image, which scrolls horizontally, and in front of it, two of the three performance symbols 50a are displayed stationary while one performance symbol 50a is displayed scrolling. In front of the background image, a first reserve icon display area 50b is displayed, showing the first reserve icon HI corresponding to the first reserve number, and an icon display area 50c is displayed, showing an image of the icon TI which is an animation that swings from side to side. Furthermore, in front of the background image, a first reserve number display area SA and a second reserve number display area SB are displayed, showing numbers corresponding to the first and second reserve numbers, respectively, and the special symbol TZ is displayed scrolling.

As shown in Figure 6-1(b), during the demo standby period B1, the main display device 131 displays a background image that scrolls horizontally, such as a Mode A background image, and three stopped performance symbols 50a in front of it. In front of the background image, the first hold icon display area 50b, where the first hold icon HI is not displayed, and the icon display area 50c, where the image of the icon TI is not displayed, are displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB, indicating that the first and second hold numbers are "0", are displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed stopped at a number combination corresponding to the three stopped performance symbols 50a. Finally, in front of the background image and the three performance symbols 50a, a sound adjustment image OC is displayed, suggesting that the volume of the BGM, etc., can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136.

As shown in Figure 6-1(c), during the customer waiting demo period B2, the main display device 131 displays the customer waiting demo animation described later. Prior to the display of the customer waiting demo animation, the first and second reserved number display areas SA and SB are displayed, indicating that the first and second reserved number are "0". Note that during the customer waiting demo period B2, the three animation symbols 50a, the first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the special symbol TZ, which were displayed during the demo waiting period B1, are not displayed on the main display device 131. Alternatively, during the customer waiting demo period B2 (while the customer waiting demo animation is displayed), the special symbol TZ may also be displayed along with the first and second reserved number display areas SA and SB on the main display device 131.

Referring to Figure 6-2, the display configuration of the customer waiting demo will now be explained. The customer waiting demo (80 seconds) consists of displays such as: "Variable effect demo (25 seconds)" → "Character introduction (25 seconds)" → "Machine name (5 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent excessive gambling (10 seconds)" → "Movable mechanism demo (10 seconds)," and these are displayed in this order. In other words, during the customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds), the main display device 131 will display these contents.

As shown in Figure 6-2(a), the "variation effect demo" in the customer waiting demo is a type of demo in which various variation effects are displayed on the main display device 131 while the special symbols are changing. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variation effects such as the SPSP Reach Revival effect, SPSP Reach effect, SP Reach effect, pseudo-consecutive effect, and normal Reach effect are displayed in order of the likelihood of a big win. Furthermore, in this "variation effect demo," when each variation effect is displayed, text explaining the content of the effect and its likelihood of winning may be added.

As shown in Figure 6-2(b), the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance that displays multiple characters that are displayed during various variation performances, and multiple characters that are part of the composition of the performance symbols 50a. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a character introduction background, which includes an image that mimics a stage, is scrolled and displayed, and in front of the background image, character displays CP1 to CP3 are displayed, which consist of images of each character in action and text displays of each character's name. Furthermore, character display CP1 includes characters that are displayed in variation performances with a high expectation level, such as the SPSP reach performance, character display CP2 includes characters that are displayed in variation performances with a relatively high expectation level, such as the SP reach performance, and character display CP1 includes characters that are displayed in variation performances such as the normal reach performance. During the display of the "character introduction," character display CP1 is displayed for a longer time than the other character displays CP2 and CP3. In other words, during the display of "Character Introduction," Character Display CP1 will be displayed at a higher rate than Character Display CP2 and CP3. Furthermore, Character Display CP1 to CP3 may be presented as animations in which the image and name text of each character operate in various different ways.

As shown in Figure 6-2(c), the "machine name" in the customer waiting demo is a display of the machine name KH, which indicates the machine name of the gaming machine 100. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a machine name background composed of a white and blue gradient is scrolled, and the machine name KH suddenly appears in front of the background image. Now, let's explain the changes in the display during the 5-second display time of the "machine name." During the 5-second display time of the "machine name," the main display device 131 performs changes in the display mode, from the start of displaying the machine name KH (switching from the "character introduction" display) to the completion of the display (for example, 1 second), and then the machine name KH becomes invisible.

As shown in Figure 6-2(d), the "manufacturer name" in the customer waiting demo is a display of the manufacturer name MH, which shows the name of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine 100. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white manufacturer name background is displayed as the background image, and the frame portion of the manufacturer name MH suddenly appears in front of the background image, while the parts "Bikkuri.", "Co., Ltd.", and "logo mark" appear sequentially from left to right. Alternatively, the shading of "Bikkuri. Co., Ltd. (logo mark)" may gradually increase from a light state to a darker state. Now, let's explain the changes in the display pattern during the 5-second display time of the "manufacturer name". During the 5-second display time of the "manufacturer name", the main display device 131 performs changes in the display pattern, from the start of displaying the manufacturer name MH (switching from the "model name" display) to the completion of the display (for example, 3 seconds), and then the manufacturer name MH becomes invisible.

As shown in Figure 6-2(e), the "warning to prevent excessive gambling" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which a warning display NH consisting of text that warns the player against excessive gambling on the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white warning background is displayed as the background image, and in front of the background image, the warning display NH is displayed in order from the top, consisting of a first section NB1 displayed as the top section, a second section NB2 displayed below the first section NB1, and a third section NB3 displayed below the second section NB2. Furthermore, the first section NB1 consists of a red frame and red text within the frame that reads, "Be careful not to get addicted." The second section NB2 consists of a black frame and black text within the frame that reads, "Pachinko and pachislot are..." The third section NB3 consists of a black frame and black text within the frame that reads, "It is a game to be enjoyed in moderation."

As shown in Figure 6-2(f), the "movable mechanism demonstration" in the customer waiting demo is a performance in which movable mechanisms such as the upper mechanism unit 154 and the lower mechanism unit 156 operate in the same manner as the operation patterns during various variation performances. Specifically, for example, the main display device 131 displays a movable mechanism demonstration background composed of radial lines as a background image, and the lower mechanism unit 156 moves to a position in front of the background image where it operates in the SPSP reach performance, etc., and operates in the same manner as the SPSP reach performance, etc. (a manner that combines movement, etc., with lighting effects using LEDs, etc.). Note that in the "movable mechanism demonstration," various performances may be performed not only by the lower mechanism unit 156, but also by the upper mechanism unit 154 and the light guide panel unit 181.

In the aforementioned waiting state, the second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds), which is the period from the stop of reel spinning to the start of the first demo performance, is shorter than the second demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds). In such a waiting state, since players may continue playing immediately after the reel spinning stops, extending the time until the start of the demo performance reduces the inconvenience and discomfort to players caused by the demo performance immediately after the reel spinning stops, compared to starting the demo performance immediately after the reel spinning stops. On the other hand, during the waiting state, shortening the interval between the display of multiple demo performances and increasing the frequency of the demo performances can appeal to players and improve the entertainment value of the performances during the waiting state. Furthermore, as a configuration that effectively promotes gameplay through frequently displayed customer-waiting demo sequences, it is also possible to have a configuration where, after the first customer-waiting demo period B2 has elapsed (after the first customer-waiting demo sequence is displayed), the customer-waiting demo period B2 is executed consecutively without going through the second demo waiting period B1, such as: Demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → Customer-waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → Second customer-waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) →… In this configuration, since two customer-waiting demo sequences are displayed consecutively during the customer-waiting state, the content of the customer-waiting demo sequences can be more effectively imprinted on the player, and, as described above, a strong promotion of the game can be achieved.

According to the customer-waiting demo presentation described above, during the "Character Introduction" display, Character Display CP1 is displayed for a longer time and at a higher rate than Character Display CP2 and CP3. In such a customer-waiting demo presentation, characters associated with high-probability variation events (e.g., Character Display CP1) are displayed for a longer time and at a higher rate. Therefore, players watching the customer-waiting demo presentation can easily recognize characters that are likely to appear during high-probability variation events.

According to the customer-waiting demo presentation described above, the display time for the "warning against excessive gambling" (10 seconds) is longer than the display time for the "machine name" (5 seconds). Such a customer-waiting demo presentation allows for the effective delivery of the "warning against excessive gambling," which is more important than information about the machine name.

According to the customer-waiting demo presentation described above, the "movable mechanism demonstration" involves moving the movable mechanism to its advance position during the variation animation and simultaneously executing a demonstration of the movable mechanism. This type of customer-waiting demo presentation is more effective in appealing to players compared to conventional gaming machines where the movable mechanism is not activated during the customer-waiting demo.

As described above, the customer waiting demo display shows the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ on the main display device 131. Therefore, players can easily recognize not only the current reserved number (that the reserved number is "0") but also that the display is not currently changing. In particular, during the customer waiting demo display, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes in various ways (Figures 6-2(a) to (f)), which can lead players to mistakenly believe that they are in a changing display sequence even though they are in the customer waiting demo period B2. The display of the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ can prevent such misunderstandings.

According to the customer-waiting demo presentation described above, the time from the start to the end of displaying the manufacturer name (MH) can be made longer than the time from the start to the end of displaying the machine name (KH) in the "machine name" section. With such a customer-waiting demo presentation, information about the manufacturer name, which is less likely to be recognized by the player at the start of the game, can be made to stand out more strongly to the player than information about the machine name, which is more likely to be recognized by the player at the start of the game or during the game. It should be noted that there may be various ways in which information about the manufacturer name can be made to stand out more strongly to the player than information about the machine name. For example, in the customer-waiting demo presentation described above, the display time for the manufacturer name may be longer than the display time for the machine name, such as "machine name (3 seconds)" and "manufacturer name (5 seconds)". Specifically, during the 3-second display time for the "model name," the main display device 131 performs a change in display mode, from the start of displaying the model name display KH (switching from the "character introduction" display) to the completion of the display (for example, 1 second), and then the model name display KH becomes hidden. On the other hand, during the 5-second display time for the "manufacturer name," the same applies as described above. In other words, not only is the display time of the manufacturer name display MH for the "manufacturer name" longer than the display time of the model name display KH for the "model name," but the time from the completion of displaying the manufacturer name display MH for the "manufacturer name" to the time from the completion of displaying the model name display KH to the time from the completion of displaying the "manufacturer name" completion of displaying the "manufacturer name" to the completion of displaying the "manufacturer name."

[Specific example 1 of a situation where the game enters a waiting state after the variation animation in normal gameplay has finished.]
Using Figures 7-1 to 7-3, we will explain a specific example of the case where the variation animation in the normal game state ends and the game transitions to a demo waiting period → customer waiting demo period. Figure 7-1 is a timing chart (1) for when the variation animation in the normal game state ends and the game transitions to a customer waiting state, and Figures 7-2 and 7-3 are diagrams showing examples of animations at various timings in Figure 7-1. Note that this explanation will focus on the case of animation mode A, but the explanations for animation modes B and C are basically the same and will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 7-1, at timing T0, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 120 with the first reserve count at "0". At this time, the first special symbol reserve indicator 123 and the first reserve count display area SA are showing "0". Also, in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, one of the three performance symbols 50a, the central one, and the three special symbols TZ are being updated and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Furthermore, the first reserve icon display area 50b and the corresponding icon display area 50c are displayed; although the reserve icon HI is not displayed in the first reserve icon display area 50b, the icon TI in its normal display mode is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 50c. Additionally, the variation BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A is being output audibly (see Figure 7-2(a)).

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a, which was scrolling (updating) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, the characters of the three performance symbols 50a perform a pre-stop performance action (a pre-stop action of shaking their heads), and the three performance symbols 50a temporarily stop at a losing outcome ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 120. Also, the variation BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A is continuously output audibly (see Figure 7-2(b)).

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c disappearing begins, and the stop display of the performance symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") begins. Then, at timing T4, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the animation of the icon TI disappearing, the animation of the icon TI disappearing ends. Furthermore, the variable BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A continues to be audibly output (see Figure 7-2(c)).

Then, at timing T5, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, a command to specify a customer waiting state is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the system enters a demo waiting period in which the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. At this time, the background image is the same Mode A background image as when the first special symbol display 120 is displaying a variation, and it is sufficient that some BGM is continuously output. For example, the variation BGM 1, which is the same as before the first special symbol display 120 stopped displaying, may be continuously output as audible, or a predetermined BGM (e.g., BGM 8) that is different from the one before the first special symbol display 120 stopped displaying and corresponds to the demo waiting period (customer waiting state) may be started to be output. Here, it is assumed that the variation BGM 6, which is the same as before the first special symbol display 120 stopped displaying, is continuously output as audible (see Figure 7-2(d)).

Next, at timing T6, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 showed a stop, the audible variable BGM 1 stops, resulting in silence (see Figure 7-2(e)). During the period from T4 to T6, when the variable BGM 1 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM 1 can be changed in response to the player's operation of the performance control stick 136, and the output volume setting can also be changed.

Next, at timing T7, after a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 stopped, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the performance symbol 50a, indicating that the volume of the variable BGM, etc., can be adjusted by operating the performance control stick 136 (see Figure 7-2(f)). The sound adjustment display OC shows the currently set volume level (volume gauge) and indicates the direction of operation for the performance control stick 136. In response to the operation of the performance control stick 136, the volume level displayed (volume gauge) changes, and the output volume level setting is also changed.

Next, at timing T8, when the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the receipt of the customer waiting state specification command, the main control board 300 sends a customer waiting demo performance start command to the performance control board 320, and a customer waiting demo performance lasting a predetermined period (80 seconds) begins. Specifically, in front of the performance symbol 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), a fade-in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) of the customer waiting demo image begins for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and the fade-out (gradually becoming transparent and disappearing from an opaque state) of the performance symbol 50a, the first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ begins. In other words, the three performance symbols 50a, the first hold icon display area 50b, the said icon display area 50c, the Mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ will be displayed in a way that at least a portion of them overlap during the disappearance display and the appearance display where the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) gradually appears. Furthermore, since the hold display areas (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they will not be obscured (unobstructed) by the customer waiting demo image (see Figure 7-3(g)).

Then, after timing T8, once the fade-in of the waiting demo image is complete, the performance symbols 50a, etc., become invisible (invisible), and the waiting demo sequence begins in the following order: "Variable Performance Demo (20 seconds)" → "Character Introduction (20 seconds)" → "Machine Name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer Name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to Prevent Addiction (10 seconds)" → "Movable Mechanism Demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 7-3(h)). In other words, if there are no winning balls in the waiting state, after the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the waiting state specification command, the waiting demo sequence to encourage the player to play begins. Furthermore, if there are no winning balls during the execution of the waiting demo sequence, the waiting demo sequence for a predetermined time (80 seconds) will be displayed.

Referring to Figure 7-3(i), we will now explain the case where, during the period T5-T6, the player changes the volume of the variable BGM 1 by operating the performance control stick 136.

As shown in Figure 7-3(i), when the performance control stick 136 is operated during the period T5 to T6 while the variable BGM 1 is being output, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed on the main display device 131 (the displayed sound adjustment display OC will end if the performance control stick 136 is not operated for a predetermined period (2 seconds)). At the same time, the sound output device 331 outputs predetermined sound effects and audio sounds for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, although the predetermined sound effects and audio sounds accompanying the start of the display of the sound adjustment display OC are output at a timing corresponding to the timing when the display of the sound adjustment display OC starts (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), the output will end even if it is not at a timing corresponding to the timing when the display of the sound adjustment display OC ends (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, at a timing before the display of the sound adjustment display OC ends). Furthermore, based on the operation of the performance control stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, the volume of the variable BGM 1 changes, and the volume level display (volume gauge) on the sound adjustment display OC changes, thereby changing the volume setting of the output BGM, etc. In addition, in conjunction with the display of the volume gauge change based on the operation of the performance control stick 136, a predetermined listening sound at the changed volume level is output from the audio output device 331 for a certain period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined listening sound is output at a timing corresponding to the timing when the display of the volume gauge change based on the operation of the performance control stick 136 begins (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), but the output ends even if it is not at a timing corresponding to the timing when the display of the volume gauge change is completed (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, before the display of the volume gauge change is completed).

Referring to Figures 7-3 (j-1) and (j-2), the case in which menu images MN1a and MN1b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while in customer waiting state will be explained. As described above, in customer waiting state, the performance control board 320, which receives the customer waiting state specification command, sets the validity period for operating the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button). When the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the validity period, a predetermined signal based on the operation of the sword handle button detected by the sword handle button detection switch 137 is transmitted to the performance control board 320, and the lamp control board 340 and the button drive device vibrate the sword handle unit 135 in a predetermined manner based on the predetermined signal from the performance control board 320. In addition, when the display of menu images MN1a, etc., starts based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135, or when the manner changes due to the operation of the sword handle unit 135 while the menu images MN1a, etc., are being displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output from the sound output device 331 for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined sound effect is output at a timing corresponding to the start of displaying the menu image MN1a, etc., or the change in its appearance, based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135 (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131). However, the output ends even if it is not at a timing corresponding to the completion of displaying the menu image MN1a, etc., or the change in its appearance (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, at a timing before the completion of displaying the menu image MN1a, etc., or the change in its appearance).

As shown in Figure 7-3(j-1), for example, if the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the operation validity period in the customer waiting state while the "Character Introduction" is displayed, the menu image MN1a will be displayed in front of the "Character Introduction" display. The menu image MN1a displays the "Machine Description" tag, the "Performance Customization" tag, and the "Pachi Log" tag, and the user can select and confirm one of these tags depending on the operation of the performance operation stick 136. If the "Machine Description" tag is selected and confirmed, an explanation of the game flow and features of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. If the "Pachi Log" tag is selected and confirmed, data related to the game results of the gaming machine 100, such as the number of jackpots for today and yesterday, is displayed. The operation validity period is set to continue throughout the customer waiting state, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN1a is displayed, the menu image MN1a will disappear.

As shown in Figure 7-3 (j-2), when "Performance Customization" is selected and confirmed while menu image MN1a is displayed, menu image MN1b is displayed. Menu image MN1b displays the text "Favorite Character Selection" along with tags for multiple character names that can be selected and confirmed according to the operation of the performance control stick 136. For example, if a character name tag is selected in menu image MN1b, when the performance symbol 50a containing the selected character is displayed during gameplay, the text "Favorite Character" will be added to the performance symbol 50a. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while menu image MN1b is displayed, menu image MN1b disappears.

In the aforementioned waiting state, the display time of the waiting demo (80 seconds) is longer than the time (30 seconds) between the stop of reel spinning and the cessation of the reel spinning background music (BGM) output. In such a waiting state, there is a high probability that the player will continue playing immediately after the reel spinning stops, so continuing to output the BGM can encourage them to continue playing. Furthermore, because the duration of the BGM output after the reel spinning stops is shorter than the display time of the waiting demo, it is possible to prevent discomfort to players of other nearby gaming machines caused by excessively long BGM output after the reel spinning stops, and the extended display of the waiting demo can also appeal to players of other nearby gaming machines.

In the aforementioned waiting state, the time from when the sound adjustment indicator OC is displayed until the waiting demo animation is displayed (80 or 60 seconds) is longer than the time from when the reel stops to when the sound adjustment indicator OC is displayed (40 seconds). In such a waiting state, the sound adjustment indicator OC is not displayed for a predetermined period after the reel stops. This allows players currently playing to focus on the reel animations, while simultaneously reducing the annoyance of the sound adjustment indicator OC for players continuing to play immediately after the reel stops. Furthermore, because the period from when the sound adjustment indicator OC is displayed until the waiting demo animation is displayed is sufficiently long, and the waiting demo animation does not obscure the sound adjustment indicator OC, players in the waiting state can easily recognize that they can adjust the volume of the background music, etc.

In the aforementioned customer waiting state, the timing of the output of predetermined sound effects and predetermined preview sounds in the sound output device 331 can be made earlier than the timing of changes in the display mode on the main display device 131, such as the display of the sound adjustment display OC, the display of changes in the volume gauge, and the display of menu images MN1a, etc. (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131). In such a customer waiting state, for example, if a player is operating the performance operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC, etc. is displayed to adjust to a desired volume, and is also operating the launch handle device 103 in the hope of quickly getting the ball into the first starting opening 112, etc., even if the display of changes by the performance symbols 50a starts before the display of changes in the volume gauge is completed on the main display device 131, causing the player to stop paying attention to the display of changes in the volume gauge, the predetermined preview sound output before the display of changes in the volume gauge is completed can make the player aware that the adjustment to the desired volume has been completed. In other words, the player can recognize that the settings of the gaming machine 100 have been changed in accordance with their actions, without having to visually confirm the completion of the change in the display mode on the main display device 131 based on their actions, through predetermined sound effects or audio sounds.

(Example of a presentation when a prize is won while waiting for customers)
Referring to Figure 7-4, an example of the presentation when a prize is won while the machine is in a waiting state will be explained. Figure 7-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when a prize is won while the machine is in a waiting state. Here, an example of the presentation when a prize is won while the machine is in a waiting state and during the demo waiting period T4 to T6 will be explained.

As shown in Figure 7-4(a), during the customer waiting state and the demo waiting period T4 to T6, as described above, the special symbol's stop time elapses, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a stopped state during the demo waiting period. At this time, the main display device 131 displays a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, similar to the one displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120. The background music (BGM) is the variable BGM 1, similar to the one displayed before the stop on the first special symbol display 120, which continues to be audibly output.

As shown in Figure 7-4(b), when a game ball enters the first starting slot 112, the first reserve count becomes "1," and the first display section of the first reserve icon display area 50b begins displaying the reserve icon HI in its normal display mode. The reserve number in the first reserve count display area SA is updated to "1." Furthermore, the variable BGM 1 continues to be audibly output, and a sound effect indicating a win is output. Additionally, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image continues to be output. In other words, during the demo waiting period in customer waiting mode, when the variable BGM is being output, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 112, the variable BGM that was output before the win continues to be output.

As shown in Figure 7-4(c), when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b is shifted (decreased display, changed display) toward the same icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated to "0" (decreased display). Furthermore, before the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image, the three performance symbols 50a that were previously stopped perform a floating display as a pre-variation action, and the scrolling display of the special symbol TZ begins. Moreover, the variation BGM 1 continues to be audibly output during this time. Note that, for example, if the performance mode is changed at this time, the variation performance may be displayed with the background image, performance symbols 50a, reserved icon HI, the icon TI, variation BGM, etc., in a changed state.

(Example of the effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the display is fluctuating)
Referring to Figure 7-5, an example of the performance when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the display of the special symbols will be explained. Figure 7-5 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the display of the special symbols. Here, we will explain the case when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the SPSP reach performance is set as the variation performance pattern. Furthermore, when the SPSP reach performance (jackpot) is set as the variation performance pattern in the performance control board 320, an operation validity period (10 seconds) in which the operation of the sword handle unit 135 is valid is set. Moreover, the operation validity period (10 seconds) is not limited to the SPSP reach performance (jackpot), but is set for multiple types of variation performance patterns, such as the SPSP reach performance (miss), SP reach performance (jackpot), and pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in Figure 7-5(a), first, at the final stage of the SPSP Reach演出 (SPSP Reach演出), when the SPSP Reach BGM output stops and the decisive performance begins, a prompt image prompting the operation of the sword handle button on the sword handle unit 135 is displayed, and the valid period for operating the sword handle button (10 seconds) begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image SSG resembling the sword handle button is displayed on the main display device 131, the SPSP Reach BGM output stops (is not output), and the sound effect "Press" is output from the sound output device 331. At this time, a reduced performance symbol 50a is displayed in the upper left corner of the main display device 131.

As shown in Figure 7-5(b), if the sword handle button on the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the operation validity period (10 seconds), a success animation indicating that a jackpot game will be executed will be performed. Specifically, the lower mechanism unit 156 moves to the animation position, and multiple light-emitting LEDs on the lower mechanism unit 156 flash. Furthermore, the success image SEF is displayed in front of the SPSP reach background on the main display device 131, and the sound effect "kyuin kyuin" is output from the sound output device 331. In addition, the sword handle unit 135 vibrates due to the button drive mechanism. Then, the reduced animation symbol 50a in the upper left corner of the main display device 131 temporarily stops at "5," resulting in the three animation symbols 50a temporarily stopping at the jackpot outcome ("555"). If the sword handle unit 135 is not operated during the operation validity period, the operation prompt image SSG described above disappears, and the success animation is executed.

As shown in Figure 7-5(c), after the execution period of the SPSP reach animation has elapsed, a pre-stop animation (display of an obscuring image (including the machine name) that obscures the background image and the animation symbol 50a for 0.5 seconds) indicating that the animation symbol 50a will stop is executed. Following this, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes, and the animation symbol 50a returns to its position before the start of the SPSP reach animation and to the first configuration, resulting in a temporarily stopped display. Furthermore, the first hold icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c where the icon TI is displayed are redisplayed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period (for example, until the animation symbol 50a stops).

In the case of variable animations with the aforementioned operation validity period, the operation validity period (10 seconds) set according to the variable animation pattern can be set for multiple types of variable animation patterns. Therefore, it can be set for many more times than the operation validity period set during the waiting state (once), and for a shorter period than the operation validity period set during the waiting state (set throughout the waiting state). With such variable animations, the variable animations with set operation validity periods during the animation increase the player's expectations, and because they can be implemented with many types of variable animation patterns with short operation validity periods, the enjoyment of the variable animations can be enhanced. Furthermore, animations with set operation validity periods during the waiting state can reduce player boredom because they have longer operation validity periods set for fewer times (once), thus enhancing the enjoyment of animations during the waiting state.

[Specific example of when the variation animation ends in the time-saving game state 3 and the game enters a waiting state for customers]
Using Figures 8-1 to 8-3, we will explain specific examples of when the variable animation in time-saving game state 3 ends and the game transitions to a demo waiting period → customer waiting demo period, when the number of playable rounds "M3" is not "0". Figure 8-1 is a timing chart for when the variable animation in time-saving game state 3 ends and the game transitions to a customer waiting state, and Figures 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing examples of animations at various timings in Figure 8-1. Note that this explanation focuses on the case of animation mode F, but the explanations for animation modes D and E, which are animation modes in time-saving game state, are basically the same and will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 8-1, first, at timing T0, the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display unit 122 with the second reserve count at "0". At this time, the second special symbol reserve display unit 124 and the second reserve count display area SB are showing "0". Also, in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode F background image, the central one and three special symbols TZ of the three performance symbols 50a of the fourth mode are being updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the remaining number of plays image JK (indicating that the remaining number of plays in the time-saving game state 3 is "101") is displayed, and the second reserve icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c are displayed. Although the reserve icon HI is not displayed in the second reserve icon display area 50d, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50c. Furthermore, the right-hand image MG is displayed, and the variable BGM 6 corresponding to the performance mode F is audibly output (see Figure 8-2(a)).

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a, which had been scrolling (updating) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, the three performance symbols 50a perform a pre-stop performance action (small bounce display), and the three performance symbols 50a temporarily stop at a losing combination ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 122. Also, the right-hand play image MG and the remaining spins image JK are displayed, and the variation BGM 6 corresponding to performance mode F is continuously output audibly (see Figure 8-2(b)).

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c disappearing begins, and the stop display of the performance symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") begins. Then, at timing T4, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the animation of the icon TI disappearing, the animation of the icon TI disappearing ends. Also, the right-hand shooting image MG and the remaining spins image JK are displayed, and the variable BGM 6 corresponding to performance mode F is continuously output audibly (see Figure 8-2(c)). Although not shown, in the remaining spins image JK, as soon as the disappearance of the icon TI ends, an image of "100 spins remaining" is displayed with an animation that subtracts "1" from the number of remaining spins "101".

Then, at timing T5, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the system enters a customer-waiting state, and a demo waiting period begins where the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. A customer-waiting state specification command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. At this time, the background image is the same mode F background image as during the variable display of the second special symbol display 122, scrolling horizontally. For the background music (BGM), any BGM should be continuously output. For example, the variable BGM 6, the same as before the second special symbol display 122 stopped, may be continuously output audibly, or a different BGM (e.g., BGM 8) corresponding to the demo waiting period (customer-waiting state) may be started. Here, we assume that the variable BGM 6, the same as before the second special symbol display 122 stopped, is continuously output audibly. Also, the right-hand image MG and the remaining spins image JK are continuously displayed (see Figure 8-2(d)).

Next, at timing T6, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol display 122 showed a stop indication, the audible variable BGM 6 stops, resulting in silence. The right-hand shooting image MG and the remaining spins image JK continue to be displayed (see Figure 8-2(e)). During the period from T4 to T6, when the variable BGM 6 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM 6 can be changed in response to the player's operation of the performance control stick 136, and the output volume setting can also be changed.

Next, at timing T7, after a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol display 122 stopped, a sound adjustment display OC, indicating that the volume of the variable BGM etc. can be adjusted by operating the performance control stick 136, is displayed in front of the performance symbol 50a. The right-hand shooting image MG and the remaining spins image JK continue to be displayed (see Figure 8-2(f)). The sound adjustment display OC shows the currently set volume level (volume gauge) and indicates the direction of operation for the performance control stick 136. In response to the operation of the performance control stick 136, the volume level display (volume gauge) changes, and the output volume level setting is also changed.

Next, at the timing of T8, once the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the receipt of the customer waiting state specification command, a customer waiting demo performance for a predetermined period (80 seconds) begins. Specifically, in front of the performance symbol 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), a fade-in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) of the customer waiting demo image begins for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and the fade-out (gradually becoming transparent and disappearing from an opaque state) of the performance symbol 50a, the right-hand shooting image MG, the remaining number image JK, the second hold icon display area 50d, the said icon display area 50c, the mode F background image, and the special symbol TZ begins. In other words, the three performance symbols 50a, the right-hand shooting image MG, the remaining spins image JK, the second reserve icon display area 50d, the said icon display area 50c, the mode F background image, and the special symbol TZ will be displayed in a way that at least a portion of them overlap in the disappearance display and the appearance display where the waiting demo image (character image, waiting demo background) will gradually appear. Note that the reserve display areas (first reserve number display area SA, second reserve number display area SB) are displayed in front of the waiting demo image, so they will not be obscured by the waiting demo image (see Figure 8-3(g)).

Then, after timing T8, once the fade-in of the waiting demo image is complete, the performance symbols 50a, etc., become invisible (invisible), and the waiting demo sequence begins in the following order: "Variable Performance Demo (20 seconds)" → "Character Introduction (20 seconds)" → "Machine Name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer Name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to Prevent Addiction (10 seconds)" → "Movable Mechanism Demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 8-3(h)). In other words, if there are no winning balls or other events while the machine is waiting for a player, after the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the waiting state specification command, the waiting demo sequence to encourage the player to play begins. Furthermore, if there are no winning balls or other events while the waiting demo sequence is running, the waiting demo sequence for a predetermined time (80 seconds) will be displayed.

Referring to Figure 8-3(i), the following describes the case where the player changes the volume of the variable BGM 6 by operating the performance control stick 136 during the period T5 to T6. As shown in Figure 8-3(i), when the performance control stick 136 is operated during the period T5 to T6, while the variable BGM 6 is being output, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. Then, in response to the operation of the performance control stick 136, the volume of the variable BGM 6 changes, and the volume level display (volume gauge) on the sound adjustment display OC changes, and the volume setting of the output BGM, etc., is changed. At this time, in accordance with the change in the volume level display corresponding to the operation of the performance control stick 136, a predetermined sound is output at the changed volume. Furthermore, if there is no operation of the performance control stick 136 during the predetermined period (2 seconds), the sound adjustment display OC disappears.

Referring to Figures 8-3 (j-1) and (j-2), we will now explain the case where menu images MN2a and MN2b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while the system is in a waiting state. Note that when the display of menu image MN2a, etc., begins, or when the display changes due to operation of the sword handle unit 135 during the display of menu image MN2a, etc., a predetermined sound effect is output for a certain period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Similar to the relationship between menu image MN1a, etc., and the sound effect described above, the timing of the display or change in the display of menu image MN2a, etc. (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) may not coincide with the timing of the output of the predetermined sound effect.

As shown in Figure 8-3(j-1), in the customer waiting state, the performance control board 320, which receives the customer waiting state specification command, sets the valid operation period for the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button). For example, if the sword handle unit 135 is operated during this valid operation period and during the demo waiting period, the Mode F background image, the three stopped performance symbols 50a, the right-hand shooting image MG, the remaining spins image JK, the second hold icon display area 50d, and the menu image MN2a are displayed in front of the icon display area 50c. The menu image MN2a displays the "Machine Description" tag and the "MUSIC Selection" tag, and it is possible to select and confirm either tag according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. When the "Machine Description" tag is selected and confirmed, an explanation of the game flow and features of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN2a is displayed, the menu image MN2a disappears.

As shown in Figure 8-3(j-2), when the "MUSIC Selection" tag is selected and confirmed while menu image MN2a is displayed, menu image MN2b is displayed. In menu image MN2b, along with the text "MUSIC Selection," multiple song title tags that can be selected and confirmed according to the operation of the performance control stick 136 are displayed. For example, when a song title tag is selected in menu image MN2b, the background music (BGM) of the selected song is output, and the volume of the BGM of the selected song can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance control stick 136. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while menu image MN2b is displayed, menu image MN2b disappears. Furthermore, when adjusting the volume of the BGM of the selected song while menu image MN2b is output, the sound adjustment image OC may be displayed.

Here, we will compare the characteristics of the waiting state in the normal game state (before the cumulative count "n" becomes "0") (see Figures 7-1 to 7-3) and the waiting state in the time-saving game state 3 (after the cumulative count "n" becomes "0") (see Figures 8-1 to 8-3), and explain the differences and similarities between them. For convenience, in the following explanation, the waiting state in the normal game state will be referred to as "normal waiting state," and the waiting state in the time-saving game state 3 will be referred to as "time-saving 3 waiting state."

First, let's explain the elements that differ between normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting. The first element is that the background image displayed from the time the reels stop spinning until the start of the waiting demo is different between normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting. Specifically, in normal waiting, it is a mode background image corresponding to one of the performance modes A to C, and in time-saving 3 waiting, it is a mode F background image corresponding to performance mode F, which is exclusive to time-saving game state 3. The second element is that the form of the performance symbols 50a displayed from the time the reels stop spinning until the start of the waiting demo is different between normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting. Specifically, in normal waiting, it is one of the first to third forms, and in time-saving 3 waiting, it is the fourth form. The third element is that the BGM output for a predetermined period after the reels stop spinning is different between normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting. Specifically, in normal waiting, it is one of BGM1 to BGM3, and in time-saving 3 waiting, it is BGM6. The fourth element is that the appearance of the hold icon display area differs between normal wait mode and time-saving 3 wait mode, from the moment the reel stops spinning until the start of the wait mode demo. Specifically, in normal wait mode, it is the first hold icon display area 50b, and in time-saving 3 wait mode, it is the second hold icon display area 50d. As mentioned above, if the display patterns of the first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second hold icon display area 50d differ in each performance mode, then the appearance will differ between normal wait mode and time-saving 3 wait mode. Furthermore, in time-saving 3 wait mode, the right-hand shooting image MG and the remaining spins image JK are displayed from the moment the reel stops spinning until the start of the wait mode demo, but they are not displayed in normal wait mode. Additionally, in time-saving 3 wait mode, if an indication of the current game state is displayed as mentioned above, "Time-saving 3 mode" is displayed, but it is not displayed in normal wait mode. Finally, while the first to fourth elements described above are assumed to have different appearances between normal wait mode and time-saving 3 wait mode, they may also have the same appearance.

Next, we will explain the elements that are the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. The first element is that the sound adjustment image OC displayed from the time the reel stops until the start of the customer waiting demo performance is the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. The second element is that the display of the volume level (volume gauge) and the test sound (short tone) output during volume adjustment are the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. The third element is that the customer waiting demo performance displayed after the demo waiting period following the reel stop is the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. The fourth element is that the special symbol TZ displayed from the time the reel stops until the start of the customer waiting demo performance is the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. The fifth element is that the period from the time the reel stops until the BGM is output, the period from the time the reel stops until the display of the sound adjustment image OC begins, and the demo waiting period B1 are the same in both normal customer waiting mode and reduced-time 3-customer waiting mode. As mentioned above, if the display position of the special symbol TZ is the same in each performance mode, it will be the same in both normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting modes. Also, although the first to fifth elements described above are assumed to be the same in both normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting modes, they may be different. In particular, in the fifth element, all three periods may be different in normal waiting and time-saving 3 waiting modes, or at least one or two of the three periods may be different. Specifically, in time-saving 3 waiting modes, if the period from when the reel stops to when the BGM is output and the period from when the reel stops to when the sound adjustment image OC is displayed are made shorter than in the case of normal waiting modes, players who want to adjust the volume of the output sound before starting to play in time-saving game state 3 can check the BGM volume and adjust it at an earlier timing than in normal waiting modes, and then play in time-saving game state 3, thus not diminishing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the case of a shortened play time (level 3), making the demo waiting period B1 longer than in the case of a normal play time can mitigate the decrease in enjoyment of the game caused by the annoying display of the demo animation while waiting for players who wish to immediately start playing in shortened play time (level 3).

Furthermore, we will explain a comparison of the customer waiting state in the normal game state (a state where the player has not won the bonus round 4 during the jackpot determination process) (see Figures 7-1 to 7-3) and the customer waiting state in the bonus round 4 game state (a state where the player has won the bonus round 4 during the jackpot determination process). The elements that differ or are the same in these customer waiting states are the same as those described above when comparing the normal customer waiting state and the bonus round 3 customer waiting state.

[Specific example 2 of when the variation animation in normal gameplay ends and the game enters a waiting state for customers]
Using Figures 9-1 and 9-2, we will explain a specific example 2 of the case where the variation animation in the normal game state ends and the game transitions to a demo waiting period → customer waiting demo period. Figure 9-1 is a timing chart (2) for when the variation animation in the normal game state ends and the game transitions to a customer waiting state, and Figure 9-2 is a diagram showing examples of animations at various timings in Figure 9-1. Note that this explanation will focus on the case of animation mode A, but the explanations for animation modes B and C are basically the same and will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 9-1, at timing T0, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 120 with the first reserve count at "0". At this time, the first special symbol reserve indicator 123 and the first reserve count display area SA are showing "0". Also, in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, one of the three performance symbols 50a, the central one, and the three special symbols TZ are being updated and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Furthermore, the first reserve icon display area 50b and the corresponding icon display area 50c are displayed; although the reserve icon HI is not displayed in the first reserve icon display area 50b, the icon TI in its normal display mode is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 50c. Additionally, the variation BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A is being output audibly.

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a, which was scrolling (updating) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, the characters of the three performance symbols 50a perform a pre-stop performance action (a pre-stop action of shaking their heads), and the three performance symbols 50a temporarily stop at a losing combination ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 120. Also, the variation BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A continues to be audibly output.

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c disappearing begins, and the stop display of the performance symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") begins. Then, at timing T4, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the animation of the icon TI disappearing, the animation of the icon TI disappearing ends. Furthermore, the variable BGM 1 corresponding to performance mode A continues to be audibly output.

Then, at timing T5, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the system enters a customer-waiting state, and a demo waiting period begins where the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. A customer-waiting state specification command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. At this time, the background image is the same Mode A background image as during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, scrolling horizontally. The background music (BGM) is the same variable BGM 1 as before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, and continues to be audibly output (see Figure 9-2(d)).

Next, at timing T6, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 stopped, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the performance symbol 50a, indicating that the volume of the variable BGM 1 can be adjusted by operating the performance control stick 136 while the variable BGM 1 is still being audibly output. The sound adjustment display OC shows the currently set volume level and indicates the direction of operation for the performance control stick 136. In response to the operation of the performance control stick 136, the volume level displayed in the sound adjustment display changes, and the output volume level setting is also changed (see Figure 9-2(e)).

Next, at timing T7, after a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 showed a stop indication, the audible variable BGM 1 stops, resulting in silence (see Figure 7-2(f)). Even when variable BGM 1 is not outputting after T7, the volume of variable BGM 1 can be changed and the output volume setting can be modified in response to the player's operation of the performance control stick 136. For example, if the performance control stick 136 is operated in a silent state, a short tone (test tone) of the set volume is output, allowing the player to confirm the volume level they have set.

Next, at the timing of T8, once the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the receipt of the customer waiting state specification command, a customer waiting demo performance for a predetermined period (80 seconds) begins. Specifically, in front of the performance symbol 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), a fade-in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) of the customer waiting demo image begins for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and the fade-out (gradually becoming transparent and disappearing from an opaque state) of the performance symbol 50a, the first hold icon display area 50b, the said icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ begins. In other words, the three performance symbols 50a, the first reserve icon display area 50b, the said icon display area 50c, the Mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ will be displayed in a way that at least a portion of them overlap during the disappearance display and the appearance display where the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) gradually appears. Furthermore, since the reserve display areas (first reserve number display area SA, second reserve number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they will not be obscured (unobscured) by the customer waiting demo image.

Then, after timing T8, once the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is complete, the performance symbols 50a, etc., become invisible (invisible), and the customer waiting demo sequence begins in the following order: "Variable Performance Demo (20 seconds)" → "Character Introduction (20 seconds)" → "Machine Name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer Name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to Prevent Addiction (10 seconds)" → "Movable Mechanism Demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 7-3(h)). In other words, if there are no winning balls or other events while the machine is in the customer waiting state, after the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specification command, the customer waiting demo sequence to encourage the player to play begins. Furthermore, if there are no winning balls or other events while the customer waiting demo sequence is running, the customer waiting demo sequence will be displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

[Effects of this embodiment]
According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variation display, when the customer waiting state is not performing variation display. After the first time has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is displayed for a second time (80 seconds). Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variation display, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed, which allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even after the end of the variation display, the variation BGM can be continuously output until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed. With this type of gaming machine, background music that enhances the enjoyment of the game is continuously output for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the end of the variable display. Compared to conventional gaming machines where the background music stops immediately after the end of the variable display and no background music is output during the waiting period, this increases the appeal to continue playing and improves the enjoyment of the presentation during the waiting period.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state where no variation display is being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended. After the first time has elapsed, it displays a customer waiting demo performance until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, it displays a sound adjustment display OC that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even after the variation display has ended, the variation BGM can be continuously output until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed. During the fourth time, the volume of the variation BGM can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136 while the player can confirm the variation BGM. With this type of gaming machine, players can listen to the background music (BGM) while waiting for customers, adjust the volume to their preference, and then continue playing at their desired volume. Compared to conventional gaming machines where players cannot adjust the BGM volume while waiting, this enhances the appeal of continued play and improves the entertainment value of the gameplay while waiting for customers.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 and 6-2 above, during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, a first display ("Model Name") which is a display related to the title of the gaming machine, and a second display ("Warning to Prevent Addiction") which is a display that warns the player about becoming addicted to the game, can be displayed, and a third display (sound adjustment display OC) can be displayed in the customer waiting state, and the demo waiting period is a first time (120) after the end of the variable display.
The game is executed until a certain number of seconds have elapsed, and the customer waiting demo is executed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed. The first display is shown before the second display, and the third display is shown after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display has finished. The second performance (second customer waiting demo) can be executed again after the second time has elapsed. With such a game machine, the second display, which serves as a warning, is shown after the first display, which includes the game machine's title and other content that the player prefers. Therefore, compared to conventional game machines where the first display, which includes the game machine's title and other content, is shown after the warning display, the second display, which is shown later, can effectively warn players who are still focused on the first display, and consequently, the entertainment value of the performance during the customer waiting state can be appropriately enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, in a customer waiting state when the variation display is not being executed, a demonstration including scrolling of the mode background image according to the performance mode is displayed as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, and a customer waiting demo performance is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and while the variation display is being executed, the main display device 131 can display a first character (character display CP1) or a second character (character display CP2, CP3), and while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed in the customer waiting state, the main display device 131 can display the first character at a higher rate than the second character. With this type of gaming machine, players who have seen the demo sequence while waiting for a customer can recognize the first character, which has a high probability of appearing, and continue playing. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines where the display ratio of the first and second characters is roughly equal during the demo sequence, the sense of anticipation when the first character appears during gameplay can be increased, improving the enjoyment of the sequences while waiting for a customer.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 described above, in a customer waiting state when no variation display is being executed, a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the performance mode is displayed as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended. After the first time has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting demo performance, a "warning to prevent addiction" is displayed to caution the player about becoming addicted to the game. This display can have a first display unit NB1 and a second display unit NB2 below the first display unit NB1. In this type of gaming machine, the "warning to prevent excessive gambling" is presented in a multi-line format. Compared to, for example, a single-line display on the main display device 131 that uses a long horizontal line of text, players can more easily recognize the content of the display in a shorter time. Therefore, the warning can be effectively conveyed, and consequently, the entertainment value of the game while players are waiting for customers can be appropriately enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 and 7-5 above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of the mode background image according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variation display, when the player is waiting for a change display and no change display is being performed. After the first time has elapsed, the player waiting demo performance is displayed for a second time (80 seconds). Furthermore, the player waiting demo performance can be displayed again as a second or subsequent player waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variation display, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. If the player operates the sword handle unit 135 during the operation valid period while the variation display is in progress, the first type of performance (Figure 7-5(b)) is executed. If the player operates the sword handle unit 135 during the operation valid period while the player is waiting for a change display, the second type of performance (display of menu image MN1) is executed. With this type of gaming machine, there is no set period for operation during the waiting state, and compared to conventional gaming machines where an effect button such as the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the waiting state but no effect such as the second-mode effect is executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the gaming machine during the waiting state, and consequently, to improve the interest of the effects during the waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, in a customer waiting state where no variation display is being performed, the main display device 131 displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the performance mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended. After the first time has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even after the variation display has ended, the variation BGM can be output continuously until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed. The third time can be longer than the fourth time and shorter than the first time. With this type of gaming machine, the sound adjustment indicator (OC) can be displayed between the time the reel stops spinning and the start of the demo sequence. Therefore, players who want to closely observe the demo sequence can check the OC indicator before the demo begins, adjust the volume to their preference, and then continue playing, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1, 6-2, 9-1, and 9-2 above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variation display, when the customer waiting state is not performing variation display. After the first time has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is displayed for a second time (80 seconds). Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variation display, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even after the end of the variation display, the variation BGM can be output continuously until a fourth time (40 seconds) has elapsed. The third time can be made shorter than the first and fourth times. With this type of gaming machine, the sound adjustment indicator (OC) can be displayed between the time the reels stop spinning and the start of the demo sequence. Therefore, players who want to pay close attention to the demo sequence can check the OC before the demo begins, adjust the volume to their preference, and continue playing, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since players can listen to the background music (BGM) during the waiting period and adjust the volume to their liking, this increases the appeal of continuing the game compared to conventional gaming machines where players cannot adjust the BGM volume during the waiting period, thus improving the enjoyment of the presentation during the waiting period.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-4 above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variation display, when the customer waiting state is not performing variation display. After the first time has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is displayed for a second time (80 seconds). Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variation display, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even after the end of the variation display, the variation BGM 1 can be continuously output until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed. If the variation display is started based on a win before the fourth time has elapsed, the variation BGM 1 can be continuously output even after the start of the variation display. With this type of gaming machine, even if a win occurs while the background music (BGM) is playing during the waiting state, the game continues without interruption. Compared to conventional gaming machines where the BGM is interrupted or changed when a win occurs during the waiting state and the display starts, this prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to BGM interruptions, and ultimately enhances the enjoyment of the gameplay during the waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of the mode background image according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variation display, when the player is not performing a variation display. After the first time has elapsed, the player waiting demo performance is displayed for a second time (80 seconds). Furthermore, the player waiting demo performance can be displayed again as a second or subsequent player waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variation display, and at any time other than the second time, a sound adjustment display OC can be displayed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. With such a gaming machine, since the sound adjustment display OC, which is not related to the content, is not displayed during the player waiting demo performance, players who want to focus on the player waiting demo performance can watch it without being bothered by the sound adjustment display OC, which is unrelated to the content of the player waiting demo performance, thus improving the enjoyment of the performance during the player waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state where no variation display is being performed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the performance mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the variation display. After the first time has elapsed, it displays a customer waiting demo performance until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the variation display, it displays a sound adjustment display OC that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. The demo waiting period can be executed in different ways depending on the mode background image according to the performance mode set before the end of the variation display. With such a gaming machine, for example, if the performance mode before the reel stops is a high-probability performance mode, the demo waiting period can be set to a mode background image corresponding to that performance mode. This allows players to maintain the expectation of winning a jackpot if they hit a target during the demo waiting period, thus encouraging them to continue playing. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines where, if a target is hit during the demo waiting period, the reel display starts in a specific performance mode regardless of the performance mode before the reel stops, this type of machine can increase the appeal of continuing to play and improve the entertainment value of the performance while the player is waiting.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state where no variation display is being performed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the performance mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended. After the first time has elapsed, it displays a customer waiting demo performance until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variation display ended, it displays a sound adjustment display OC that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. During the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to display multiple characters in the "Character Introduction" display. If the sword hilt unit 135 is operated by the player while multiple characters are displayed, the player can select and set one of the multiple characters as their favorite character according to the player's actions. With this type of gaming machine, for example, during the customer waiting demo, players can check the characters displayed in the "character introduction" section and then customize them according to their preferences, such as their favorite character. This improves the enjoyment of the waiting-time presentation compared to conventional gaming machines where such customization during the customer waiting demo is not possible.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 and Figures 8-1 to 8-3 as described above, the main display device 131 displays a demo waiting period, including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode, for a first time (120 seconds) after the end of the variable display, when the player is waiting for a change in the display mode and not performing a change in the display mode. After the first time has elapsed, the player waiting demo performance is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the player waiting demo performance can be displayed again as a second or subsequent player waiting demo performance even after the second time has elapsed. The demo waiting period B1 in the normal game state and the demo waiting period B1 in the time-saving game state are displayed in different ways. If the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo waiting period B1 in the normal game state, a first setting (selection of favorite character) can be made. If the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo waiting period in the time-saving game state, a second setting (selection of MUSIC) can be made. With this type of gaming machine, it's possible to customize it to the player's preferences according to the machine's state, thus improving the entertainment value of the gameplay while waiting for customers compared to conventional gaming machines that lack such multiple customization options.

[Other Embodiments]
Referring to Figure 10, other embodiments will be described. Figure 10 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in another embodiment. As shown in Figure 10, in this embodiment, the scroll pattern SZ is displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the performance pattern 50a, etc., on the main display device 131 during the variable performance. The scroll pattern SZ consists of three patterns, and in each pattern, "■", "□", "●", "○", and "◎" are displayed in a variable (scroll) manner before being displayed at a stop. Although Figure 10 describes the case of performance mode A, the same applies to the other performance modes B to F, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in Figure 10(a), first, after the special symbol's variation display begins, and at the same time as the variation display of the three performance symbols 50a begins, the variation display of the scroll symbol SZ begins. As shown in Figure 10(b), and before the special symbol's stop display, while at least one of the three performance symbols 50a is displaying variation, the scroll symbol SZ is displayed in a stopped state. At this time, the order in which the three symbols of the scroll symbol SZ are displayed in a stopped state may be from left to right or from right to left. In other words, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112 or the second start opening 115, the variation display of the scroll symbol SZ is performed. The number of times the three symbols of the scroll symbol SZ are displayed in the same combination is stored in the sub-RAM 320c of the performance control board 320.

As shown in Figure 10(c), for example, when the menu image MN1a is displayed in the waiting state, if the "Pachi Log" tag is selected and confirmed by operating the performance control stick 136, the menu image MN3 may be displayed. Menu image MN3 displays a list of the number of times the same combination of three symbols stopped on the scroll pattern SZ for the past three days, and the types of symbols that were stopped. In such an embodiment, the player can check information such as the number of times the same three symbols stopped on the scroll pattern SZ while in the waiting state, and furthermore, they can estimate the settings of the gaming machine 100 based on this information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the sound adjustment indicator OC was displayed during the waiting state. However, during the variation performance, a smaller sound adjustment indicator (smaller than the OC) may be displayed on the main display device 131 in response to the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and it may disappear if there is no operation of the performance operation stick 136 for a predetermined period (5 seconds). In such an embodiment, the small sound adjustment indicator during the variation performance is smaller than the sound adjustment indicator OC in the waiting state and has a shorter display period, so it does not obstruct the visibility of the variation performance on the main display device 131, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented. The manner in which the sound adjustment indicator is displayed during the variation performance may be various manners that do not obstruct the display of the variation performance on the main display device 131, for example, it may be displayed on the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. Even in such a manner, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, we will explain the case where the volume of output sounds such as BGM is adjusted by operating the performance control stick 136 when transitioning from the stopping of special symbol rotation to the customer waiting state. Specifically, during the special symbol rotation, the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance control stick 136 while the "Small" sound adjustment indicator is displayed. At the timing of the special symbol rotation stopping and transitioning to the customer waiting state, the "Small" sound adjustment indicator disappears and volume adjustment becomes impossible. After transitioning to the customer waiting state, the "OC" sound adjustment indicator is displayed by operating the performance control stick 136 and volume adjustment becomes possible. With this embodiment, players can adjust the volume at their preferred timing regardless of whether the gaming machine is in the special symbol rotation state or the customer waiting state.

In the above-described embodiment, the "machine name" display during the customer waiting demo was shown before the "warning against addiction" display and for a short duration. However, it may also be shown before the "warning against addiction" display and for a longer duration. In such an embodiment, the "machine name" display would have a longer duration than the "warning against addiction" display, thus making a stronger impression of the game machine's content on the player. Furthermore, since the "warning against addiction" display would appear after the "machine name" display, the warning from the "warning against addiction" display would be sufficiently impressed upon the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the "manufacturer name" and the "warning to prevent addiction" were displayed separately during the customer waiting demo. However, the "manufacturer name" and the "warning to prevent addiction" may be displayed simultaneously, or the "warning to prevent addiction" may be displayed partway through the display of the "manufacturer name." Specifically, this could be "manufacturer name & warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)," or the "warning to prevent addiction" could be displayed 3 seconds after the start of the "manufacturer name" display. With such an embodiment, the "manufacturer name" and the "warning to prevent addiction," which are the content that you want to impress on the player, can be displayed simultaneously, making a stronger impression on the player. Furthermore, by shortening the display time of the customer waiting demo, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored with long customer waiting demos. Furthermore, because the "warning to prevent excessive gambling" is displayed partway through the "manufacturer name" display, the customer-waiting demo is more varied and memorable compared to conventional gaming machines that simply display information sequentially, making a stronger impression on players.

In the above-described embodiment, during the display time of the "warning to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demo performance, only the warning display NH was displayed. However, other images that convey warnings or cautions to the player may also be displayed. For example, images that convey warnings other than the warning display NH include a prevention image CH (see Figure 5-3 (a-1)) that warns against forgetting to remove the game card inserted into the game device, an image that warns against illegal acts against the game machine, and an image that warns that smoking should be done only in designated areas. At least one of these images may be displayed during the display time of the "warning to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demo performance, or the images may be displayed in sequence. In other words, during the display time of the "warning to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demo performance, the warning display NH may be displayed at all times, while other images conveying warnings or cautions are displayed. In this configuration, by changing the display of the "warning to prevent addiction" during the customer waiting demo, it becomes possible to make the most important warning NH more memorable to players compared to a configuration where only the warning NH is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, during the customer waiting state, the volume adjustment indicator OC was displayed after a predetermined period (10 seconds) had elapsed following the cessation of the variable background music (BGM), which had been continuously outputting since the variable BGM stopped. However, the volume adjustment indicator OC may be displayed simultaneously with the cessation of the variable BGM. In such an embodiment, displaying the volume adjustment indicator OC simultaneously with the cessation of the variable BGM is more effectively communicated to the player that volume adjustment is possible than displaying only the volume adjustment indicator OC.

In the embodiments shown in Figures 8-1 to 8-3 above, specific examples were described for when the number of playable rounds "M3" is not "0", that is, when the variation performance in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the player enters a waiting state. However, there are various other timings for entering a waiting state. Here, for example, the case in which the player enters a waiting state when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3 will be described. In this case, when the player enters a waiting state when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, when the variation display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in a game in which the cumulative number "n" becomes "0", the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the above-described performance modes A to C (see Figures 5-1(a) to (c)) to performance mode F (Figure 5-1(f)), and the player enters a waiting state in the display mode of the time-saving game state 3 (see Figures 8-2(d) to (f) and Figure 8-3). At this time, the right-hand shooting lamp lights up, and the main display device 131 starts displaying the right-hand shooting image MG, and displays the remaining number of spins image JK, such as "700 spins remaining". When the player enters the second start gate 115 while in this time-saving game state 3 waiting state, the performance corresponding to the first game in time-saving game state 3 is executed, and the right-hand shooting image MG continues to be displayed on the main display device 131 (the right-hand shooting lamp also continues to light up). However, when the player is in the waiting state in time-saving game state 3, the above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is not executed, but the time-saving entry performance is executed when the player enters the second start gate 115 for the first time in time-saving game state 3. Furthermore, for example, in the main display device 131, the cumulative count image RK, which was displayed during normal gameplay before entering the customer waiting state, may continue to be displayed even when entering the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state 3, such as "800 times." It may then disappear simultaneously with the start of the first game in time-saving game state 3, and the remaining count image JK, such as "700 times remaining," may be displayed instead.

Furthermore, when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the performance modes A to C to performance mode F may be, in addition to the timing described above, when the first variation display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-saving game state 3 begins. In this embodiment, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the normal game state (one of the performance modes A to C), and the right-hand shooting image MG and remaining count image JK described above are not displayed (although the right-hand shooting lamp lights up), and the system enters a customer waiting state (see Figures 7-2(d) to (f) and Figure 7-3). Then, when a ball enters the second starting slot 115 in this waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the performance modes A to C to performance mode F (Figure 5-1(f)), and the display of the right-hand shooting image MG begins, or the remaining count image JK, such as "700 remaining," is displayed, and the performance corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed. Alternatively, for example, in the waiting state described above, the main display device 131 may continue to display the cumulative count image RK, such as "800," until it disappears simultaneously with the start of the first game in the time-saving game state 3, and the remaining count image JK, such as "700 remaining," is displayed.

Next, we will explain, for example, the case when the player enters a waiting state when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 4. In this case, when the player enters a waiting state when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 4, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in a game in which the jackpot judgment process results in a time-saving state 4, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the above-mentioned performance modes A to C (see Figures 5-1(a) to (c)) to performance mode G corresponding to the time-saving game state 4, and the player enters a waiting state with the display mode of the time-saving game state 4. The change in the mode on the main display device 131, etc. in this mode is the same as when the player enters a waiting state when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, and the mode changes when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in a game in which the cumulative count "n" becomes "0". Furthermore, for example, when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 4, and entering a waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 may change from one of the aforementioned performance modes A to C (see Figures 5-1(a) to (c)) to performance mode G, which corresponds to the time-saving game state 4, when the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-saving game state 3 begins. The change in the display mode on the main display device 131 in such a scenario is similar to the change in the display mode when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3 and entering a waiting state, when the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-saving game state 3 begins.

Next, we will explain the case where the game enters a waiting state when transitioning from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state. In this case, when the game enters a waiting state when transitioning from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 122 stops during a game in which the number of playable rounds becomes "0", the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from the above-mentioned performance mode F (Figure 5-1(f)) to one of performance modes A to C (see Figures 5-1(a) to (c)), and the game enters a waiting state in the display mode of the normal game state (see Figures 7-2(d) to (f) and Figure 7-3). At this time, the right-hand shooting lamp is turned off, and on the main display device 131, the right-hand shooting image MG and the remaining rounds image JK are hidden, and the left-hand shooting start image is displayed for a predetermined period of time. After the predetermined period has elapsed, the left-hand shooting start image is hidden, the transition completion notification image is displayed, and the game enters a waiting state in the display mode of the normal game state. Furthermore, for example, in the main display device 131, the remaining spins image JK, which was displayed in the time-saving game state 3 before entering the customer waiting state, may continue to be displayed as "0 spins remaining" even when entering the customer waiting state in the normal game state. It may then disappear simultaneously with the start of the first game in the normal game state, and a transition notification image such as "Time-saving state 3 completed" may be displayed.

Furthermore, when transitioning from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state, if the player enters a waiting state, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from performance mode F to one of performance modes A to C may be other than the timing described above, such as when the first variation display of the first special symbol display 120 in the normal game state begins. In this embodiment, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the time-saving game state 3 (performance mode F), the left-hand shooting start image is displayed for a predetermined period, and the right-hand shooting image MG and remaining spins image JK described above (the right-hand shooting lamp is turned off) are hidden, and the player enters a waiting state. When a ball enters the first start opening 112 in this waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from performance mode F to one of performance modes A to C, the transition notification image is displayed, and the performance corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed. Furthermore, for example, in the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state described above, the cumulative count image RK, such as "800 times," may remain displayed until it disappears simultaneously with the start of the first game in the normal game state, and a transition notification image such as "Time Reduction 3 Completed" may be displayed.

◆As a first configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems, the gaming machine executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation of the player, wherein the display control means, in a waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, controls the first waiting period until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display has finished. The gist of this system is as follows: It executes the performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)), and after the first time has elapsed, it executes a second customer-waiting performance (first customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2) that is different from the first customer-waiting performance until the second time (customer-waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer-waiting performance can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2). After the third time has elapsed since the end of the fluctuation display, it executes a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound even after the end of the fluctuation display in the customer-waiting state, until the fourth time has elapsed (Figures 7-2(d), Figure 8-2(d)). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A second configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game that is advantageous to the player, comprising: a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image; a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM); and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by the player's operation, wherein the display control means executes a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) in a waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display has finished, and the first time has elapsed After the first time period has elapsed, a second customer-waiting performance (first customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer-waiting performance, is executed until the second time period (customer-waiting demo period) has passed. Furthermore, the second customer-waiting performance can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2). After the third time period has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The sound control means is capable of continuously outputting the predetermined sound even after the end of the variable display in the customer-waiting state, until the fourth time period has elapsed (Figures 7-2(d), 8-2(d)). During the fourth time period, the volume of the predetermined sound can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means, in a state where the player can confirm the predetermined sound (Figures 7-3(i), 8-3(i)). In essence, such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A third configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and in a customer waiting state where no variable display is being executed, can execute a first performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) and a second performance (customer waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2), and can display a first display (machine name display KH) and a second display (warning display NH) during the execution of the second performance, and can display a third display (sound adjustment image OC) different from the first and second displays in the customer waiting state, and the first The first display is executed from the end of the variable display until the first time period (demo waiting period) has elapsed. The second display is executed from the end of the first time period until the second time period (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. The first display is shown before the second display. The third display is shown after the end of the variable display until the third time period has elapsed. The second display can be executed again after the second time period has elapsed. The first display is related to the title of the game machine, and the second display is intended to warn the player about becoming too engrossed in the game. Such a game machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fourth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems includes a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a volume control means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of sound output from a sound output means (sound output device 331) by the player's operation, wherein the display control means displays a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the changing display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and when the first time has elapsed After the first customer waiting sequence, a second customer waiting sequence (first customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first, is displayed until the second time period (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting sequence can be displayed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). After the third time period has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustment indicator (sound adjustment image OC) is displayed, allowing the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. During the execution of the variable display, the display means can display either the first character (character display CP1) or the second character (character displays CP2, CP3). During the execution of the second customer waiting sequence in the customer waiting state, the display means displays the first character at a higher rate than the second character. Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fifth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems includes, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game advantageous to the player, the machine includes a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of sound output from a sound output means (sound output device 331) by the player's operation, and the display control means executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, when the variable display is not being executed. After the first time period has elapsed, a second customer waiting sequence (first customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer waiting sequence, is executed until the second time period (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting sequence can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). After the variable display ends and a third time period has elapsed, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. In the second customer waiting sequence, a warning display (warning display NH) is executed to alert the player about becoming too engrossed in the game. The warning display has a first display unit (first stage NB1) and a second display unit (second stage NB2, etc.) below the first display unit. Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A sixth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems includes, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game advantageous to the player, the machine includes a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of sound output from a sound output means (sound output device 331) by the player's operation, an action detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's actions, and an effective period setting means (performance control board 320) that can set an effective period during the variable display and the waiting state in which the action detection means can detect the player's actions, and the display control means executes a first waiting state performance (Figure 7-2) in the waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display has finished. The gist of the system is to execute d) to (f) and Figures 8-2(d) to (f), to execute a second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2) that is different from the first customer waiting performance until the second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed, and furthermore the second customer waiting performance can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2), and after the third time has elapsed after the fluctuation display has ended, to execute a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that makes it clear that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means, and if the action of the player is detected by the action detection means during the effective period during the fluctuation display, to execute the first type performance (Figure 7-5), and if the action of the player is detected by the action detection means during the effective period during the customer waiting state, to execute a second type performance (Figures 7-3(j-1), (j-2), Figures 8-3(j-1), (j-2)) that is different from the first type performance. Such gaming machines can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a gaming machine with the configuration of 7-1 to solve the above problem, the gaming machine executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation of the player, wherein the display control means, in a waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, executes a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed. The gist of this is that, after the first time has elapsed, a second customer-waiting performance (first customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer-waiting performance, is performed until the second time (customer-waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer-waiting performance can be performed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer-waiting demo performance: Figure 6-2). After the third time has elapsed since the end of the fluctuation display, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is performed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound until the fourth time has elapsed even after the end of the fluctuation display in the customer-waiting state (Figures 7-2(d), 8-2(d)). The third time is longer than the fourth time and shorter than the first time (Figures 7-1, 8-1). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a gaming machine with the configuration of 7-2 to solve the above problems, the gaming machine executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation of the player, wherein the display control means, in a waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, executes a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed. The gist of this system is as follows: The system executes Figures 8-2(d) to (f), and after the first time has elapsed, a second customer-waiting animation (first customer-waiting demo animation: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer-waiting animation, is executed until the second time (customer-waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer-waiting animation can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer-waiting demo animation: Figure 6-2). After the third time has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The sound control means, in the customer-waiting state, continues to output the predetermined sound until the fourth time has elapsed even after the end of the variable display (Figure 9-2), and the third time is shorter than the first and fourth times (Figure 9-1). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eighth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game that is advantageous to the player, comprising: a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image; a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM); and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by the player's operation, wherein the display control means executes a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, when the variable display is not being executed, and the first time has elapsed After the first customer waiting sequence, a second customer waiting sequence (first customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer waiting sequence, is executed until the second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting sequence can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). After the third time has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The sound control means, in the customer waiting state, continues to output the predetermined sound even after the end of the variable display until the fourth time has elapsed (Figures 7-2(d), 8-2(d)). If the variable display of the identification information is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition before the fourth time has elapsed, the predetermined sound continues to be output even after the variable display has started (Figure 7-4). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A ninth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems includes, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of sound output from a sound output means (sound output device 331) by the player's operation, wherein the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, has a first time (demo waiting period) after the variable display has finished. The gist of this system is to execute the first customer waiting animation (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) until a certain time has elapsed, then execute a second customer waiting animation (first customer waiting demo animation: Figure 6-2) that is different from the first customer waiting animation until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and furthermore, the second customer waiting animation can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo animation: Figure 6-2). After the variable display has finished and a third time has elapsed, and at any time other than the second time, execute a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A tenth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems includes, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, executes a special game advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image including a mode image (performance mode A to G: Figure 5-1) corresponding to a plurality of modes set according to the state of the game, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (sound output device 331) by operation of the player, wherein the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, after a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed since the variable display has finished The gist of this system is as follows: The first customer waiting sequence (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) is executed until the first time has elapsed, and after the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting sequence (first customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer waiting sequence, is executed until the second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting sequence can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). After the end of the variable display and after a third time has elapsed, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The first customer waiting sequence is then executed in a different manner according to the mode image corresponding to the mode set before the end of the variable display (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problems, the gaming machine executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of sound output from a sound output means (sound output device 331) by the player's operation, and an action detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's actions, and the display control means executes a first waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, when the variable display is not being executed, and the first After the initial time has elapsed, a second customer-waiting sequence (first customer-waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first customer-waiting sequence, is executed until a second time period (customer-waiting demo period) has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer-waiting sequence can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer-waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). After the variable display ends and a third time period has elapsed, a sound adjustment indication (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, allowing the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. During the execution of the second customer-waiting sequence, multiple characters can be displayed (Figure 6-2(b)). If the player's actions are detected by the action detection means while multiple characters are displayed, the machine executes a display of one of several selected modes according to the player's actions detected by the action detection means (Figure 7-3(j-1), (j-2)). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a gaming machine with a 12th configuration to solve the above problems, the gaming machine executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, executes a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and can transition to an advantageous game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after the special game ends, the gaming machine comprises a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, and an action detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's actions, wherein the display control means executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2(d) to (f), Figures 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, when the variable display is not being executed in a customer waiting state, and after the first time has elapsed until a second time (customer The gist of this system is that, until the waiting demo period has elapsed, a second waiting demo sequence (first waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2), different from the first waiting demo sequence, is executed. Furthermore, the second waiting demo sequence can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed (second waiting demo sequence: Figure 6-2). The first waiting demo sequence in normal gameplay (Figure 7-2) and the first waiting demo sequence in advantageous gameplay (Figure 8-2) are executed in different ways. If the motion detection means detects player movement during the execution of the first waiting demo sequence in normal gameplay, a first setting can be performed (Figure 7-3 (j-1), (j-2)). If the motion detection means detects player movement during the execution of the first waiting demo sequence in advantageous gameplay, a second setting different from the first can be performed (Figure 8-3 (j-1), (j-2)). Such a gaming machine can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

<Rainbow effect>
[Specific examples of light emission patterns]
Referring to Figure 11, a specific example of the rainbow-colored effect produced by the gaming machine 100 will be explained.
A rainbow effect is a visual effect that includes a rainbow-colored light display, which appears as a rainbow to the player by displaying multiple colors using a light-emitting means. There are no specific limitations on the types of colors or gradations (steps) that must be output, nor are there any limitations on the number of colors that make up the rainbow, as long as the display appears as a rainbow to the player. For example, the colors can be displayed using five colors that are primarily seen as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. Of course, the number of colors that are primarily seen can be fewer, but three or more is preferable. In the following explanation, the colors displayed to represent a rainbow will also be simply referred to as multiple colors.

As shown in Figure 11(a), the rainbow effect in this embodiment is performed by the main display device 131, stage back display device 141, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, and the first side display device 132, second side display device 133, upper display device 134, and upper unit 180, all of which are provided on the game board unit 102. The stage back display device 141 includes so-called start-up lamps that perform the effects of the first start-up opening 112 and the second start-up opening 115.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11(b), the rainbow effect can also be implemented in the upper mechanism unit 154, the lower mechanism unit 156, and the like. In addition, it can be implemented in devices other than those described above, such as the light guide plate panel unit 181 and the film for executing the 3D effect, which are not shown in Figures 11(a) and (b).
In devices other than the main display device 131 that perform the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is realized by one or more light-emitting elements, such as LEDs, that can switch between and output multiple colors. By switching the emitted color of the light-emitting elements over time, changes and movements of colors can be expressed, and the rainbow effect can be further emphasized. The emitted colors that appear simultaneously from multiple light-emitting elements do not need to be seven colors; it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

In the following description, when describing the above-mentioned light-emitting means, including the main display device 131, without making any particular distinction, they will simply be referred to as "light-emitting means." One light-emitting means means one light-emitting unit having one or more light-emitting elements and operating at the same time.
For example, the main display device 131, the backstage display device 141, and the first side display device 132 can each be a single light-emitting means. However, in the case of a light-emitting means with a large light-emitting area, it may operate in several divided areas, in which case each area may be treated as a single light-emitting means. The rainbow effect may be performed by a single light-emitting means or it may be realized by multiple light-emitting means.

The rainbow effect may be performed by combining multiple of the above-described light-emitting means. For example, the rainbow effect may be performed by combining the movable mechanism (upper mechanism unit 154, lower mechanism unit 156) with the main display device 131. Alternatively, the rainbow effect may be performed by combining the main display device 131 with the light guide plate panel unit 181.
Figure 11(a) illustrates a case where the stage back display device 141, which is a light-emitting means provided in the game area, emits light using LEDs. Here, the stage back display device 141 may be configured to either perform a rainbow-colored effect as a whole, or to emit light only around the first start opening 112, as shown in Figure 11(b).

(Examples of light emission patterns)
Rainbow-colored effects can be implemented in various ways, as long as they are perceived as rainbow-colored by the player. Representative examples of these effects are described below.
Figure 12(a) shows an example of a rainbow-colored effect using flashes. A flash refers to an effect that lights up instantaneously, and in gaming machines, it refers to an effect that flashes multiple times instantaneously. In other words, the flash in a rainbow-colored effect means an effect that uses one or more light-emitting means to display multiple colors and flash instantaneously multiple times. Note that two or more colors may be displayed with a single flash, or the color may change with each flash.
Although Figure 12(a) illustrates flashing using the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134, the system is not limited to this, and various combinations of light-emitting means, or even single-use flashing, are possible. When flashing is performed, the specific shape of the light-emitting area is not particularly limited. For example, a specific area of the main display device 131 or the light guide plate panel unit 181 may flash in rainbow colors.

A specific example of a flash will be explained using Figure 13. Figure 13(a) shows a mode in which the colors change sequentially over time, with each color flashing intensely for an instant. In this mode, for example, four colors, color 1 to color 4, flash intensely in sequence. By flashing colors 1 to 4 in sequence, the player can select colors that appear as a rainbow. Of course, the number of colors is not particularly limited. In this mode, multiple light-emitting means or light-emitting elements may flash the same color simultaneously, or they may flash different colors simultaneously.
Figure 13(b) shows a configuration in which a rainbow light display is performed while a flash is achieved by emitting light of a specific color (e.g., white) at a constant short interval. The specific color may be a color that does not make up the rainbow colors, or it may be a color that makes up the rainbow colors. Also, there may be multiple specific colors. Furthermore, the light-emitting element that performs the rainbow light display and the light-emitting element that performs the flash may be the same element, or they may be different elements. If they are different light-emitting elements, the light-emitting element that performs the rainbow light display does not need to stop the rainbow light display at the timing of the flash. Even with a display configuration like that in Figure 13(b), the player can visually perceive it as a flash as a rainbow effect.

Figure 12(b) shows an example of a rainbow-colored effect where multiple colors move and emit light. Moving light, in this context, refers to an effect where the colors displayed on the light-emitting means appear to move in a specific direction from the player's perspective. This effect is achieved by repeatedly changing the area emitting a certain color (e.g., red) to an adjacent area in a specific direction. Through this light control, the player perceives each color constituting the rainbow as moving. In Figure 12(b), multiple colors are displayed on the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134, and they are shown moving sequentially. That is, it shows an example where the moving effect is executed across multiple light-emitting means. Such a moving effect may also be executed, for example, when a light-emitting means, which is a movable mechanism that appears at a specific timing, such as the upper mechanism unit 154 or the lower mechanism unit 156, moves in front of the main display device 131. Alternatively, the moving light may be executed only within the light-emitting area of a single light-emitting means.

The direction of movement in moving light emission is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in Figure 12(b), the light emission may move across multiple light-emitting means (first side display device 132, upper display device 134, second side display device 133) as indicated by arrow Y1 along the outer circumference of the gaming machine 100. Here, moving light emission across means an effect in which a specific color appears to move sequentially across multiple light-emitting means. In Figure 12(b), an example of an effect in which the color moves clockwise is shown, but it may also be counterclockwise. Also, as indicated by arrow Y2 pointing to the left and right center in Figure 12(b), the color may move so as to converge at a specific position (for example, the position of the first start opening 112). Furthermore, the color may move so as to spread outward from a specific position, in other words, to spread radially, or conversely, to concentrate from the periphery to a specific position. Such radial movement can be well realized when using the main display device 131. Furthermore, the main display device 131 may work in cooperation with the panel lamps and frame lamps arranged around it to achieve radial movement that spans both the main display device 131 and the panel lamps or frame lamps. Additionally, one or more of the multiple light-emitting means may emit light so that the colors move in the same direction (for example, from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, left to right, etc.).

The light emitted during the rainbow effect can change color over time, thereby creating a stronger visual impact on the player. This color change can be achieved through periodic light emission. The light emission period here can be defined as the time required for a single point within the light-emitting area to change to another color, such as "blue → green." In other words, it can be defined as the time it takes for a particular LED element to emit a specific color, regardless of whether the position of the light source moves. This includes cases where the entire light-emitting mechanism changes color, and cases where only a portion of the light-emitting mechanism changes color.

Other types of light emission include changes that form a so-called rainbow gradient, where colors gradually shift in a specific direction in a predetermined order, and changes where the colors do not move, or move, and the appearance of a rainbow or not depends on the speed at which the colors switch.
Specific rainbow luminescence patterns include: (a) a gradient luminescence pattern that changes gradually in the order of blue → green → yellow → red; (b) a luminescence pattern that spreads out radially while switching colors; (c) a luminescence pattern that switches while moving or switches without moving to appear as a rainbow; (d) a luminescence pattern (flash pattern) in which a flash (white) is inserted when switching colors, such as blue → white (flash) → green → white (flash) → red → white (flash) → yellow; and (e) a pattern that switches from blue → green → red in an operation suggestion display that suggests operation of an operation button (lever, sword handle unit 135) that the player can operate. Note that for (e) above, depending on the speed of the switching, it may or may not appear as a rainbow.

When switching colors sequentially, the colors can be switched in the order of the actual rainbow colors (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet) (for example, if there are four colors, red → yellow → green → blue → red…), or in an order that does not follow the actual rainbow colors. Similarly, in the case of moving light emission, the order in which the colors move can follow the actual rainbow colors or not.

By the way, in cases where the same colors have different cycles (i.e., a number of colors that cannot be called a rainbow), the system may be configured so that the content of the effects changes depending on the cycle, such as performing a first effect during one cycle and a second effect during another. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that a third effect is not performed during a certain cycle. For example, a specific effect (e.g., a confirmed stop) may not be executed until a certain cycle of light emission is complete, and then that specific effect is executed after the light emission is finished.

[Specific examples of effects using light]
(Example of a rainbow-colored effect during a demo while waiting for customers)
Referring to Figure 14, an example of a rainbow-colored effect during a demo while the gaming machine 100 is waiting for customers will be explained. Figure 14 shows an example of a light-up effect while waiting for customers.
If the display of special symbols stops and, for example, the number of reserved balls in the first reserve is "0" and no game balls enter the first start opening 112, the machine enters a waiting state and a demonstration for a predetermined period of time begins.

Here, we will explain the display format of the customer-waiting demo. During the customer-waiting demo period (80 seconds), the display consists of content such as: "Variable effect demo (25 seconds)" → "Character introduction (25 seconds)" → "Machine name (5 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent excessive gambling (10 seconds)" → "Movable mechanism demo (10 seconds)." The content is displayed in this order. In other words, the main display device 131 will display this content during the customer-waiting demo period (80 seconds).

As shown in Figure 14(a), the "variation effect demo" in the customer waiting demo is a type of effect in which various variation effects are displayed on the main display device 131 while the special symbols are changing. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variation effects such as the SPSP Reach Revival effect, SPSP Reach effect, SP Reach effect, pseudo-consecutive effect, and normal Reach effect are displayed in order of the likelihood of a big win.

As shown in Figure 14(b), the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which multiple characters displayed during various variation performances are shown. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a character introduction background image, including an image resembling a stage, is scrolled and displayed, and in front of the background image, character displays CP1 to CP3 are displayed, consisting of images of each character in action and the text display of each character's name. Here, the edges of the display area on the main display device 131 appear rainbow-colored (rainbow effect R1). Also, the text of character displays CP1 to CP3 is displayed in rainbow colors (rainbow effect R2). Although not shown, rainbow colors may also be displayed behind the displayed characters. Note that the duration of the rainbow effect is not limited to the entire duration of the "character introduction." For example, the rainbow effect R1 may only occur for a few seconds at the time the character appears. Also, the rainbow effect R2 may only occur during the period in which the corresponding character is introduced.

As shown in Figure 14(c), in the customer waiting demo performance, the "machine name" section displays the machine name KH, indicating the machine name of the gaming machine 100. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a machine name background image composed of a white and blue gradient is scrolled, and the machine name KH suddenly appears in front of the background image. At this time, no rainbow-colored effect is performed by any of the light-emitting means.

As shown in Figure 14(d), in the customer waiting demo sequence, the "Manufacturer Name" section displays the manufacturer name MH, indicating the name of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine 100. Specifically, the main display device 131 displays a white manufacturer name background image, and the frame portion of the manufacturer name MH suddenly appears in front of the background image. The "Surprise," "Corporate," and "Logo" sections appear sequentially from left to right. However, no rainbow-colored effect is performed using any of the light-emitting means.

As shown in Figure 14(e), in the "warning to prevent excessive gambling" section of the customer waiting demo, a warning display NH consisting of text is displayed to alert the player to excessive gameplay on the gaming machine 100. The content displayed here is the same as in Figure 6-2(e). At this time, the main display device 131 does not display rainbow colors.

As shown in Figure 14(f), the "movable mechanism demonstration" in the customer waiting demo is a performance in which movable mechanisms such as the lower mechanism unit 156 operate in the same manner as the operation patterns during various variation performances. Specifically, for example, on the main display device 131, a movable mechanism demonstration background composed of radial lines is displayed as a rainbow-colored effect R3, and the lower mechanism unit 156 moves to a position in front of the background image where it operates in SPSP reach performances, etc., and the LEDs on the lower mechanism unit 156 operate in a manner that emits rainbow colors. At this time, the frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, upper display device 134) and the panel lamp (stage back display device 141) also simultaneously perform the rainbow-colored effect.

In the "Demonstration of Movable Parts," various effects may be performed not only by the lower part unit 156, but also by the upper part unit 154, the upper unit 180, or the light guide panel unit 181. The background image and the lower part unit 156 will perform the same display and operation as in the SPSP reach effect, but the sound output device 331 will not output any sound (music, sound effects, etc.) for the effects that are generated in the SPSP reach effect.
Furthermore, the speed at which the colors move during this moving light is relatively small compared to, for example, the variable effects shown in Figure 19(g) and Figures 22(e) to (g) described later.

As shown in Figure 14(g), once the demonstration of the movable mechanism has elapsed for a certain period of time, the rainbow display on the main display device 131 stops. Meanwhile, the frame lamp and the panel lamp continue to display the rainbow color.
As shown in Figure 14(h), after the customer waiting demo performance ends, the screen returns to displaying the performance symbol 50a in a stopped state.
The customer waiting demo shown above may also include a rainbow-colored effect using frame lamps and panel lamps at the timing shown in Figure 14(d) or Figure 14(e).

(Example of a rainbow-colored effect during a demo while waiting for customers)
Referring to Figure 15, an example of a rainbow-colored effect during a demo while waiting for another customer will be explained. Figure 15 shows an example of a light-up effect while waiting for a customer.

As shown in Figure 15(a), first, a demonstration of the variation effect is performed, similar to Figure 14(a).
As shown in Figure 15(b), the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demo is then performed. Here, a rainbow effect using frame lamps, panel lamps, etc. is performed during the introduction period. On the main display device 131, a rainbow effect R4 is performed for a portion of the period (a few seconds) as the character moves across the display screen.
As shown in Figure 15(c), the main display device 131 continues to display the effects, but the rainbow effect is not executed on the display screen. On the other hand, the frame lamp continues to display the rainbow effect.

As shown in Figure 15(d), the "model name" is then displayed, similar to Figure 14(c). Subsequently, although not shown in the diagram, the "manufacturer name,""warning to prevent addiction," etc., are displayed, similar to Figures 14(d) and (e).
As shown in Figure 15(e), after the customer waiting demo performance ends, the screen returns to displaying the performance symbol 50a in a stopped state.

Using Figure 16, an example of the time-dependent change in the rainbow-colored display while waiting for customers will be explained. During the demo while waiting for customers, the demo display will be stopped and a demo waiting period (e.g., 120 seconds) will elapse. At this point, the demo will start, and a demo video will be displayed as shown in Figures 15(a) to (b). During this demo video display period, the rainbow-colored display will be performed for a certain period of time.
For example, during the first timing (rainbow illumination period) of the demo video display, rainbow illumination is performed in a specific first area (specific location) of the liquid crystal display device 131, frame lamp, and panel lamp. During the second timing other than the first timing, rainbow illumination is not performed, and illumination with colors other than rainbow illumination is performed. For example, changes in two or more illumination colors, flashing, or changes in the speed of movement or blinking of colors in a predetermined direction are performed. On the other hand, when it is neither the first nor the second timing, monochromatic illumination or illumination with multiple colors that do not appear to be rainbow (biased towards similar colors or with a small number of colors) is performed.

Next, when the title display is executed, the frame lamps and panel lamps perform a rainbow-colored effect through moving illumination, with the illumination moving relatively slowly. The main display device 131 also displays a rainbow-colored background and objects. The second region is a region that includes at least a part of the light-emitting means that is different from the first region.
Next, when displaying warnings such as an addiction prevention indicator, the rainbow light display is restricted. Specifically, it may be a single color or multiple colors that do not appear rainbow-colored, or flashing lights and color changes may be restricted. The primary purpose of the light display at this time is to convey information to the player, so compared to the third timing during the demo video display period mentioned above, for example, the speed of color movement, the speed of flashing, and the range of brightness are smaller.

Furthermore, the lamps (frames, special effects, buttons) are provided with a first and second region, and the lighting patterns in the first and second regions can be different. Examples of the first region include the game board (board lamps) and special effects, while examples of the second region include the frame (lamp) and special effects buttons. For example, in the waiting state, at the first timing described above, the first region can flash, and the second region can move and light up.

The rainbow effect is restricted when warnings are displayed using specific text during customer-waiting demo sequences. On the other hand, the rainbow light effect may be displayed not only when the machine name or manufacturer logo is displayed (including text-based displays), but also when certain characters are displayed.
In other words, in a customer-waiting demo presentation, the rainbow effect may be enabled when the first specific information (text display such as manufacturer name, character display) is displayed, and the rainbow effect may be disabled when the second specific information (anti-addiction display) which includes text different from the first specific information is displayed.

Furthermore, restrictions on the execution of the rainbow effect include not only the fact that the rainbow effect itself is not performed, but also, for example, (a) single-color illumination/flashing (white) illumination, (b) restrictions on color changes and transitions, and (c) restrictions on flash effects. If the lamp is divided into a first area and a second area, for example, the first area may be configured to illuminate as described in (a) through (c) above. As a supplement to (a) above, white illumination may be performed in the first area and blue illumination in the second area.
Furthermore, the ease with which the rainbow light display is executed may differ between the first specific information and the second specific information (including text). When the anti-immersion display (specific text information) is displayed, the execution of the flash effect may be restricted.

(Example of rainbow-colored effect during volume control display, etc.)
Referring to Figure 17, an example of a rainbow-colored effect during volume control display and other operations by the gaming machine 100 will be explained. Figure 17 shows an example of a light-emitting effect when the volume control display is executed while waiting for customers.

As shown in Figure 17, when the special symbol display stops and, for example, the number of reserved balls (such as the first reserved ball) is "0" and no game balls enter the first starting slot 112, the machine enters a waiting state.

As shown in Figure 17(a), first, during the variation of the special symbols, the main display device 131 displays a background image, such as a Mode A background image, which scrolls horizontally, and a state in front of it where two of the three performance symbols 50a are displayed stopped and one performance symbol 50a is displayed scrolling. Also, the image of the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 50c. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a scrolling state. At this time, although not shown, a rainbow-colored effect can be performed using the panel lamps, frame lamps, and the main display device 131.

As shown in Figure 17(b), the rainbow effect is not executed immediately after the "losing" stop display. If there is no winning entry into the first start slot 112, the display of the effect symbols 50a on the main display device 131 will remain still for a certain period (e.g., 120 seconds) without scrolling or any other action. During the demo waiting period, the main display device 131 displays, for example, a horizontally scrolling background image and three effect symbols 50a stopped in front of it. In addition, the first reserve icon display area 50b, where the first reserve icon HI is not displayed, and the icon display area 50c, where the image of the icon TI is not displayed, are displayed in front of the background image. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is displayed stopped at a number corresponding to the combination of numbers of the three effect symbols 50a that are stopped.

As shown in Figure 17(c), when the performance control stick 136 is operated, a sound adjustment image OC is displayed in front of the background image and the three performance symbols 50a, indicating that the volume of the background music, etc., can be adjusted. When this OC is displayed, the rainbow effect is not performed by the panel lamps, frame lamps, main display device 131, etc.
In addition to the volume control image, a screen brightness control display may also be shown. Furthermore, an adjustment display for adjusting the effect level may also be shown. Even when such displays are shown, the rainbow effect will not be executed.

As shown in Figure 17(d), after the sound adjustment image OC is no longer displayed, a customer waiting demo is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, a rainbow-colored effect can be performed using the panel lamps, frame lamps, main display device 131, etc.
Furthermore, volume control image overclocking and screen brightness adjustment displays may be executed even while the volume is fluctuating. In such cases, the system may be configured not to restrict the rainbow effect.

(Example 1 of rainbow-colored effect during a variation effect)
Referring to Figure 18, an example of a rainbow-colored effect during the execution of a variation effect by the gaming machine 100 will be explained. Figure 18 shows an example of an effect during a variation that results in a jackpot after a reach.

As shown in Figure 18(a), first, when the special symbol display starts to change, the three performance symbols 50a also start to change.
As shown in Figure 18(b), a pre-reach notification sequence begins. During this notification sequence, a rainbow-colored effect using frame lights, etc., can be performed.

In Figures 18(c) to (e), the pre-announcement sequence begins after a reach. During the pre-announcement sequence, a rainbow effect is performed.
In Figure 18(c), the left and right display symbols 50a stop at the same number, and only the central display symbol 50a changes, resulting in a reach state. In the reach state, it may develop into an SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.

In Figure 18(d), the lower mechanism unit 156 moves to the performance position, and a rainbow-colored effect is executed, with multiple light-emitting LEDs on the lower mechanism unit 156 flashing. The rainbow-colored effect is also executed on the main display device 131, and a "kyuin kyuin" sound effect is output from the sound output device 331. Furthermore, a sword hilt unit 135 (not shown) vibrates via a button drive device. Finally, the reduced performance symbol 50a in the upper left corner of the main display device 131 temporarily stops at "5," resulting in the three performance symbols 50a temporarily stopping at the winning combination ("555").

In Figure 18(e), the performance symbol 50a is then displayed in a temporarily stopped state. The first reserved icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c where the icon TI is displayed are then redisplayed. After the temporary stop display, a confirmation animation is executed in which the performance symbol 50a stops. After this, the game proceeds to the jackpot round.

By the way, as shown in Figure 18(b-1), in the pre-reach予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figure 18(b), a rainbow-color effect R1 may be executed, in which the edge of the display screen of the main display device 131 is displayed in rainbow colors.

(Example 2 of the rainbow-colored effect during the variation effect)
Figure 19 shows an example of a spinning animation that occurs after a reach (a near-win) and results in a big win.
As shown in Figure 19(a), first, after the special symbol variation display has started, the variation display of the three performance symbols 50a begins at the same time as the variation display of the three performance symbols 50a begins.
As shown in Figure 19(b), when a ball enters the first starting slot 112, a hold indicator is added to the first hold icon display area 50b. At this time, as a pre-announcement, the hold indicator is displayed in rainbow colors. This rainbow-colored hold indicator is an example of a rainbow-colored effect (Rainbow-colored effect R5).

As shown in Figure 19(c), the rainbow-colored hold indicator continues to be displayed until the hold becomes a hold. The display of the hold may change when the hold becomes a hold, or before or after that.
As shown in Figure 19(d), a pre-reach予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is performed in which a character CR and dialogue SE are displayed. During this pre-announcement effect, a rainbow effect is performed by the frame lamps and board lamps.
As shown in Figure 19(e), the left and right display symbols 50a stop changing at the same number, resulting in a reach state where only the central display symbol 50a changes.
As shown in Figure 19(f), as a pre-announcement effect after a reach, a light guide panel unit 181 is displayed in front of the display screen of the main display device 131. Here, a rainbow-colored effect is performed in which the light guide panel unit 181 flashes in rainbow colors.

In Figure 19(g), the lower mechanism unit 156 moves to the performance position, and multiple light-emitting LEDs provided on the lower mechanism unit 156 flash. At the same time, the main display device 131 displays a rainbow light, and the sound effect "kyuin kyuin" is output from the sound output device 331. At this time, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134 execute a rainbow color effect. Here, a rainbow color effect is executed by moving light. Note that this operation is faster than, for example, the moving light effect in the customer waiting effect in Figure 14(f).
In Figure 19(h), the sequence from temporary stop to confirmation is executed, similar to Figure 14(h). The first side display device 132 and the second side display device 133 perform a rainbow-colored effect, but the lower mechanism unit 156 does not emit rainbow-colored light.

By the way, when displaying the number as the symbol 50a in the confirmation animation, the main display device 131 may or may not perform a rainbow animation.
As shown in Figures 20(a), (b-1), and (c-1), for example, the display pattern of the rainbow effect may be changed depending on whether the stop symbol "2" is displayed or, as shown in Figures 20(a), (b-2), and (c-2), for example, whether the stop symbol "7" is displayed. Figures 20(c-1) and (c-2) show examples where the presence or absence of the rainbow effect, in which the edge of the display screen is displayed in rainbow colors, differs. In addition to this, for example, the speed of the moving light emission, the number of light emission means that perform the rainbow effect, and the number and presence or absence of rainbow effects by dialogue, cut-ins, characters, etc., shown on the main display device 131 may be changed.

Furthermore, Figure 21 shows a symbol enlargement effect (emphasis effect). Symbol enlargement refers to a display mode where the central effect symbol 50a occupies a larger area on the screen than the symbols to its left and right, and is displayed in a display area so large that the rainbow light effect image cannot be displayed on the screen. In Figure 21(b), the central effect symbol 50a hides (restricts the display of) the rainbow effect (e.g., the rainbow color of the border) displayed on the screen. This symbol enlargement effect is a display mode in which the effect symbol 50a is gradually enlarged, and is larger than the enlarged display size when a reach is established or the display size during symbol variation before a reach. Afterward, as shown in Figure 21(c), the size of the effect symbol 50a returns to its original size and it is displayed in a stopped state. At this time, the rainbow effect may be executed by the stage back display device 141 (panel lamp). The rainbow effect may also be executed by the main display device 131 or the frame lamp.

(Example of the effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the display is fluctuating)
Referring to Figure 22, an example of a rainbow-colored effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the gaming machine 100 will be explained. Figure 22 is an example of a light-up effect when a so-called "decisive" effect is executed.
As shown in Figure 22(a), a normal variation effect is being performed in which the effect symbol 50a is displayed in a variable manner.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 22(b), a reach animation is performed in which the "2" symbol 50a is displayed as a stop (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display area of the variable display area, while the variable display area of the variable display area of the variable display area is displayed as a change.

As shown in Figure 22(c), when the game progresses to an SP reach, a scene begins in which ally character C2 and enemy character C3 confront each other.

As shown in Figure 22(d), after the SPSP Reach animation progresses, the SPSP Reach BGM output stops at the final stage of the animation, and the decisive animation begins. At this point, a prompt image prompting the operation of the sword handle button (animation button) on the sword handle unit 135 is displayed, and the validity period for operating the sword handle button (10 seconds) begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image SSG resembling the sword handle button is displayed on the main display device 131, the SPSP Reach BGM output stops (is not output), and the sound effect "Press" is output from the sound output device 331. At this time, a reduced animation symbol 50a is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the upper left corner of the main display device 131.

In Figure 22(e), if the sword handle button on the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the operation validity period (10 seconds), a success animation is performed that indicates that a jackpot game will be executed. Specifically, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the stage back display device 141 perform a rainbow-colored animation with flashing lights. In addition, the main display device 131 performs a rainbow-colored animation (R6) using an image, and the lower mechanism unit 156 moves in front of it. The lower mechanism unit 156 also performs a rainbow-colored animation.
(f) In Figure 22(f), the rainbow effect is then performed using moving light. Here, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the stage back display device 141 move in a clockwise direction around the main display device 131, moving in color. The main display device 131 displays a successful outcome image (not shown), and the sound effect "kyuin kyuin" is output from the sound output device 331. At this time, the rainbow effect of the movable mechanism is stopped. If the sword hilt unit 135 is not operated during the operation valid period, the above operation prompt image SSG disappears and the successful outcome animation is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 22(g), the victory of ally character C2 against enemy character C3 suggests a jackpot, and the fluctuating display of the animation symbols 50a stops in a combination that indicates a jackpot (in this case, "222").
At this point, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the stage back display device 141 are performing a rainbow effect, while all other light-emitting means have stopped performing the rainbow effect.
Then, as shown in Figure 22(h), the animation pattern 50a returns from its reduced size to its original size and stops in the center of the liquid crystal display device 131 (main liquid crystal).

(Example of a sequence of events when a winning combination is guaranteed)
Referring to Figure 23, an example of the rainbow-colored effect in the case of a guaranteed jackpot reach by the gaming machine 100 will be explained. Figure 23 shows an example of the flashing effect in the case of a guaranteed jackpot reach, and for comparison, an example of the flashing effect in the case of a non-jackpot (miss).

As shown in Figure 23(a), when the first and second hold icons are not displayed, that is, when no hold memories are stored, a variation effect is performed to change the display of the effect symbol 50a.
As shown in Figure 23(b), a reach animation is performed in which the "2" animation symbol 50a is displayed as a stop (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display symbol 50a that was previously displayed as a variable symbol 50a, while the animation symbol 50a is displayed as a variable symbol in the central variable display area.
Figure 23(c) shows that, as a preview effect, the dialogue sound effect "Big Chance!!" is displayed on the main display device 131 with a cut-in of the dialogue. In this effect, the edges of the dialogue are outlined in rainbow colors (rainbow effect R7). When this effect is displayed, it is a confirmed effect that suggests that the spin in question is a big win spin.
As shown in Figure 23(d), after a reach animation using, for example, a movable mechanism or the main display device 131, the animation symbol 50a stops and displays in a manner that suggests a jackpot. In this case, a rainbow-colored animation is performed using frame lamps, panel lamps, etc.

Next, regarding the case where a jackpot is not achieved, we will explain the configuration when the pre-announcement animation is different from that shown in Figure 23(b).
In Figure 23(e), the same dialogue sound effect as in Figure 23(c) is displayed as a preview effect, but the rainbow effect is not performed on the background of the dialogue. In other words, in Figure 23(e), a preview effect is performed that has a lower reliability in triggering the special game than the rainbow effect.
As shown in Figure 23(f), after a reach animation using, for example, a movable mechanism or the main display device 131, the animation symbol 50a stops and displays in a manner that suggests a loss.

(Example of a gameplay sequence during a jackpot)
Referring to Figure 24, an example of a performance during a jackpot game using the gaming machine 100 will be explained. Figure 24 shows an example of a light-up performance after the performance symbols 50a stop on a jackpot symbol and the jackpot game begins.

As shown in Figure 24(a), during a jackpot game, the main display device 131 first displays a background for the special effect, and a right-hand image MG1 is displayed with a rainbow effect (rainbow effect R8) around the edge. The rainbow effect R8 is partially obscured by image MG1. The frame lamps and panel lamps can also display the rainbow effect, and the audio output device 331 outputs background music for the jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 24(b), during round play (special play), a small right-hand image MG is displayed along with the background visuals, and a rainbow-colored effect is executed by the main display device 131, frame lamps, and board lamps.

As shown in Figure 24(c), when a specific payout is displayed, the numbers and other elements are shown in a rainbow pattern. These specific payouts are not limited to 5000 balls; they can be "2500 balls" or "10000 balls," etc. Other numbers (e.g., 3000 balls) will not display in the rainbow pattern. In other words, the rainbow effect is less likely to occur with other numbers. Note that payout displays like those in Figure 24(c) are particularly likely to occur during consecutive wins. The value of the specific payout can be set arbitrarily.

As shown in Figure 24(d), when a predetermined round is completed, text is displayed. This text may be a warning such as a reminder to take your prepaid card or a theft warning. When such text is displayed, the rainbow effect is restricted. That is, the rainbow effect is either not performed, or it is performed in a more subdued manner compared to when text is displayed in other states.
Next, as shown in Figure 24(e), the model name, manufacturer name, etc., may be displayed. In this case, a rainbow color display may be performed.

As shown in Figure 24(f), the time-saving mode (probability change/non-probability change) then begins. The main display device 131's screen prominently displays "Right-Handed Play" (Right-Handed Play Image MG1). A rainbow-colored background (Rainbow-Colored Effect R8) is displayed, partially obscured by the "Right-Handed Play" display. The form of this rainbow-colored effect may be determined according to the probability change/non-probability change mode, or it may be determined according to the stopping symbols in the jackpot confirmation effect.

As shown in Figure 24(g), a time-saving game is then played. During this time, a rainbow-colored animation can be played when a reach animation is performed or when a jackpot is won. The form of the rainbow-colored animation at this time is not particularly limited. After that, if a jackpot is won during the time-saving game, the jackpot game is played again.
If the predetermined number of fluctuations are performed without a jackpot, the results screen will be displayed as shown in Figure 24(h). At this time, a rainbow-colored effect may be performed. For example, the text or background may be displayed in rainbow colors. In addition, the display pattern of the rainbow-colored effect may be changed depending on the number of consecutive wins or the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, warnings and other text displays are only executed during the ending (ED) of the initial jackpot game. Subsequently, during consecutive jackpot games (ED), the anti-gambling warning, prepaid card reminder, and theft warning are not displayed, and therefore the rainbow effect is not executed.

By the way, regarding the display of winnings during consecutive wins, either a type (A) that continuously displays the added winnings, or a type (B) that displays the winnings when a specific number of winnings is reached, may be implemented. In type (A), the rainbow display may be restricted when a specific number of winnings is reached. Furthermore, both (A) and (B) may be implemented. Also, the rainbow display may be more likely to be displayed when a predetermined display is executed in the consecutive win indication or MAX payout indication sequences.

(Example of initial operation animation)
Referring to Figure 25, an example of a performance during the initial operation of the gaming machine 100 will be explained.
As shown in Figure 25(a), when the main board is powered on, the display screen shows a power-on message such as "Power ON," and the first side display device 132, second side display device 133, upper display device 134, stage back display device 141, etc., light up. At this time, the display may be illuminated in a rainbow-like pattern.
As shown in Figure 25(b), the initial operation of the movable mechanism is then performed. Although only the lower mechanism unit 156 is shown, the upper mechanism unit 154 also operates sequentially or simultaneously. At this time, the rainbow effect by the movable mechanism does not necessarily have to be performed.
As shown in Figure 25(c), after the main display device 131 or the movable mechanism has performed a specific operation, the main display device 131 displays a losing stop screen.
As shown in Figure 25(d), after a certain period of time has elapsed, the logo is displayed and a customer waiting demo is revealed.

[Characteristics of the light emission patterns of gaming machines]
(Characteristics of the light emission mode 1)

As shown in Figures 14 to 25, the gaming machine 100 can perform a rainbow-colored effect using light-emitting means provided on the game board unit 102 (first region), namely board lamps (stage back display device 141, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, upper mechanism unit 154, lower mechanism unit 156), and light-emitting means provided on the glass frame 150 (second region), namely frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided on the glass frame 150). The gaming machine 100 can perform a first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamps and board lamps work together) that displays light in the first and second regions, and a second effect that displays a rainbow light display in a different manner from the first effect. For example, the first effect may involve executing the same rainbow-colored effect in two areas, while the second effect may involve a different light emission effect in one of the areas (including cases where the rainbow-colored effect is not executed in either area).

Furthermore, regarding the first effect, which displays light in the first and second regions, as shown in Figure 26, there are two patterns of rainbow-colored effects that can be selected when the machine is waiting for a customer, and nine patterns of rainbow-colored effects that can be selected during the variation effect. In other words, there are more patterns of rainbow-colored light-up effects when the machine is performing the variation effect than when the game machine 100 is waiting for a customer.
By enabling such effects, the game can enhance players' interest in the game during the execution of these effects, providing different experiences from those during the waiting period.

In this context, "waiting for customers" refers to both the first state, as shown in Figure 14(h), where the display remains stopped without executing a variable display, and the second state, as shown in Figures 14(a) to (i), where a customer-waiting demo is being performed. It is also possible that the number of rainbow-colored light emission patterns is greater when the variable display is being performed than when the gaming machine 100 is in either the first or second state (waiting for customers).

Specifically, during the variation effect, it is possible to perform, for example, a rainbow effect (first effect) in which the panel lamp and frame lamp work together to move colors, as shown in Figure 12(b), and a rainbow effect (second effect) in which the panel lamp and frame lamp operate separately.
Furthermore, in the case of moving light effects, for example, if the direction of movement is the same but the speed of movement is different, or if the duration of the moving light effects is different, these may be counted as different effect patterns. Similarly, differences in the number of rays emitted when emitting rainbow-colored light radially, differences in the manner of rainbow-colored effects when the hold changes, and differences in the colors when it appears rainbow-colored can also be counted as effect patterns.

Examples of the first type of effect include effects where each color rotates and moves in the same direction, effects where the colors of adjacent components and the frame become the same, and effects where the colors of adjacent parts of different light-emitting elements such as frame lamps, panel lamps, and sword handle unit 135 (effect button) become similar. Examples of the second type of effect include effects where each element exhibits different light-emitting patterns, such as flashing or moving.

Furthermore, while the variable display effect is running, both the first and second effects described above can be executed. However, while waiting for customers, only the effect that activates either the panel lamp or the frame lamp may be executed.

Furthermore, the first region is not limited to the game board unit 102, and the second region is not limited to the glass frame 150. The first region may be a part of the game board unit 102, or it may include parts of both the game board unit 102 and 150. Also, for example, the light-emitting means provided in the first region and the light-emitting means provided in the second region may be any two or more combinations of the board lamps (stage back display device 141, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, upper mechanism unit 154, lower mechanism unit 156) and frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided on the glass frame 150). In other words, it may be a combination of board lamps such as the upper mechanism unit 154 and the light guide plate panel unit 181, or a combination of any of the frame lamps and the liquid crystal display device 131. Also, the main display device 131 may be in the first region or the second region. Furthermore, the above-described distinction between regions does not have to be distinguished by the device. For example, a portion of the display screen of the main display device 131 may correspond to the first region, and another portion may correspond to the second region. Furthermore, in a light-emitting means equipped with multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs), the regions may be distinguished based on the number of specific light-emitting elements. Also, in the first and second performances, there may naturally be overlapping portions between the first and second regions.

Furthermore, the number of lighting effects can be greater while waiting for customers than while the variable effect is being executed.
Furthermore, in the above example, the number of rainbow-colored light emission patterns was compared between the waiting state (first state) and the variation performance (second state), but comparisons can also be made in other states. Examples of the first state include, for example, during a jackpot game when the first stopping symbol (a win with 2), during the execution of a development performance, normal gameplay (non-probability change gameplay), and probability change gameplay. Examples of the second state include during a jackpot game when the second stopping symbol (a win with 7), during the execution of a decisive performance, probability change gameplay, and normal gameplay (non-probability change gameplay). These can be combined arbitrarily. Examples of combinations include, for instance, "a jackpot game when the first stopping symbol is 2 (a win) and a jackpot game when the second stopping symbol is 7 (a win),""a development sequence in progress and a decisive sequence in progress,""a normal game state (non-probability change game state) and a probability change game state," and "a probability change game state / a normal game state (non-probability change game state)."

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 2)
As shown in Figures 18, 19, and 24, the gaming machine 100 can perform a rainbow-colored display using light-emitting means provided on the game board unit 102 (first region), namely board lamps (stage back display device 141, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, upper mechanism unit 154, lower mechanism unit 156), and light-emitting means provided on the glass frame 150 (second region), namely frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided on the glass frame 150). The gaming machine 100 can perform a first performance (for example, a performance in which the frame lamps and board lamps work together) that displays light in the first and second regions, and a second performance that displays a rainbow light display in a different manner from the first performance. For example, the first effect may involve performing the same rainbow effect in two areas, while the second effect may involve a different light emission effect in one of the areas (including cases where the rainbow effect is not performed in either area).

Furthermore, regarding the first effect, which displays light in the first and second regions, as shown in Figure 26, there are nine rainbow-colored effects that can be selected for the variation effect, and three rainbow-colored effects that can be selected during a jackpot game. In other words, the number of light-emitting patterns for the first effect described above is greater when the variation effect is being executed than when the game machine 100 is in the middle of a jackpot game.
The ability to execute such effects allows for a wide variety of effects during the execution of the variable effects, raising the player's expectation of a big win and increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, as explained in Feature 1 of the above-described light emission mode, the first and second regions are not limited to the game board unit 102 and the glass frame 150; they may be regions that are at least partially different and equipped with light emission means that do not overlap in at least part.

For example, if the display screen of the main display device 131 is included in the first or second region, then as a rainbow-colored effect during the execution of a variation effect, for example, a hold icon, an operation suggestion effect for the sword hilt unit 135, dialogue, effects, text overlays, titles, a step-up frame, etc., can be displayed in a manner that appears rainbow-colored, and the number of such executable effect displays becomes the number of effect patterns.
Furthermore, the rainbow-colored effects during jackpot gameplay include rainbow-colored displays such as the display of the number of balls dispensed on the main display device 131 and the rainbow-colored display of the frame. The method for counting the number of effect patterns can be the same as for the light emission mode 1 described above.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 3)
The gaming machine 100 includes a second light-emitting means provided on the special features (upper special feature unit 154, lower special feature unit 156) and a first light-emitting means provided elsewhere. As shown in Figures 18 and 22, the machine is capable of performing a first effect in which two specific light-emitting means, such as a frame lamp and a special feature, simultaneously produce a rainbow effect, and a second effect in which only one of the two light-emitting means produces a rainbow effect. The second effect includes a state in which one of the light-emitting means does not produce a rainbow effect, and a state in which it emits light but in a position that is not visible to the player (for example, a hidden position). In other words, the second effect is an effect in which only one of the two specific light-emitting means is visible to the player.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, within a single variation sequence, the first sequence is more likely to be executed after a reach (second state) than before a reach (first state). Specifically, the rainbow-colored effect caused by the mechanism is restricted before a reach, and as a result, the execution of the first sequence is restricted.
The ability to execute such effects allows the rainbow effect to be more strongly displayed after a reach, thereby strongly suggesting the possibility of a big win and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the special feature is not limited to the lower special feature unit 156, but may also be the upper special feature unit 154. Also, in the first or second performance, multiple special features may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate.
Furthermore, the aforementioned features are not limited to movable features such as the lower feature unit 156 and the upper feature unit 154, but may also be other features. For example, they may be features composed of LED light-emitting elements provided on movable members such as the center feature, the start opening, and the prize entry opening.

The examples of the first and second states mentioned above are not limited to before and after a reach. Examples of the first state include a normal reach state, before a reach during a spin, development of a normal reach, a losing spin, and a normal gameplay state. Examples of the second state include an SP reach state, during a jackpot game, development of a reach that guarantees a jackpot, a jackpot spin, and a favorable gameplay state (time-saving/probability change). These can be combined arbitrarily. Examples of combinations include a normal reach state (first state) and an SP reach state (second state), before a reach during a spin (first state) and during a jackpot game (second state), development of a normal reach (first state) and development of a reach that guarantees a jackpot (second state), a losing spin (first state) and a jackpot spin (second state), and a normal gameplay state (first state) and a favorable gameplay state (second state). The second state should make it easier for the first performance to be executed than the first state.

By the way, as an example of the first effect, a rainbow effect using a movable mechanism and frame lamps is shown, in which case the movable mechanism does not light up in the second effect. The second effect is exemplified by a rainbow effect using the main display device 131 alone (for example, when the reserved symbols are displayed in rainbow colors due to a reserved symbol change effect).
An example of the first production is a combination of one or more of the following: frame lamp, panel lamp, sword handle unit 135, light guide plate panel unit 181, and main display device 131, and a movable mechanism.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 4)
The gaming machine 100 can perform rainbow-color effects using multiple lighting modes, such as moving lights and flashes. It also has a first light-emitting area (e.g., frame lamps) and a second light-emitting area (e.g., board lamps) capable of performing rainbow-color effects.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19(d), the main display device 131 can display a first set of characters (cut-in effects, dialogue, etc.) at a first timing, such as during the execution of a variation effect, and a second set of characters (post-jackpot warning, logo, cheat warning, machine name, manufacturer name) at a second timing, as shown in Figure 24(d). Here, the second timing is a predetermined timing within a specific period, which is from the start of an effect during special gameplay (jackpot effect) until the start of the next variation display. During the aforementioned specific period, when the second set of characters is displayed, the rainbow effect of the frame lamps and panel lamps is restricted.

By enabling such effects, the text displayed after a special game (jackpot game) begins can be made to the player to recognize important text such as warnings, and the text display as an effect can have a significant visual impact on the player, increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, when a third text display (such as "Victory" in Figure 22(g)) is displayed on the main display device 131 at a third timing, such as during a variation effect, the rainbow effect does not need to be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission pattern 5)
As shown in Figures 11 and 12, the gaming machine 100 can produce different types of rainbow-colored effects using two or more light-emitting effects means, such as the frame lamp and the sword handle unit 135. Specific rainbow-colored effects include a rainbow-colored effect using flashes, a rainbow-colored effect where colors move (moving light emission), and a rainbow-colored effect where colors are displayed without moving (for example, seven colors that look like a rainbow are displayed without moving).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 27, in this embodiment, four patterns of rainbow color effects are executed during the rainbow color effect after the final effect. Here, the probability that the flashing effect (third effect) following the rainbow color effect (second effect) with moving colors is selected is 10%, and the probability that the second effect is executed following the third effect is 90% (30% x 3). In other words, in the rainbow color effect after the start of the final effect, the pattern in which the rainbow color effect with moving colors is executed after the flashing effect is more likely to be executed than the light emission pattern in which the rainbow color effect with moving colors is executed after the flashing effect.
The ability to implement such effects allows for a stronger rainbow-colored visual effect when a jackpot is achieved, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the rainbow-colored effect after the finishing move may be configured to start after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the sword hilt unit 135.
Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 20, the rainbow-colored effect during a jackpot may change depending on the winning stop symbol (for example, "2", "5", "7", etc.) and the lighting pattern (content of the rainbow-colored effect).

Furthermore, effects that display colors without movement include, for example, effects where colors are displayed without changing, or effects where a light source flashes multiple colors or changes the intensity of the light, making it appear as a rainbow to the player.
Furthermore, the combination of two or more light-emitting effects means is not particularly limited, and any two combinations from among the light-emitting means (main display device 131, stage back display device 141, sword hilt unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134, 3D display, special effects, etc.) is acceptable.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 6)
The gaming machine 100 can perform a rainbow effect (first effect) in which the colors move slowly, as shown in Figure 14 during the waiting period, and can also perform a rainbow effect (second effect) in which the colors move quickly, as shown in Figure 22 during the SP reach. As shown in Figure 28, the number of combination patterns of the rainbow effect when the second effect is performed is greater than when the first effect is performed, in terms of the rainbow effect by the main display device 131 and the rainbow effect by the frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided on the glass frame 150). The speed of color movement is the speed at which the moving light is performed by the main display device 131 or the frame lamps. In other words, it is not necessary for multiple light-emitting means to perform moving light. Of course, multiple light-emitting means may perform moving light.
The ability to implement such effects allows the rainbow-colored effect to be more pronounced when the expected value of a big win is high, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

The examples of timing for executing the first and second effects described above are not limited to waiting for customers and during SP reach. Examples of timing for executing the first effect include when the stopping symbol displays "2", during a normal reach, a losing spin, and during normal gameplay. Examples of timing for executing the second effect include when the stopping symbol displays "7", during an SP reach, during a jackpot spin, and during a favorable gameplay state (time-saving/probability-changing). These can be combined arbitrarily. Examples of combinations include when the stopping symbol of effect symbol 50a displays "2" (first effect) and when the stopping symbol displays "7" (second effect), during a normal reach (first effect) and an SP reach (second effect), during a losing spin (first effect) and a jackpot spin (second effect), and during normal gameplay (first effect) and a favorable gameplay state (second effect).

Furthermore, in the first and second performances described above, the first performance may have a greater number of combination patterns of the rainbow effect by the main display device 131 and the rainbow effect of the frame lamps.
The number of combination patterns refers to the number of combinations that are actually possible when the rainbow effect of the main display device 131 and the rainbow effect of the frame lamp are executed at the same time. If the rainbow effect is not executed simultaneously by the main display device 131 and the frame lamp, the number of patterns for that effect will be 0.

Furthermore, the light-emitting means used in combination with the main display device 131 to produce the rainbow-colored effect in the first performance is not limited to frame lamps, but may also be panel lamps.

The first effect is one in which the color changes faster than the second effect. In other words, the second effect is one in which, from the player's perspective, any given color appears to move relatively quickly. When the second effect is executed, the color switching (change to the next color) cycle of each light-emitting element (LED, etc.) is accelerated. Note that the lighting patterns of the first and second effects may be reversed.

Furthermore, in a variation effect that performs a rainbow-colored light emission at an early cycle, or after such a variation effect, the system may be configured to display a confirmed stop for the effect symbol 50a. Also, when the second effect is executed, it may include a rainbow-colored effect similar to the first effect. In other words, the first effect is a rainbow-colored effect without the execution of the second effect.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 7)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 27, in the rainbow effect after the winning effect, the flash (second effect using the second light pattern) is executed first, and effects other than the flash (first effect using the first light pattern) are more likely to occur.
The ability to implement such effects allows for a stronger rainbow-colored visual effect when a jackpot is achieved, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Examples of the first type of effect include moving light effects where colors move, and effects where colors change slowly without moving.
The second effect is not limited to flashes; it may also be a type of light emission (such as blinking or flickering) where the intensity of the light changes at a longer interval than a flash. In this case, the configuration may involve a slow, gradual change in light intensity, or it may involve a blinking light emission.
Furthermore, the rainbow-colored effect after the finishing move may be configured to start after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the sword hilt unit 135.
In addition, in the gaming machine 100, the lighting pattern (content of the rainbow effect) may change depending on the winning symbol (for example, "2", "5", "7", etc.) as a rainbow effect during a jackpot.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 8)
In the gaming machine 100, the number of patterns for the color switching cycle (lighting pattern) is greater for the rainbow effect (first effect) performed during the execution of the variation effect, as shown in Figure 19, than for the rainbow effect (second effect) performed while waiting for customers, as shown in Figure 14.
The ability to execute such effects allows for a wide variety of effects during the execution of the variable effects, raising the player's expectation of a big win and increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, the number of patterns referred to here is not limited to the color switching cycle; as long as the light emits in a manner that appears rainbow-colored, various patterns as described above can be employed.

Furthermore, the rainbow color effect by the main display device 131 may involve making objects such as characters and dialogue rainbow-colored, making the entire screen rainbow-colored, or making a specific area (e.g., the edge of the screen) rainbow-colored. Each of these can be counted as a different pattern. Also, if the color switching cycle differs, for example, flashing, blinking at a normal speed, or blinking with a slow color change, these are also considered different patterns. Note that since the color transition effect essentially involves switching the colors of the light-emitting elements, a fast color transition speed corresponds to a short color switching cycle.

For example, in the second animation sequence performed while waiting for customers, comparing the start-up lamp (a lamp that can light up in response to a win, based on changes in the hold icon) and the frame lamp, the start-up lamp may not emit rainbow-colored light, but the frame lamp may be configured to light up.

The following are examples of variations in which the first performance is executed: non-reach variation, reach variation, pre-reach variation in reach variation, post-reach variation in reach variation, variation in normal gameplay, and variation in advantageous state (time reduction/probability variation).
The second performance is not limited to the waiting state. For example, if a performance suggesting a probability increase is being executed, the second performance may occur during a jackpot game.

During customer waiting periods, brightness and volume adjustments are available when the customer waiting demo is not running. However, during customer waiting demos, when manufacturer logos, immersion indicators, etc., are displayed, the screen display for adjusting brightness, etc., and the rainbow color effect are also restricted. In other words, both the rainbow color effect and adjustment displays are restricted, especially during the aforementioned displays in customer waiting demos. Even with these restrictions, the reserved numbers and small symbols will still be displayed, but they will not display the rainbow color.

Furthermore, the light-emitting means for executing the first effect may be any of the following: frame lamps, panel lamps, main display device 131, etc. Also, the light-emitting means for executing the second effect may be frame lamps only, panel lamps only, or the main display device 131 only.

(Characteristics of the light emission pattern 9)
In the gaming machine 100, the rainbow effect can be performed in two ways: a first effect involving the movement of colors, and a second effect that does not involve movement of colors. The second effect includes color changes, flashing, and other effects that do not involve movement of colors.
Then, as shown in Figure 20, after the start of the winning animation, a rainbow-colored animation is performed in a manner corresponding to the winning symbol (stopping symbols, such as 7, 5, or 2). For example, either the first animation or the second animation may be selectively executed depending on the winning symbol. Alternatively, the combination of the first and second animations may be changed depending on the winning symbol. For example, if the winning symbol is "7", all of the flashing, blinking, and movement animations are performed, but if the winning symbol is "2", only the flashing and movement animations are performed, and the blinking animation is not performed.
The ability to implement such effects provides a significant visual impact to players who have hit the jackpot, and also allows them to anticipate profits corresponding to the jackpot stopping symbols (stop display), thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns may be configured to differ depending on the period during which a jackpot occurs and the pre-jackpot animations. For example, the lighting patterns may differ between a jackpot from a normal state and a jackpot from a probability-increasing state. Also, the lighting patterns may differ depending on whether or not a promotion animation is performed.

Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be altered depending on the winning symbol or other reasons that affect the content of the special game (number of rounds, presence or absence of a probability increase, etc.). For example, if a "2" win results in a 4-round special game, the rainbow effect performed in the 4th round may be relatively less flashy (e.g., moving slowly, fewer light-emitting means used) and shorter in duration. On the other hand, if a "7" win results in a 10-round special game (e.g., when the next jackpot is practically guaranteed), a relatively flashy and longer rainbow effect may be performed.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 10)
The gaming machine 100 can perform rainbow-color effects using multiple lighting modes, such as moving lights and flashes. It also has a first light-emitting area (e.g., frame lamps) and a second light-emitting area (e.g., board lamps) capable of performing rainbow-color effects.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19, it is possible to display a first text display (such as cut-in effects or dialogue) executed at a first timing, for example, during the execution of a variation effect, and a second text display (such as a post-jackpot warning, logo, anti-cheating warning, machine name, or manufacturer name) executed at a second timing, as shown in Figure 24. Here, the second timing refers to a predetermined timing within a specific period, from the start of a customer-waiting effect (customer-waiting demo) until the start of the next variation display.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 19, at a first timing, such as during a variation performance, text display (first text display) such as a cut-in of dialogue text can be performed, and as shown in Figure 14, at a second timing, between the start of the customer waiting demo and the start of the next variation performance, warnings in text such as a warning against excessive gambling, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution regarding contact with movable parts (second text display) can be performed. When text is displayed at this second timing, at least flashy effects such as rapidly moving light, flashes, rapid blinking, and rainbow-colored light effects are restricted. On the other hand, effects that are not restricted include slow moving light and slow blinking. Of course, when text is displayed at the second timing, rainbow-colored effects do not have to be performed.
The ability to implement such visual effects allows players to be alerted to important text displays, such as warnings, and also provides a significant visual impact, thereby enhancing players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, text display can be performed at times other than the first and second timings mentioned above. For example, text indicating that the player can change the performance content (e.g., "Mode change available") can be displayed while waiting for customers or during a variation performance. In addition, when such text display is performed, the rainbow color effect can be restricted.
Furthermore, when a third character display (such as "Victory" in Figure 22(g)) is displayed on the main display device 131 at a third timing, such as during the execution of a variation effect, the rainbow effect does not need to be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 11)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 16, during the customer waiting animation, the execution time of the rainbow-colored animation on the liquid crystal display screen of the main display device 131 is relatively short, while the execution time of the rainbow-colored animation by other light-emitting means (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided on the glass frame 150, stage back display device 141 provided on the game board unit 102, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide plate panel unit 181, upper mechanism unit 154, and lower mechanism unit 156) is relatively long.
In other words, when the gaming machine 100 is performing a customer waiting animation, the duration of the rainbow animation (first animation) using other light-emitting means is longer than the duration of the rainbow animation (second animation) using the main display device 131. The other light-emitting means may be any of the light-emitting means provided on the gaming board unit 102, or any of the light-emitting means provided on the glass frame 150.
The ability to implement such effects allows for attracting players' attention with rainbow-colored effects such as frame lights while waiting for customers, and by using different effects during waiting periods and during operation, it becomes possible to create effects that cannot be seen in waiting demos, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the execution period of the second effect may be 0 seconds. That is, even if the second effect is not executed and the first effect is executed, the execution period of the first effect can still be considered long. However, the execution period of the second effect may be extended in certain effects, such as the rainbow effect at the edge of the display screen of the main display device 131.

Furthermore, the first and second effects described above may be conditional on the movable parts, such as the upper mechanism unit 154 or the lower mechanism unit 156, being in a standby position where they do not perform any movement-based effects. Even when comparing the execution periods under such conditions, the execution period of the first effect will still be longer than that of the second effect.

Incidentally, as shown in Figures 19 and 25, during the execution of the variable effect and the initial operation of the gaming machine 100, the execution period of the effect by the light-emitting means (first effect) may be longer than the execution period of the effect by the liquid crystal display device (second effect). Also, during the execution of the variable effect and the initial operation of the gaming machine 100, the execution period of the effect by the liquid crystal display device (second effect) may be longer than the execution period of the effect by the light-emitting means (first effect).
Furthermore, during the execution of the variable effect, the rainbow effect may be performed in a specific area of the liquid crystal display device 131 (for example, the edge), and during the execution of the initial operation, the rainbow effect may be restricted in the aforementioned specific area.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 12)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figures 19 and 22, during the execution of the changing symbol animation, the execution period of the rainbow animation (second animation) by the main display device 131 (period in Figure 19(g), period in Figures 22(e), (f)) is longer than the execution period of the rainbow animation (first animation) by other light-emitting means (periods in Figures 19(d), (g), (h), and Figures 22(e) to (g)). Specific examples of the second animation include rainbow colors spreading along the edge of the liquid crystal screen, character and dialogue colors, and button animations (operation suggestion animations).

Thus, multiple rainbow-colored light effects can be executed using the liquid crystal. The second effect can be any of these. In other words, the execution time of the first effect is longer than any of the second effects performed by the main display device 131.
By enabling such effects, it is possible to display a rainbow effect for an extended period while simultaneously displaying a variety of images, not limited to rainbow colors, on the main display device 131, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

The first effect allows for the aforementioned flash and moving light effects. In particular, the rainbow effect created by moving light is longer in the first effect than in the second effect.
In other words, the light-emitting effect means is capable of performing a rainbow-colored light-emitting effect, which includes a first light-emitting mode in which the intensity of the light emitted by the colors constituting the rainbow changes over time (flashes), and a second light-emitting mode in which the visible colors move. During the variation of the effect pattern, the period for performing the second light-emitting mode may be longer than the period for performing the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect on the liquid crystal display screen.

Furthermore, the main display device 131 can perform two types of rainbow-colored effects: a rainbow-colored effect by displaying the hold indicator in rainbow colors (first type of rainbow illumination display), and a rainbow-colored effect by other displays (dialogue, cut-ins, background, etc.) (second type of rainbow illumination display). The first effect may have a longer execution period than the second type of rainbow illumination display, but a shorter execution period than the first type of rainbow illumination display. The first effect may also be longer than either the first or second type of effect. Furthermore, the first effect may be longer than the first type of effect, and furthermore, longer than the second type of effect.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 13)
In the gaming machine 100, a rainbow effect is possible in two modes: a flashing mode (first effect) and a non-flashing mode (second effect). Furthermore, as shown in Figures 22 and 27, the flashing mode followed by a non-flashing mode is more likely to occur in the effects after the start of a decisive effect than the flashing mode followed by a flashing mode.
The ability to implement such effects provides a significant visual impact to players who have hit the jackpot, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the second type of performance described above includes various performance modes that involve lighting with a longer (or no) cycle for changing the intensity of the light compared to the first type of performance. For example, the aforementioned moving light, a mode that does not involve moving light or flashing but allows for the simultaneous confirmation of a certain number of colors or more, or a mode in which the color changes over time may also be implemented.
Furthermore, the first and second effects may be performed using any of the multiple light-emitting means. For example, in an effect involving moving light, it may be implemented using some of the light-emitting means, or it may be implemented using a specific combination of light-emitting means.

Furthermore, the light emission patterns of the gaming machine 100 can include, for example, a pattern in which multiple colors constituting a rainbow are visible at a certain timing, or a pattern in which the colors change over time to appear as a rainbow. It may be preferable that the pattern of transitioning from a flash to a non-flash rainbow emission pattern be more likely to occur in the animation after the start of a decisive animation sequence, compared to the pattern of transitioning from a non-flash rainbow emission pattern to a flash rainbow emission pattern.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 14)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figures 22, 24, and 29, in the effects after the start of the decisive effect (effects that are performed during the period from when a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of a special game is started until the next variation display starts), immediately after the variation symbols stop, a rainbow-colored light effect is performed by many light-emitting effect means (disc, mechanism, frame, button, etc.), but the number of light-emitting effect means that perform the rainbow-colored light effect decreases over time.
In other words, the gaming machine 100 is capable of executing the rainbow effect in both the first period after the start of the winning animation and the second period after the first period. Furthermore, the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow light display in the first period is greater than the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow light display in the second period.
The ability to execute such effects allows for a significant visual impact on players during highly exciting moments when climactic sequences are performed, thereby enhancing their enjoyment of the game.

The number of light-emitting means refers to, for example, the number of units of a single light-emitting device that perform synchronized light-emitting operations. For example, even if the first side display device 132 and the second side display device 133 always perform the same type of light-emitting display, they can be counted as two. On the other hand, if, for example, the upper display device 134 performs different light-emitting patterns in multiple areas, the number of those areas may be considered the number of light-emitting means. If the main display device 131 performs multiple different rainbow-color displays, that number may be considered the number of light-emitting means.

Furthermore, the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow light display in the second period may be greater than that in the first period.
By the way, the decisive moment can be defined as the period from when the sword hilt unit 135 is operated (or after a predetermined time has elapsed without operation) until the decisive moment symbol 50a stops.

Figure 29 shows the change in the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow illumination display. For example, comparing the first and second periods, the number is smaller in the second period. Figure 29 also shows an example of a gaming machine configured so that a so-called "V-win" results in a favorable state for the player (for example, a probability change during the time-saving mode after the end of a round of gameplay). In this case, when a V-win occurs, the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow illumination display may increase compared to before. Even in this case, the number of light-emitting means is still smaller compared to the timing immediately after the start of the decisive animation.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 15)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 22, in the effects after the start of the decisive effect (effects that are performed during the period from when a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of a special game is started until the next variation display starts), a rainbow-colored light effect is performed over a wide area immediately after the variation symbols stop, but the area in which the rainbow-colored light effect is performed decreases over time.
In other words, the gaming machine 100 can execute the rainbow effect in both the first period after the start of the winning animation and the second period after the first period. The area where the rainbow light display is executed in the first period is larger than the area where the rainbow light display is executed in the first period. The comparison of the area sizes can be made not only at specific timings but also within the range in which the rainbow light display is executed during the relevant period.
The ability to execute such effects allows for a significant visual impact on players during highly exciting moments when climactic sequences are performed, thereby enhancing their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the light-emitting area in which the rainbow light display is performed during the second period may be larger than that in the first period.
By the way, the area in which the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect is performed is a planar area when viewed from the player's perspective, that is, when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front. The size of the area changes depending on the increase or decrease in the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow light-emitting display. In other words, if the rainbow light-emitting display of a particular light-emitting means is stopped, the above area becomes smaller.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 16)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 23, a rainbow-colored light-up effect with a "short cycle/fast movement" is performed during the jackpot confirmation effect (first state), and as shown in Figure 14, a rainbow-colored light-up effect with a "long cycle/slow movement" is performed during the effect while waiting for customers (second state).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, the jackpot confirmation sequence has many patterns for the period/movement speed of the rainbow-colored light effect, while the sequences during customer waiting have fewer patterns for period, movement direction, or movement speed. In other words, four patterns (A-D) are possible in the customer waiting demo, but nine patterns (E-M) are possible in the jackpot confirmation sequence. These patterns are examples, and their specific content and number are not particularly limited.
The ability to implement such effects provides a significant visual impact to players who have hit the jackpot, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

In Figure 30, velocity may, for example, be the time required for a specific color to move from one point to another (point 2). Alternatively, velocity may refer to the time (msec) or period required for a specific light-emitting element to switch colors.

Specific examples of the first state include not only the animation during which a jackpot is confirmed, but also, for example, the jackpot spin (from the start to the end of the spin that results in a jackpot), and during jackpot gameplay. In these first states, there are more patterns of cycles/movement speeds compared to when waiting for customers.
In addition to the aforementioned "guaranteed jackpot/waiting for customers," specific examples of combinations of the first and second states include "normal gameplay state/advantageous gameplay state (probability change/time reduction)" and "when the jackpot stopping symbol is 7/when it is 2."
The winning symbols are not limited to the difference between "7" and "2," but may also be configured to have different patterns depending on other numbers, odd and even numbers, etc. Furthermore, the differences in the effects depending on the winning symbols are not limited to the cycle/movement speed patterns mentioned above, but may also be differences in the length of the rainbow effect.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 17)
In the gaming machine 100, examples of the timing at which the aforementioned movable mechanism operates include the initial operation, the start of the variation, the development effect, and the decisive effect. At this time, the probability of the main display device 131 executing the rainbow-colored light effect at each timing is in the order of decisive effect > development effect > start of variation > initial operation.
Thus, the rainbow-colored illumination effect on the main display device 131's display screen is more likely to be executed when the aforementioned specific mechanism is used in the decisive effect than when the effect is executed by a specific mechanism (light guide panel unit 181, upper mechanism unit 154, lower mechanism unit 156, or 3D effect) at the start of the variation or during development.
The ability to implement such effects makes it possible to create a stronger expectation of a big win for the player when the decisive effect is executed rather than when the variable effect starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The 3D effect described above is a three-dimensional effect created by the liquid crystal display screen of the main display device 131 and a film placed in front of it (on the player's side).
Furthermore, some of the mechanical devices (upper mechanical device unit 154, lower mechanical device unit 156) are capable of performing effects in response to the player operating the sword handle unit 135 in accordance with the operation suggestion effect. However, the timing of the mechanical device's operation may be simultaneous with the operation of the sword handle unit 135, or it may occur after a certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, when a decisive effect is initiated based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135, the timing of the rainbow effect during the decisive effect may not coincide with the timing of the effect performed by the mechanical device.

Furthermore, the ease with which the rainbow effect is executed may vary depending on the magnitude of the movement of the movable mechanism. For example, the movable mechanism may be capable of performing a first movement that is relatively small and a second movement that is larger, and the rainbow effect (rainbow light display) by the light-emitting means may be more easily executed when the second movement is performed. Also, the specific form of the rainbow effect may change between the first and second movements. The second movement is more likely to be executed in the decisive effect, while the first movement is more likely to be executed at the start of a variation or during a development effect.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 18)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 14, even when the rainbow-colored light effect is being performed while the machine is waiting for customers (second state), the sound output corresponding to the rainbow-colored light effect, such as during a jackpot or during reel spinning (first state), is restricted.
Thus, the first performance, which simultaneously displays a rainbow light and outputs sound (a confirmation sound) using a sound output device, is more likely to be performed when the gaming machine is in the first state (in a spinning state) than when it is in the second state (waiting for customers).
The ability to implement such effects allows for a greater visual impact on players during gameplay than while they are waiting for customers, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

The aforementioned sound output could be music synchronized with the rainbow light display, or it could be sound effects such as confirmation sounds. For example, it could be the sound effect when the hold display changes to a rainbow pattern due to a hold change animation, or the sound effect when the animation buttons or levers are operated during a decisive animation.

In the second state, the system may be configured to output a sound effect that is different from the first effect in the first state, for example, a relatively quiet sound effect.
Furthermore, specific examples of the second state are not limited to waiting for customers. For example, it may occur when the rainbow flashing display is executed during a jackpot game, or during a round game. In this case, the game's background music plays, but the specific sound output mentioned above is restricted. Moreover, specific examples of the first state are not particularly limited to during a variation animation or a jackpot confirmation animation. For example, the first state may occur when an upgrade animation is executed during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that in the first state, sound output is triggered when a specific operation (such as pressing a performance button or operating a control lever) is performed, while in the second state, sound output is not triggered even if the aforementioned specific operation is performed.

Furthermore, while the above sound output is possible during normal gameplay and also during special variation displays in specific gameplay states (advantageous gameplay states such as time-saving and probability-changing states), the sound output may be restricted (or have a different frequency of occurrence) during special variation displays in specific gameplay states.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 19)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figures 19 and 24, for example, during a variation animation, at a first timing, text display such as a cut-in of dialogue text (first text display) can be performed, and at a second timing, such as during a jackpot game, warnings in text such as a warning against excessive gambling, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution regarding contact with movable parts (second text display) can be performed. When text display is performed at this second timing, the rainbow-colored light effect is restricted.
The ability to implement such visual effects allows players to be alerted to important text displays, such as warnings, and also provides a significant visual impact, thereby enhancing players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, the restriction on rainbow-colored effects is not limited to warnings. For example, rainbow-colored effects may be restricted in text displays such as titles, manufacturer names, and logos. Conversely, rainbow-colored effects may be enabled for text displays such as titles, manufacturer names, and logos.

Furthermore, the rainbow light display may be restricted when certain text displays (operation instructions, game instructions) are shown while the player is waiting (third timing). The likelihood of the rainbow light display being executed may differ in each of the first to third timings. For example, the likelihood of the rainbow light display being executed may be first timing > second timing. It may also be first timing > third timing. Alternatively, the values may be the same in all three timings. There may also be cases where the rainbow light display is not executed. Additionally, when a fourth text display (for example, text display upon V-winning) is shown on the main display device 131 during a fourth timing, such as during a jackpot game, the rainbow effect does not need to be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission pattern 20)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figures 14 and 19, for example, during a variation performance, at a first timing, text display such as a cut-in of dialogue text (first text display) can be performed, and at a second timing between the start of the customer waiting demo and the start of the next variation performance, warnings in text such as a warning against excessive gambling, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution regarding contact with movable parts (second text display) can be performed. When text display is performed at this second timing, the rainbow light effect is restricted.
The ability to implement such visual effects allows players to be alerted to important text displays, such as warnings, and also provides a significant visual impact, thereby enhancing players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, the restriction on rainbow-colored effects is not limited to warnings. For example, rainbow-colored effects may be restricted in text displays such as titles, manufacturer names, and logos. Conversely, rainbow-colored effects may be enabled for text displays such as titles, manufacturer names, and logos.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 21, 22)
In the gaming machine 100, as schematically shown in Figure 31, the number of rainbow-colored effects, i.e., the number of light patterns, executed in the variation animation for a win differs depending on whether the variation of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state based on entry into the first start port 112, or in the advantageous game state (probability change/time reduction). In Figure 31, patterns A, B, and C are the light patterns of the rainbow-colored effects executed by, for example, reserve change, development animation, decisive animation,予告 animation (dialogue, background display, cut-in), full rotation, etc. Pattern D is, for example, decisive animation, full rotation, etc. In other words, in the case of variation of the first special symbol in a specific game state, a limited number of rainbow-colored effect patterns are executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a specific game state, some of the rainbow-colored effect patterns that are possible when the first special symbol is displayed in a normal game state are also possible, but there are more patterns than when the first special symbol is displayed in a special game state.

For example, when the first special symbol (first starting condition) is displayed in normal gameplay mode, and when the second special symbol (second starting condition) is displayed in advantageous gameplay mode, the main display device 131 will execute rainbow-colored effects in "preview effects," "hold change effects," and "decisive effects." In preview effects, rainbow-colored effects are executed through the background, cut-ins, and dialogue. In hold change effects, the display of the hold changes to rainbow colors. In decisive effects, a more spectacular effect than the preview effect is executed using not only the main display device 131, but also the frame lamps and panel lamps.

By enabling such effects, the content of the display changes depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed during a favorable game state or a normal game state. This guides players to aim for the appropriate starting conditions, thereby allowing them to enjoy the benefits of each game state and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 31, the number of rainbow-colored effects, i.e., the number of light patterns, executed in the variation animation for a win differs depending on whether the first special symbol variation is performed based on a ball entering the first start port 112 during a favorable game state (probability variation/time reduction), or whether the second special symbol variation is performed based on a ball entering the second start port 115 during a favorable game state.

The ability to perform such effects means that the content of the effects changes depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a favorable game state or the second special symbol is displayed in a favorable game state. This guides players to aim for the appropriate starting conditions, thereby allowing them to enjoy the benefits of each game state and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
For example, when the first special symbol variation display is executed in a favorable game state, the execution of the rainbow effect for pre-announcement effects and reserve changes is restricted, and the probability of execution is set to be lower than in a normal game state, or it is set not to be executed at all. For example, the rainbow effect may be executed only in the "decisive effect". For example, the rainbow effect may not be executed at all.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 23)
In the gaming machine 100, it is possible to perform more spectacular effects during the variation effect shown in Figure 22 than during the customer waiting demo effect shown in Figure 14. For example, during the variation effect, a rainbow effect is performed using flashes, simultaneous execution of mechanical devices, and multiple light-emitting means, but during the customer waiting period, flashes are not performed, and instead, effects such as color-changing effects using lamps are performed.
The ability to implement such effects allows for a greater visual impact on players during gameplay than while they are waiting for customers, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

Examples of relatively understated rainbow effects include, for example, cases where only rainbow-colored moving light is emitted from the frame lamp, or effects where a portion of the display screen of the main display device 131 (for example, when the edges of the screen or some of the displayed objects are rainbow-colored) is displayed in rainbow colors. On the other hand, examples of relatively flashy rainbow effects include effects that simultaneously display rainbow light using multiple light-emitting means (a wide range over which the rainbow light display is performed), effects that display rainbow light for a relatively long time, effects that perform rainbow flashes, and effects where the color movement speed is fast in moving light.

The customer waiting demo sequence is an example of the first state, and the variation sequence is an example of the second state. The specific examples of the first and second states are not particularly limited. For example, the first state could include when a jackpot is confirmed, during a variation sequence leading to a jackpot, or while a jackpot game is being played. The second state could be when a jackpot game is being played (when the first state is not a jackpot game).

Furthermore, the customer waiting demo, which is an example of the first state, may also be a timing in which the rainbow effect is restricted when a specific display (such as text display to prevent addiction) is displayed, but the rainbow effect is not displayed at that specific display. Also, when the addiction prevention display is displayed, not only may the execution of the rainbow light display be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light display) may also be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 24)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 14, the rainbow effect is visible over a wider area when the performance symbol 50a is not displayed during a winning performance (such as during title display) than when the performance symbol 50a is not displayed during a waiting period. The area referred to here is the planar range when viewed from the player's perspective, that is, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100.

The above area becomes larger when rainbow-colored illumination is performed by multiple light-emitting means. In other words, the above area is larger when rainbow-colored illumination is performed by both frame lamps and panel lamps than when rainbow-colored illumination is performed by only one of them. Also, when rainbow colors are displayed on the display screen of the main display device 131, the size of the above area changes depending on the size of the displayed object.
The ability to implement such effects makes it possible to create a stronger expectation of a big win for players when a key effect is executed, rather than while waiting for customers, thereby increasing players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, the comparison of the area size can be made not only at specific timings, but also within the scope of the rainbow light display during the duration of the performance. For example, the total area size of the rainbow light display during the first state (e.g., when no performance symbols are displayed while waiting for customers) can be compared to the total area size of the rainbow light display during the second state (e.g., when no performance symbols are displayed during a decisive performance).

Furthermore, the rainbow effect when the performance symbol 50a is not displayed during the waiting period (e.g., during title display, warning display, logo display) may be configured to be visible over a wider area than the rainbow effect when the performance symbol 50a is not displayed during the decisive animation, during the jackpot variation, or during jackpot gameplay.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 25)
In the gaming machine 100, there are two types of display symbols: regular decorative symbols (first display mode) and small symbols (second display mode). Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14 and 22, a rainbow effect can be performed when the display symbol 50a (regular decorative symbols) is not displayed during the customer waiting demo and the final performance.
Furthermore, for example, in a customer waiting demo, the rainbow effect is restricted at the timing when warning displays such as an "addiction" display or title display (specific effect) are executed. Also, in a decisive effect, the illumination of a certain area on the display screen of the main display device 131 is restricted at the timing when a predetermined effect is executed. A predetermined effect is, for example, an effect in which a movable mechanism is executed, in which case the rainbow effect visible to the player is restricted because the movable mechanism obstructs the view between the player and the display screen. Another predetermined effect is, for example, an effect executed by the main display device 131, in which case the rainbow effect visible to the player is restricted by hiding the hold display that executes the rainbow effect during the specific effect, or by the rainbow color displayed in the background disappearing during the specific effect.

The ability to implement such effects makes it possible to create a stronger expectation of a big win for players when a key effect is executed, rather than while waiting for customers, thereby increasing players' interest in the game.
Furthermore, when warning displays such as anti-addiction displays are shown, not only may the execution of rainbow illumination be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than rainbow illumination) may also be restricted.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 26)
In the gaming machine 100, a rainbow light display can be performed while waiting for a customer and during a variation performance. While the rainbow light display while waiting for a customer is restricted to being initiated based on the operation of the control means, as shown in Figure 22, the rainbow light display during a variation performance can be initiated based on the operation of the control means.
Furthermore, in the jackpot notification animation, as shown in Figure 21, when a specific animation is performed in which one animation symbol 50a occupies a larger proportion of the image display area of the main display device 131 than other animation symbols 50a (an animation in which the central 7 of "777" is larger than the left and right 7s), the rainbow animation is restricted. Examples of the restriction of the rainbow animation here include, for example, the rainbow animation not being performed on the display screen of the main display device 131, or some or all of the light-emitting means that were performing the rainbow animation stopping their illumination.
By enabling such effects, the rainbow effect can suppress the interference of the effects of specific effects performed in the jackpot notification sequence, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the rainbow light display during the customer waiting demo may be terminated based on the player's operation of the control devices (sword handle unit 135, launch handle device 103). For example, in the case of the sword handle unit 135, the rainbow light display may be terminated by mode switching or menu operation, and in the case of the launch handle device 103, it may be terminated by the start of the variation due to a ball launch and subsequent winning. However, the rainbow light display during the variation variation is restricted from being terminated based on the player's operation of the control devices. In this case, for example, the rainbow light display may be terminated at the end of the variation period.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 27)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 14, when the game is in a waiting state, if the title display (second character display) is shown, a rainbow-colored effect can be performed using the frame lamps and board lamps, and if the anti-addiction display (first character display) is shown, the rainbow-colored light effect using the frame lamps and board lamps can be restricted.
By enabling such effects, it is possible to make players aware of important text displays, such as warnings, by limiting the rainbow color effect, and to create a significant visual effect for title displays, thereby enhancing players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, the first text display may be a title display, in which case the second text display may be a warning display such as an anti-addiction display. Also, when a warning display such as an anti-addiction display is displayed, not only may the execution of the rainbow light display be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light display) may also be restricted.

(Characteristics of the luminescence pattern 28)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 24, if the jackpot symbols are displayed as a stop from the start of the jackpot variation display until the start of the first variation display after the round, at least one of the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131, frame lamps, or panel lamps can be performed. On the other hand, if text information (such as an anti-addiction display) is displayed during the ED (ending) of the jackpot game resulting from the first win, the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131 can be restricted.
By enabling such effects, it is possible to make players aware of important text displays such as warnings by limiting the rainbow effect, and when the winning symbols are displayed, it can create a great visual effect for the player, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.
Furthermore, when the anti-addiction display is activated, not only may the execution of the rainbow light display be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light display) may also be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission pattern 29)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 24, if the jackpot symbols are displayed as stopped from the start of the jackpot variation display until the start of the first variation display after the round, at least one of the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131, frame lamps, or panel lamps can be performed. On the other hand, if text information (such as an anti-addiction display) is displayed during the ED (ending) of the jackpot game resulting from the first win, the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131 or the light-emitting means can be restricted.
By enabling such effects, it is possible to make players aware of important text displays, such as warnings, by limiting the use of rainbow colors. Furthermore, when a winning combination of symbols is displayed, it can create a significant visual effect for the player, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the anti-addiction display is activated, not only may the execution of the rainbow light display be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light display) may also be restricted.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 30)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 24, if the jackpot symbols are displayed as aligned during the period from the start of the jackpot variation display to the start of the first variation display after the round, at least one of the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131, frame lamps, or panel lamps can be executed. On the other hand, when an operation instruction effect displaying a right-hand shooting image (large/small), etc., is being executed, the rainbow-colored effects by the main display device 131 can be restricted.
By making such effects possible, the rainbow effect can be made to the player to realize that it is a display that suggests appropriate operation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The limitations of the rainbow-colored display referred to here include cases where, at the timing of the right-hand shooting image being displayed, the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow-colored display is reduced, or all of them are stopped, or the area is smaller (compared to other scenes in which the rainbow-colored display is performed), or the frequency is reduced. It also includes cases where, for example, the right-hand shooting image is displayed in front of the display screen of the main display device 131, thereby obscuring the rainbow-colored display.
Although there are multiple right-hand play indicators, for example, the rainbow effect may be restricted when the large right-hand play indicator is displayed, or when the small right-hand play indicator is displayed.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 31)
The gaming machine 100 is configured to allow the game to progress by switching between game states, which include a normal state (first game state), an advantageous state (second game state) that is more favorable than the first game state, and a jackpot game (third game state) in which a special game is performed. The first game state and the second game state will be described in detail in the second embodiment.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can be controlled to activate a specific function (complete function) at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value (95,000). This function restricts the progress of the game. Details of the specific function will be described later.

Furthermore, there is a first start condition that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the start opening) that occur at the first start opening 112, a second start condition that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the start opening) that occur at the second start opening 115, and a third condition (round progression and payout conditions) that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the big prize opening) that occur at the first big prize opening 117 or the second big prize opening 127. Based on the fulfillment of the first start condition or the fulfillment of the second start condition, the main display device 131 can execute a variation effect of the performance symbols.
If a specific function is activated in a state other than a jackpot (first game state), even if a ball enters the first start opening 112, the fulfillment of the first start condition can be restricted. Also, if a specific function is activated in a jackpot (third game state), during the period from the activation of the specific function until the end of the jackpot round (a predetermined period), if a predetermined requirement occurs at the first large prize opening 117 or the second large prize opening 127, the fulfillment of the third condition can be achieved, and even if a ball enters the first start opening 112, the fulfillment of the first start condition can be restricted.

When the winning variation animation is executed based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the advantageous state (second game state), the number of patterns in the direction of color movement in the rainbow illumination display may be relatively small (for example, only from bottom to top). On the other hand, when the winning variation animation is executed based on the fulfillment of the second starting condition in the advantageous state (second game state), the number of patterns in the direction of color movement in the rainbow illumination display may be relatively large. Note that the latter may be less than the former; that is, it is sufficient that the number of patterns in the direction of color movement are different.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate winning opening according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The limitations on the rainbow effect in the second effect described above include, for example, the rainbow effect not being performed, a reduction in the number of light-emitting effects, and a reduction in the area in which the rainbow effect is performed.
Furthermore, this may be limited to cases where specific textual information is displayed during the second performance. In other words, the rainbow effect may be restricted when specific textual information is displayed during the second performance. The specific textual information referred to here includes warning displays such as the anti-addiction display shown during the ending credits.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 32)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 19, the variable animation can perform multiple expectation-indicating animations (reserve change, dialogue, cut-in) that suggest the possibility of performing a special game, and a decisive animation that suggests the performance of a special game. The expectation-indicating animations include first animations such as dialogue and cut-ins, and second animations such as reserve changes. When the variable animation is performed, the execution times of the first and second animations are different. For example, the second animation is set to run for a longer period. Furthermore, the decisive animation is more likely to display a rainbow flash than the first expectation-indicating animation, and the duration of the rainbow flash is longer.
The ability to execute such effects makes it possible to create a stronger expectation of a big win in the player when a decisive effect is executed compared to when an expectation-indicating effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Characteristics of the light emission mode 33)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 24, when a jackpot is won on the first win (especially during the ending), a message to prevent excessive gambling, a message to prevent forgetting the prepaid card, and a message to prevent theft are displayed. Also, the rainbow-colored effect is restricted at this time. In other words, when a jackpot is won on the first win (especially during the ending), the messages to prevent excessive gambling, a message to prevent forgetting the prepaid card, and a message to prevent theft are more likely to be displayed, and the rainbow-colored effect is more likely to be restricted, compared to when a jackpot is won during a winning streak (especially during the ending).
By enabling such effects, it is possible to make players aware of important text displays, such as warnings, by limiting the rainbow color effect, while also providing a significant visual effect in other cases, thereby enhancing the players' interest in the game.
Furthermore, when warning displays such as anti-addiction indicators are displayed, not only may the execution of rainbow illumination be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than rainbow illumination) may also be restricted.

(A variation of the rainbow effect)
Even when the rainbow effect is being executed, the first special symbol display 120, the second special symbol display 122, and the sub-LEDs (LEDs controlled by the effect control board 320) may be restricted from displaying rainbow light.
Furthermore, while the display symbol 50a emits a rainbow glow, the number symbols that make up the smaller symbols themselves may be configured not to emit a rainbow glow.
The way the lamps (frame lamps, panel lamps, mechanical parts, buttons, etc.) illuminate when a warning display is shown while customers are waiting may differ from the way the lamps illuminate when a warning display is shown during the ending sequence of the first win. For example, the speed of color movement and the flashing cycle may differ.

Furthermore, the lamps (frame lamps, panel lamps, special features, buttons, etc.) are provided with a first and second region, and in the first region, a warning display is executed at a first/second timing (first state/second state) with different lamp lighting patterns (movement cycle, lighting cycle, light color), and the execution of a rainbow light display by the main display device 131/lamp may be restricted.

Specifically, the following can be cited: (i) In the first domain, the lamps light up in different patterns at the first timing (waiting for customers/during variation (normal/probability variation)) and the second timing (during variation/during ED performance) when the warning display is executed, and the execution of the rainbow light display by the liquid crystal can be restricted. (ii) In the first domain, the lamps light up in different patterns at the first timing and the second timing when the warning display is executed, and the execution of the rainbow light display by the lamp can be restricted. (iii) In the first domain, the lamps light up in different patterns at the first state (waiting for customers) and the second state (jackpot game state) when the warning display is executed, and the execution of the rainbow light display by the liquid crystal can be restricted. (iv) In the first domain, the lamp illumination patterns differ between the first state (waiting for customers) and the second state (jackpot game state) when the warning display is executed, and the execution of the rainbow illumination display by the lamp can be restricted.

In the variation effects, the number of times (number of executions) or type (rainbow light display by lamp/main display device 131/effect button/light guide plate, rainbow light display pattern for each effect) of the rainbow light display may differ before (dialogue) and after (cut-in, decisive effect, re-draw, revival).
For example, the selection rate for the rainbow flashing display in the success animation or re-draw animation may be 100%. Also, for example, while the flash animation may be possible during the success animation, the execution of the flash animation may be restricted when the addiction prevention display (specific character information) is displayed.

The likelihood of the rainbow flash effect occurring may differ between the first timing (e.g., while waiting for customers) and the second timing (e.g., during the jackpot ending sequence/during reel spinning). Furthermore, the likelihood of the rainbow flash effect occurring may differ between the first state (e.g., waiting for customers) and the second state (e.g., during jackpot gameplay).

For example, the execution of flash effects while waiting for customers may be restricted. In this case, rainbow-colored effects other than flash effects may be executed, or their execution may be restricted. Furthermore, the execution of flash effects when displaying specific text information while waiting for customers may be restricted. In this case, when displaying specific text information, rainbow-colored effects other than flash effects may be executed, or their execution may be restricted.

Furthermore, for example, the execution of the flash effect in the ending sequence of the first win may be restricted, while the flash effect may be allowed in the ending sequence of subsequent big wins. In this case, a rainbow effect other than the flash effect may be allowed in the ending sequence of the first win, or its execution may be restricted. Similarly, a rainbow effect other than the flash effect may be allowed in the ending sequence of subsequent big wins, or its execution may be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises: a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game; a subordinate control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the performance of the game based on signals from the main control means; a first light-emitting means (board lamp) provided in a first area and capable of performing a light-emitting display based on signals from the subordinate control means; and a second light-emitting means (frame lamp) provided in a second area different from the first area and capable of performing a light-emitting display based on signals from the subordinate control means, wherein the subordinate control means is provided by the player The system is capable of performing a first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the panel lamp work together) that displays light in a specific manner that appears rainbow-colored in the first and second regions, and a second effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the panel lamp each display light in a predetermined manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, but in a different manner than the first effect) that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The system is characterized in that the number of light patterns of the first effect differs depending on whether the game state is a first state (for example, waiting for a customer) or a second state (for example, during a variation effect).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that performs a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of symbols performed on the display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, it is possible to perform a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine comprises: a first light-emitting means (display lamp) provided in a first area and capable of performing a rainbow-colored light display visible to the player; and a second light-emitting means (frame lamp) provided in a second area different from the first area and capable of performing the rainbow light display. It is capable of performing a first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the display lamp work together) that performs the rainbow light display in the first and second areas, and a second effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the display lamp each perform different light-emitting modes such as flashing or moving) that performs the rainbow light display in a different light-emitting mode than the first effect. The number of light-emitting patterns of the first effect differs depending on whether the special game is being performed (during a jackpot game) or the variation display is being performed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising: a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game; a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game's effects based on signals from the main control means; and a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means provided on a special feature (movable feature, center feature, start opening, movable member) that are capable of performing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player based on signals from the secondary control means. The secondary control means is capable of performing a first performance in which the first and second light-emitting means are capable of performing the rainbow-colored light display; and a second performance in which the light-emitting means can perform the rainbow-colored light display in a manner that restricts the light emission of either the first or second light-emitting means (for example, a manner in which a part of the light-emitting means does not perform the rainbow-colored light display, or a manner in which the rainbow-colored light display is obstructed and cannot be seen by the player). The first performance is more easily performed when the game state is in the second state (e.g., after a reach) than when the game state is in the first state (e.g., before a reach).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that makes a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, comprising two or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, light-emitting element) capable of executing a rainbow light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying character information, wherein the light-emitting means is capable of executing a first light-emitting mode that performs the rainbow light display in a manner in which the colors move, and a second light-emitting mode that performs the rainbow light display in a manner different from the first light-emitting mode, and comprises a first light-emitting region and the first light-emitting region The display means has a first light-emitting region and a second light-emitting region that differs from the first light-emitting region. The display means is capable of displaying a first character display (such as cut-in effects or dialogue) executed at a first timing, and a second character display (such as a post-jackpot warning, logo, cheating warning, machine name, or manufacturer name) executed at a second timing different from the first timing. The second timing is a predetermined timing within a specific period, from the start of the special game's effects (jackpot effects) until the start of the next variation display. When the second character display is shown by the display means during this specific period, the execution of the second light-emitting mode by the light-emitting means can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, comprising: a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; a first effect that performs the rainbow light display; a second effect that performs the rainbow light display in a manner different from the first effect; and a third effect (a flashing effect) that performs the rainbow light display in a manner different from the first and second effects; and a predetermined effect (decision effect) that suggests the execution of the special game, characterized in that the light-emitting pattern in which the second effect is executed after the third effect is more likely to be executed than the light-emitting pattern in which the third effect is executed after the second effect.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising: a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game; a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game's effects based on signals from the main control means; a light-emitting means capable of performing light-emitting displays based on signals from the secondary control means; and a display means (main display device 131). The secondary control means is capable of performing a first effect in which the rainbow colors visible to the player change in a first manner (for example, the colors move slowly) and a second effect in which the rainbow colors visible to the player change in a second manner different from the first manner (for example, the colors move quickly). The present invention is characterized in that the combination patterns of the display means and the light-emitting means when the second effect is performed have more types of rainbow-colored patterns than the combination patterns of the display means and the light-emitting means when the first effect is performed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that enables a special game advantageous to the player, and includes a light-emitting means capable of displaying a rainbow-colored light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The machine is capable of performing a first effect (other than a flash) in which the light-emitting means displays the rainbow light using a first light-emitting pattern, and a second effect (a flash) in which the light-emitting means displays the rainbow light using a second light-emitting pattern. Furthermore, in an effect performed after a predetermined effect (a successful outcome effect) indicating the execution of the special game (jackpot game) has begun, the pattern in which the second effect is performed followed by the first effect is more likely to be performed than the pattern in which the second effect is performed followed by the first effect.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that performs a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of symbols executed by the display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine comprises: a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game; a subordinate control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game's performance based on signals from the main control means; and a light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player based on signals from the subordinate control means. The subordinate control means is capable of executing a first performance in which the rainbow-colored light display is performed during the execution of the variation display, and a second performance in which the rainbow-colored light display is performed in a specific state different from the execution of the variation display (for example, a waiting state). The light-emitting pattern when the first performance is executed has more rainbow-colored patterns than the light-emitting pattern when the second performance is executed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of symbols executed on the display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, and a variation display of the performance symbols can be executed based on the fulfillment of the starting condition. The gaming machine is equipped with a light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc.) capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The light-emitting means is capable of executing a first effect that moves the colors in a specific direction, and a second effect that differs from the first effect, in the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect. Furthermore, from the start of a predetermined effect (decision effect) that suggests the execution of the special game until the next variation display starts, the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect can be executed in different forms depending on whether the performance symbol becomes a first stop display or a second stop display.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that makes a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, comprising two or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, light-emitting element) capable of performing light-emitting displays, and a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying character information, wherein the light-emitting means has a first light-emitting mode that emits light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player in a first display mode (for example, a fast color change, a flash, etc.) and a mode that appears rainbow-colored to the player in a manner different from the first display mode (for example, a slow color change The display means is capable of performing a second light emission mode (such as flashing or blinking), and is capable of displaying a first character display (such as cut-in effects or dialogue) executed at a first timing, and a second character display (such as a post-jackpot warning, logo, cheating warning, machine name, or manufacturer name) executed at a second timing different from the first timing, wherein the second timing is a predetermined timing within a specific period, from the start of the customer waiting effect until the start of the next variation display, and when the second character display is displayed by the display means during the specific period, the execution of the first light emission mode by the light emission means can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a game board with a game area formed thereon, and a game frame, further comprising a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, performance button) and a display means, wherein the light-emitting means is capable of performing a first performance that displays a rainbow-colored light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the display means is capable of performing a second performance that displays a rainbow-colored light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and when a customer waiting performance is performed, the performance period of the first performance (performance by the light-emitting means) is longer than the performance period of the second performance (performance by the liquid crystal display device).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) capable of performing a variation effect of the performance symbols when the starting conditions are met, comprising a light-emitting means (frame lamp) and a display means (main display device 131), wherein the light-emitting means is capable of performing a first effect that displays a rainbow light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the display means is capable of performing a second effect that displays a rainbow light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and when performing one of the variation effects, the execution period of the first effect is longer than the execution period of the second effect.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131) capable of executing a rainbow-colored light display that appears to the player as rainbow-colored. The machine is capable of executing a first effect in which the light-emitting means performs the rainbow-colored light display in a first flashing light-emitting mode, and a second effect in which the light-emitting means performs the rainbow-colored light display in a second light-emitting mode different from the first light-emitting mode. Furthermore, in an effect executed after a predetermined effect (decisive effect) indicating the execution of the special game has started, the light-emitting pattern in which the second effect is executed after the second effect is more likely to be executed than the light-emitting pattern in which the first effect is executed after the second effect.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that performs a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of symbols executed by the display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. The machine comprises two or more light-emitting means (frame lamps, board lamps, main display device 131, etc.) capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The rainbow-colored light-emitting display is possible in both a first period and a second period following the first period, during the period from the start of a predetermined performance (decisive performance) suggesting the execution of the special game until the start of the next variation display. The number of light-emitting means executing the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the second period is different from the number of light-emitting means executing the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the first period.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that performs a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of symbols executed on the display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. The machine comprises one or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc.) capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The rainbow-colored light-emitting display is possible in both a first period and a second period following the first period, during the period from the start of a predetermined performance (decisive performance) suggesting the execution of the special game until the start of the next variation display. The area in which the player perceives the execution of the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the second period is different from the area in which the player perceives the execution of the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the first period.

◆To solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises: a main control means for controlling the progress of the game; a secondary control means for controlling the game's effects based on signals from the main control means; and a light-emitting means capable of displaying a rainbow-colored light display to the player based on signals from the secondary control means. The secondary control means is capable of displaying at least one of the following characteristics of the light-emitting means: the light-emitting period, movement direction, or movement speed of the color displayed; when the game state is a first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, during jackpot variation, or during jackpot gameplay); and when the game state is a second state different from the first state (during a customer waiting demo). The number of patterns of light-emitting modes with at least one of the light-emitting period, movement direction, or movement speed of the color displayed is smaller when the game state is a second state than when the game state is a first state.

◆To solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game's effects based on signals from the main control means, a display means (main display device 131) capable of performing a rainbow-colored light emission display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a special feature (light guide panel unit 181, upper feature unit 154, lower feature unit 156, 3D effect) capable of performing a specific effect. The rainbow-colored light emission display using the display means is more likely to be performed when the special feature performs a specific effect in a second state (decisive effect) that is different from the first state, than when the special feature performs a specific effect in a first state (start of variation, development).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a game board with a game area formed therein and a game frame, wherein the gaming machine includes a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, performance button) configured to enable a rainbow-colored light display to be seen as rainbow-colored by the player, and a sound output means (sound output device 331) configured to enable sound output, and is capable of performing a first performance that simultaneously performs the rainbow light display and sound output (output of a confirmation sound) by the sound output means, and a second performance that performs the rainbow light display but does not perform sound output by the sound output means, and is characterized in that the first performance is more easily performed in the first game state (during variation, a state other than the specific state during a jackpot game) than in the second game state (waiting for customers, a specific state during a jackpot game).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that makes a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the variation display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and comprises a light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, etc.) that can execute a rainbow light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and a display means (main display device 131) that can execute the display of character information, wherein the display means executes a first character display (effects such as cut-ins, dialogue characters) at a first timing, and a different timing from the first timing. The system is capable of displaying a second set of characters (a warning after a big win, a logo, a warning against cheating, the machine name, and the manufacturer name) which is executed at a second timing. The second timing is a predetermined timing within a specific period, from the start of the special game's performance (big win performance) until the next variation display begins. The system is characterized by a difference in the likelihood of the rainbow light display being executed depending on whether the first character display is executed by the display means at the first timing or at the second timing.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that performs a determination based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and when the symbol variation display performed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, it is possible to perform a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine comprises a light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, etc.) capable of performing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying text information. The display means is configured to display a first text display (cut-in or other effects, dialogue text) performed at a first timing, and a second text display (demonstration warning, logo, cheat warning, model name, manufacturer name) performed at a second timing different from the first timing. The second timing is a predetermined timing within a specific period during which a customer waiting effect is performed, and when the second text display is displayed by the display means during the specific period, the rainbow light display by the light-emitting means can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that enables a special game advantageous to the player, having a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing a variation effect of the performance symbols on the display means based on the fulfillment of a first start condition for the first start means or a second start condition for the second start means, and capable of performing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, characterized in that the number of light-emitting patterns of the rainbow light display that can be performed in the variation effect differs depending on whether the variation effect for a win is performed based on the fulfillment of the first start condition in the specific game state or based on the fulfillment of the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that enables a special game advantageous to the player, having a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing a variation effect of the performance symbols on the display means based on the fulfillment of a first start condition for the first start means or a second start condition for the second start means, and capable of performing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, characterized in that the number of light-emitting patterns of the rainbow light display that can be performed in the variation effect differs depending on whether the variation effect for a win is performed based on the fulfillment of the first start condition in the specific game state or based on the fulfillment of the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that is capable of performing special games advantageous to the player, and is equipped with one or more light-emitting means (board lamps, frame lamps, special features, main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing light-emitting displays. The light-emitting means is capable of performing a first light-emitting mode (e.g., slow color movement speed) that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a second light-emitting mode (e.g., fast color movement speed) that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The first light-emitting mode of the rainbow light-emitting display is more easily performed when the game state is a second state (waiting for customers) than when the game state is a first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, during jackpot variation, or during jackpot gameplay).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that, when a starting condition is met, is capable of performing a variation effect of the performance symbols on the display means, and is equipped with one or more light-emitting means (panel lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is characterized in that the area in which the rainbow light-emitting display is performed differs depending on whether the performance symbols are not displayed when the game state is a first state (waiting for a player) or when the game state is a second state different from the first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, during jackpot variation, or during jackpot gameplay).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that, when a starting condition is met, can perform a variation performance of performance symbols on a display means (main display device 131, etc.), and comprises a light-emitting means (panel lamp, frame lamp, performance button, etc.) capable of performing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the display means capable of performing the rainbow light display, wherein the performance symbols have a first display mode (normal decorative symbols) and a second display mode (small symbols) different from the first display mode, and the game state is a first state in which the first display mode is not displayed (no decorative symbols are displayed while waiting for customers). The system is controllable between a first state and a second state (a predetermined animation), and in the first state, the rainbow light display can be executed, and the rainbow light display can be restricted when a specific animation (immersion animation/title animation) is executed. In the second state, the rainbow light display can be executed, and when a predetermined animation (movable prop animation/LCD screen animation) is executed, the area of the rainbow light display on the display means can be restricted (the visible area becomes narrower due to being hidden by the movable prop/the reserved rainbow is not displayed/the background during the stop animation (the center of the three animation diagrams is enlarged)).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that, when a starting condition is met, is capable of executing a variation performance of multiple performance symbols on a display means (main display device 131, etc.), and comprises a light-emitting means (panel lamp, frame lamp) capable of executing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and an operating means (performance button 17, sword handle unit 135) that can be operated by the player, wherein the rainbow light display can be executed using the light-emitting means during the waiting period and during the execution of the variation performance, the rainbow light display during the waiting period is restricted from being started based on the operation of the operating means, the rainbow light display during the execution of the variation performance can be started based on the operation of the operating means, the rainbow light display can be executed when a jackpot notification performance (jackpot symbol alignment) is executed, and the area of the rainbow light display by the display means can be restricted when a specific performance is executed in which one of the performance symbols occupies a larger proportion of the image display area by the display means than other performance symbols.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that enables a special game advantageous to the player, and which includes a display means (main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing a variation effect of the performance symbols based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition for the first starting means (first starting port 112) or a second starting condition for the second starting means (second starting port 115), and a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) capable of performing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player. The display means is capable of displaying a first character display (anti-addiction display), a second character display (title display, etc.), and a predetermined effect (character display), and is characterized in that the rainbow light display is more likely to be performed when the predetermined effect is being performed in the waiting state than when the first character display (anti-addiction display) is being displayed in the waiting state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) capable of executing a variation performance of performance symbols when a starting condition is met, comprising: a light-emitting means (panel lamp, frame lamp, performance button, etc.) and a display means (main display device 131), and capable of executing a specific performance (jackpot symbol alignment) in which the performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner from the start of a specific variation performance which is the variation performance resulting in a jackpot until the start of the next variation performance following the specific variation performance, and a predetermined performance (anti-addiction display, etc.) which is executed after the specific performance and displays predetermined text information, and is characterized in that, when the specific performance is being executed, the light-emitting means or the display means can perform a light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and when the predetermined performance is being executed, the light-emitting display by the display means can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) capable of executing a variation performance of performance symbols when a starting condition is met, comprising: a light-emitting means (panel lamp, frame lamp, performance button, etc.) and a display means (main display device 131), and capable of executing a specific performance (jackpot symbol alignment) in which the performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner from the start of a specific variation performance which is the variation performance resulting in a jackpot until the start of the next variation performance following the specific variation performance, and a predetermined performance (anti-addiction display, etc.) which is executed after the specific performance and displays predetermined text information, and is characterized in that, when the specific performance is being executed, the light-emitting means or the display means can perform a light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and when the predetermined performance is being executed, the light-emitting means can restrict the light-emitting display.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that, when a starting condition is met, can execute a variation performance of performance symbols on a display means (main display device 131). This gaming machine comprises a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, performance button, etc.) provided on at least one of the game board and the game frame, and the display means (main display device 131). The invention is characterized in that, from the start of a specific variation performance that results in a jackpot until the start of the next variation performance following the specific variation performance, when a jackpot notification performance (jackpot symbol alignment) is executed, the light-emitting means or the display means can execute a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player. Furthermore, when an operation instruction performance (large right-hand display, full-open, small right-hand display) is executed to instruct the player to perform a specific operation, the area of the rainbow light display by the display means can be limited by the operation instruction performance.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that can advance the game by switching between game states, including a first game state (normal state), a second game state (advantageous state) which is more advantageous than the first game state, and a third game state (jackpot game) which performs a special game, and activates a specific function (complete function) at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value given and used reaches a predetermined value (95000). It is controllable and has a first condition (first start condition) that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the start opening) that occur at the first prize-winning means (first start opening 112), a second condition (second start condition) that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the start opening) that occur at the second prize-winning means (second start opening 115), and a third condition (round progression and payout conditions) that is met based on predetermined requirements (ball entering the big prize opening) that occur at the third prize-winning means (big prize opening), and based on the fulfillment of the first condition or the fulfillment of the second condition The display means is capable of executing a variation effect of the performance symbols; when the specific function is activated in the first game state (other than a jackpot), even if the predetermined requirements occur in the first prize-winning means, the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted; when the specific function is activated in the third game state (jackpot), if the predetermined requirements occur in the third prize-winning means during a predetermined period after the activation of the specific function (the period until the jackpot round ends), the fulfillment of the third condition is possible; even if the predetermined requirements occur in the first prize-winning means, the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted; and the device is equipped with a light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow-colored light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; and the number of patterns of color movement in the rainbow light display that the light-emitting means can execute in the variation effect differs depending on whether the variation effect for a win based on the fulfillment of the first condition in the second game state is executed or whether the variation effect for a win based on the fulfillment of the second condition in the second game state is executed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and which is capable of executing a variation performance of performance symbols on a display means (main display device 131) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition for a first starting means, or based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition for a second starting means, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow light display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and which suggests the possibility of executing the special game in the variation performance. The system is capable of executing a first effect (dialogue, cut-in), a second effect (hold change) that suggests the possibility of executing the special game in a manner different from the first effect, and a third effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of the special game in a manner different from the first or second effect. In the variation effect, the execution time of the first effect and the execution time of the second effect are different, and the rainbow light display is more likely to be executed in the third effect (decisive effect) than in the first effect (dialogue, cut-in), and the execution time of the rainbow light display is longer.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that is capable of performing a special game that is advantageous to the player, and which is capable of performing a variation performance of performance symbols on a display means (main display device 131) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition for a first starting means or based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition for a second starting means, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, mechanism, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of performing a rainbow light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and the display means is capable of performing the special game When this is executed, specific text displays (such as addiction prevention) can be executed. The special games that can be executed include a first specific game (a big win game upon initial win) and a second specific game (a big win game during a winning streak) following the first specific game. The specific text displays (such as addiction prevention, prepaid card forgetting warning, and theft prevention) are more likely to be executed, and the rainbow light display is more likely to be restricted, when the first specific game is executed, compared to when the second specific game is executed.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In principle, the same gaming machine as in the first embodiment will be used for the explanation in the second embodiment, however, some of the reference numerals for components shown in Figures 32 to 59 will be used only in the second embodiment.

(Regarding the shortened game mode)
In addition to the aforementioned "low probability time-saving game state," which is executed after a jackpot, or in place of the "low probability time-saving game state after a jackpot," a "low probability time-saving game state triggered by a predetermined number of special symbol changes" may be set in the low probability game state, which is triggered when a predetermined number of special symbol changes are performed. The "low probability time-saving game state triggered by a predetermined number of changes" is executed in the low probability game state, including the low probability time-saving game state, after a predetermined number of symbol changes, for example 1000 times, and can be executed in combination with effects such as whether or not it is a jackpot, as well as time-saving entry effects such as counting down the number of changes until the time-saving state is triggered.

Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the "low probability time-saving game state after a big win" and/or the "low probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination," a "low probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set in the low probability game state, triggered by the display of a predetermined special symbol combination. The "low probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" can be implemented in the low probability state by combining the effects of whether or not it is a big win, which are performed after the display of a specific symbol such as "1-2-3" or "7-8-7," with reach effects that determine whether or not the time-saving mode will occur and other time-saving mode entry effects.

(Winning by getting the game ball into the starting slot)
In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that when a game ball is launched to pass through the left side of the game area 106, it is possible to win a prize in the second start opening 47 (second start opening 115), which is opened based on the result of a winning lottery for ordinary symbols, which is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 45 or the ordinary symbol activation gate 113b. In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that when a game ball is launched to pass through the right side of the game area 106, it is possible to win a prize in the second start opening 47, which is opened based on the result of a winning lottery for ordinary symbols, which is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 45 or the ordinary symbol activation gate 113b.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 100, when a game ball is launched into the right-hand area of the game area 106, it is easier for the ball to pass through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than when it is launched into the left-hand area of the game area 106. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state" (specific game state) of this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second start opening 47 is more easily controlled to open than in the "non-time-saving game state." In this state, aiming to enter the second start opening 47 by launching the game ball into the right-hand area of the game area 106 allows the player to progress through the game more advantageously without consuming game balls, compared to launching the game ball into the left-hand area of the game area 106.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the entrance to the warp device opens on the left side of the decorative frame, and a first starting opening 45, into which the game ball can always be entered, is provided directly below the stage where the game ball guided by the warp device rolls. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving game state" (normal game state), when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b and the second starting opening 47 is less easily controlled than in the "time-saving game state," aiming to launch the game ball into the left side of the game area 106 and have it enter the first starting opening 45 allows the player to progress through the game more advantageously without consuming game balls, compared to launching the game ball into the right side of the game area 106.

Thus, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, there is a difference in advantage or disadvantage for the player depending on whether the ball is launched into the left or right area of the game area 106, and it is preferable to switch the area of the game area 106 to which the ball is launched according to the game state. In other words, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the player is required to proceed with the game aiming to enter the starting holes 45 and 47 according to the game state. However, since the decision of whether to launch the ball into the right or left area of the game area 106 is left to the player's launch operation, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game aiming to enter the wrong starting hole 45 or 47.

Furthermore, in both the "non-time-saving game state" and the "time-saving game state," even if the game machine only requires the player to launch the game ball into the same area of the game area 106 (for example, the left area), the decision of whether to launch the ball into the right or left area of the game area 106 is left to the player's launching operation. Therefore, there remains a risk that the player may proceed with the game aiming for the wrong starting holes 45 and 47.

(Example of a performance 1)
Figures 32 and 33 show specific examples of the following effects: expectation level display, hold icon change effect, lamp change effect, notification sound effect, movable member operation effect, and consecutive予告 (preview) effects resulting from these. Various effects that make the player expect to win a jackpot are sometimes called win-hinting effects.

As shown in Figure 32(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the losing animation symbol 70a of "728" is displayed in a stopped position.

Subsequently, when the variation effect begins, as shown in Figure 32(b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first sequence of the continuous予告演出 (preview sequence) begins when a blue effect image EF is displayed around the performance symbol 70a that initiates the variable display. The display mode of the first hold icon, which is shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2, changes to a blue character icon, initiating the hold icon change sequence. Consequently, the start gate lamp NR changes from an off state to a blue blinking state, initiating the lamp change sequence. Furthermore, an operation sequence in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is performed for a predetermined period. Note that the operation sequence of the first movable member 73 in its weak operation mode begins before the performance symbol 70a starts to vary and stops before the performance symbol 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 32(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, the zone performance (normal zone performance) is started on the first image display device 70. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling horizontally is displayed, and zone BGM is output. After the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 32(d), the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and then the "259" loss performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

Subsequently, when the variation effect begins, as shown in Figure 32(e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 70a that initiates the variable display, starting the second sequence of the continuous予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence. The hold icon change sequence, lamp change sequence, and zone sequence continue. Furthermore, an action sequence in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is performed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in Figure 32(f), the effect image EF displayed around the animation symbol 70a is erased, and the animation symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. After the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 32(g), the animation symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and then the "753" loss animation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, when the variation effect in question begins, as shown in Figure 32(h), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 70a that starts the variable display, initiating the third consecutive予告演出 (preview)演出. However, the effect image EF is displayed in red, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE changes to a color that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than before. The hold icon change演出 continues to be displayed. Furthermore, the start gate lamp NR changes from a solid blue state to a flashing red state, executing a lamp change演出 that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than a solid blue state. Also, an action演出 is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves in a strong action mode, falling from the top of the first image display device 70 to the front of the first image display device. At this time, an action演出 is executed in which the second movable member 74 moves in a weak action mode, vibrating diagonally, for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the pre-notifications executed in the variable display are displayed in a way that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than those executed previously.

Then, as shown in Figure 33(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is stopped. Note that the zone performance is displayed with zone background B, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in Figure 33(j), the first image display device 70 displays a mini-character MCB, and an effect is performed to heighten anticipation, for example, by having the mini-character MCB move across the screen.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 33(k), for example, the dialogue window displayed on the first image display device 70 shows the dialogue "CHANCE!" spoken by an ally, and the voice output device 331 displays the corresponding voice "A chance has come!", thereby executing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出).

Then, as shown in Figure 33(l), a reach animation (normal reach) is executed in which the "3" animation symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display symbol 70a that was previously displayed, while the animation symbol 70a is displayed in a variable display area in the center. At this time, the display mode of the first reserve icon, which is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, changes to a red character icon, executing a reserve icon change animation that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the blue character icon animation. Furthermore, in conjunction with this, the start gate lamp NR changes from a red light to a multi-colored (rainbow) light, executing a lamp change animation that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red light light animation.

Subsequently, when the game progresses to an SP Reach, as shown in Figure 33(m), the SP Reach animation begins, the animation symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first reserve icon display area 70B and the second reserve icon display area 70D are erased. The reduced-size animation symbol 70a changes from its normal display configuration, which consists of a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG representing part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the character's background, to a simple reduced-size display configuration consisting only of the identification area.

Then, when the game progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in Figure 33(n), the SPSP reach animation begins, and the icon display area 70C, along with the icon, is erased.

Subsequently, when the execution period of the SPSP reach sequence, which results in a jackpot, ends (the sequence control board 320 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 33(o), the jackpot sequence symbol 70a of "333," which indicates the type of jackpot game (in this case, the first jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) before being stopped, and the fluctuating sequence ends.

Furthermore, while the SP and/or SPSP reach display is active, the start gate lamp NR may remain off. However, the lamp change animation may continue, or the start gate lamp NR may be illuminated in a lighting pattern not used in the lamp change animation (i.e., white illumination) that does not indicate the probability of winning a jackpot.

(Expectation level display)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, in the display of the changing symbols 70a, it is possible to display so-called expectation levels, such as color effects like effect image EF and symbol effect image ZE, which make the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game. As shown in Figure 34, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the proportion of expectation level displays using color effects is smaller in the Special 1 changing display, which is executed in a specific game state, than in the display of the changing symbols 70a based on the first starting condition, which is established by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45, which is executed in a normal game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Special 1 changing display). In other words, in the Special 1 changing display, expectation level displays using color effects are less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific game state than when shooting left-handed in a normal game state, which is when shooting a game ball towards the left side of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 34, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the rate at which the expectation level display using color effects is displayed is lower for the special variation display (special variation 1) performed in a specific gaming state than for the variation display of the performance symbol 70a based on the second start condition (which is achieved when a game ball enters the second start opening 47) performed in a specific gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special variation 2). (Execution rate a3 < Execution rate a4). In other words, the expectation level display using color effects in special variation 1 is less likely to be displayed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106 in a specific gaming state.

This expected outcome display allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The color effect described above may also be a rainbow-colored light emission display by the image display device described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the color effect described above may also be accompanied by various forms of rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

As an indicator of expectation, it is not limited to color effects; it can also be superimposed on background images or performance symbols, or it can be text or decorations placed around images, as long as the differences in their content and colors make the player anticipate a big win.
The expected value display described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 34 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation indicators using color effects may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state. Furthermore, the number of types of expectation indicators using color effects may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state compared to the Special 2 variation display performed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern A32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or performance pattern A32 is not set), then while the expectation display of performance pattern A12 can be executed during the special variation display in the normal game state, the expectation display of performance pattern A32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern A12, will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special variation display in the normal game state, it becomes possible to execute expectation displays for performance patterns that cannot be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern A32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or performance pattern A32 is not set), then while the expectation display of performance pattern A42 can be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state, the expectation display of performance pattern A32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern A42, will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special variation display in the specific game state, it becomes possible to execute the expectation display of performance patterns that cannot be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Zone effect)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, zone effects involving a change in the background image can be performed during the display of the animation symbols 70a. The zone effects create the expectation of a jackpot game over a predetermined period of time and can be performed at either a predetermined display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions.

As shown in Figure 35, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of zone effects is lower for Special 1 variation displays executed in a specific gaming state than for Special 1 variation displays executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b1). In other words, zone effects are less likely to be executed in Special 1 variation displays when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed towards the left side of the gaming area 106 in a normal gaming state.

As shown in Figure 35, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of zone effects is lower for Special 1 variation display, which is executed in a specific gaming state, than for Special 2 variation display, which is executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b4). In other words, when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state, the zone effects are less likely to be executed in Special 1 variation display than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) towards the right-hand area of the gaming area 106.

This zone presentation ratio allows players to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This guides players to aim for the second start opening 47 in specific game states. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, players can enjoy the advantages of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
The zone effects described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 35 may be the same or different. Here, the number of zone presentation types may be fewer for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of zone presentation types may be fewer for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow-colored presentation types may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of zone presentation types, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

For example, if the execution rate of the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if the special variation display is not set), then while the zone effect of the special variation display in the normal game state can be executed, the zone effect of the special variation display in the normal game state (which corresponds to (or is the same as) the special variation display in the normal game state) will not be executed. In this case, when the special variation display is executed in the normal game state, zone effects that cannot be executed in the special variation display in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow effect, which cannot be executed in the special variation display in the specific game state, may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern B32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or performance pattern B32 is not set), then while the zone performance of performance pattern B42 can be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state, the zone performance of performance pattern B32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern B42, will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special variation display in the specific game state, zone performances with performance patterns that cannot be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state can be executed.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed across multiple spin displays; it may also be performed within a single spin display. Furthermore, if a zone effect or other win-hinting effect spanning a predetermined number of spin displays is possible, the proportion of shorter spin counts (including zero spins) for the Special 1 spin display in a specific game state may be greater than for the Special 1 spin display in a normal game state or the Special 2 spin display in a specific game state. In other words, it can be said that win-hinting effects such as zone effects spanning shorter spin counts are more likely to be performed for the Special 1 spin display in a specific game state than for the Special 1 spin display in a normal game state or the Special 2 spin display in a specific game state.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, it is possible to perform actions such as changing the background scene, displaying scrolling text on the screen, and changing the decorative properties of the symbols to change into the zone effect symbols 70a. However, in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, it may be possible to restrict the execution of actions such as changing the background scene, displaying scrolling text on the screen, and changing the decorative properties of the symbols to change into the zone effect symbols 70a. In this case, the rainbow effect may also be restricted.

Even when done in this way, if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Announcement sound effect)
In the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, when a CD icon appears as a hold icon, a first occurrence notification sound is output as an icon occurrence notification sound. Also, as shown in Figure 32(b), when a hold icon and a blue character icon appear (or change to) that icon, a second occurrence notification sound (first change notification sound) is output as an icon occurrence (change) notification sound. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33(l), when a hold icon and a red character icon appear (or change to) that icon, a third occurrence notification sound (second change notification sound) is output as an icon occurrence (change) notification sound. Furthermore, when that icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth occurrence notification sound (third change notification sound) is output as an icon change notification sound.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types). However, it is also possible to use only two types of notification sounds: one for when the CD icon appears, and another for when the icon changes to the blue character icon, red character icon, or rainbow character icon. Alternatively, the notification sound may not be output when the CD icon appears, and may only be output when the icon changes to any of the other modes. Furthermore, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided for the rainbow character icon, which guarantees a jackpot, resulting in three types of notification sounds.

As shown in Figure 36, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the execution rate of the change notification sound effect is lower for the Special 1 change display executed in a specific gaming state than for the Special 1 change display executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c1). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the Special 1 change display when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting).

As shown in Figure 36, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the change notification sound effect is lower for the special change display (Special 1) executed in a specific gaming state than for the special change display (Special 2) executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c4). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special change display (Special 1) when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106 in a specific gaming state.

This frequency of sound notification effects makes it possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45 even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
When the above-mentioned change notification sound effect is executed, various forms of rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment may be executed. The same applies to the following description.

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be reduced for the Special 1 change display executed in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 change display executed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be reduced for the Special 1 change display executed in a specific game state compared to the Special 2 change display executed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow-colored effects executed may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of change notification sound effects, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The change notification sound effect may be used not only when the hold icon changes, but also when a win occurs, or as a sound to build anticipation when the reel starts or stops.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound during a special change 1 display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific change notification sound is set), then while a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound can be executed during a special change 1 display in a normal game state, the notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special change 1 display in a normal game state, it is possible to execute notification sound effects of effects that cannot be executed during a special change 1 display in a specific game state. In this case, a rainbow effect of effects that cannot be executed during a special change 1 display in a specific game state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound during the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific change notification sound is set), then while a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound can be executed during the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be executed. In this case, when executing the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute notification sound effects of effects that cannot be executed during the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state. In this case, a rainbow-colored effect of effects that cannot be executed during the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The notification sound effects are not limited to being associated with the change of the (relevant) icon. They can also be associated with various other conditions, such as when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a decisive effect (confirmation effect) like "kyun" is performed, when a hidden operation button appears (e.g., "gyuuuiin"), the operating sounds of movable parts 73 and 74, the start and return sounds when multiple movable parts combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is formed.

If a notification sound effect can be executed in association with predetermined conditions, the probability of the predetermined conditions being met and the probability of the notification sound effect being executed may be the same or smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, for example, the sound effect using the confirmed notification sound can be executed. However, in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of the sound effect using the confirmed notification sound may be restricted. This applies not only to the confirmed notification sound, but also to the various sound effects mentioned above. In other words, in the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, the sound effect using the predetermined notification sound can be executed, but in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of the sound effect using the predetermined notification sound can be restricted.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The notification sound effect described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment.

(Pending icon change animation)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, in the display of the changing symbols 70a, the shape and color of the hold icon are changed, making it possible to perform a hold icon effect that makes the player anticipate a jackpot. The hold icon change in this embodiment makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot over a predetermined period of time, and can be performed at either a predetermined display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions.

As shown in Figure 37, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the hold icon change effect is lower when the Special 1 variation display is executed in a specific gaming state than when it is executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d1). In other words, the hold icon change effect in the Special 1 variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting).

As shown in Figure 37, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the hold icon change effect is lower for the special variation display (Special 1) executed in a specific gaming state than for the special variation display (Special 2) executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d4). In other words, the hold icon change effect in the special variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106 in a specific gaming state.

This rate of execution of the hold icon change animation makes it possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45, even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state. This guides the player to aim for the second start opening 47 in a specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The aforementioned hold icon change effect may be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 37 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of reserve icon change presentations may be smaller for the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of types of reserve icon change presentations may be smaller for the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation presentation performed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow-colored presentations may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of reserve icon change presentations, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The hold icon change effect is not limited to changes in the color of the hold icon (including the icon itself) or changes in the shape of the icon. It may also involve changes in the effects or characters associated with the icon, or any other effects associated with the icon. Furthermore, the hold icon effect is not limited to changes such as a round CD icon transforming into a character icon, as in the embodiment; it may also involve changes in the shape of the icon, such as a triangle or square.

For example, if the execution rate of the special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if the special pattern D32 is not set), then while the hold icon change effect of the special 1 variation display in the normal game state can be executed, the zone effect of the special pattern D32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) the special pattern D12, will not be executed. In this case, when the special 1 variation display is executed in the normal game state, the hold icon change effect, which is not executable in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, can be executed. In this case, the rainbow effect, which is not executable in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the performance pattern D32 during the special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if performance pattern D32 is not set), then the hold icon change performance of performance pattern D42 can be executed during the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the hold icon change performance of performance pattern D32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern D42, will not be executed. In this case, when the special 2 variation display is executed in the specific game state, the hold icon change performance of a type that cannot be executed during the special 1 variation display in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow color performance of a type that cannot be executed during the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

The Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may have fewer displayable hold icons than the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Furthermore, in the hold icon change animation, the CD icon may change gradually from blue to red to rainbow, etc., or it may change selectively from the CD icon to blue, red, or rainbow. The Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may have fewer display modes that can be changed from the current hold icon display mode than the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, for example, the hold icon change effect can be executed, but in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of the hold icon change effect may be restricted. In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, for example, the change effect performed when changing the hold icon can be executed, but in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of the change effect may be restricted. Even if the hold icon effect is not executed, icon decorations associated with the hold icon, such as the pedestal on which the hold icon is placed or the frame surrounding the hold icon, may be displayed.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, a lamp change effect, which is a type of pre-announcement effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, can be performed by changing the illumination pattern of the prize-winning lamp NR over one or more variable displays.

As shown in Figure 38, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is lower for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state than for the Special 1 variation display executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e1). In other words, the lamp icon change effect in the Special 1 variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting).

As shown in Figure 38, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is lower for the special variation display (special variation 1) executed in a specific gaming state than for the special variation display (special variation 2) executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e4). In other words, the lamp change effect in the special variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106 in a specific gaming state.

This rate of lamp change animations makes it possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45 even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
The lamp change effect described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 38 may be the same or different. Here, the number of lamp change presentations may be fewer in the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of lamp change presentations may be fewer in the Special 1 variation presentation performed in a specific game state than in the Special 2 variation presentation performed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow color presentations may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of lamp change presentations, or the number of presentations may remain unchanged.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the prize entry lamp NR; it may also be implemented in conjunction with other lighting devices, such as the movable members 73 and 74, the decorative frame, the game board, and the frame lighting device 34b for the glass frame.

For example, if the execution rate of the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if the special variation display in E32 is not set), then while the lamp change effect of the special variation display in the normal game state can be executed, the lamp change effect of the special variation display in E12 will not be executed. In this case, when the special variation display executed in the normal game state is performed, the lamp change effect that cannot be executed in the special variation display executed in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow effect, which cannot be executed in the special variation display executed in the specific game state, may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the animation pattern E32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if the animation pattern E32 is not set), then while the lamp change animation of animation pattern E42 can be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state, the lamp change animation of animation pattern E32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) animation pattern E42, will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special variation display in the specific game state, the lamp change animation of an animation type that cannot be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow animation of an animation type that cannot be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

The number of lamp change effects may be fewer in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state. Furthermore, the lamp change effects may change gradually from no light → blue → red → rainbow, etc., or selectively from no light to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of possible destination light patterns from the current light pattern may be fewer in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Also, the number of rainbow color effects executed may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of lamp change effects, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, for example, a predetermined pattern of lamp change effects can be executed. However, in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of the predetermined pattern of lamp change effects may be restricted.

The light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect can be associated with various conditions, such as the change of the held (relevant) icon, when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a decisive effect (confirmation effect) such as "kyun" is executed, when a hidden operation button appears such as "gyuuuiin", the operating sound of the movable parts 73 and 74, the change start sound and return sound when multiple movable parts combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is formed.

If a lamp change animation can be executed in association with predetermined conditions, the probability of the predetermined conditions being met and the probability of the lamp change animation being executed may be the same or smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, for example, effects using the prize entry lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device) can be executed. However, in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, effects using the board lighting device and frame lighting device can be executed, while the execution of effects using the prize entry lamp NR may be restricted. In other words, in the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, effects using predetermined parts (regions, component units, etc.) of the lamp change effects can be executed, but in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, the execution of effects using predetermined parts can be restricted.

The lamp change effect or the pattern selected by the lamp change effect may change depending on the timing (for example, when a win occurs, when the variation starts, when the variation stops, the number of consecutive occurrences, when the movable parts start/stop/determine their operation, when the operation buttons vibrate or activate, etc.). In the special variation display of normal gameplay or the special variation display of specific gameplay states, the lamp change effect can be executed at predetermined timings, such as when a win occurs, and at specific timings when the movable parts operate. However, in the special variation display of specific gameplay states, the execution of the lamp change effect at predetermined timings and specific timings may be restricted.

The duration of the lamp change animation (a predetermined pattern of lamp change animation) performed during the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may be shorter than the duration of the lamp change animation (a predetermined pattern of lamp change animation) performed during the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Furthermore, the duration of the rainbow-colored animation may be configured to increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the duration of the lamp change animation, or it may be configured so that the duration remains unchanged.

In the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed during the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the number of types of parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light may be less than the number of types of parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed during the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the range of light emitted in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed during the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the range of light emitted in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed during the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Here, the light-emitting effect may be a mode in which the number of emitted LEDs arranged in a row changes, resulting in a gradual change in the number of emitted LEDs and the range of light emission, or a mode in which the light emission pattern changes due to the overlap of a light guide plate, image display device, or panel lighting device.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Simulation of the operation of movable parts)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, by operating the first movable member 73 in operation modes that include a weak operation mode and a strong operation mode that operates more significantly (more conspicuously) than the weak operation mode, it is possible to perform an operation effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played.

As shown in Figure 39, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the weak operation mode of the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gaming state is lower for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gaming state than for the Special 1 variation display performed in a normal gaming state (execution rate f31 < execution rate f11). In other words, the weak operation mode of the Special 1 variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting).

As shown in Figure 39, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the execution rate of the weak operation mode of the operation performance by the first movable member 73 is smaller for the special variation display 1, which is executed in a specific gaming state, than for the special variation display 2, which is executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate f31 < execution rate f41). In other words, when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state, the operation performance of the weak operation mode of the variation display 1 is less likely to be executed than when shooting right-handed, which is shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106, in a specific gaming state.

With this kind of execution rate for the action sequences, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second start opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The above-described operation may also be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Furthermore, the execution rate of the strong activation mode in the activation animation may be smaller than, the same as, or larger than that of the weak activation mode. Also, for the strong activation mode, the relationship between winning at the starting openings 45 and 47 and the game state may be the same as the weak activation mode, the opposite, or the execution rate may be the same.

Here, the number of types of activation patterns for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state may be reduced compared to the Special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of types of activation patterns for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state may be reduced compared to the Special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow-colored effects executed may increase or decrease in conjunction with the increase or decrease in the number of activation effects, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

In this embodiment, the operation of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation of other movable components, such as the second movable member 74, may be performed in the same manner as the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and the other movable components may be operated in conjunction (related to each other).

For example, if the execution rate of a specific operation pattern for the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific operation pattern is set), then while the operation pattern according to the predetermined operation pattern can be executed during the special variation display in the normal game state, the operation pattern corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation pattern will not be executed. In this case, when the special variation display is executed in the normal game state, the operation pattern of an effect that cannot be executed in the special variation display in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow effect of an effect that cannot be executed in the special variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific operation pattern for the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific operation pattern is set), then while the operation pattern according to the predetermined operation pattern can be executed for the special variation display in the specific game state, the operation pattern corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation pattern will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special variation display in the specific game state, it becomes possible to execute operation patterns that are not possible for the special variation display in the specific game state. In this case, the rainbow-colored effect of an effect pattern that is not possible for the special variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

The activation animations can be executed at various timings, such as at the start of a variation, during the development of an animation, when a reach occurs, during build-up, and during a decisive animation (confirmation animation). In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state, weak and strong activation animations can be executed at predetermined timings, such as the start of a variation, and at specific timings, such as a decisive animation. However, in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state, while the execution of strong activation at predetermined timings may be restricted, strong activation at specific timings may be permitted. Thus, differences in the activation mode and the possibility of executing activation animations may be established depending on the timing.

The operation animation can be performed in conjunction with a light-emitting animation using light-emitting means such as LEDs provided on the movable member. In this case, the light-emitting animation can be selected from various light-emitting patterns, such as blue light → red light → rainbow light, as well as light-emitting colors and light-emitting ranges, such as modes with progressively different levels of expectation. Furthermore, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, operation animations of, for example, a predetermined light-emitting mode of blue light and a specific light-emitting mode of rainbow light can be performed. However, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the operation animation when using the predetermined light-emitting mode, while still being able to perform the operation animation when using the specific light-emitting mode. In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, operation animations of, for example, a predetermined light-emitting mode of blue light and a specific light-emitting mode of rainbow light can be performed. However, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the light-emitting animation of the predetermined light-emitting mode while still being able to perform the light-emitting animation of the specific light-emitting mode. Furthermore, if there are predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during weak operation and predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during strong operation, the execution rate of the predetermined light emission patterns may be smaller for the special variation display in the specific game state than for the special variation display in the normal game state or the special variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Display presentation using a display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in Figure 40, a light guide plate provided in front of the first image display device 70 can display a light guide plate image DG over one or more fluctuation displays, thereby enabling a player to anticipate that a jackpot game will be played. This is a type of pre-announcement effect called a light guide plate display effect. For example, as shown in Figure 40(a), in the first consecutive announcement effect, a light guide plate image DG modeled after a character is displayed, for example, at the start of the fluctuation display. As shown in Figure 40(b), in the second consecutive announcement effect, a light guide plate image DG modeled after a character in a different pose than the first is displayed, for example, at the start of the fluctuation display. As shown in Figure 40(c), in the third consecutive announcement effect, a light guide plate image DG modeled after a character in the same pose as the second but in a different color (red character or rainbow character) is displayed, for example, at the start of the fluctuation display. The timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the fluctuation, but may also be during or at the end of the fluctuation display, and the timing of consecutively executed light guide plate display effects may differ.

As shown in Figure 40-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the light guide plate display effect is lower for the Special 1 Variation Display performed in a specific gaming state than for the Special 1 Variation Display performed in a normal gaming state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g1). In other words, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the Special 1 Variation Display when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting).

As shown in Figure 40-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the light guide plate display effect is lower for the special variation display (Special 1) executed in a specific gaming state than for the special variation display (Special 2) executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g4). In other words, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the special variation display (Special 1) when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right side of the gaming area 106.

This light guide plate display effect allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second start opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
The light guide plate display effect described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Here, the number of patterns for the light guide plate display effects may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of patterns for the light guide plate display effects may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state compared to the Special 2 variation display performed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow-colored effects may be increased or decreased along with the increase or decrease in the number of light guide plate display effects, or the number of effects may remain unchanged.

In this embodiment, the display effects of the light guide plate were described. However, display effects performed by display means other than the first image display device 70, such as the second image display device 71 or a 3D filter, may be performed in the same manner as the light guide plate display effects, or at different execution rates. In this case, the light guide plate display effects and other display effects may be executed in conjunction (related).

For example, if the execution rate of the performance pattern G32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if performance pattern G32 is not set), then while the light guide plate display performance of performance pattern G12 can be executed during the special variation display in the normal game state, the light guide plate display performance of performance pattern G32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern G12, will not be executed. In this case, when the special variation display performed in the normal game state is executed, the light guide plate display performance that cannot be executed during the special variation display performed in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow color performance, which cannot be executed during the special variation display performed in the specific game state, may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the performance pattern G32 during the special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if performance pattern G32 is not set), then the light guide plate change performance of performance pattern G42 can be executed during the special variation display in the specific game state, but the light guide plate change performance of performance pattern G32, which corresponds to (or is the same as) performance pattern G42, will not be executed. In this case, when the special variation display executed in the specific game state is performed, the light guide plate change performance that cannot be executed during the special variation display executed in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, the rainbow color performance, which cannot be executed during the special variation display executed in the specific game state, may also be executed.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings, such as at the start of a variation, during the development of an effect, when a reach occurs, during build-up, and during a decisive effect (confirmation effect). In the special variation display of normal gameplay or the special variation display of a specific gameplay state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at predetermined timings, such as at the start of a variation, and at specific timings, such as a decisive effect. However, in the special variation display of a specific gameplay state, the execution of the light guide plate display effect at predetermined timings may be restricted, while the execution of the light guide plate display effect at specific timings may be permitted. Thus, differences in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed may be made depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in conjunction with other winning indication effects, such as an operation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effect can be selected for its light emission pattern, such as a mode where the level of expectation differs in stages, like blue light emission → red light emission → rainbow light emission, as well as the light emission color and light emission range. Furthermore, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission can be executed together with other winning indication effects such as operation effects. However, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of other winning indication effects when the predetermined display mode is used, while it may be possible to execute other winning indication effects when the specific display mode is used. In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission can be executed together with the operation effect, while in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of the predetermined display mode, while it may be possible to execute the specific display mode together with the operation effect. Furthermore, if there are predetermined display patterns (executable during weak operation) and predetermined display patterns (executable during strong operation), the execution rate of the predetermined display patterns may be smaller for the special variation display in the specific game state than for the special variation display in the normal game state or the special variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Display effects performed by means other than the first image display device 70 are not limited to the light guide plate; they may also include sub-LCDs provided on the game board, such as the second image display device, or sub-LCDs provided on the frame. These display means, including the light guide plate, may be combined to perform display effects.

(Continuous preview sequence)
As shown in Figures 32, 33, and 40, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of executing a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect), which is a type of pre-announcement effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played by executing a predetermined effect over one or more fluctuation displays. In this embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, hold icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using light guide plates, etc. are executed in conjunction (related to each other).

Therefore, as shown in Figures 35-39 and 40-1, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment exhibits a lower rate of continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) execution in the Special 1 Variation Display performed in the specific gaming state compared to the Special 1 Variation Display performed in the normal gaming state. In other words, the continuous予告演出 is less likely to be executed in the Special 1 Variation Display when shooting left-handed in the specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in the left-hand area of the gaming area 106 in the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is lower for the special variation display (special variation 1) executed in a specific gaming state than for the special variation display (special variation 2) executed in a specific gaming state. In other words, the continuous予告演出 is less likely to be executed in the special variation display (special variation 1) when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state compared to when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) when shooting game balls toward the right-hand area of the gaming area 106.

This sequence of consecutive notification sequences allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The aforementioned continuous予告演出 (preview effect) may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Here, the number of patterns for the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state. Similarly, the number of patterns for the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be reduced in the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state compared to the Special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow-colored effects executed may increase or decrease along with the increase or decrease in the number of continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) types, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may include not only linked effects that occur consecutively or in relation to multiple fluctuation displays, but also development effects (such as development-enhancing effects and step-up (SU) type effects) in which the expectation of a jackpot increases in stages or in succession as predetermined conditions such as the number of fluctuation displays increase or time elapses progress. Furthermore, development effects may also include change effects such as countdown or timer effects, in which the form (display form or content) changes when predetermined conditions (such as time elapses) are met.

Other pre-announcement effects, such as selection effects that suggest different outcomes depending on the chosen option (e.g., roulette effects, effects where the number of symbols increases during a reach), pre-announcement effects that indirectly foreshadow events leading to a jackpot (e.g., pre-announcement text, LCD dialogue/cut-in effects, development roulette effects), content-suggestion effects that hint at the content of events that will occur after the effect (e.g., jackpot type indication effects (e.g., XX Bonus)), operation-suggestion effects such as button long-press guidance effects on image display devices, rapid-press effects (e.g., a gauge filling up during long-pressing, the button vibrating at each level reached), and operation effects such as the movement of movable parts (including dedicated movable parts and parts with other functions such as light guide plates) (weak pre-announcement (suggestion) activation, strong pre-announcement (suggestion) activation, suggestion, development, decisive effect), and vibration of operation buttons, may also be executed at a rate based on the aforementioned relationship between the game state and the starting conditions.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific type of continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) during a special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific operation mode is set), then while a predetermined type of continuous予告演出 can be executed during a special variation display in a normal game state, the continuous予告演出 corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined type of continuous予告演出 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special variation display in a normal game state, it becomes possible to execute a continuous予告演出 of a type of continuous予告演出 that cannot be executed during a special variation display in a specific game state. In this case, a rainbow-colored演出 of a type of continuous予告演出 that cannot be executed during a special variation display in a specific game state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific type of continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) during a special variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or if no specific operation mode is set), then while a predetermined type of continuous予告演出 can be executed during a special variation display in the specific game state, the continuous予告演出 corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined type of continuous予告演出 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special variation display in the specific game state, a continuous予告演出 of a type that cannot be executed during a special variation display in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow-colored演出 of a type that cannot be executed during a special variation display in the specific game state may also be executed.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the normal game state's special variation display (Special 1), the first start opening 45 can be illuminated at the timing of a game ball entering the first start opening 45 and/or the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a (first special symbol), and the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be operated. Similarly, in the specific game state's special variation display (Special 2), the second start opening 47 can be illuminated at the timing of a game ball entering the second start opening 47 and/or the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a (second special symbol), and the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be operated.

In contrast, during normal gameplay, in the special variation display of the first starting slot 45, the lighting effect of the first starting slot 45 is not performed at the timing of the game ball entering the first starting slot 45 and/or the timing of the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a (first special symbol), nor is the movement effect of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 performed. In other words, when playing left-handed during normal gameplay, the lighting effect and movement effect are performed, but when playing left-handed during a specific gameplay state, the execution of the lighting effect and movement effect is restricted.

In this way, by making the light-up and motion effects different for the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay and the special 1 variation display in specific gameplay, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in the specific gameplay state as in normal gameplay, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second start opening 47 in the specific gameplay state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the gameplay state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each gameplay state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
When the above-described light emission and motion effects are performed, various forms of rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment may also be performed. The same applies to the following descriptions.

The three display symbols 70a may be configured such that when a specific symbol (a specific outcome = a chance symbol) appears (stops), it triggers a so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change) or develops into an SP reach (a reach with a high probability of winning). Such a chance symbol may appear in a single spin or over multiple spins. In this case, the appearance rate of the chance symbol may be lower in the Special 1 spin display in the specific game state than in the Special 1 spin display in the normal game state or the Special 2 spin display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the appearance rate of the chance symbol over multiple spins may be lower in the Special 1 spin display in the specific game state than in the Special 1 spin display in the normal game state or the Special 2 spin display in the specific game state. In conjunction with the appearance of the chance symbol, various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment may be executed. The same applies to the following descriptions.

The performance symbol 70a may be displayed in various ways, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of an identification part such as numbers (1-9) or letters (A, B, etc.) and a decorative part such as a character, or a specific display mode consisting only of the identification part. There may be multiple predetermined display modes. In addition to the performance symbol 70a, or in place of the performance symbol 70a, a pseudo-consecutive symbol such as "NEXT" may be displayed to perform a performance (pseudo-consecutive) that changes multiple times regardless of a single starting condition (one win). In addition to the performance symbol 70a, or in place of the performance symbol 70a, symbols such as a change symbol, a mode entry symbol, or a development symbol may appear, so that the appearance of these symbols suggests the expectation of a different mode (e.g., a performance mode) or the execution of a performance. Special symbols such as pseudo-consecutive symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have different information (expected degree of execution of a jackpot game) than the normal performance symbol 70a. The appearance of such special patterns can also be considered an element of the linked performance.

The appearance rate of special symbols may be lower in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Furthermore, the total number of displayable symbols (normal effect symbols + special symbols) may be lower in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Also, the execution rate of linked effects that occur in conjunction with the appearance of special symbols may be lower in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state.

Even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. The player will then be guided to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The linked effects described above may include various forms of rainbow-colored effects as explained in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following descriptions.

(Specific example of staging 2)
Here is a second example of how to display fluctuations.

(Display of special variation 1 in normal game state)
Using Figures 41 and 42, the special symbol change display in the normal game state will be explained. As shown in Figure 41, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 42(a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations, such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 42(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 42(c)).

At timing P3, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 42(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P4, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 42(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 120. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see Figure 42(f)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol display 120 begins to show the variation of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LEDs on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Finally, the display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol begins, and after preparatory operations, scrolling begins (see Figure 42(g)).

At timing P7, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 42(h)).

Subsequently, at timing P8, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect action). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect action) (see Figure 42(i)).

Then, at timing P9, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 120. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 42(j)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

From this point onward, the Special 1 variation display will be performed during normal gameplay according to the flow described above.

While we have explained the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay, the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 variation display in normal gameplay and the Special 2 variation display in specific gameplay states (time-saving gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state).

Specifically, the following should be replaced with the following: 1st Reserved Number, 1st Special Symbol, 1st Special Symbol Indicator 120, 1st Special Symbol Reserved Indicator 63 (123), Sub-1st Variable Indicator 81, Sub-1st Reserved Indicator 83, 1st Reserved Number Display Area 70E, 1st Reserved Icon Display Area 70B, 1st Lamp Symbol, and 1st Start Port 45, respectively, as the 2nd Reserved Number, 2nd Special Symbol, 2nd Special Symbol Indicator 122, 2nd Special Symbol Reserved Indicator 64 (124), Sub-2nd Variable Indicator 82, Sub-2nd Reserved Indicator 84, 2nd Reserved Number Display Area 70F, 2nd Reserved Icon Display Area 70D, 2nd Lamp Symbol, and 2nd Start Port 47.

(Special 1 fluctuation display for specific game state)
Using Figures 43 and 44, the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific game state will be explained. As shown in Figure 43, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 44(a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B (it is not shifted). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begin to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 44(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 44(c)).

At timing P3, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 44(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P4, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 44(e)).

Then, at timing P5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 120. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display symbol 70a remains stationary. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see Figure 44(f)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol display 120 begins to show the variation of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LEDs on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol begin to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 44(g)).

At timing P7, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the reserved icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 44(h)).

Subsequently, at timing P8, once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a remain in a stopped state (see Figure 44(i)).

Then, at timing P9, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 120. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display symbol 70a remains stationary, but the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 44(j)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off).

From this point forward, the special variation display will be performed in the specific game state according to the flow described above. Note that in the example above, the effect symbol 70a does not change, but it may change if the effect symbol 70a does.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of performing a specific variation display in which, during a specific game state, the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display. In this embodiment, the special variation display does not perform the change of the performance symbol 70a. On the other hand, in a normal game state, the aforementioned specific variation display is not performed from the start to the end of the special variation display. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of performing a specific variation display in which, during a specific game state, the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display 1. In this embodiment, the performance symbol 70a does not change during the specific variation display. On the other hand, during a specific game state, the aforementioned specific variation display is not performed from the start to the end of the special variation display 2. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special variation display 2.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
Furthermore, when the specific fluctuation display described above is not performed, a rainbow effect may be performed. Also, the specific fluctuation display may be accompanied by various forms of rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

In the specific variation display, at least one of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can vary. For example, both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may vary, the performance symbol 70a may vary while the special symbol TZ does not, or the special symbol TZ may vary but the performance symbol 70a is not displayed.

In this embodiment, during normal gameplay, the reserve icon and reserve number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 45. In contrast, during a specific gameplay state, the reserve icon can be displayed in a specific manner, different from the predetermined manner, showing only the reserve number in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 45.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, during a specific game state, the reserve icon and reserve number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 47. In contrast, during a specific game state, the reserve icon can be displayed in a specific manner, different from the predetermined manner, showing only the reserve number in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 45.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display, information regarding the number of reserved balls is displayed using reserved icons, reserved numbers, and indicators. In contrast, in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display, it is displayed using reserved numbers and indicators. In other words, the total number of types of information regarding the number of reserved balls is smaller in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display than in the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display. Furthermore, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) information regarding the number of reserved balls in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display than in the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display.

Furthermore, in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state, it is not limited to not displaying the reserved (relevant) icon; it may also be displayed. Also, in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state, even if the reserved (relevant) icon is not shifted based on the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, it may be displayed in a different manner from the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, such as by not activating the reserved (relevant) icon. In other words, while shifting the reserved icon is possible in the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, the execution of shifting the reserved icon can be restricted in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state. Furthermore, while the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner in the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, the execution of displaying the reserved icon in a predetermined manner can be restricted in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The shift display of the hold icon or the display of the hold icon in a predetermined manner described above may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored effect may be performed when the shift display of the hold icon or the display of the hold icon in a predetermined manner is not performed. The same applies in the following description.

(Specific example of directing 3)
Here is a specific example of a variable display effect (example 3).

(Special 1 variation display when the number of reserved balls is "1" in normal gameplay state)
Using Figure 45, an example of the special variation display when the number of reserved spins is "1" in the normal game state will be explained. Note that the variation pattern will be selected from among several variation patterns.

As shown in Figure 45, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 45(a)).

Next, as the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0", the display of the first special symbol's variation begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 45(b)).

At this point, the scrolling of the animation symbols 70a begins in the following order: the left animation symbol 70a, the center animation symbol 70a, and the right animation symbol 70a (see Figures 45(c) to (e)).

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation animation, the left, center, and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the animation symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of left animation symbol 70a, center animation symbol 70a, and right animation symbol 70a (see Figures 45(f) to (h)). In addition, the animation symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE that make up the animation symbols 70a perform a swaying motion (animation). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (animation) (see Figures 45(f) to (h)).

Then, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol display unit 120 will stop displaying the first special symbol in a losing state. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) will perform processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 45(i)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

(Special 1 variation display when the number of reserved balls is "4" in normal gameplay state)
Using Figure 46, an example of the special variation display when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the normal game state will be explained. Note that the variation pattern will be selected from among several variation patterns.

As shown in Figure 46, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 46(a)).

Next, as the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "4" to "3," the display of the first special symbol's variation begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LEDs on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) processes the display of the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) from "4" to "3," in order to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 46(b)).

At this time, the left-hand animation symbol 70a, the central animation symbol 70a, and the right-hand animation symbol 70a all begin scrolling simultaneously (see Figure 46(c)).

When a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "3" to "4" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 46(d)).

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation animation, the left, center, and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the left animation symbol 70a, the center animation symbol 70a, and the right animation symbol 70a temporarily stop simultaneously (see Figure 46(e)). In addition, the animation symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE that constitute the animation symbols 70a perform a swaying motion (animation). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (animation) (see Figure 46(e)).

Then, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol display unit 120 will stop displaying the first special symbol in a losing state. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) will perform processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 46(f)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Subsequently, the special variation 1 display will be shown in the normal game state according to the variation pattern selected in the flow described above.

While we have explained the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay, the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 variation display in normal gameplay and the Special 2 variation display in specific gameplay states (time-saving gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state).

Specifically, the following should be replaced with the following: 1st Reserved Number, 1st Special Symbol, 1st Special Symbol Indicator 120, 1st Special Symbol Reserved Indicator 63 (123), Sub-1st Variable Indicator 81, Sub-1st Reserved Indicator 83, 1st Reserved Number Display Area 70E, 1st Reserved Icon Display Area 70B, 1st Lamp Symbol, and 1st Start Port 45, respectively, as the 2nd Reserved Number, 2nd Special Symbol, 2nd Special Symbol Indicator 122, 2nd Special Symbol Reserved Indicator 64 (124), Sub-2nd Variable Indicator 82, Sub-2nd Reserved Indicator 84, 2nd Reserved Number Display Area 70F, 2nd Reserved Icon Display Area 70D, 2nd Lamp Symbol, and 2nd Start Port 47.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern shown in Figure 46, where the three animation symbols 70a start scrolling simultaneously and then temporarily stop simultaneously, has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern shown in Figure 45, where the three animation symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially and then temporarily stop sequentially.

As shown in Figure 47, the average fluctuation time of the Special 1 fluctuation display in normal gameplay differs at least between the number of reserved balls "1" and "4". For example, the average fluctuation time increases as the number of reserved balls increases. In normal gameplay, the average fluctuation time of the Special 1 fluctuation display is longest when the number of reserved balls is "1" and shortest when the number of reserved balls is "4". Similarly, the average fluctuation time of the Special 2 fluctuation display in specific gameplay states differs at least between the number of reserved balls "1" and "4". For example, the average fluctuation time increases as the number of reserved balls increases. In specific gameplay states, the average fluctuation time of the Special 2 fluctuation display is longest when the number of reserved balls is "1" and shortest when the number of reserved balls is "4". Note that the average fluctuation times may be the same or different for the number of reserved balls "2" and "3", and the average fluctuation times for the number of reserved balls "2" through "4" may be the same or different.

In contrast, the average variation time for the special variation display in a specific game state is either the same or different for at least two different levels of reserved ball counts, "1" and "4". For example, if they differ, the average variation time is longest when reserved ball count is "1" and shortest when reserved ball count is "4".

Here, the difference between the average variation display time for a "4" reserved ball count and the average variation display time for a "1" reserved ball count when executing the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time for a "4" reserved ball count and the average variation display time for a "1" reserved ball count when executing the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state. In other words, even when the average variation time differs between a "4" reserved ball count and a "1" reserved ball count, the difference is smaller than that for the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state.

Furthermore, the difference between the average variation display time with 4 reserved balls and the average variation display time with 1 reserved ball when executing Special 2 variation display in a specific game state is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time with 4 reserved balls and the average variation display time with 1 reserved ball when executing Special 1 variation display in a specific game state. In other words, even when the average variation time differs between 4 and 1 reserved balls in a specific game state, the difference is smaller than that of Special 1 variation display in a normal game state.

In this embodiment, the difference in average variation time between the number of reserved balls "4" and the number of reserved balls "1" in the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state is smaller than the difference in average variation time between the number of reserved balls "4" and the number of reserved balls "1" in the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the difference in average variation time between the number of reserved balls "4" and the number of reserved balls "1" in the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference in average variation time between the number of reserved balls "4" and the number of reserved balls "1" in the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state (Normal Special 1 > Specific Special 2 > Specific Special 1).

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern shown in Figure 46, where the three animation symbols 70a start scrolling simultaneously and then temporarily stop simultaneously, has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern shown in Figure 45, where the three animation symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially and then temporarily stop sequentially.

In the normal game state, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the variation pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 45, and when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "3", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46. In other words, in the normal game state, there are multiple variation patterns that are determined according to the number of reserved balls. In contrast, in the specific game state, even when the number of reserved balls is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46, and the variation pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of reserved balls. Thus, when the special game state is executed for a loss, the number of variation display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls is less than the number of variation display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls when the special game state is executed for a loss. Furthermore, when executing the variable display, it may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of possible rainbow-colored effect patterns may be fewer when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state compared to when executing it in a normal game state. The same applies to the following description.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 2 variation display of a specific game state, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the variation pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 45, and when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "3", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46. In other words, the special 2 variation display of a specific game state has multiple variation patterns that are determined according to the number of reserved balls. In contrast, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even when the number of reserved balls is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46, and the variation pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of reserved balls. Thus, when the special 2 variation display for determining a loss is executed in a specific game state, the number of variation display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls is less than the number of variation display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls when the special 1 variation display for determining a loss is executed in a specific game state. Furthermore, when executing the variable display, it may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of executable rainbow-colored effect patterns may be fewer when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state than when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state. The same applies to the following description.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when executing the special 1 variation display for a miss judgment in normal gameplay, or when executing the special 2 variation display for a miss judgment in a specific gameplay state, the number of variation display time patterns determined by the number of reserved balls from "4" to "1" is less than the number of variation display time patterns determined by the number of reserved balls from "4" to "1" when executing the special 1 variation display for a miss judgment in a specific gameplay state. Thus, instead of comparing each reserved ball count as described above, when comparing the total number of variation display time patterns that can be determined by the number of reserved balls from "4" to "1", the number of variations for the special 1 variation display for a miss judgment in a specific gameplay state is less than the number of variations for the special 1 variation display for a miss judgment in normal gameplay, or the special 2 variation display for a misalignment judgment in a specific gameplay state. Even in this way, the aforementioned effects can be obtained.

In the normal gameplay state, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the variation pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 45, and when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "3", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46. In other words, in the normal gameplay state, there are multiple variation patterns determined by the number of reserved balls. In contrast, in the specific gameplay state, even when the number of reserved balls is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46, and the variation pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the specific gameplay state, the variation pattern is almost predetermined regardless of the number of reserved balls. To put it another way, when the special variation display for a loss judgment is performed in the specific gameplay state, the proportion of times the same variation pattern is executed for both the number of reserved balls "4" and "1" is greater than when the special variation display for a loss judgment is performed in the normal gameplay state.

Furthermore, when executing the variable display, it may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. In this case, the proportion of times the same rainbow-colored effect pattern is executed for both the number of reserved balls "4" and "1" may be greater when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state compared to when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a normal game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the special variation display for a specific game state, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the variation pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 45, and when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "3", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46. In other words, the special variation display for a specific game state has multiple variation patterns determined by the number of reserved balls. In contrast, in the special variation display for a specific game state, even when the number of reserved balls is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 46, and the variation pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special variation display for a specific game state, the variation pattern is almost predetermined regardless of the number of reserved balls. To put it another way, when the special variation display for a loss judgment is performed in a specific game state, the proportion of times the same variation pattern is executed for both the number of reserved balls "4" and the number of reserved balls "1" is greater when the special variation display for a loss judgment is performed in a specific game state than when the special variation display for a loss judgment is performed in a specific game state.

Furthermore, when executing the variable display, it may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. In this case, the proportion of times the same rainbow-colored effect pattern is executed for both the number of reserved balls "4" and "1" may be greater when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state compared to when executing the special variable display for a loss judgment in a specific game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The Special 1 variation display in a specific game state exhibits a higher proportion of the same stopping or starting variation patterns, regardless of the number of reserved balls (even with four reserved balls and one reserved ball), compared to the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Furthermore, the total number of variation patterns with different stopping (starting) patterns is smaller in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figures 45 and 46, the display symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory actions, such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or the expansion or contraction of the entire symbol or part thereof. The presence or absence of such preparatory actions, and the type of such actions, create the expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 48, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the execution rate of the preparation operation for the Special 1 variation display, which is executed in a specific gaming state, is smaller than that for the Special 1 variation display, which is executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h1). In other words, the preparation operation for the Special 1 variation display is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting), which is when shooting game balls towards the left side of the gaming area 106.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the preparation operation for the special variation display (special variation 1) performed in a specific gaming state is smaller than that of the special variation display (special variation 2) performed in a specific gaming state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h4). In other words, the preparation operation for the special variation display (special variation 1) is less likely to be performed when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting right-handed (so-called right-handed shooting) in a specific gaming state.

This ratio of preparatory actions allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The preparatory steps described above may include various rainbow-color effects as explained in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

As shown in Figure 48, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the number of types of preparation actions for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gaming state is fewer than the number of types of variation pattern H3 performed in a normal gaming state (number of types of variation pattern H3 < number of types of variation pattern H1). In other words, when a player shoots the game ball towards the left side of the gaming area 106 (so-called left-handed shooting) in a specific gaming state, the preparation actions for the Special 1 variation display are more likely to be performed in the same pattern than when a player shoots left-handed in a specific gaming state.

As shown in Figure 48, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the number of types of preparation actions for the special variation display (Special 1) executed in a specific gaming state is fewer than the number of types of variation patterns (H3) (number of variations in variation pattern H4). In other words, when shooting game balls towards the left side of the gaming area 106 (so-called left-handed shooting) in a normal gaming state, the preparation actions for the special variation display (Special 1) are more likely to be executed in the same pattern when left-handed shooting is performed in a specific gaming state than when left-handed shooting is performed in a normal gaming state.

The variety of preparatory actions in this configuration allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow-colored effects to be performed may increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of types of preparation actions, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

As shown in Figures 45 and 46, when the temporary stop occurs, the display symbol 70a moves slightly up and down to a predetermined stopping position (oscillating display), in addition to the display symbol 70
A stop operation is performed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE, which make up a, perform a flickering motion (effect motion).

As shown in Figure 49, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the execution rate of the stop operation is lower for the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state than for the Special 1 variation display executed in a normal gaming state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i1). That is, the stop operation is less likely to be executed for the Special 1 variation display when shooting left-handed in a specific gaming state than when shooting left-handed in a normal gaming state (so-called left-handed shooting). The stop operation described above may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

As shown in Figure 49, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the execution rate of the stop operation for the special variation display (special variation 1) executed in a specific gaming state is lower than that of the special variation display (special variation 2) executed in a specific gaming state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i4). That is, when shooting the game ball towards the right side of the gaming area 106 (so-called right-handed shooting) in a specific gaming state, the preparation operation for the special variation display (special variation 1) is less likely to be executed when shooting to the left in a specific gaming state than when shooting to the right in a specific gaming state. The above-mentioned preparation operation may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

This timing of stopping actions allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 48, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the number of stop operations for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gaming state is fewer than the number of variations of variation pattern I3 performed in a normal gaming state (number of variations of variation pattern I3 < number of variations of variation pattern I1). In other words, when a player shoots the game ball towards the left side of the gaming area 106 (so-called left-handed shooting) in a specific gaming state, the stop operations for the Special 1 variation display are more likely to be performed in the same pattern than when a player shoots left-handed in a specific gaming state.

As shown in Figure 48, in the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the number of stop operations for the special variation display (Special 1) executed in a specific gaming state is fewer than the number of special variation displays (Special 2) executed in a specific gaming state (Number of variations in variation pattern I3 < Number of variations in variation pattern I4). In other words, when shooting left-handed (so-called left-handed shooting) towards the left side of the gaming area 106 in a normal gaming state, the stop operations in the special variation display (Special 1) are more likely to be executed in the same pattern when left-handed shooting is performed in a specific gaming state than when left-handed shooting is performed in a normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when shooting the game ball towards the left side of the game area 106 (so-called left-handed shooting) during normal gameplay, or when shooting the game ball towards the right side of the game area 106 (so-called right-handed shooting) during a specific gameplay state, the rainbow-colored effect may be more likely to occur in the same pattern when shooting left-handed during a specific gameplay state.

The variety of stopping actions in this configuration allows the player to realize that even if they mistakenly shoot to the left in a specific game state, just as they would in a normal game state, it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it is acceptable to perform only one of the preparatory and stopping actions, rather than both.

In this embodiment, when the variable display stops upon a loss, there are two patterns: one in which the three performance symbols 70a stop sequentially (temporarily) as shown in Figure 45, and another in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together as shown in Figure 46. As shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is lower in the Special 1 variable display, which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the normal game state, compared to the Special 1 variable display, which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together in the Special 1 variable display with a number of reserved balls of "4" is less likely to occur when shooting left-handed in the specific game state than when shooting left-handed in the normal game state (so-called left-handed shooting). Note that such stopping patterns may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is higher for the Special 1 variation display that determines a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display that determines a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the variation in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence in the Special 1 variation display with "4" reserved balls is more likely to occur when shooting left-handed in the specific game state than when shooting left-handed in the left-hand area of the game area 106 in the normal game state. Note that such stopping patterns may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when the variable display stops upon a loss, there are two patterns: one in which the three performance symbols 70a stop sequentially (temporarily) as shown in Figure 45, and another in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together as shown in Figure 46. As shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is lower for the Special 1 variable display, which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, than for the Special 2 variable display, which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state. In other words, the pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together in the Special 1 variable display with a number of reserved balls of "4" is less likely to occur when shooting to the left in a specific game state than when shooting to the right in a specific game state. Note that such stopping patterns may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is higher for the Special 1 variation display, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, than for the Special 2 variation display, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4". In other words, the variation in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is more likely to be executed when the player shoots left-handed in a specific game state than when the player shoots right-handed in a specific game state. Note that such stopping patterns may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in a specific manner is the same for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the normal game state, or the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state, and the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in a specific manner is the same for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the normal game state, or the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state, and the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, when a losing result is detected and the display starts, there are two patterns for starting the display: one in which the three display symbols 70a are scrolled sequentially, as shown in Figure 45, and another in which the three display symbols 70a are scrolled simultaneously, as shown in Figure 46. As shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three display symbols 70a start scrolling together is lower in the Special 1 variation display for a losing result, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the normal game state, compared to the Special 1 variation display for a losing result, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three display symbols 70a start scrolling together in the Special 1 variation display with a number of reserved balls of "4" is lower when left-handed shooting is performed in the specific game state compared to when so-called left-handed shooting is performed, where the game balls are shot towards the left side of the game area 106 in the normal game state. Note that such scrolling start patterns may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially is higher for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the variation in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially in the Special 1 variation display when the number of reserved balls is "4" is more likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in the specific game state than when shooting left-handed in the left-hand area of the game area 106 in the normal game state. Note that such a scrolling start pattern may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when the display stops due to a loss, there are two patterns for starting the display: one in which the three display symbols 70a scroll sequentially, as shown in Figure 45, and another in which the three display symbols 70a scroll together, as shown in Figure 46. As shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three display symbols 70a scroll together is smaller for the special variation display (special 1) which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, compared to the special variation display (special 2) which results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state. In other words, the pattern in which the three display symbols 70a scroll together in the special variation display (special 1) with a number of reserved balls of "4" is less likely to occur when shooting to the left in a specific game state than when shooting to the right in a specific game state. Note that such scrolling start patterns may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially is higher for the Special 1 variation display, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, than for the Special 2 variation display, which is executed when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state and results in a loss. In other words, the variation in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling sequentially in the Special 1 variation display with "4" reserved balls is more likely to be executed when the player shoots left-handed in a specific game state than when the player shoots right-handed in a specific game state. Note that such a scrolling start pattern may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a begin scrolling is the same for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the normal game state, or the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state, and the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a begin scrolling sequentially is the same for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the normal game state, or the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state, and the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss judgment when the number of reserved balls is "1" in the specific game state. Note that such scrolling start patterns may include various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the special variation display of a specific game state, the displayed performance symbols 70a may not scroll, or some decorative elements such as characters may be missing from the performance symbols 70a, or the performance symbols 70a may not be displayed at all. For example, the symbols may scroll, but the decorative elements such as characters on the performance symbols 70a may not perform the predetermined actions. In other words, the proportion of the performance symbols 70a being displayed in a special manner different from that of the special variation display of a normal game state or the special variation display of a specific game state is greater in the special variation display of a specific game state than in the special variation display of a normal game state or the special variation display of a specific game state. Furthermore, such special variations in the display of performance symbols may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

The special symbols, such as the pseudo-consecutive symbols mentioned above, may be displayed overlaid on or in place of the performance symbols 70a. In this case, the display of the special symbols obscures all or part of the scrolling of the normal performance symbols 70a and the movement of decorative elements such as characters on the performance symbols (preparation and stopping movements). Furthermore, the proportion or extent to which the normal symbols are hidden by the display of the special symbols is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display in the normal game state. Note that the display of special symbols in this manner may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Specific example of directing 4)
A specific example of the display effect 4 will be explained with reference to Figure 51.

As shown in Figure 51(a), a reach animation is being performed in which the "8" animation symbol 70a is displayed as a stop (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display symbol 70a, while the animation symbol 70a is displayed as a change in the central variable display area.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 52(b), the temporarily stopped left and right display symbols 70a change to a display mode different from the previous display mode (Figure 52(b)), suggesting a high expectation of a jackpot. Then, a symbol size change effect is executed, displaying the display symbols 70a in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and predetermined effects such as video insertion are performed on the first image display device 70. The reduced-size display symbols 70a change from their normal display mode, which consists of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a symbol effect image ZE that decorates the character's background, to a simple reduced-size display mode consisting only of the identification part, with the normal display mode consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numerical part (identification character).

As shown in Figures 51(d) and (f), the pseudo-symbol GZ is displayed in three rows vertically, increasing the expectation of a jackpot. After the jackpot reach animation period ends (the animation control board 320 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 51(g), the jackpot animation symbol 70a with the letter "888," which indicates the type of jackpot game (in this case, the first jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) before being stopped, ending the fluctuation animation.

In this embodiment, the variable display can be performed using a normal mode of the performance symbol 70a and a specific mode of the performance symbol 70a that is displayed at predetermined timings of the variable display (for example, at the start of a reach performance, during a reach performance, at the start of a variation, during a variation, or when a variation stops). The specific mode of the performance symbol 70a may not only be a changed performance symbol 70a (changed symbol) or pseudo-symbol GZ as shown in Figure 51(b), but may also be a mode entry symbol that suggests a transition to a predetermined mode, or a development symbol that heightens the expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 52, the proportion of times the specific type of performance symbol 70a is displayed is smaller in the Special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the Special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (m32 < m12). In other words, the display of the specific type of performance symbol 70a in the Special 1 variation display is less likely to occur when playing left-handed in the specific game state than when playing left-handed in the normal game state. Note that such a specific type of display of the performance symbol 70a may be accompanied by the various types of rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 52, the proportion of times the special variation display 70a is displayed in the special variation display 1, executed in the specific game state, is smaller than the proportion of times the special variation display 2, executed in the specific game state, is smaller (m32 < m42). In other words, the proportion of times the normal variation display 70a is displayed is larger for the special variation display 1, executed in the specific game state, than for the special variation display 2, executed in the specific game state. That is, the display of the special variation display 70a is less likely to occur when shooting left in the specific game state than when shooting right in the specific game state. Note that such a special variation display of the variation display 70a may be accompanied by the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 51, a display size change effect can be performed in the variable display, which changes the display size of the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the execution rate of the display size change effect is smaller (n3 < n1) for the special variable display that results in a loss in a specific game state than for the special variable display that results in a loss in a normal game state. In other words, the display size change effect of the performance symbol 70a is less likely to be performed in the special variable display when playing left-handed in a specific game state than when playing left-handed in a normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the execution rate of the display size change effect (n3 < n4) is lower for the special variation display (special variation 1), which results in a loss in a specific game state, than for the special variation display (special variation 2), which results in a loss in a specific game state. In other words, the display size change effect (special variation 70a) is less likely to be executed when playing left-handed in a specific game state than when playing right-handed in that state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The display size change effect may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment.

The display size change effect is not limited to being performed in conjunction with the reach effect; it can also be performed at predetermined timings, such as at the start of a spin or during a spin. The display size change effect may also be performed in conjunction with predetermined conditions, such as the operation of movable parts, the number of reserved balls, or the operation of control buttons.

The execution rate of the symbol change animation may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, compared to the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state. The execution rate of the symbol change animation may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "1" in a specific game state, compared to the Special 1 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "1" in a normal game state, compared to the Special 2 variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "1" in a specific game state. The symbol change animation may include various rainbow-colored animations as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The execution rate of the symbol change animation may be the same for the special variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state, and for the special variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "1" in a specific game state. Furthermore, the execution rate of the symbol change animation may be smaller or larger for the special variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "1" in a specific game state than for the special variation display that results in a loss when the number of reserved balls is "4" in a specific game state.

The symbol change effect, which creates anticipation of a jackpot game by changing the symbols, is not limited to a change in display size. Other forms may include changes in the display position of the effect symbols 70a, or changes in the display order of the effect symbols 70a. Furthermore, if the symbol change effect has multiple patterns with different display sizes, positions, and order, the total number of patterns for the special 1 variation display in a specific game state may be less than that for the special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Additionally, the number of patterns of the rainbow effect may increase or decrease in conjunction with the increase or decrease in the number of patterns of the symbol change effect, or the number of patterns may remain unchanged.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 52, the variable display shows reach animations (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development prompt animation, etc.). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 54, the execution rate of reach animations is lower for special variable display animations that result in a loss in specific game states than for special variable display animations that result in a loss in normal game states (o3 < o1). In other words, reach animations are less likely to be executed in special variable display animations when shooting left-handed in specific game states than when shooting left-handed in normal game states.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 54, the execution rate of the reach animation is lower for the special variation display that results in a loss in a specific game state than for the special variation display that results in a loss in a specific game state (o3 < o4). In other words, the reach animation is less likely to be executed when shooting left-handed in a specific game state than when shooting right-handed in that specific game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.
The reach animation described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-colored animations as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Prior to the reach animation, a first animation such as a mode entry animation or a development animation is performed, followed by a second animation such as a roulette animation or a development animation. This process, where multiple pre-announcement animations are repeated before the reach animation, increases the expectation of a big win. Here, the proportion of pre-announcement animations performed before the reach animation may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state. In other words, the proportion of reach animations performed after pre-announcement animations is smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. Furthermore, the number of pre-announcement animations performed before the reach animation may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. In other words, the proportion of times a reach animation is executed after a pre-announcement animation is smaller when using the Special 1 animation in a specific game state compared to when using the Special 2 animation in a normal game state.

The probability of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach animation is lower when using the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay compared to the Special 2 variation display in specific gameplay states. Conversely, the probability of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach animation is lower when using the Special 1 variation display in specific gameplay states compared to the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay states (Special 2 variation display in specific gameplay states > Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay states > Special 1 variation display in specific gameplay states).

When selecting and executing a reach animation from multiple patterns, the total number of reach animation types may be less in the Special 1 animation display in a specific game state than in the Special 2 animation display in a normal game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow animation types executed may increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reach animation types, or it may be configured so that the number of types remains unchanged.

During or before a reach animation, related animations such as the operation of movable parts and vibration of control buttons can be selected and executed from multiple patterns at appropriate timings in conjunction with the reach animation. In this case, the execution rate of related animations in conjunction with the reach animation is smaller for the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Also, the number of types of related animations in conjunction with the reach animation is smaller for the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow-colored animations executed may also increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of types of related animations, or it may be configured so that the number of types does not change.

The rate at which a normal reach develops into an SP reach or SPSP reach is lower when using the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. The execution period of the reach animation is shorter when using the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. The execution rate of reach animations spanning multiple variations is lower when using the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state compared to the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Specific example of directing 5)
Specific example 5 of the display variation will be explained with reference to Figures 55 and 56. In specific example 5 of the display variation, the player is in a specific game state, and a first specific notification SR1 is displayed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70, instructing the player to shoot to the right.

As shown in Figure 55, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 47, the second reserved ball count U2 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the second reserved ball count U2, indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved ball indicator 64 (124), changes from "3" to "4". The first reserved ball count stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) is "0", and the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), is "0".

At this time, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the second reserved number digit displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, changes from "3" to "4" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the LED on the sub-second reserved indicator 84, changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one reserved icon T2 is added to the second reserved icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 56(a)). Also, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number digit displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, is "0". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83, is "0", and the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Next, at timing P1, the second reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "4" to "3," and the display of the second special symbol variation begins. Also, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the LEDs on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124), changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "4" to "3," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, changes from "4" to "3" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the reserved icon T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shifts towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-second variable indicator 82 begin to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations, such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 56(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated frame. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 56(c)).

Furthermore, based on the winning entry into the first starting gate 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a second specific notification SR2 is executed, in which a message such as "Hit to the right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a voice message such as "Please hit to the right." is output from the voice output device 331 (see Figure 56(c)).

Subsequently, at timing P3, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect action). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect action) (see Figure 56(d)).

Then, at timing P6, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicator 122 displays the second special symbol in a losing state. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 56(e)), and the second lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P5, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the second reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "3" to "2," and the variation display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserve number U2, indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124), changes from "3" to "2." Furthermore, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "3" to "2," and processing is performed to start the variation performance. Note that the main control unit (main control board 300) also stores the first reserve based on entry into the first start port 45, but the second reserve based on entry into the second start port 47 takes priority, and the variation performance is performed accordingly.

At this time, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, changes from "3" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the reserved icon T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-second variable indicator 81 begin to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations, such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 56(f)).

At timing P6, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 56(g)).

Furthermore, based on the winning entry into the first starting gate 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a second specific notification SR2 is executed, in which a display such as "Hit to the right" is shown in the center of the first image display device 70, and an audio output such as "Please hit to the right." is output by the audio output device 331 (see Figure 56(g)).

Subsequently, at timing P7, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("913"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 56(h)).

Then, at timing P8, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicator 122 displays the second special symbol in a losing state. Furthermore, the performance control unit (performance control board 320) performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("913") (see Figure 56(j)), and the second lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

In this way, it is possible to perform a first specific notification that indicates a specific game state, and a second specific notification that is performed in addition to the first specific notification based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45 while the first specific notification is being performed. In this way, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This guides the player to aim for entry into the second start opening 47 in a specific game state. Accordingly, with the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
The first specific notification described above may be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description. The second specific notification described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Unlike the right-hand shooting notification that is issued at the start of a jackpot game, the second specific notification SR2 is triggered based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 45 during a specific game state.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, predetermined effects (winning indication effects) such as notification sound effects, illumination effects at the start gate, and hold icon changes can be executed. However, when the second specific notification SR1 is executed, the execution of predetermined effects (winning indication effects) such as notification sound effects, illumination effects at the start gate, and hold icon changes can be restricted. It can also be said that when a ball enters the first start gate 45 in a specific game state, the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of the predetermined effects.

Furthermore, the execution rate of the predetermined animation (winning hint animation) is lower when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed compared to when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed. Note that the aforementioned predetermined animation (winning hint animation) may include various forms of rainbow-colored animations as described in the first embodiment.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Specific example of directing 6)
As a notification effect (pre-notification effect) that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game, there is a first notification that is executed at a predetermined timing (when the spin starts) and a second notification that is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (when the ball enters the starting slot). For example, in this embodiment, when the spin of the performance symbol 70a (special symbol) starts, it is possible to execute a first notification effect which consists of a first lighting mode in which the entry slot lamp NR (starting slots 45, 47) flashes in blue, for example (see Figure 57(a)) and a second lighting mode in which the entry slot lamp NR (starting slots 45, 47) flashes in red, for example, which is different from the first lighting mode (see Figure 57(b)). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the starting openings 45 and 47, a second notification can be performed using a third lighting mode (see Figures 57(d) and (e)) which differs from the first and second lighting modes, for example, by combining the entry opening lamp NR with a panel lighting device 76 such as a decorative frame or a frame lighting device 34b to produce light. Note that even for the second notification, the first and/or second lighting modes may be performed. In addition, as a notification performance, there is a fourth lighting mode (see Figures 58(c) and (f)) which differs from the first to third lighting modes, for example, without the illumination of the entry opening lamp NR.

As shown in Figure 58, the execution rate of the first, second, and third light emission modes in the notification effect is lower when the Special 1 variation display is executed in a specific game state compared to when it is executed in a normal game state (p31 < p11). Furthermore, the execution rate of the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is higher when the Special 1 variation display is executed in a specific game state compared to when it is executed in a normal game state (p32 > p12). In other words, the first, second, and third light emission modes in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player shoots left-handed in a specific game state compared to when the player shoots left-handed in a normal game state. Also, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed when the player shoots left-handed in a specific game state compared to when the player shoots left-handed in a normal game state.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This will guide the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As for the notification effects, the first notification can be performed in the first, second, and third light emission modes, and the second notification can be performed in the first and second light emission modes, but the third light emission mode may be disabled for the second notification. Even in this case, as shown in Figure 58, the execution rate of the first, second, and third light emission modes in the notification effects is smaller for the special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state (p31 < p11). Also, the execution rate of the fourth light emission mode in the notification effects is larger for the special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state (p32 > p12). In other words, the first, second, and third light emission modes in the notification effects are less likely to be performed when playing left-handed in a specific game state than when playing left-handed in a normal game state. Also, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effects is more likely to be performed when playing left-handed in a specific game state than when playing left-handed in a normal game state. The term "light emission mode" as used herein may include the various rainbow light emission displays described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following descriptions.

Even in this way, if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 57, a vibration effect is performed using the operation button 17 in conjunction with the notification effect described above. The vibration effect, by causing the operation button 17 to vibrate, creates anticipation of a jackpot, and may be performed in combination with a button illumination effect that causes the operation button 17 to light up. In the notification effect, the first notification can be performed using two illumination modes: a first illumination mode (see Figure 57(a)) in which the prize entry lamps NR (starting holes 45, 47) flash in, for example, blue, and a second illumination mode (see Figure 57(b)) in which the prize entry lamps NR (starting holes 45, 47) flash in, for example, red, which is different from the first illumination mode. Furthermore, a second notification can be performed using a third illumination mode (see Figures 57(d) and (e)) which is different from the first and second illumination modes, for example, by combining the prize entry lamps NR with other light-emitting means such as a panel lighting device 76 or a frame lighting device 34b.

As shown in Figure 59, in the Special 1 variation display performed during normal gameplay, the vibration effect triggered by the operation button 17 is more frequently triggered by the second notification than by the first notification (q12 > q11). That is, in the Special 1 variation display during normal gameplay, the vibration effect is more likely to be triggered when combined with the second notification than with the first notification. Furthermore, the vibration effect triggered by the operation button 17 is less frequently triggered when performing the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than when performing the Special 1 variation display during normal gameplay (r3 < r1). That is, the vibration effect is less likely to be triggered when playing left-handed in a specific game state than when playing left-handed in normal gameplay.

The vibration effect may be selected from multiple vibration patterns, such as patterns that are executed over a certain period of time or patterns that are executed intermittently at predetermined intervals. Furthermore, the vibration effect may be selected from multiple effect patterns, such as weak effect patterns (vibrating without emitting light) and strong effect patterns (vibrating while emitting light). The total number of vibration effect patterns may be fewer for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state. Also, while both weak and strong vibration effect patterns can be executed for the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state, the execution of weak vibration effect patterns may be restricted while strong vibration effect patterns can be executed for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effects described above may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as explained in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following descriptions. Furthermore, the number of rainbow-colored effect patterns may be configured to increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of vibration effect patterns, or the number of patterns may remain constant.

The lighting effect is not limited to the start-up lamp (NR); other parts such as the game board or frame may also light up.

As shown in Figure 57, the machine is capable of performing a light-up effect by the prize-winning lamp NR, an operation effect of the first movable member 73, and a vibration effect of the operation button 17, in conjunction with the timing of the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a. Here, the light-up effect can be selected from multiple patterns, such as a mode in which only the prize-winning lamp NR lights up, or a mode in which the prize-winning lamp NR lights up in combination with the first movable member 73, the operation button 17, the game board (lighting device for the board), and specific positions such as the frame. The light-up effect can also be selected from multiple patterns of light-up colors, such as blue, red, and rainbow. Furthermore, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from multiple patterns, such as weak operation and strong operation. In addition, the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be selected from multiple patterns with different durations, intensities, and intervals. As shown in Figure 57, in this embodiment, in the special variation display 1 during normal gameplay, the light emission effect of the prize entry lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable mechanism (movable member 73 and operation button 17) can be executed at the start of the variation. Similarly, in the special variation display 2 during a specific gameplay state, the light emission effect of the prize entry lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable mechanism (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may be executed at the start of the variation. In contrast, in the special variation display 1 during a specific gameplay state, the light emission effect of the prize entry lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable mechanism (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the start of the variation. In the special variation display 1 during a specific gameplay state, the light emission effect of the prize entry lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable mechanism (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time, but at different times.

Thus, the total number of types of winning indication effects executed simultaneously is smaller for the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in a normal game state. The timing of the effects can be, for example, upon winning, during a variation, or when the variation stops.

By doing this, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The aforementioned winning indication effect may include various forms of rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description. Furthermore, the number of rainbow-colored effects performed may increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of winning indication effects, or the number of effects may remain unchanged.

(Variations of specific examples 1-6 of the production)
In the special variation display that is performed in the normal game state, the performance symbol 70a is displayed, but in the special variation display that is performed in the specific game state, the performance symbol 70a may not be displayed, or if it is displayed, it may not scroll. Also, in the special variation display that is performed in the specific game state, the performance symbol 70a is displayed, but in the special variation display that is performed in the specific game state, the performance symbol 70a may not be displayed, or if it is displayed, it may not scroll. By doing so, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second start opening 47 in the specific game state. Accordingly, according to the game machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate start openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the special variation display executed during a specific game state, even if the hold icon is not displayed, related displays such as the base that adorns the hold icon may be displayed.

The symbol 70a used in the special variation display performed in the normal game state and the symbol 70a used in the special variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared or separate. Similarly, the symbol 70a used in the special variation display performed in the specific game state and the symbol 70a used in the special variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared or separate.

The special symbol TZ used in the Special 1 variation display performed in normal gameplay and the special symbol TZ used in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gameplay state may be separate and not shared. Similarly, the special symbol TZ used in the Special 2 variation display performed in a specific gameplay state and the special symbol TZ used in the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific gameplay state may be separate and not shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different for the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay and the Special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state. Furthermore, the display position and/or display manner of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different for the Special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state and the Special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state.

The reserved numbers used in the Special 1 variation display performed during normal gameplay and the reserved numbers used in the Special 1 variation display performed during a specific gameplay state may be shared rather than being separate. Furthermore, the reserved numbers used in the Special 2 variation display performed during a specific gameplay state and the reserved numbers used in the Special 1 variation display performed during a specific gameplay state may be shared rather than being separate.

Pre-announcement effects with different execution timings can be combined and executed. At the start of a spin, the expectation of a jackpot can be suggested by the actions of the symbols themselves or the characters on the symbols at the start of the spin, or by the order in which the symbols start spinning. Also, at the end (stop) of a spin, the expectation of a jackpot can be suggested by the actions of the symbols themselves or the characters on the symbols at the start of the spin, or by the order in which the symbols start spinning. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of pre-announcement effects in one or more spin displays, the following can be executed individually or in combination in the first half of the spin display (first period): conversation announcements on the LCD or other display means, cut-in announcements, development destination roulette effects, long-press and rapid-press effects of the operation button 17, hold icon changes and changes to the said icon, display effects of the light guide plate, operation effects of movable members 73 and 74 (suggestion, development, and determination effects), vibration effects of the operation button (suggestion, development, and determination effects), timer effects, and lamp illumination effects of the start ports 45 and 47. Furthermore, during the latter half of the execution period for pre-announcement effects using one or more variable displays, it is possible to execute, individually or in combination with other effects such as development and decisive effects on display means such as LCDs, display effects on light guide plates (lighting according to the result of the decisive effect, etc.), vibration effects of operation buttons 17 (suggestion, development, and decisive effects), operation effects of frame and panel components (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion effects (e.g., XX Bonus), timer effects, and lamp illumination effects of start ports 45, 47 in accordance with changes in the reserve, etc.

In this case, the execution rate of the pre-announcement effect performed in the first half of the execution period is smaller for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state. Furthermore, the execution rate of the pre-announcement effect performed in the first half of the execution period is smaller for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display performed in a specific game state. The execution rate of the pre-announcement effect performed in the second half of the execution period is smaller for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display performed in a normal game state. Furthermore, the execution rate of the pre-announcement effect performed in the second half of the execution period is smaller for the Special 1 variation display performed in a specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display performed in a specific game state. Note that the above-mentioned pre-announcement effect may include the various forms of rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

If there are two pre-announcement sequences, a first sequence performed in the first half of the execution period and a second sequence performed in the second half, both sequences can be executed using the special 1 variation display during normal gameplay. However, it may also be possible to restrict the execution of the second sequence while allowing the execution of the first sequence using the special 1 variation display during a specific gameplay state. Alternatively, both sequences can be executed using the special 2 variation display during a specific gameplay state. However, it may also be possible to restrict the execution of the second sequence while allowing the execution of the first sequence using the special 1 variation display during a specific gameplay state.

Even in this way, if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the aforementioned specific game states (such as the time-saving game state or the probability-increasing game state), the various effects displayed in the Special 1 variation display that suggest the execution of a jackpot game may have an execution rate of "0".

The various effects that suggest the execution of the aforementioned jackpot game (sometimes collectively referred to as "winning indication effects") may have only one effect (display) pattern set, or multiple effect (display) patterns may be selected and executed. The execution rate of the winning indication effects is not limited to the relationship between the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay, the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state, and the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. For example, the execution rates of multiple patterns selectable for the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay (Special 1 variation display in a specific game state, Special 2 variation display in a specific game state) may be the same or different.

For example, in the special 1 variation display in a specific game state, if the winning suggestion effect is selected from multiple patterns, the execution rate of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. Conversely, in the special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the special 2 variation display in a specific game state, if the execution rate of the first pattern, which is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and the execution rate of the second pattern, which is the same as or corresponds to the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, may be the same, or they may be different from the execution rate of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Even if there is a difference in the execution rate of the patterns in this way, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. This can then guide the player to aim for getting the ball into the second start opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting holes 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when selecting the expectation level display using color effects from "blue," "red," and "rainbow," the execution rate of the "red" color effect selectable in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may be smaller than that of the "red" color effect selectable in the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. In this case, the execution rates of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. This can be applied not only to the expectation level display but also to the various effects that make the player anticipate the execution of the aforementioned jackpot game. That is, when a winning suggestion effect can be selected from multiple patterns, the execution rate of the specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern selectable in the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern selectable in the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. By doing so, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first start opening 45. Furthermore, the player can be guided to aim for entry into the second starting opening 47 in a specific game state. Therefore, according to the game machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, the execution rate of the winning indication effect or the pattern selected in the winning indication effect may differ depending on predetermined conditions such as timing (for example, at the start of the variation, at the stop of the variation, or the number of consecutive occurrences), the game state, and combinations with other patterns (for example, variation pattern or variation time). For example, if a variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is selected, the execution rate of the "red" color effect executed at the start of the variation in the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the execution rate of the "red" color effect executed at the start of the variation in the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Similarly, if a variation pattern with a short variation time for the effect symbols 70a is selected, the execution rate of the "red" color illumination effect by the prize entry lamp NR executed at the start of the variation in the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the execution rate of the "red" color illumination effect executed at the start of the variation in the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Furthermore, this can be applied not only to the expectation level display and the starting gate illumination effect, but also to the various effects that suggest the execution of the aforementioned jackpot game. That is, when a jackpot suggestion effect is executed under predetermined conditions, the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect performed with the special 1 variation display in a specific game state (a predetermined pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect) may be smaller than that of the jackpot suggestion effect performed with the special 2 variation display in a specific game state (a predetermined pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect). Even in this way, if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting gate 45. This then guides the player to aim for entry into the second starting gate 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting gates 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The duration of the winning indication effect (a predetermined pattern of the winning indication effect) performed during the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be shorter than the duration of the winning indication effect (a predetermined pattern of the winning indication effect) performed during the Special 2 variation display in the normal game state. Furthermore, the duration of the rainbow effect may be configured to increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease of the winning indication effect duration, or it may be configured so that the duration remains unchanged.

When a joint performance is possible, where multiple types of winning indication performances are performed simultaneously, the execution rate of the joint performance may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state than for the Special 2 variation display in the normal game state. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning indication performances performed simultaneously, the execution rate of the predetermined winning indication performance within the joint performance may be smaller for the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning indication performances performed simultaneously, the predetermined winning indication performance and a specific winning indication performance may be performed for the Special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the execution of the predetermined winning indication performance within the joint performance may be restricted for the Special 1 variation display in the specific game state, while a specific winning indication performance may be performed.

The confirmed winning animations (including animations that strongly indicate a big win) include a first animation in which, at a predetermined timing, the movable members 73 and 74 are activated, the operation button 17 vibrates, and a predetermined display such as a rainbow display or rainbow light is shown; and a second animation that is performed at a different timing from the first animation (for example, at the start of a spin, during a spin, or when a spin stops). The second animations include, for example, a confirmed notification sound output at the start of a spin, a rainbow-patterned change in the reserve, or a bonus round confirmation animation that suggests the execution of a bonus round through a battle victory. These can be executed individually or in combination, and there are multiple patterns.

The execution rate of the first and/or first performance of the confirmation animation differs between the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay or the special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state, and the special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state. In this case, the execution rate of the first performance of the confirmation animation may be lower for the special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state than for the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay or the special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state. Furthermore, the execution rate of the second performance of the confirmation animation may be lower for the special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state than for the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay or the special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state. Moreover, the execution rate of either the first or second performance of the confirmation animation may be lower for the special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state than for the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay or the special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state. In this case, the execution rate of the other of the first and second performances of the confirmation animation may be the same or different. The above-described confirmation animation may also be accompanied by various forms of rainbow-colored animations as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

In the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, the first and second confirmation effects can be executed. However, in the specific game state's Special 1 variation display, it is preferable to restrict the execution of at least one predetermined pattern of the second effect. For example, in the normal game state's Special 1 variation display or the specific game state's Special 2 variation display, the first effect, which involves the operation of movable members 73 and 74 and the operation button 17, is executed as a confirmation effect, while the pattern of the second effect, which also involves the operation of movable members 73 and 74 and the operation button 17, is not executed.

By doing so, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to get the game ball into the first starting opening 45. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

While we have explained the indication of a win in the display of a losing outcome, the relationship between the special 1 display in normal gameplay or the special 2 display in a specific gameplay state and the special 1 display in a specific gameplay state may be the same as in the case of a losing outcome.

As explained above, if a player notices something unusual about the expected effects (winning indication effects) in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, such as the degree or type of execution, they may suspect an error in the game machine 100 itself. In this case, it is expected that the hall manager will check the control parts that govern the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the configuration of the effects in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state described above, the configuration of the circuit board case described later makes it easier for the hall manager to check, reduces player stress, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in both normal and specific game states, when a predetermined effect (such as a mechanism activation, notification sound effect, or radial effect) is performed, the rainbow effect may be more likely to occur compared to when the predetermined effect is not performed. For example, when an effect that runs for a certain period of time (such as a reach effect, a customer waiting demo effect, a pre-read reserve change effect, or during a jackpot game) is being performed, the rainbow effect is less likely to occur when the predetermined effect is not performed than when the predetermined effect is being performed. A radial effect is an effect in which light appears to spread radially, and can be performed using a liquid crystal display or a light guide plate.
Furthermore, the game may be configured so that the same effects (rainbow effect, mechanism activation, radial effect) can be executed in both the normal game state and the specific game state, starting from the predetermined effects described above (mechanism activation, notification sound effect, radial effect).

The Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay or the Special 2 variation display in a specific gameplay state may be configured to have different numbers or types of executable rainbow effects when compared with the Special 1 variation display in a specific gameplay state. The number of rainbow effects may refer to the number of times the rainbow effect is executed at each timing (first timing, second timing, third timing, etc.). The types of rainbow effect presentations may refer to the executable patterns of rainbow illumination for each presentation of dialogue, cut-ins, hold icons, and the icons themselves.
Furthermore, the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state may be configured to have fewer possible rainbow-colored effects or fewer types of effects than the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display in a specific game state. In the Special 1 variation display in a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the hold changes, mechanism effects, and pseudo-consecutive effects, so the Special 1 variation display in a normal game state will have a greater variety of rainbow-colored effect patterns.

Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be triggered when displaying the special variation 1 for a win in a normal game state or the special variation 2 for a win in a specific game state, compared to the special variation 1 for a win in a specific game state.
Furthermore, the rainbow effect can be performed regardless of whether the special 1 variation display for a win in a specific game state, the special 1 variation display for a win in a normal game state, or the special 2 variation display for a win in a specific game state is performed (during a big win, a pre-announcement effect, or a decisive effect). However, the system may be configured so that the number of times or types of rainbow effects can be performed is greater for the special 1 variation display for a win in a normal game state or the special 2 variation display for a win in a specific game state than for the special 1 variation display for a win in a specific game state. For example, the execution of the rainbow effect due to a change in the reserve is restricted in the special 1 variation display for a specific game state.

Furthermore, the rainbow effect can be executed regardless of whether the special variation display for a win in a specific game state, a special variation display for a win in a normal game state, or a special variation display for a win in a specific game state is performed (during a big win, a pre-announcement effect, or a decisive effect). However, the special variation display for a win in a normal game state or a special variation display for a win in a specific game state may be configured to have a greater number of color movement directions than the special variation display for a win in a specific game state.

Furthermore, the likelihood of the rainbow effect being executed may differ between a specific game state where a predetermined state is reached (a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed without any balls entering the first or second start slot 45 after the end of the variation animation) and a normal game state where the same predetermined state is reached. Also, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed in a normal game state than in a specific game state where the same predetermined state is reached. Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be restricted in a specific game state than in a normal game state where the same predetermined state is reached. Note that if a predetermined time has elapsed without any balls entering the first or second start slot 47 after the end of the variation animation, a customer waiting demo animation will start in a normal game state, but a demo animation will not start in a specific game state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can execute a first instruction display (a large right-hand play display or a "Aim for V" display that instructs the player to play to the right during a specific period (when right-hand play begins)) and a second instruction display (a small right-hand play display, a display that instructs the player to play to the left during normal gameplay such as "Please play to the left", and a display that instructs the player to play to the right during specific gameplay such as "Please play to the right"). The likelihood of the rainbow-colored display being executed may differ depending on whether the first instruction display is being executed or the second instruction display is being executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed. Also, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be restricted when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition which is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), Alternatively, based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variation display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and based on the determination, it can perform an expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) that suggests the execution of the special game, and the execution rate of the expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) is smaller for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the second starting condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that makes the player expect the execution of the special game over a predetermined period based on the determination can be performed at either a predetermined variable display period based on one determination or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple determinations, and the execution rate of the special performance (e.g., zone performance) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second prize-winning means ( Based on a second starting condition, which is established by a game ball entering the second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can display a variation of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and based on the determination, it can execute a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the hold icon changes) that suggests the execution of the special game. The execution rate of the notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the hold icon changes) is smaller for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the activation conditions of 2, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can perform linked effects (e.g., color effects, notification sound effects, light effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) that are performed consecutively or in relation to multiple variable displays. The execution rate of the linked effects (e.g., color effects, notification sound effects, light effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) is smaller in the variable display based on the first activation conditions in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first activation conditions in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a game into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition established by the ball entering a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a). Furthermore, a variable icon change effect can be performed, where the display mode of the variable icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed upon the activation condition changes from a normal mode (e.g., CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., color character icon). The execution rate of the variable icon change effect is smaller in the specific game state based on the first activation condition than in the normal game state based on the first activation condition.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition Based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the prize mechanism (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting effect (e.g., illumination of the prize opening lamp NR) can be performed based on a ball entering the first prize mechanism (first starting opening 45). The execution rate of the light-emitting effect (e.g., illumination of the prize opening lamp NR) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and has a first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means different from the first display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or the second winning means Based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second starting opening (47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can perform a display effect in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., blue effect) and a second mode (e.g., rainbow effect). The variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is less frequent in the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) than in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the established second starting condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the movable mechanism (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can perform operation effects in operation modes including a first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong operation such as a decisive move), and the execution rate of the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation effects by the movable mechanism (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition which is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), Alternatively, based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variation display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and based on the determination, it can perform an expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) that suggests the execution of the special game, and the rate at which the expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) is performed is smaller for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than for the variation display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the second activation condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that makes the player anticipate the execution of the special game over a predetermined period based on the determination can be performed at either a predetermined variable display period based on one determination or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple determinations, and the execution rate of the special performance (e.g., zone performance) is smaller for the variable display based on the first activation condition in the specific game state than for the variable display based on the second activation condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second prize-winning means ( Based on a second starting condition, which is established by a game ball entering the second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can display a variation of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and based on the determination, it can execute a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the hold icon changes) that suggests the execution of the special game. Furthermore, the execution rate of the notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the hold icon changes) is smaller for the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than for the variation display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the second starting condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can perform linked effects (e.g., color effects, notification sound effects, light effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) that are performed consecutively or in relation to multiple variable displays. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the linked effects (e.g., color effects, notification sound effects, light effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a game into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition, which is met by the ball entering a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a). Furthermore, a variable icon change effect can be performed, where the display mode of the variable icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed upon the fulfillment of the activation condition changes from a normal mode (e.g., CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., color character icon). The execution rate of the variable icon change effect is smaller for the variable display based on the first activation condition in the specified game state than for the variable display based on the second activation condition in the specified game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition Based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the prize mechanism (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting effect (e.g., illumination of the prize opening lamp NR) can be performed based on a prize entering the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45). The execution rate of the light-emitting effect (e.g., illumination of the prize opening lamp NR) is smaller for the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specified game state than for the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specified game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and has a first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means different from the first display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or the second winning means Based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening (47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can perform a display effect in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., blue effect) and a second mode (e.g., rainbow effect), and the ratio of the execution of the display effect by the first mode (e.g., blue effect) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is smaller for the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than for the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the established second starting condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the movable mechanism (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can perform an operational performance in operational modes including a first operational mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operational mode (e.g., strong operation such as a decisive move), and the execution rate of the first operational mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operational performance by the movable mechanism (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specified game state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specified game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45, 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second prize-winning means ( Based on a second starting condition that is met by a game ball entering the second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a), and when the first starting condition is met in the specific game state, a specific variable display can be performed (for example, displaying at least one of the performance symbols 70a or the special performance symbols TZ in a variable state without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display), and when the first starting condition is met in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not performed.
To solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45, 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the game state has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the first starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45). Based on, or based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying a variation of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and when the variation display based on the first starting condition is performed in the normal game state, predetermined performances (for example, color effects, zone performances, hold icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.) that cannot be performed with the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state are capable of being performed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45, 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second prize-winning means ( Based on a second starting condition that is met by a game ball entering the second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and if the first starting condition is met in the specific game state, a specific variable display can be performed (for example, displaying at least one of the performance symbol 70a or the special performance symbol TZ in a variable state without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display), and if the second starting condition is met in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not performed.
To solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45, 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the game state has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the first starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45). Based on, or based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying a variation of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and when the variation display based on the second starting condition is performed in the specific game state, it is possible to perform predetermined performances (for example, color effects, zone performances, hold icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.) that cannot be performed with the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or the Based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). In the normal game state, the reserve display can be shown in a predetermined manner (e.g., an action such as rotation) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first starting condition. In the specific game state, the reserve display can be shown in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., no action or no display) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first starting condition.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or the Based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a). In the specified game state, the reserve display can be shown in a predetermined manner (e.g., an action such as rotation) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the second starting condition. In the specified game state, the reserve display can be shown in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., no action or no display) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first starting condition.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and a first starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the above, the display means (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying the variation of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the difference between the average variation display time at the maximum number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved balls) and the average variation display time at a predetermined number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved ball) that is less than the maximum number of reserved balls when the variation display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the normal game state is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time at the maximum number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved balls) and the average variation display time at a predetermined number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved ball) that is less than the maximum number of reserved balls when the variation display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), Based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls when performing the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is less than the number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls when performing the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45). Based on a second starting condition, which is met by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The characteristic feature is that the proportion of the same variable pattern being executed for the first number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved) and the second number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved) is greater when the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the specific game state than when the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and a first starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). Based on the above, the display means (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying the variation of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the difference between the average variation display time at the maximum number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved balls) and the average variation display time at a predetermined number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved ball) which is less than the maximum number of reserved balls, when the variation display for the loss determination based on the second starting condition is performed in the specific game state, is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time at the maximum number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved balls) and the average variation display time at a predetermined number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved ball) which is less than the maximum number of reserved balls, when the variation display for the loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), Based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The characteristic feature is that, when the variable display for a loss determination based on the second starting condition is performed in the specific game state, the number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls is less than the number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined number of reserved balls when the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45). Based on a second starting condition, which is met by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The characteristic feature is that the proportion of the same variable pattern being executed for the first number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 reserved balls) and the second number of reserved balls (e.g., 1 reserved ball) is greater when the variable display for a loss determination based on the first starting condition is performed in the specified game state than when the variable display for a loss determination based on the second starting condition is performed in the specified game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition established by winning a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to perform an action animation (e.g., preparation or stopping animation) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display based on the first activation condition in the specific game state has a smaller proportion of action animations (e.g., preparation or stopping animation) performed at the start and/or end of the variable display compared to the variable display based on the first activation condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition established by winning a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to perform action sequences (e.g., preparation and stopping actions) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display based on the first activation condition in the specific game state has fewer types of action sequences (e.g., preparation and stopping actions) performed at the start and/or end of the variable display compared to the variable display based on the first activation condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on the second activation condition that is met, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a). This variable display can be performed using the pattern in a first form (e.g., 1 to 9) and the pattern in a second form (e.g., a special pattern without numerical information) displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display. The variable display based on the first activation condition in the specific game state exhibits a smaller proportion of the pattern in the second form (e.g., a special pattern without numerical information) than the variable display based on the first activation condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition established by winning a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to perform an action animation (e.g., preparation or stopping animation) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display based on the first activation condition in the specified game state has a smaller proportion of action animations (e.g., preparation or stopping animation) performed at the start and/or end of the variable display compared to the variable display based on the second activation condition in the specified game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on the first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47) Based on a second activation condition established by winning a prize, the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to perform action sequences (e.g., preparation and stopping actions) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display based on the first activation condition in the specified game state has fewer types of action sequences (e.g., preparation and stopping actions) performed at the start and/or end of the variable display compared to the variable display based on the second activation condition in the specified game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45), or a second prize-winning means ( Based on a second starting condition, which is established by a game ball entering the second starting opening (47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). In this variable display, the symbol can be displayed as a first symbol in a predetermined configuration (e.g., 1 to 9) and as a second symbol in a specific configuration (e.g., a special symbol without numerical information). The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state shows a larger proportion of the first symbol than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). The (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying the pattern (performance pattern 70a) in a variable state. In the variable display, there are two stop display modes (e.g., a short time until stop) for displaying the pattern (performance pattern 70a) in a stopped state: a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode with a different stop display period (e.g., a long time until stop). The first stop display mode (e.g., a short time until stop) is executed less frequently in the variable display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the normal game state, compared to the variable display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbols based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). The display of the (performance symbol 70a) is capable of variation, and the variation display includes a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode. The variation display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved symbols is reached in the normal game state is more likely to use the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) than the variation display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved symbols is reached in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the first is established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45) Based on the starting conditions, or based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting conditions in the specific game state has a smaller rate of execution of the symbol change effect, which involves changing the display size of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), compared to the variable display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting conditions in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the game balls to the first winning means (first starting opening 45) Based on a first starting condition established by winning a prize, or based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variation display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variation display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the reach performance than the variation display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means is based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). The (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying the pattern (performance pattern 70a) in a variable state. In this variable display, there are two stop display modes (e.g., a short time until stop) for displaying the pattern (performance pattern 70a) in a stopped state: a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode with a different stop display period (e.g., a long time until stop). The variable display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state is executed less frequently than the variable display that results in a loss judgment based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbols based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). The system is capable of displaying variations in the (performance symbol 70a), and the stop display modes for displaying the stop of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) in the variation display include a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode. The system is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) is higher for the variation display that results in a loss judgment based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state, compared to the variation display that results in a loss judgment based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the first is established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45) Based on the starting conditions, or based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can perform a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variable display resulting in a loss judgment based on the second starting condition in the specified game state has a smaller execution rate for the variable display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the specified game state than for the variable display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the specified game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the game balls to the first winning means (first starting opening 45) Based on a first activation condition established by winning a prize, or based on a second activation condition established by a game ball entering the second prize-winning means (second activation opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variation display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a). The variation display resulting in a loss judgment based on the first activation condition in the specified game state has a smaller execution rate than the variation display resulting in a loss judgment based on the second activation condition in the specified game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the first starting condition is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means (first starting opening 45). Based on this, or based on a second starting condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) is capable of displaying a variation of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and is characterized by the ability to execute a first specific notification (e.g., a right-hand shooting display) that indicates the specific game state, and a second specific notification (a display or notification other than the right-hand shooting display) that is performed in addition to the first specific notification (right-hand shooting display) based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means while the first specific notification (right-hand shooting display) is being executed.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47), the display means (first starting opening 47) The image display device 70) is capable of displaying the changing pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the illumination effect at a predetermined position (e.g., the start-up lamp NR) and the operation effect of the movable parts (e.g., the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the normal game state can be executed at predetermined timings (e.g., the winning timing and the start of variation timing). Furthermore, the illumination effect at the predetermined position (e.g., the start-up lamp NR) and the operation effect of the movable parts (e.g., the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the specific game state can be restricted from being executed at predetermined timings (e.g., the winning timing and the start of variation timing).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (entry into starting openings 45, 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means (first image display device 70) can execute the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47), and a predetermined type of notification performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of the special game. The system is capable of performing a first notification at a specific timing (e.g., when a variation starts) and a second notification at a different timing (e.g., when a prize is awarded at the starting slot). The first notification can be performed in two forms: a first form (e.g., the starting slot lamp NR flashing blue) and a second form different from the first (e.g., the starting slot lamp NR flashing red). The second notification can be performed in a third form different from the first and second forms (e.g., the starting slot lamp NR and the lighting devices for the game board and/or frame emitting light). The system is characterized in that the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third forms and a larger execution rate of the fourth form different from the first to third forms (e.g., the starting slot lamp NR does not emit light) compared to the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (entry into starting openings 45, 47), and when the display of the changing symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special outcome, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means (first image display device 70) can execute the display of the changing symbols (performance symbols 70a) based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47), and a first notification is made at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the change) as a notification effect that makes the player anticipate the execution of the special game. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a second notification at a different timing from the first notification (when a prize is awarded at the starting gate), and the first notification can be performed in a first mode (e.g., the starting gate lamp NR flashes blue), a second mode different from the first mode (e.g., the starting gate lamp NR flashes red), and a third mode different from the first and second modes (e.g., the starting gate lamp NR and the lighting devices for the game board and/or frame illuminate), and the second notification can be performed in the same mode as the first and second modes, but cannot be performed in the same mode as the third mode, and the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third modes and a larger execution rate of the fourth mode different from the first to third modes (e.g., the starting gate lamp NR does not illuminate) compared to the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) in which a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (entry into the starting openings 45 and 47), and when the variation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), and the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbols based on a first starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first starting opening 45), or based on a second starting condition that is fulfilled by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second starting opening 47). The display of the (performance symbol 70a) is capable of variation, and as a light-emitting effect that anticipates the execution of the special game, it is possible to perform a first light-emitting mode using the first prize-winning means (start-up lamp NR) and a second light-emitting mode using other light-emitting means (e.g., lighting devices for the game board and/or frame) in conjunction with the first prize-winning means. In the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal game state, the second light-emitting mode has a higher proportion of vibration effects using vibration means (operation buttons) than the first light-emitting mode, and the variation display based on the first start condition executed in the specific game state has a lower proportion of vibration effects than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In principle, the same gaming machine as in the first embodiment will be used for the explanation in the third embodiment, however, some of the reference numerals for components shown in Figures 60 to 92 will be used only in the third embodiment.

(Overview of specific functions)
In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 can be controlled to activate a specific function, also called a complete function, at a predetermined timing when a specific value (sometimes called the MY value) derived from the amount of game value awarded (e.g., prize balls) and the amount used (safe balls and out balls) reaches a predetermined value, thereby restricting the progress of the game.

(Counting the value of the game)
The main CPU 301a performs game value counting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs processing to count game performance information such as the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering various prize slots (mainly the first start slot 112 and the general prize slot) during low-probability non-time-saving game play; the number of outs during normal play, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 11a during low-probability non-time-saving game play; the total payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering each prize slot (general prize slot and large prize slots 117, 127) and each start slot (first start slot 112 and second start slot 115) regardless of the game state; and the total outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 11a regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, "prize balls" refers to the number of game balls awarded to the player, regardless of whether the payout from the gaming machine 100 has been completed (i.e., whether the actual payout of game balls has been completed). Also, "number of payouts" is a concept that includes not only the number of game balls that have been actually paid out, but also the number of game balls stored in the payout counter of the gaming machine 100 (the number of game balls that have not yet been actually paid out).

In this embodiment, the total payout count in the gaming machine 100 is based on the "planned number of prize balls" rather than the "actual payout." More specifically, when the gaming machine 100 detects the entry of a game ball into each prize slot or starting slot (general prize slot, first starting slot 112, second starting slot 115, large prize slots 117, 127), it calculates the planned number of prize balls to be paid out (planned number of prize balls) based on the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to each prize slot or starting slot and the corresponding number of prize balls. The total payout is then counted by adding the planned number of prize balls to the total payout counter. In other words, the gaming machine 100 counts the total payout based on the value of the prize ball counter (planned number of prize balls), not the number of game balls actually dispensed from the payout device (actual payout). Note that the total payout may also be counted based on the "actual payout" rather than the "planned number of prize balls."

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the count of normal payouts is based on the "planned number of prize balls" rather than the "actual payouts," similar to the count of total payouts. However, the normal payout count may also be based on the "actual payouts" rather than the "planned number of prize balls."

(Performance display data setting process)
The main CPU 301a performs performance display data setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs performance display data to be displayed on the information display unit 113, switching between the normal base values for four game sections saved in the base memory area every five seconds.

(MY value monitoring process and specific value arrival process)
The main CPU 301a performs MY value monitoring processing. Specifically, it calculates the MY value, as described later, based on the total number of outputs and the total number of payouts, and performs processing to update the MY value. The main CPU 301a then performs specific value reach determination processing. Specifically, it performs processing to determine whether the conditions for the operation of a specific function, as described later, are met, such as when the MY value reaches a specific value.

(Specific function activation flag determination process)
The main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether or not a specific function activation flag is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether or not a specific function activation flag is set in the specific function activation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. If the specific function activation flag is set, for example, the following process is executed.

If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs a process to invalidate the prize. Specifically, the main CPU 301a creates data indicating that a prize has been won in the first start gate 112 or the second start gate 115, but does not use this created data for game control (determining the number of prize balls, random number generation, etc.) (invalidating the prize). Once this process is complete, the main CPU 301a terminates the start gate detection switch input process.

If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs a variation cancellation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to clear the variation time and cancel the variation. Once this process is completed, the main CPU 301a terminates the special symbol variation process for this time.
If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs a variation cancellation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to clear the variation time and cancel the variation. Once this process is completed, the main CPU 301a terminates the current normal pattern variation process.

If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs auxiliary game cancellation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a cancels the current auxiliary game, stops the operation of the normal electric mechanism (closes the starting movable piece), and clears the values of various timer counters related to the auxiliary game (maximum number of times the starting movable piece opens, auxiliary game opening time, second start opening 115 opening time, interval time, auxiliary game ending time, etc.). Once this processing is complete, the main CPU 301a terminates the current auxiliary game processing.

(Main control board MY value monitoring process)
In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 can be controlled to activate a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value (sometimes called the MY value) derived from the amount of game value awarded (e.g., prize balls) and the amount used (safe balls and out balls) reaches a predetermined value. When the specific function is activated, predetermined processes are performed, such as stopping the game (game stop) and notifying the relevant matter (that the game will be stopped because a specific condition has been met). "Game stop" includes, for example, stopping the variation of special symbols or normal symbols (variation stop), and invalidating entries into each prize pocket and start pocket (general prize pocket, first start pocket 112, second start pocket 115, and large prize pockets 117, 127).

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the progress of the game is restricted by stopping the game when a specific function is activated. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may, in addition to restricting the progress of the game, also prohibit the launch of game balls (stop launching) when a specific function is activated. Stopping launching may also be achieved, for example, by stopping the power supply to the launching solenoid 353 or the ball feeding solenoid 354.

In the gaming machine 100, a specific function is activated when the number of game balls increases from the point at which the number of game balls decreased most significantly during a day's operation reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000 balls), or, if the predetermined value is reached during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game has ended. More specifically, in the gaming machine 100, a specific function is activated when the number of game balls increases from the point at which the number of game balls decreased most significantly (MY calculated baseline value) from the baseline value at power-on (baseline = 0) until the power is cut off, or, if the predetermined value is reached during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game has ended. This allows the gaming machine 100 to maintain a wide range of gameplay options while suppressing excessive gambling tendencies.

In the following explanation, the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the total number of payouts from the total number of payouts after power-on (after the start of business for the day) may be simply referred to as the "specific value." Note that the specific value at the time of power-on (the start of business for the day) is "0." Furthermore, the value of the specific value at which it decreased the most after power-on (the specific value at which the number of game balls decreased the most when the game result was obtained) may be simply referred to as the "MY calculation base value." From another perspective, the "MY calculation base value" can be said to be the value of the specific value at which it decreased the most among the results of gameplay from the start of business for the day (from power-on) to the present.

In gaming machine 100, a specific function is activated when the deviation between a specific value and the MY calculation standard value reaches "95,000".

In the following explanation, the deviation between a specific value and the MY calculation base value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY calculation base value from the specific value) may be simply referred to as the "MY value." In other words, the "MY value" can be said to be the increase in the number of game balls relative to the MY calculation base value. As will be explained later, the MY value is always greater than or equal to "0" and can never be a negative value (the MY value is always ≥ 0).

Furthermore, the MY value ("95000") that is a condition for the activation of a specific function may be simply described as "MY Upper Limit." Additionally, the remaining number of game balls (MY Upper Limit - MY Value) up to the MY value that satisfies the conditions for the activation of a specific function (MY Upper Limit "95000") may be simply described as "Remaining MY."

The main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether there has been a change in the total number of payouts or the total number of outputs. Specifically, the main CPU 301a determines whether there has been a change in at least one of the values of the total payout counter and the total output counter in the main RAM 301c. If there has been a change in at least one of the total payouts or total outputs, the main CPU 301a performs a specific value calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a calculates the current specific value by subtracting the value of the total output counter from the value of the total payout counter in the main RAM 301c. If there has been no change in either the total payouts or the total output, the MY value monitoring process for this time is terminated.

The main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the specified value is less than the MY calculation reference value. Specifically, the main CPU 301a refers to the MY calculation reference value stored in the MY calculation reference value storage area of the main RAM 301c and determines whether the current specified value is less than that value. If the specified value is less than the MY calculation reference value (i.e., "specified value < MY calculation reference value"), the MY calculation reference value update process is performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301a updates and stores the value of the specified value as the new MY calculation reference value in the MY calculation reference value storage area of the main RAM 301c. If the specified value is greater than or equal to the MY calculation reference value (i.e., "specified value ≥ MY calculation reference value"), the MY value update process is performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301a updates and stores the value obtained by subtracting the MY calculation reference value from the specified value as the new MY value in the MY value storage area of the main RAM 301c.

Thus, the MY calculation base value is updated when the specific value (total payouts - total outs) is updated to a negative value. Conversely, the MY calculation base value is not updated when the specific value is updated to a positive value. That is, the MY calculation base value is always the lowest specific value for that day (after power-on). Furthermore, the MY value is not updated if the specific value is smaller than the MY calculation base value (specific value < MY calculation base value) (it remains "MY value = 0" and is not updated). Additionally, the MY calculation base value is updated to a negative value in conjunction with a negative update of the specific value. Therefore, the MY value can be said to be the increase in the number of game balls starting from the MY calculation base value. For this reason, the MY value can never be less than "0" (it is always "MY value ≥ 0").

The main CPU 301a performs the process of setting the MY value update specification command. Specifically, the main CPU 301a sets the new MY value as the MY value update command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the updated MY value is transmitted to the performance control board 320 as the MY value update specification command, and the performance control board 320 performs the processing necessary to execute the pre-notification and other actions described later.

(Specific function arrival determination process on the main control board)
The main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the MY value is 95000 or greater. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the MY value stored in the MY value storage area of the main RAM 301c is 95000 or greater. If the MY value is 95000 or greater, it performs a process to determine whether the jackpot symbol is in a confirmed stop state or whether a jackpot game is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the special symbol (jackpot symbol) that will execute the jackpot game is in a confirmed stop state or whether a jackpot game is in progress. If the jackpot symbol is not in a confirmed stop state or a jackpot game is not in progress, it performs a specific function activation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a sets a specific function activation flag in the specific function activation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. This will stop the game by disabling each prize entry point and start point, and stopping the reel spins. If the game is in the process of confirming a winning combination or is currently in a winning game, a special function activation preparation process is performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301a sets a special function activation preparation flag in the special function activation preparation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. If the MY value is not "95000" or greater, the special function arrival determination process is terminated.

The main CPU 301a sets the specific function activation command in the data storage area for performance transmission. This transmits the specific function activation command to the performance control board 320, which then notifies the system of the specific function activation.

The main CPU 301a sets a command to specify the preparation for activation of a specific function in the data storage area for performance transmission. This sends the command to the performance control board 320, which then notifies the player that the specific function will activate after the jackpot game ends, and the game will stop.

Furthermore, if a jackpot game ends while the specific function activation flag is set, the specific function will be activated. Thus, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, if the jackpot symbols are not stopped in confirmation or a jackpot game is not in progress, the specific function activation process is performed when the MY value reaches "95000". If the jackpot symbols are stopped in confirmation or a jackpot game is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000", the specific function activation preparation flag is set, and the specific function activation waits until the jackpot game ends.

(Specific function arrival determination process of the subordinate control board)
SubCPU 320a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a MY value update specification command. If it is a MY value update specification command, it performs MY-related notification update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to execute arbitrary notifications based on the MY value included in the MY value update specification command. If it is not a MY value update specification command, it determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a specific function activation preparation specification command. If it is a specific function activation preparation specification command, it performs specific function activation preparation notification processing. Specifically, it sets a specific function activation preparation instruction command in the transmit buffer of subRAM 320c based on the specific function activation preparation specification command. As a result, the specific function activation preparation instruction command is transmitted to the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit, and processing to execute the specific function activation preparation notification described later is performed. If it is not a specific function activation preparation specification command, it determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a specific function activation command. If it is a specific function activation command, it performs specific function activation notification processing. Specifically, based on the specific function activation command, the process sets the specific function activation command in the transmission buffer of sub-RAM 320c. As a result, the specific function activation command is transmitted to the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit, and processing for executing the specific function activation notification is performed. Once this process is completed, the command analysis process for this time is terminated.

If the command is not a specific function activation command, the system determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is an error indication command. An "error indication command" is a command that indicates the occurrence of an error. Specifically, examples of error indication commands include the "magnetic detection error indication command" (indicating magnetic field detection), the "radio wave detection error indication command" (indicating radio wave detection), and the "door open error indication command" (indicating door opening detection). If the command is an error indication command, error notification processing is performed. Specifically, based on the content of the received error indication command (e.g., error type), the system sets the command related to the error (e.g., magnetic detection error instruction command, ejection error instruction command) in the transmit buffer of sub-RAM 320c. This sends the error instruction command to the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit, triggering the error notification process. Once this process is complete, the command analysis process ends. If the command is not an error indication command, the command analysis process ends.

(MY-related notification update process)
Sub-CPU 320a performs arbitrary notification update processing. Specifically, sub-CPU 320a performs processing to update and display the arbitrary notification pattern (such as updating and displaying the remaining MY count) based on the MY value included in the MY value update specification command. As a result of this processing, the remaining MY count and other information are updated and displayed on the image display device 70.

Sub-CPU 320a performs a process to determine whether the MY value is 90000 or greater. Specifically, it determines whether the MY value included in the MY value update specification command is 90000 or greater. If the MY value is 90000 or greater, it performs the pre-notification start process. Specifically, sub-CPU 320a performs the process to execute the pre-notification described later. This process initiates the pre-notification. If the MY value is not 90000 or greater, the current MY-related notification update process is terminated.

(Execution timing and examples of notifications related to the operation of specific functions)
In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the following notifications regarding the operation of a specific function can be executed: "optional notification,""pre-notification,""notification during preparation for operation of a specific function," and "notification of operation of a specific function."

"Advance notification" refers to a notification that the remaining MY (My Points) are running low. In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the advance notification is given after the MY value reaches a predetermined value (90000 in this embodiment) and before the specific function is activated or before the machine is preparing to activate the specific function.

The "Specific Function Activation Preparation Notification" is issued when the MY value reaches "95000" during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game. The "Specific Function Activation Preparation Notification" is issued from the time the MY value reaches "95000" during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game until the end of the jackpot game (until the specific function is activated).

A "specific function activation notification" is issued when a specific function is activated. The notification informs the user that the specific function has been activated.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of executing "optional notifications," "pre-notifications," "specific function activation preparation notifications," and "specific function activation notifications" as notifications related to the activation of specific functions. In the following description, notifications related to the activation of specific functions, such as "optional notifications," "pre-notifications," "specific function activation preparation notifications," and "specific function activation notifications," may be collectively referred to simply as "specific function activation-related notifications."

Furthermore, among the notifications related to the activation of specific functions, "optional notifications" and "advance notifications" differ from "notifications in preparation for activation of specific functions" and "notifications for activation of specific functions" depending on whether the specific function is activated or in standby mode. Specifically, "optional notifications" and "advance notifications" provide an estimate of when the specific function will be activated (current MY value or remaining MY), while "notifications in preparation for activation of specific functions" informs that the specific function will be activated soon, and "notifications for activation of specific functions" inform that the specific function is currently activated. Therefore, among the "notifications related to the activation of specific functions," "optional notifications" and "advance notifications," which provide an estimate of when the specific function will be activated, are sometimes collectively referred to simply as "MY-related notifications."

(Execution timing of notifications related to the operation of specific functions)
In this embodiment, when the MY value reaches, for example, "90000", advance notification is initiated. When the MY value falls below, for example, "89000" (MY value < 89000), advance notification is canceled and optional notification is initiated. Furthermore, when the MY value reaches "95000", a specific function is activated at a predetermined timing and the advance notification ends (specific function activation notification is initiated). In addition, if the jackpot symbol is stopped or a jackpot game is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000", a specific function activation preparation notification is initiated. In other words, the condition for initiating advance notification is "MY value ≥ 90000", and the conditions for canceling advance notification are "MY value <89000","specific function activation preparation notification begins", or "specific function activated".

In the gaming machine 100, when the MY value reaches "95000," a specific function is activated at a predetermined timing. Specifically, if the timing at which the MY value reaches "95000" is not during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game, the specific function is activated at that timing (the timing at which the MY value reaches "95000"). Furthermore, if the timing at which the MY value reaches "95000" is during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game, the specific function is activated at the timing when that jackpot game ends.

In the following explanation, if the timing at which the MY value reaches "95000" is not during the confirmation stop of a jackpot symbol or during a jackpot game (e.g., during a spin), the timing at which a specific function is activated (when the MY value reaches "95000") may simply be referred to as "First Activation Timing Tc1."

Furthermore, if the MY value reaches "95000" while the jackpot symbols are being confirmed or during a jackpot game, the timing of the activation of a specific function at the end of that jackpot game may be simply described as "Second Activation Timing Tc2."

While the MY value is approaching "90000", a notification will be issued as needed. Furthermore, after the MY value reaches "90000", a pre-notification will be issued until the MY value reaches "95000" (until the first activation timing Tc1). Finally, once the MY value reaches "95000", a notification for the activation of a specific function will be issued from that timing (first activation timing Tc1).

Until the MY value reaches "90000", optional notifications will be issued. Furthermore, after the MY value reaches "90000", pre-notifications will be issued until the MY value reaches "95000". Additionally, if the MY value reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, a notification indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation will be issued from that point. Finally, a notification indicating the activation of a specific function will be issued from the moment the jackpot game ends (second activation timing Tc2).

Thus, the gaming machine 100 provides multiple notifications (optional notification, pre-notification, and notification indicating preparation for the specific function) in stages before the specific function is activated. This allows the gaming machine 100 to prevent confusion among players when the specific function is activated. Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can avoid situations such as the specific function suddenly activating (suddenly stopping the game), thereby providing players with a sense of security.

If a specific function is activated at the second activation timing Tc2, the notification indicating that the specific function is being prepared for activation will continue until the jackpot game ends. In other words, the notification indicating that the specific function is being prepared for activation begins when the MY value reaches "95000" during the jackpot game and continues until the end of the ending period of that jackpot game.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the notification indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation, which is displayed during a jackpot game (for example, during a round of play), does not change its display pattern even when transitioning to the interval period or ending period of the jackpot game (it maintains the same display pattern).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, during the execution period of the "Preparing for Activation of Specific Function" notification (the period during which the specific function is waiting to be activated), a special image for the ending of a jackpot game is displayed. This special ending image displays the game results (number of balls acquired during the advantageous period, number of consecutive wins, etc.).

(An example of notification related to the operation of a specific function)
In the following description, when a predetermined image is displayed across the entire area of the image display device 70 (the entire area of the first image display device 70 in this embodiment), the screen on which the image is displayed may be referred to as "screen Z". For example, when the image 205 indicating that a specific function is in operation is displayed across the entire area of the first image display device 70, that screen may be referred to as the "specific function in operation screen" (Figures 76(g), (h)). Also, when a predetermined image is displayed across the entire area of the first image display device 70, it may simply be referred to as "entire area" or "full display".

Advance notification can be provided by displaying an advance notification image 202 in a predetermined area of the image display device 70. The advance notification image 202 in this embodiment (see Figures 90 and 91) may be an image that shows the remaining number of MY until the specific function is activated, and also notifies that the game will end after the specific function is activated (an image including the text "The specific function will activate when approximately XX units remain. When activated, today's game will end").

The notification of "Preparing to activate specific function" can be performed by displaying a "Preparing to activate specific function" image (warning image) in a predetermined area of the image display device 70.

In this embodiment, the notification indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation darkens almost the entire area of the image display device 70 to reduce the visibility priority of the performance screen (the performance screen during a jackpot game), and displays a screen (specific function preparation screen) on a layer above the performance screen during a jackpot game. In other words, the notification indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation in this embodiment displays a screen (specific function preparation screen) that slightly darkens almost the entire area while allowing the lower-layer screen (the performance screen during a jackpot game) to be visible, and displays the specific function preparation image. Furthermore, the specific function preparation image includes text encouraging continuation of the game, and text indicating that the specific function will be activated after the jackpot game ends.

The notification of the activation of a specific function can be performed, for example, by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across substantially the entire area of the image display device 70 and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) via the audio output device 331 that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that displays a text image indicating that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended, with substantially the entire area of the image display device 70 being darkened.

Thus, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the remaining MY (My Points) are indicated as an approximate value (e.g., approximately 5000) in both optional and pre-notification. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, pre-notification is performed by displaying an image indicating that a specific function is being prepared on the image display device 70.

Furthermore, the notifications related to the operation of specific functions performed by the gaming machine of the present invention are not limited to this embodiment. For example, optional notifications and advance notifications may allow the user to grasp the approximate number of balls up to the upper limit of MY using a meter image or the like. Also, optional notifications and advance notifications may show the current MY value numerically, or they may allow the user to grasp the approximate MY value using a meter image or the like.

Furthermore, the advance notification does not necessarily involve darkening the entire image display device 70 and displaying a "Preparing for Operation of a Specific Function" image approximately in the center of the screen; it may also involve displaying a text image in a specific area (for example, the top).

(RAM clear)
When a RAM clear operation (RAM clear process) is performed, the main CPU 301a clears all areas of the main RAM 301c (including the MY value and MY calculation reference value described later) and sets the RAM to its state when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, if the specific function activation flag or the specific function activation preparation flag is set, these flags will be cleared during this process. In other words, if the specific function activation flag or the specific function activation preparation flag is set, these flags will be cleared by executing a RAM clear. Also, the MY value and MY calculation base value, described later, will also be cleared during this process.

(Relationship between RAM clearing and specific functions)
As shown in Figure 60, if the specific function activation flag is set and the power is shut off without performing a RAM clear operation, or if the power is turned on after the power is shut off without performing a RAM clear operation, the specific function activation flag from before the power was shut off is retained. This allows the operation of the specific function based on this specific function activation flag to continue after the power is turned on. In this case, after the power is turned on, the specific function may be activated after displaying the power-on screen (e.g., power recovery image DFG) and performing power-on processing such as an initial check, or the specific function may be activated simply by displaying the power-on screen without performing power-on processing such as an initial check, or the specific function may be activated without displaying the power-on screen or performing power-on processing such as an initial check.

As shown in Figure 60, if a RAM clear operation is performed and the power is shut off while a specific function activation flag is set, or if the power is turned on after a RAM clear operation following a power shutdown, the specific function activation flag that was in place before the power was shut off is erased. This restricts the continued execution of the specific function based on this flag after power is turned on. In this case, the power-on screen is displayed, and then power-on processing such as initial checks is executed.

As shown in Figure 60, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set and the power is shut off without performing a RAM clear operation, or if the power is turned on after the power is shut off without performing a RAM clear operation, the specific function activation preparation flag from before the power was shut off is retained. This allows the pre-activation notification of the specific function (e.g., display of the specific function activation image 205) based on this flag to continue to be executed after the power is turned on. In this case, the pre-activation notification of the specific function may be executed after the power-on screen is displayed and power-on processing such as initial checks is performed; or after the power-on screen is displayed and the pre-activation notification of the specific function may be executed in conjunction with power-on processing such as initial checks; or during the customer waiting animation after power-on processing is performed; or after the start of the first variation animation (first game ball entry).

As shown in Figure 60, if the RAM clear operation is performed and the power is shut off while the specific function activation preparation flag is set, or if the power is turned on after the power has been shut off and the RAM clear operation is performed, the specific function activation preparation flag that was in place before the power was shut off will be erased. This restricts the continued execution of pre-activation notifications for specific functions based on this specific function activation flag after the power is turned on.

(Display priority)
Next, we will explain the display priority (display layer) for each image related to the operation of specific functions, the performance screen, the right-hand shooting notification image 260, the special symbol TZ, and the number retention.

In the following explanation, the number of reserved balls indicated by the numbers displayed in the first reserved ball display area 70E and the second reserved ball display area 70F may be simply referred to as "numbered reserved balls." Similarly, the image representing the numbered reserved balls (the first reserved ball display area 70E, the second reserved ball display area 70F, and the numbers displayed therein) may be simply referred to as "numbered reserved ball image." Furthermore, in the following explanation, the performance screens during variable display and the performance screens during jackpot gameplay may be collectively referred to simply as "performance screens."

The special symbol TZ, number hold, and right-hand shooting notification image 260 have a higher display priority than the images related to specific function activation (optional notification images, pre-notification image 202, images exclusive to the ending, and images preparing for specific function activation), with the exception of the specific function activation image 205 (they are displayed on the upper layer). Furthermore, the images related to specific function activation have a higher display priority than the image display screens (effect screens) during variation effects and jackpot gameplay.

For example, the display priority (display layer) is as follows: "Performance screen Z < Specific function activation preparation screen ≤ Right-hand shooting notification image 260 = Special symbol TZ = Number hold". That is, on the specific function activation preparation screen, the performance screen (for example, the performance screen during a jackpot game) has a low display priority and is displayed in a darkened state, while the right-hand shooting notification image 260, special symbol TZ, and number hold have a high display priority and are displayed without being darkened.

Furthermore, for example, the display priority (display layer) is as follows: "Performance screen < Ending-only image < Specific function activation preparation image ≤ Right-hand shooting notification image 260 = Special symbol TZ = Number hold". In this embodiment, an example is shown where the right-hand shooting notification image 260 is displayed during the ending period, regardless of whether the specific function activation preparation notification is being executed or not. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may not display the right-hand shooting notification image 260 during the ending period. Also, when displaying the right-hand shooting notification image 260, it may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) or the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD).

(Error type and priority, error notification content)
Hereinafter, in this specification, "occurrence of an error" strictly means detecting the occurrence of an irregular event defined as an error, such as power restoration or the occurrence of an abnormal prize. For example, while "power restoration" is not an error of the gaming machine 100 itself, if we consider the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 100 for the player to play as the normal state (in other words, a normal state), then the event of the gaming machine 100 switching from the OFF state to the ON state can be said to be a kind of abnormality (error). Similarly, while "activation of a specific function" is not an error of the gaming machine 100 itself, the event of the game being stopped can be said to be a kind of abnormality (error).

As mentioned above, "RAM clear operation" refers to turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 302a (with the RAM clear switch 302a in the ON position). "Power restoration operation" refers to turning on the power with the RAM clear switch 302a in the OFF position.

(1. RAM Clear)
A RAM clear is detected upon detection of a RAM clear operation. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a RAM clear when the gaming machine 100 switches from a power-off state to a power-on state (i.e., a RAM clear operation is performed) while the RAM clear switch 302a is ON.

(2. Power restored)
Power restoration is detected upon detection of a power restoration operation. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects power restoration when the gaming machine 100 switches from a power-off state to a power-on state (a power restoration operation is performed) without the RAM clear switch 302a being turned ON (while the RAM clear switch 302a is OFF).

(3. Abnormal prize entry error)
An abnormal prize entry error is detected when a predetermined game ball detection switch (large prize entry detection switch 306a, 306b, first start entry detection switch 304, second start entry detection switch 305) detects a predetermined number of game balls or more within a predetermined time (for example, 3 balls in 0.5 seconds).

(4. Magnetic detection error)
A magnetic detection error is detected when the magnetic sensor 54b detects magnetism for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a magnetic detection error when the magnetic sensor 54b continuously outputs an ON signal, such as when an abnormal magnetic field is applied to the gaming machine 100.

(5. Impact detection error)
An impact detection error is detected when an impact sensor (not shown in the diagram) detects an impact (vibration). Specifically, the main control board 300 detects an impact detection error when an abnormal vibration is applied to the gaming machine 100.

(6. Radio wave detection error)
A radio wave detection error is detected when the radio wave sensor 54a detects radio waves. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a radio wave detection error when abnormal radio waves are applied to the gaming machine 100.

(7. Ejection error)
An ejection error is detected when the difference between the number of balls that passed through the prize slot switch and the number of balls that passed through the frame count switch is ±50 or more (or less).

(8. Specific function activation)
The activation of a specific function is detected based on the detection of the "ON" specific function activation flag. As described above, when the MY value reaches the upper limit (95000), the main control board 300 sets (turns ON) the specific function activation flag at a predetermined timing (when the MY value reaches 95000, or at the end of a jackpot game). The main control board 300 detects the activation of a specific function based on the detection of the "ON" specific function activation flag.

(9. Door opening error)
A door open error is detected by detecting the OFF state of the door open detection switch (not shown) (a state indicating that the glass frame 150 is in an open state). Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a door open error when the glass frame 150 is open relative to the outer frame 160 (when the door open detection switch is OFF). The door open detection switch is a switch that detects whether the glass frame 150 is in a closed state or an open state, outputting an ON signal when the glass frame 150 is in a closed state and an OFF signal when the glass frame 150 is in an open state. Furthermore, when the main control board 300 detects the ON state of the door open switch, it clears the event.

(10. Switch not connected error)
A switch disconnection error is detected upon detection of a switch disconnection state. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a switch disconnection error when the actual connection of a switch that should be connected to the main control board 300 is faulty (including complete disconnection). Furthermore, the main control board 300 clears the event when it detects a switch connection state.

Thus, in the gaming machine 100, at least 10 types of errors (1 to 10 errors) may occur, including RAM clear, power restoration, abnormal prize entry error, magnetic detection error, shock detection error, radio wave detection error, ejection error, specific function activation, door opening error, and switch disconnection error.

Furthermore, each of the errors mentioned above is assigned a notification priority (priority). Specifically, as shown in Figure 61, the more serious the event (error) that should be notified to the player first, the higher the notification priority. Specifically, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, higher-level errors have higher priority, with the priority being "RAM clear > power restoration > abnormal prize entry error > magnetic detection error > impact detection error > radio wave detection error > ejection error > specific function activation > door open error > switch not connected error". Errors related to the gaming machine 100 system, such as RAM clear and power restoration, have the highest priority, followed by errors related to fraud prevention. Thus, notifications related to the gaming machine 100 system, such as RAM clear and power restoration, are important information for the continuation or cancellation of specific functions, and therefore it is desirable to give them a higher priority than notifications for specific function activation. Also, even when a specific function is activated, fraudulent activity can negatively affect gameplay in canceling the specific function, so it is desirable to give notifications for fraud prevention a higher priority than notifications for specific function activation. Furthermore, for notifications using images or sounds that can be performed via manual operation such as volume control or mode switching, it is advisable to give them a lower priority than notifications for specific function activations.

The errors mentioned above are merely examples; other errors such as those related to the start of a setting change, the end of a setting change, or the end of a setting confirmation are also possible. Furthermore, for these errors, specific function actions can be configured as either "lower-priority errors" or "higher-priority errors."

The aforementioned error and specific function activation-related notifications can be implemented using image display devices such as LCDs 70, lamps such as panel lighting devices 34a and frame lighting devices 34b, and sound output devices 331, either individually or in combination. Such notification means are not particularly limited as long as they are recognizable to players and hall administrators. Furthermore, the notification methods can include image display, light emission, and sound, either individually or in combination. Higher-priority error notifications may have more notification methods, more types of notification methods, longer notification periods, and be more difficult to cancel than lower-priority error notifications. Higher-priority error notifications may also have louder volume or more flashy light emission, making them easier to recognize than lower-priority error notifications.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can notify of an abnormality through notification means (such as an image display device 70 including a liquid crystal, lamps such as a panel lighting device 34a and a frame lighting device 34b, and an audio output device 331) based on the detection of a predetermined abnormality, using image display, light emission, sound, etc. Furthermore, even if a specific function is activated, the notification means can still notify of the abnormality. This prevents fraud against the gaming machine 100, ensures the smooth resumption of gameplay by accurately identifying errors, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, an anomaly that began to be reported before a specific function was activated may continue to be reported even after the specific function is activated. This allows for the prevention of fraud against the gaming machine 100, accurate identification of errors to ensure a smooth resumption of gameplay, and ultimately enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that any abnormality notifications initiated before the activation of a specific function are stopped once that function is activated.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure may also be capable of notifying abnormalities via notification means (such as an image display device 70 like an LCD, lamps such as a panel lighting device 34a and a frame lighting device 34b, or an audio output device 331) based on the detection of a predetermined abnormality, even when a specific function is operating. This prevents fraud against the gaming machine 100, ensures the smooth resumption of gameplay by accurately identifying errors, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In the case of specific anomalies among the aforementioned anomalies (for example, anomalies in the payout of prize balls), the system may be configured to stop anomaly notifications related to the specific anomaly once the specific anomaly is resolved, even if the specific function is activated.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can perform multiple notifications (optional notification, pre-notification, and notification during preparation for a specific function) in stages before the activation of a specific function. Notifications before the activation of a specific function can be performed individually or in combination with image display, sound, or lamp illumination, but it is preferable to perform them by image display. As shown in Figures 90, 91, and 92, pre-notifications can be performed by displaying a pre-notification image 202 (pre-display) in a predetermined area of the image display device 70. The pre-notification image 202, as a pre-notification, can be displayed in a position different from the first information, such as special symbol TZ or number hold, displayed on the image display device 70, and the second information, such as performance symbol 70a, which is different from the first information. Thus, the pre-notification image 202 is positioned so as not to overlap with the first information, such as special symbol TZ, number hold, hold icon T1, and hold number, which are necessary information for the player during the progress of the game. This approach avoids interfering with the player's ability to visually observe the variation in the special effect of the symbol 70a, which is designed to attract the player's attention, by preventing prior notification of the activation of a specific function.

In the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, even if the pre-notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function operation image 205 is displayed, first information such as the icon, the hold icon, the special symbol TZ also called a small symbol, and the hold number can be displayed. Here, if the pre-notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function operation image 205 is displayed, the performance symbol 70a or the variation path of the performance symbol 70a may be made to overlap with the pre-notification image 202. In this case, the pre-notification image 202 may be hidden by the performance symbol 70a, but it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 is not hidden by the performance symbol 70a. In other words, during a variation animation, even if the variation trajectory, size, or variation display position of the variation symbol 70a changes, such as in a variation where the variation symbol 70a moves to a position different from its normal position, or in a variation where the display size of the variation symbol 70a changes, it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 be displayed in a position different from the variation symbol 70a.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, in a specific game state, a right-shoot notification image 260, which guides the player to shoot the game ball to the right, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. Furthermore, in a specific game state, if the ball enters the first starting opening 112, a right-shoot warning image 261 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70, informing the player that the starting opening to aim for is the second starting opening 115. In a specific game state, if the ball enters the second starting opening 115, the right-shoot warning image 261 is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. Note that in a normal game state, neither the right-shoot notification image 260 nor the right-shoot warning image 261 is displayed.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can display either the right-hand shooting notification image 260 or the right-hand shooting warning image 261, or both, even if the pre-notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function activation image 205 is displayed. In this case, the pre-notification image 202 may be obscured by the right-hand shooting notification image 260, but it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 is not obscured by the right-hand shooting notification image 260, and it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 and the right-hand shooting notification image 260 are in different positions. For example, the pre-notification image 202 and the right-hand shooting notification image 260 may be displayed in different positions, but the pre-notification image 202 and the right-hand shooting warning image 261 may be displayed in positions where they partially or completely overlap. In this case, the right-hand shooting warning image 261 may be given priority over the pre-notification image 202, or the priority may be reversed.

The pre-notification image 202 may be obscured by the right-handed hitting warning image 261, but it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 is not obscured by the right-handed hitting warning image 261, and it is preferable that the pre-notification image 202 and the right-handed hitting warning image 261 are in different positions. For example, the pre-notification image 202 and the right-handed hitting warning image 261 may be displayed in different positions, but the pre-notification image 202 and the right-handed hitting notification image 260 may be displayed in a position where they partially or completely overlap. In this case, the right-handed hitting notification image 260 may be given priority over the pre-notification image 202, or the priority may be reversed.

As shown in Figures 62, 63, and 64, when the rainbow effect is executed at the first timing of a decisive effect or cut-in in a variation effect on the image display device 70, the area of the rainbow effect displayed on the image display device 70 by the effect or screen display can be limited by the pre-notification image 202 as a pre-display. For example, the execution area of the rainbow effect is limited by hiding the rainbow effect with the pre-notification image 202. That is, even if a part of the rainbow emission effect image of the rainbow effect displayed on the image display device 70 overlaps with the pre-notification image 202, the pre-notification image 202 remains visible to the player. In the case of normal gameplay where a pre-notification of a specific function activation is provided based on a ball entering the first starting opening 112, which is targeted with left-handed shooting; in the case of specific gameplay states such as time-saving or probability-changing states where a pre-notification of a specific function activation is provided based on a ball entering the first starting opening 112; and in the case of specific gameplay states such as time-saving or probability-changing states where a pre-notification of a specific function activation is provided based on a ball entering the first large winning opening 117, which is targeted with right-handed shooting, it is possible to limit the area of the rainbow-colored effect displayed on the image display device 70 based on the pre-notification image 202 as a pre-display at the first timing.

As shown in Figures 65, 66, and 67, when the rainbow effect is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, such as a hold change in a variation effect, the area of the rainbow effect displayed on the image display device 70 by the hold icon T is not restricted by the pre-notification image 202 as a pre-display. For example, by displaying the pre-notification image 202 at a different position from the hold icon T, the entire rainbow effect can be viewed without being hidden by the pre-notification image 202. In the case of normal gameplay, when prior notification of the activation of a specific function is given based on the entry of the ball into the first starting opening 112, which is targeted with left-handed shooting; in the case of specific gameplay states such as time-saving or probability-changing states, when prior notification of the activation of a specific function is given based on the entry of the ball into the first starting opening 112; and in the case of specific gameplay states such as time-saving or probability-changing states, when prior notification of the activation of a specific function is given based on the entry of the first large winning opening 117, which is targeted with right-handed shooting, in any of these cases, the area of the rainbow-colored effect displayed on the image display device 70 by the reserve icon T can be limited by the prior notification image 202 as a prior display at the second timing.

By doing so, it is possible to ensure that players are properly notified in advance of the activation of specific functions, thereby reducing confusion among players and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure is capable of executing a rainbow effect using, for example, an image display device 70 (first performance means), and is also capable of executing a rainbow effect using a light-emitting device (second performance means) different from the image display device 70, such as a lighting device 34a for the game board or a lighting device 34b for the game frame. Furthermore, as described above, with respect to a specific function, it is possible to execute a pre-operation notification for a specific function (first notification) that notifies that the operation of the specific function is imminent, and with respect to a specific function, it is possible to execute both a pre-operation notification for a specific function and an operation notification for a specific function (second notification). Here, when the pre-operation notification for a specific function (first notification) is executed, it is possible to execute either the rainbow effect by the image display device 70 or the rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a and 34b, or both the rainbow effect by the image display device 70 and the rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a and 34b. In other words, when a specific function pre-operation notification (first notification) is executed, the image display device 70, the panel lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b can perform a rainbow color effect, either individually or in combination.

On the other hand, when a specific function activation notification (second notification) is executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of either the rainbow color effect by the image display device 70 or the rainbow color effect by the lighting devices 34a and 34b, or both. That is, when a specific function activation notification (second notification) is executed, the execution of the rainbow color effect may be restricted in at least one of the means capable of executing the rainbow color effect, such as the image display device 70, the panel lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b, or the execution of the rainbow color effect may be restricted in all of the means capable of executing the rainbow color effect, such as the image display device 70, the panel lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b.

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the confusion experienced by players when certain functions are activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein is capable of executing predetermined effects (reserve change, dialogue, cut-in) that lead to the expectation of a transition to a special game. Furthermore, it is capable of executing two types of notifications regarding a specific function: a first notification (notification before the specific function is activated) and a second notification (notification of the specific function's activation) that differs from the first notification. The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein is capable of executing a rainbow-colored effect in the predetermined effect when the first notification is executed, while restricting the execution of the rainbow-colored effect in the predetermined effect when the second notification is executed. This reduces player confusion when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein proceeds with the aim of getting the game ball into the first start port 112 during normal gameplay, and proceeds with the aim of getting the game ball into the second start port 115 during specific gameplay states such as time-saving mode or probability variation mode, which are more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay. Here, a first start port detection switch 304 is installed in the first start port 112, and based on the detection of a game ball by the first start port detection switch 304, a start condition based on the first start port 112 is set, and after this start condition is met, the game proceeds with variations and other effects. Similarly, a second start port detection switch 305 is installed in the second start port 115, and based on the detection of a game ball by the second start port detection switch 305, a start condition based on the second start port 115 is set, and after this start condition is met, the game proceeds with variations and other effects. Furthermore, in the jackpot game, the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein is designed to primarily aim for the game balls to enter the large prize winning holes 117 and 127. Large prize winning hole detection switches 306a and 306b are installed in the large prize winning holes 117 and 127. Based on the detection of game balls by the large prize winning hole detection switches 306a and 306b, specific conditions for predetermined processing, such as the payout of prize balls or the progression of rounds in the jackpot game, are met. In this way, the gaming machine 100 is designed to advance the game by switching the target for the game balls to enter.

As shown in Figure 68, when the specific function activation flag is set, it is determined whether the internal game state is in a jackpot game or another game state. If it is a game state other than a jackpot game, the specific function is activated. When the specific function is activated, a specific function activation notification is executed, the start-up gate detection switches 304, 305 and the big prize-winning gate detection switches 306a, 306b are disabled, and predetermined specific function activation processes, such as restricting the launch of game balls, are executed. Here, disabling the detection switches can be done in various ways, such as controlling the detection switch so that it does not activate detection even if it detects a game ball, or cutting off the power so that the detection switch does not detect a game ball. Thus, in the game machine 100 of this disclosure, even if a game ball enters the start-up gate or the big prize-winning gate after the specific function has been activated, the detection switches are disabled, so the start condition based on the game ball entering the start-up gate is not met, and similarly, the specific condition based on the game machine entering the big prize-winning gate is not met. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of disabling the large prize slot detection switches 306a and 306b, the large prize slot may be closed. If a specific function is activated during gameplay other than a jackpot, the large prize slot will not be open, thus restricting the entry of game balls into the large prize slot.

As shown in Figure 68, when the specific function activation flag is set, it is determined whether the internal game state is in a jackpot game or another game state. If it is a jackpot game, the jackpot game continues to be executed. At this time, the jackpot entry detection switches 306a and 306b are not disabled, and the launch of game balls is not restricted, so that the functions necessary for the progress of the jackpot game are not limited. Alternatively, by disabling the start entry detection switches 304 and 305 and the jackpot entry detection switches 306a and 306b, even if a game ball enters the start entry or jackpot entry, the establishment of the start condition based on the entry of a game ball into the start entry may be restricted. Thus, the game machine 100 of this disclosure is configured so that, during a predetermined period from when the specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game until the jackpot game ends, the establishment of the specific condition based on the entry of a game ball into the jackpot entry is possible. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein, the fulfillment of the activation condition is restricted based on the entry of game balls into the activation opening during a predetermined period from when a specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game until the jackpot game ends.

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the confusion experienced by players when certain functions are activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

If a specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game (i.e., the activation conditions for the specific function are met), it may be possible to dispense prize balls upon entry into the start gate, gate, or general prize entry point. Conversely, if a specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot game (i.e., the activation conditions for the specific function are met), it may be possible to restrict the dispensing of prize balls upon entry into the start gate, gate, or general prize entry point.

If a specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game, the rainbow-colored effects associated with the jackpot game's round sequences can be executed during a predetermined period from the time the flag is set until the jackpot game ends. After this predetermined period has elapsed, the specific function activates, and the execution of the rainbow-colored effects is restricted.

As shown in Figure 69, when the specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot, the display of the image display device 70, including the variable effect, rainbow effect, display of the effect symbols 70a, special symbol TZ, reserve storage such as the relevant icon, reserve icon, and reserve numbers, background image, and image effect, can continue to be executed during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (display of the specific function activation image 205). When the specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot, the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect of the panel lighting device 34a, the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect of the frame lighting device 34b, and the main sound output of the sound output device 331 can continue to be executed during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (display of the specific function activation image 205). Note that in game states other than a jackpot, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed may be very short.

As shown in Figure 69, in a jackpot game, when the specific function activation flag is set, the display that was being executed on the image display device 70, such as the jackpot effect and the rainbow effect, can continue to be executed during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (display of the specific function activation image 205). In a jackpot game, when the specific function activation flag is set, the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect on the panel lighting device 34a, the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect on the frame lighting device 34b, and the sound output device 331 can continue to be executed during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (display of the specific function activation image 205). Note that in a jackpot game, the length of the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed varies depending on the remaining number of rounds in the jackpot game.

The time between setting the specific function activation flag and receiving the specific function activation notification differs between game states other than jackpot games, and between setting the specific function activation flag and receiving the specific function activation notification during jackpot games. Here, the time between setting the specific function activation flag and receiving the specific function activation notification during jackpot games tends to be longer than the time between setting the specific function activation flag and receiving the specific function activation notification during game states other than jackpot games.

In game states other than jackpot games, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification begins is constant. However, in jackpot games, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification begins varies depending on the remaining length of the jackpot game, as the timing of the specific function activation flag setting changes. In other words, the number of variations in the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed in jackpot games is greater than the number of variations in the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed in game states other than jackpot games.

As shown in Figure 70, if the power is cut off during a variation animation and then restored by turning on the power switch, a power restoration image DFG, such as "Power Restoring," will be displayed on the image display device 70 after the power is restored. Even if there is pending memory at the time of the power cut-off and no RAM clear operation is performed when the power is restored, the display of pending memory on the image display device 70 will be restricted during the display period of the power restoration image DFG. Furthermore, after the display of the power restoration image DFG, predetermined initial checks may be performed, and then the variation animation may be executed based on the pending memory stored before the power cut-off.

As shown in Figure 71, when a specific function is activated during a variation animation, the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 is displayed on the image display device 70. If the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 is displayed, and the power is interrupted (power cut off) and then restored by turning on the power switch without performing a RAM clear operation, the display of a power restoration image DFG such as "Power Restoring" on the image display device 70 is restricted, and the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 is displayed instead. Even if there is pending memory when the specific function is activated and no RAM clear operation is performed when the power is restored, the display of the pending memory on the image display device 70 is restricted during the display period of the "Specific Function Activation" image 205. Furthermore, the start of the variation animation is restricted based on the pending memory stored before the specific function is activated.

Furthermore, if the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 is displayed, and the power is cut off (power is shut off), and then restored by turning on the power switch without performing a RAM clear operation, the display of the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 on the image display device 70 may be restricted after power restoration. Instead, a power restoration image DFG such as "Power Restoring" may be displayed on the image display device 70, and the "Specific Function Activation" image 205 may be displayed after the display period of the power restoration image DFG has ended.

The power recovery image DFG may not only display "Power recovery in progress," but also other messages such as "Loading" as shown in T1.

Even if the reserved memory stored before the specific function was activated is not displayed when the specific function is activated, the reserved memory may still be stored during the activation of the specific function. Furthermore, if power is restored without a RAM clear operation during the activation of a specific function, even if the reserved memory stored before the specific function was activated is not displayed, the reserved memory may still be stored during the activation of the specific function.

(Power recovery when no specific function activation flag is present)
Specifically, "when power is restored without a specific function activation flag" refers to a situation where the power is turned OFF after a specific function has been activated, and then the power to the gaming machine 100 is turned on again with a RAM clear operation (power on with RAM clear operation). Since the specific function activation flag is cleared (flag turned OFF) by the RAM clear operation, if the power is turned on without performing a RAM clear operation, the specific function activation flag will not be cleared.

(Specific examples of initial operational checks after power restoration)
Figure 72 shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various components (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and performance button 17 (corresponding to the sword hilt unit 135)) after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 301c. In the figure, the part labeled 17 corresponds to the sword hilt unit 135 as a performance button, and the part labeled 9 corresponds to the sound output device 331 capable of outputting sound.

Note that there are two types of power-on procedures that involve the initialization of the main RAM 301c: one where the main RAM 301c is initialized after a configuration change process, and another where the main RAM 301c is initialized without a configuration change process. This explanation will focus on the case where the main RAM 301c is initialized without a configuration change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 100 is turned ON and power supply begins, the initial screen (power recovery image) displaying the words "Loading..." is shown as the initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 320 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 300, the origin return process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin returning to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. The image display device displays the first standby screen, showing the initial "135" performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in a stopped (static) state. The audio output device 331 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice message "RAM clear."

Furthermore, when the special feature hold number specification command (first special feature hold number and second special feature hold number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the hold number in both the first special feature hold number display area 70E and the second special feature hold number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first variable indicator 81, the sub-second variable indicator 82, and the sub-general diagram variable indicator 85 continue in a non-display state (losing state) where the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general diagram hold indicator 86 display "0".

At timing T3, once the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the LEDs of the first movable member, the second movable member, and the performance button remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process begins, initiating the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17. At this time, the LEDs of the first and second movable members light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the LEDs of the performance button light up in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial illumination of the performance button LED ends and the LED lights up in a waiting state (white light). At timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T7, when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial illumination of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they light up in a waiting state (white light). At timing T8, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops, and the system becomes silent.

At timing T9, when a command specifying the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (number of reserved balls in the first special symbol = 1) is received based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 45, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the sound output device 331.

At timing T10, when the main control board 300 receives a variation start command (special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0," and the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement or change of the reserved icon, and output of BGM) begins.

At this time, the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts displaying the variable, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED light up during the variable, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays "0".

(Specific examples of customer waiting strategies after power is restored)
The customer waiting sequence, which is performed after power is restored, can be executed as described with reference to Figures M3 and M4 mentioned above. After power is restored and a predetermined initial check is performed, if, for example, the number of reserved balls such as the first reserved ball is "0" and no game balls enter the first start opening 112, the system enters a customer waiting state and a demo for a predetermined period of time begins. As will be described later, even after power is restored, if the specific function activation flag is set, the system will not transition to the customer waiting sequence even if the conditions for executing the customer waiting sequence (such as the passage of time or the absence of reserved balls) are met. Here, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set, the customer waiting sequence executed after power is restored may either perform a pre-notification of specific function activation or restrict the performance of the pre-notification of specific function activation.

In the customer waiting animation performed after power is restored, one or more of the following effects means capable of executing a rainbow-colored effect, such as the image display device 70, the panel lighting device 34a, or the frame lighting device 34b, can be combined to execute a specific light emission effect that appears rainbow-colored (a rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting animation). The specific details of the rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting animation are as described separately.

(Power restoration when a specific function activation flag is present)
Furthermore, "when power is restored while a specific function activation flag is present" specifically refers to a situation where the power is turned OFF after a specific function has been activated, and then the power to the gaming machine 100 is turned on again without performing a RAM clear operation (power on without a RAM clear operation). Since the specific function activation flag is cleared (flag turned OFF) by a RAM clear operation, if the power is turned on without performing a RAM clear operation, the specific function activation flag will not be cleared.

When power is restored (power on without a RAM clear operation) while the specific function activation flag is active, a power restoration specification command and a specific function activation specification command are transmitted from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. The performance control board 320, upon receiving the power restoration specification command, displays a power restoration notification (power restoration image DFG), and then displays the specific function activation screen 205. That is, the specific function activation screen 205 is displayed, and the game becomes unplayable. Furthermore, initial movements of movable parts 73, etc., are not performed after power restoration. Additionally, while the power restoration system sound is output after power restoration, the specific function activation system sound is output as sound data, but in an inaudible state. Finally, even after a predetermined period has elapsed since power restoration (when power restoration (power on with a RAM clear operation) occurs without the specific function activation flag), the customer waiting performance does not begin.

Thus, in the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if a specific function activation flag is present when power is restored, initial operation checks such as the initial movement of the movable member 73 are not performed. This allows the gaming machine 100 to indicate to the administrator (e.g., hall staff) that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, etc. Furthermore, by not activating the movable member 73, etc., the gaming machine 100 does not obstruct the visibility of the specific function activation notification screen. As a result, the gaming machine 100 can more efficiently indicate to the administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, etc.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can, when there is no specific function activation flag (no information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, execute a specific rainbow-colored light emission effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) using the display means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). Conversely, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, the execution of the specific light emission effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) using the display means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) can be restricted during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein can execute a customer waiting animation at a predetermined timing after power-on but before the start conditions are met, if there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no information on the operation of a specific function) at power-on. Conversely, if there is a specific function activation instruction flag (information on the operation of a specific function) at power-on, the execution of the customer waiting animation can be restricted even at a predetermined timing after power-on but before the start conditions are met. This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can, when there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, execute a specific rainbow-colored light emission effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) on multiple effect means (image display device 70, game board and frame lighting devices 34a, 34b, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start condition is met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). Conversely, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific light emission effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) on any of the multiple effect means (e.g., the image display device 70) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start condition is met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, when there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, can execute a predetermined effect, such as a rainbow-colored specific light emission effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect), using the effect means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on but before the start condition is met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). Conversely, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, it can execute a different effect (for example, a spinning effect without light emission) during a predetermined period after power-on but before the start condition is met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed) from the predetermined effect executed during that period. This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can, when there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, execute display effects (e.g., machine name display, title display, etc.) using display means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b for the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effects should be executed). Conversely, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (information on the activation of a specific function) at power-on, the execution of display effects (e.g., machine name display, title display, etc.) can be restricted during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effects should be executed). This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can perform initial operation checks of movable parts, etc., when the specific function activation instruction flag is not present (i.e., there is no information about the operation of a specific function) at power-up. Conversely, when the specific function activation instruction flag is present (i.e., there is information about the operation of a specific function) at power-up, the execution of initial operation checks of movable parts, etc., can be restricted. This allows for more efficient notification to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, etc., thereby ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if a specific function activation instruction flag is present (i.e., information indicating the activation of a specific function is present) at power-on, initial operation checks of movable parts and other components may be performed. In this case, the "Specific Function Activation" screen 205Z may be displayed after or during the initial operation check.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein can perform initial operation checks of gimmicks such as attackers when the specific function activation instruction flag is not present (i.e., there is no information about the operation of a specific function) at power-on. Conversely, when the specific function activation instruction flag is present (i.e., there is information about the operation of a specific function) at power-on, the execution of initial operation checks of gimmicks such as attackers can be restricted. This allows for more efficient notification to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if a specific function activation instruction flag is present (i.e., information indicating the activation of a specific function is present) at power-on, initial operation checks for gimmicks such as attackers may be performed. In this case, the "Specific Function Activation" screen 205Z may be displayed after or during the initial operation check.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein can execute a specific rainbow-colored light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the waiting-for-player animation) if the activation condition is not met for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined game state (e.g., normal game state or time-saving state) that is different from a special game state that is advantageous to the player. Conversely, if a specific function is activated in a predetermined game state (e.g., normal game state or time-saving state), the execution of the specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the waiting-for-player animation) can be restricted even if the activation condition is not met for a predetermined period of time. This allows for more efficient indication to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation flag is ON due to forgetting to perform a RAM clear operation, ensuring a smooth start to the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Specific examples of variable effects)
The following specific example describes a situation where the performance control board 320 cannot properly receive commands during normal gameplay. However, even if the gameplay state is a specific gameplay state (time-saving gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state), the basic flow is the same as in normal gameplay.

Specifically, the following should be replaced with the following: 1st hold count, 1st special symbol memory specification command, 1st special symbol, 1st special symbol indicator 60 (120), 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 (123), sub-1st variable indicator 81, sub-1st hold indicator 83, 1st hold count display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp symbol, and 1st start port 112.

Figures 73 and 74 will be used to explain specific examples of variation effects.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing begins to start the variation performance.

At this time, while the background music continues to play, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 (referred to as the first lamp symbol when specifically distinguished) begin to display in a variation sequence, but the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing a preparatory action.

Furthermore, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the main control board 300 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED. The variation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the flashing of the LED on the sub-first variation indicator 81. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED.

Next, at timing P1, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the entry command (first special symbol memory specification command, first start opening entry specification command (pre-read specification command)) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T12 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 74(a)).

Subsequently, at timing P2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T1 and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 74(b)).

Then, at timing P3, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control board 300, processing is performed to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see Figure 74(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at the P4 timing, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begin to change. Furthermore, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 74(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P5, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll while the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. At this point, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has begun, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotational movement (performance movement) (see Figure 74(e)).

Then, at timing P6, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the background image scrolls, and the hold icon T1 and the corresponding icon TH rotate (effect movement) continues (see Figure 74(f)).

Then, at timing P7, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control board 300, processing is performed to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("164") (see Figure 74(g)), and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P8, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing begins to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, one reserved icon H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 begins. In addition, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 74(g)).

Subsequently, at timing P9, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll while the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has begun, the icon TH is performing a rotational movement (performance movement) (see Figure 74(h)).

Then, at timing P10, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("365"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE that make up the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the background image scrolls, and the hold icon T1 and the corresponding icon TH rotate (effect movement) continues (see Figure 74(i)).

Then, at the timing of P11, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control board 300, processing is performed to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("365") (see Figure 74(j)), and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Subsequently, since the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 is "0", the system transitions to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the performance control board 320 performs the processing necessary to terminate the variation performance. Thus, the customer waiting performance begins execution at timing P12, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a (special symbol).

The specific details of the customer waiting animation can be implemented as described with reference to Figures M3 and M4 mentioned above. Here, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set, the customer waiting animation may either perform a pre-notification of the specific function activation or restrict its execution.

In the customer waiting display, one or more display means capable of executing a rainbow-colored effect, such as the image display device 70, the panel lighting device 34a, or the frame lighting device 34b, can be combined to execute a specific light emission effect that appears rainbow-colored (a rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting display). The specific details of the rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting display are as described separately.

When the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 is "0", the predetermined performance to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the performance symbol 70a (special symbol) is not limited to a customer waiting performance, but may also include adjustment guidance performances such as adjusting the volume or brightness of the image display device, guidance performances related to game operation, or other performances. In this case, a performance other than the customer waiting demo performance may be executed before the customer waiting demo performance. Thus, the predetermined performance includes performances that are executed before the next variation performance of the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped begins. Furthermore, the predetermined performance is not limited to being executed by a customer waiting command (customer waiting state specification command), but may also be executed by other commands or by a timer.

(Specific examples of variable effects - when a specific function is activated)
The following specific example describes a situation where the performance control board 320 cannot properly receive commands during normal gameplay. However, even if the gameplay state is a specific gameplay state (time-saving gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state), the basic flow is the same as in normal gameplay.

Specifically, the following should be replaced with the following: 1st hold count, 1st special symbol memory specification command, 1st special symbol, 1st special symbol indicator 60 (120), 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 (123), sub-1st variable indicator 81, sub-1st hold indicator 83, 1st hold count display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp symbol, and 1st start port 112.

(Specific example 1)
Using Figures 75 and 76, we will explain a specific example of the variation effect when a particular function is activated.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing begins to start the variation performance.

At this time, while the background music continues to play, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 (referred to as the first lamp symbol when specifically distinguished) begin to display in a variation sequence, but the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing a preparatory action.

Furthermore, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the main control board 300 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED. The variation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the flashing of the LED on the sub-first variation indicator 81. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED.

Next, at timing P1, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the entry command (first special symbol memory specification command, first start opening entry specification command (pre-read specification command)) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T12 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 76(a)).

Subsequently, at timing P2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect action). Furthermore, the hold icon T1 and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect action) (see Figure 76(b)).

Then, at timing P3, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control board 300, processing is performed to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see Figure 76(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at the P4 timing, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins. Furthermore, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 76(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P5, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll while the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. At this point, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has begun, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotational movement (performance movement) (see Figure 76(e)).

Next, at timing P6, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the entry command (first special symbol memory specification command, first start opening entry specification command (pre-read specification command)) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T12 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 76(f)).

When a game ball enters the first starting opening 112 at timing P6, the activation conditions for a specific function are met, and the specific function activation flag is set. The image display device 70 then performs a specific function activation notification (see Figure 76(g)). For example, this can be done by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across almost the entire area of the image display device 70 and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) via the audio output device 331 indicating that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that displays text images indicating that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended, with almost the entire area of the image display device 70 darkened. In the above embodiment, the display of hold memory such as the hold icon T1 was increased, but the specific function activation image 205 may be displayed without increasing the display of hold memory.

When a specific function activation notification is executed, the display of game-related information such as the icon, hold icon, hold number, performance symbol, special symbol (small symbol), and background image on the image display device 70 screen is restricted, and the specific function activation notification image 205 is displayed. In addition to the specific function activation notification image 205, management displays such as a message instructing the user to call an administrator may also be displayed. When a specific function activation notification is executed, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64 controlled by the main control board 300 may continue to display the hold memory, or the continuation of the hold memory display may be restricted in the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64. Similarly, when a specific function activation notification is being performed, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and sub-second hold indicator 84, controlled by the performance control board 320, may continue to display the hold memory, or the continuation of the hold memory display may be restricted in the sub-first hold indicator 83 and sub-second hold indicator 84.

Subsequently, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol 70a, the customer waiting animation does not begin, and the specific function activation notification continues to be executed (see Figure 76(h)).

(Specific example 2)
Using Figures 77 and 78, we will explain a specific example of the variation effect when a particular function is activated.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing begins to start the variation performance.

At this time, while the background music continues to play, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 (referred to as the first lamp symbol when specifically distinguished) begin to display in a variation sequence, but the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing a preparatory action.

Furthermore, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the main control board 300 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED. The variation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the flashing of the LED on the sub-first variation indicator 81. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 through the lighting, extinguishing, and flashing of its LED.

Next, at timing P1, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the entry command (first special symbol memory specification command, first start opening entry specification command (pre-read specification command)) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T12 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 78(a)).

Subsequently, at timing P2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T1 and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 78(b)).

Then, at timing P3, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control board 300, processing is performed to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see Figure 78(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at the P4 timing, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol indicator 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the start command (first special symbol storage specification command, performance symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Additionally, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begin to change. Furthermore, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 78(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P5, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll while the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. At this point, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has begun, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotational movement (performance movement) (see Figure 78(e)).

Next, at timing P6, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives the entry command (first special symbol memory specification command, first start opening entry specification command (pre-read specification command)) transmitted from the main control board 300, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

In specific example 2, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112 at timing P5, the activation conditions for a specific function are met, and the specific function activation flag is set. In this case, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E will not change from "1" to "2" in a non-animated display of one frame. Furthermore, the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 will not change the first reserved number U1 from "1" to "2". Additionally, a single reserved icon T12 will not be added to the first reserved icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displaying gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 78(f)).

When the specific function activation flag is set, the image display device 70 and other devices execute a specific function activation notification (see Figure 78(g)). For example, this can be done by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across almost the entire area of the image display devices 70 and 71, and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) via the audio output device 331 indicating that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that displays text images indicating that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended, with almost the entire area of the image display devices 70 and 71 being darkened.

When a specific function activation notification is executed, the display of game-related information such as the icon, hold icon, hold number, performance symbol, special symbol (small symbol), and background image on the image display device 70 screen is restricted, and the specific function activation notification image 205 is displayed. In addition to the specific function activation notification image 205, management displays such as a message instructing the user to call an administrator may also be displayed. When a specific function activation notification is executed, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64 controlled by the main control board 300 may continue to display the hold memory, or the continuation of the hold memory display may be restricted in the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64. Similarly, when a specific function activation notification is being performed, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and sub-second hold indicator 84, controlled by the performance control board 320, may continue to display the hold memory, or the continuation of the hold memory display may be restricted in the sub-first hold indicator 83 and sub-second hold indicator 84.

Subsequently, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol 70a, the customer waiting animation does not begin, and the specific function activation notification continues to be executed (see Figure 78(h)).

As described above, when a specific function is activated, a notification of the activation of the specific function is executed, the start-up slot detection switches 304, 305 and the big prize slot detection switches 306a, 306b are disabled, and predetermined specific function activation processes, such as restricting the launch of game balls, are executed. Here, disabling the detection switches can be done in various ways, such as controlling the detection switch so that it does not activate the detection even if it detects a game ball, or cutting off the power so that the detection switch does not detect a game ball. In this way, even if a game ball enters the start-up slot or the big prize slot after the specific function has been activated, the game machine 100 of this disclosure will not meet the start-up condition based on the entry of a game ball into the prize slot, and similarly, the specific condition based on the entry of a game ball into the big prize slot will not be met, because the detection switches are disabled. In addition to disabling the big prize slot detection switches 306a, 306b, or instead, the big prize slot may be closed. If a specific function is activated during gameplay other than a jackpot, the large prize slot will not be open, thus restricting the entry of game balls into the slot.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can display the reserved balls (reserved ball icon T1 and reserved ball numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved ball display means) in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved balls (when reserved balls are stored or consumed) when the specific function is not activated. Conversely, when the specific function is activated, even if a game ball enters the starting slot, the display of the reserved balls (reserved ball icon T1 and reserved ball numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved ball display means) can be restricted. This prevents confusion for the player when the specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can display the reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved memory, such as when reserved memory is stored or consumed, when a specific function is not activated. Conversely, when a specific function is activated, the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can restrict the display of reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means), even if reserved memory is stored. This reduces confusion for the player when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if a specific function is not activated and a hold memory is stored, the image display device 70 can execute a variation animation. Conversely, in the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if a specific function is activated, even if a hold memory is stored, the image display device 70 (hold display means) can restrict the execution of the variation animation. This reduces player confusion when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, when a specific function is not activated, if the reserve memory increases or decreases due to a ball entering the prize slot, the image display device 70 (reserve display means) can perform an updated display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserve memory. Conversely, when the specific function is activated, even if a game ball enters the start slot, the image display device 70 (reserve display means) can restrict the updated display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserve memory. This prevents confusion for the player when the specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if there is no specific function activation flag (no information about the activation of a specific function) when the power is turned on, and if a hold memory is stored, the image display device 70 (hold display means) can display the hold memory (hold icon T1 and hold number). Conversely, if there is a specific function activation flag (information about the activation of a specific function) when the power is turned on, even if a hold memory is stored, the image display device 70 (hold display means) can restrict the display of the hold memory (hold icon T1 and hold number). This reduces the likelihood of players becoming confused when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if there is no specific function activation flag (no information indicating the activation of a specific function) when the power is turned on, the image display device 70 (holding display means) can perform an updated display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the holding memory when a ball enters the starting slot, etc. Conversely, if there is a specific function activation flag (information indicating the activation of a specific function) when the power is turned on, even if a game ball enters the starting slot, the image display device 70 (holding display means) can restrict the updated display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the holding memory. This reduces confusion for the player when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, the front surface of the main control board 300 is equipped with the following components: an RWM (RAM) clear switch 302a for inputting signals to clear the contents of the main RAM 301c or update the setting value of the game's advantage level (the probability of being judged as a jackpot); a setting key switch 302b for inputting signals to switch to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode; an information display 302c for displaying the base value B and setting values, which allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood; and other electronic components.

The information display unit 302c is used to display setting values and performance information (normal base value). It consists of four 7-segment displays with decimal points DP arranged side-by-side. The two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits are configured with identification segments to display identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), while the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured with numerical segments to display numerical information indicating the setting value and performance information. These four 7-segment displays display the setting value and the base value B in the normal game state. Dynamic lighting is used when displaying the base value B, while static lighting is used on the two 7-segment displays from the right when displaying a two-digit setting value.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can display held memory based on the fulfillment of the start condition on the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84. Furthermore, as described above, the information display 302c (performance display means) can display information related to the game value (e.g., base value). If the power is shut off while a specific function is not operating and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and there is no specific function operation flag (no information indicating the operation of the specific function) at power-on, the held memory stored before the power shutdown can be displayed on the held memory display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84, and the information display 302c (performance display means) can display information from before the power shutdown.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is not operating, followed by a RAM clear operation and then power-on, and there is no specific function operation flag (no information indicating the operation of the specific function) at power-on, it is possible to restrict the display of the pending memory stored before the power shutdown on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83, 84. Conversely, newly stored pending memory can be displayed on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83, 84. In this case, the information display 302c (performance display means) can display the information from before the power shutdown, and the information display 302c (performance display means) can update the information based on the new pending memory and other information.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is operating, followed by a RAM clear operation and subsequent power-on, and the specific function operation flag is not present (i.e., there is no operation information for the specific function) upon power-on, it is possible to restrict the display of the pending information stored before the power shutdown on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84, while simultaneously allowing the information before the power shutdown to be displayed on the information display device 302c (performance display means). In this case, newly stored pending information can be displayed on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is operating and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and if a specific function operation flag is present at power-on (i.e., no information indicating the operation of the specific function), it is possible to restrict the display of the pending memory stored before the power cut off on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84, while simultaneously allowing the information before the power cut off to be displayed on the information display device 302c (performance display means). In this case, even if a predetermined condition (such as a ball entering the start slot) occurs during the operation of a specific function that would trigger the storage of new pending memory, it is possible to restrict the display of the pending memory on the pending display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is operating and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and there is no specific function operation flag (no information about the specific function's operation) at power-on, and if a hold memory is stored, the hold memory can be displayed on the hold display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84, and the information display 302c (performance display means) can display the information from before the power was cut off. Conversely, if there is a specific function operation flag (information about the specific function's operation) at power-on, even if a hold memory is stored, the display of the hold memory can be restricted on the hold display means such as the image display device 70 and LED displays 83 and 84, but the information display (performance display means) can display the information from before the power was cut off.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the confusion that players may experience when certain functions are activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is not active, and then powered back on without performing a RAM clear operation, and if the specific function activation flag is not present (i.e., there is no information indicating the specific function is active) upon power-on, the machine can dispense prize balls based on the payout information stored before the power was shut off.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is not active, followed by a RAM clear operation and then power-on, and the specific function's activation flag is not present (i.e., there is no information indicating the specific function is active) upon power-on, it is possible to restrict the payout of prize balls based on the payout information before the power was shut off.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is active, followed by a RAM clear operation and then power-on, and the specific function activation flag is not present (i.e., there is no information indicating the specific function is active) upon power-on, it is possible to restrict the payout of prize balls based on the payout information before the power was shut off.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is active, and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and if the specific function is activated (i.e., if there is information indicating the specific function is active) at the time of power-on, then the payout of prize balls can be executed based on the payout information stored before the power was cut off.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the confusion that players may experience when certain functions are activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can retain the reserved memory stored before the activation of a specific function when that function is activated. If the gaming machine 100 is powered off after the activation of the specific function, and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, the reserved memory stored before the activation of the specific function can be retained, but the execution of the variation animation based on the reserved memory can be restricted. Furthermore, if the gaming machine 100 is powered off after the activation of the specific function, and then powered back on with a RAM clear operation, and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is not set, the execution of the variation animation based on the reserved memory stored before the power off can be restricted. In this way, confusion for the player due to the activation of the specific function can be suppressed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Here, if a losing reserve memory for a losing variation animation and a winning reserve memory for a winning variation animation are stored, and the game machine 100 is powered off after the specific function is activated, and then powered on without a RAM clear operation, and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, then the losing reserve memory and winning reserve memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of variation animations based on the winning reserve memory can be restricted. Also, if a losing reserve memory for a losing variation animation and a winning reserve memory for a winning variation animation are stored, and the game machine 100 is powered off after the specific function is activated, and then powered on without a RAM clear operation, and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, then the losing reserve memory and winning reserve memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of variation animations based on the losing reserve memory can be restricted. Furthermore, if a memory for losing spins and a memory for winning spins are stored, and the game machine 100 is powered off after a specific function is activated, and then powered back on without a RAM clear operation, and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, then the memory for losing spins and the memory for winning spins stored before the specific function was activated can be retained. However, it may be possible to restrict the execution of both the spinning animations based on the losing spins and the spinning animations based on the winning spins.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure has an image display device 70 (display means) that can execute a variation effect of the performance symbols 70a based on the occurrence of a ball entering the start slot (a predetermined requirement). Furthermore, when a specific function is activated, the execution of the variation effect based on the held memory can be restricted. Here, when the specific function is activated, even if a new ball entry into the start slot (a predetermined requirement) occurs, the storage of the held memory can be restricted, and the execution of the variation effect can be restricted. Here, "a new ball entry into the start slot (a predetermined requirement)" refers to situations such as when a ball jam occurs in the game area before the specific function is activated, and the ball jam is resolved after the specific function is activated, allowing the game ball to enter the start slot. This reduces confusion for the player when the specific function is activated, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, when there is no specific function activation flag (no information about the activation of a specific function) at power-on, can store new hold memories based on the occurrence of ball entry into the start slot (a predetermined requirement) after power-on, and can execute variable effects based on these hold memories. Conversely, when there is a specific function activation flag (information about the activation of a specific function) at power-on, even if a ball entry into the start slot (a predetermined requirement) occurs again after power-on, it is possible to restrict the storage of new hold memories and the execution of variable effects. Here, "a ball entry into the start slot (a predetermined requirement) occurs again" refers to situations such as when a ball jam occurs in the game area before the specific function is activated, and the ball jam is resolved after power-on, allowing the game ball to enter the start slot. This approach can suppress confusion for players when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Referring to Figure 79, the case where a specific function is activated while the movable member 73 is in operation will be explained. For example, if a specific function is activated during the execution of a predetermined effect such as a promotion notification effect, the image display device 70 will display an image 205 indicating that the specific function is in operation. Here, the predetermined effect in which the movement effect of the movable member 73 and the rainbow effect are executed simultaneously is not limited to promotion notification effects that suggest changes to advantageous symbols, but is also used for effects with a relatively high expectation level, such as decisive effects that suggest symbols will line up, scene transition effects, step-up effects, and reach transition effects. The specific content of the rainbow effect in the predetermined effect can be applied as described separately.

As shown in Figure 79, a pre-notification image 202 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70 before the specific function is activated. Then, as shown in Figure 79, when the specific function is activated, an image 205 indicating that the specific function is in operation is displayed on the image display device 70, and notification of the specific function's activation is provided.

As shown in Figure 79, the image display device 70 is executing a rainbow effect and simultaneously performing an operation animation for the first movable member 73. At this time, the rainbow effect is being performed by the first movable member 73 using its built-in lamp. If a specific function is activated while the rainbow effect and the operation animation of the first movable member 73 are being performed, the first movable member 73 overwrites its normal drive data and sets drive data for when the specific function is activated. In other words, the first movable member 73 discards its planned operation and performs the operation required when the specific function is activated (it does not complete the operation it was currently performing).

For example, as shown in Figure 79, if a specific function is activated during the execution of the rainbow effect and the movement of the first movable member 73, the first movable member 73 will cancel its planned movement and return to its retracted position. Conversely, if a specific function is activated during the execution of the rainbow effect and the movement of the first movable member 73, the continuation of the rainbow effect in the image display device 70 is restricted. Furthermore, if a specific function is activated during the execution of the rainbow effect and the movement of the first movable member 73, the continuation of the rainbow effect in the first movable member 73 is restricted.

In other words, when a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is operating, the first movable member 73 stops its normal operation (retracted position → extended position → retracted position), temporarily stops at the position where the specific function was activated, and then returns to the retracted position (specific function activation operation). When the specific function is activated, the first movable member 73 performs the retraction operation for the specific function using "low speed and high torque." Furthermore, the image display device 70 stops its rainbow effect and switches its screen to the specific function activation image 202. Additionally, the first movable member 73 turns off its built-in lamp. That is, when the first movable member 73 returns to the retracted position, its built-in lamp is off.

Thus, in the gaming machine 100 of this disclosure, if a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is performing an action that includes a rainbow-colored effect, the planned action is discarded and the action performed when the specific function is activated is performed. This allows the gaming machine 100 to reliably and quickly return the first movable member 73 to its retracted position, regardless of its current position. As a result, the gaming machine 100 can prevent the first movable member 73 from obstructing the view of the specific function activation image 205 displayed on the image display device 70, and can quickly notify the player that the specific function has been activated.

Furthermore, even if a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is performing its operation, the first movable member 733 may continue its planned protruding operation (the operation related to the set energization time) and complete that operation (finish the operation). Also, the operation when the specific function is activated may be the same as the initial check operation of the first movable member 73 performed when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure is capable of executing a predetermined performance that includes an action performance by a first movable member 73 (movable mechanism) and a specific light emission performance (rainbow effect) that appears rainbow-colored using performance means (image display device 70, panel lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.). If a specific function is activated during the period in which the action performance of the first movable member 73 is being executed in the predetermined performance, the action performance can continue to be executed, while the continuation of the specific light emission performance (rainbow effect) in the predetermined performance can be restricted. This reduces confusion for the player when a specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it reduces the load associated with suddenly stopping the movement of the movable mechanism.

(Regarding the shortened game mode)
In addition to the aforementioned "low probability time-saving game state," which is executed after a jackpot, or in place of the "post-jackpot low probability time-saving game state," a "low probability time-saving game state triggered by a predetermined number of special symbol changes" may be set in the low probability game state, triggered by the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol changes. The "low probability time-saving game state triggered by a predetermined number of changes" is executed in the low probability game state, including the low probability time-saving game state, after, for example, a predetermined number of symbol changes have occurred (1000 times). This can be executed in combination with effects such as whether or not it is a jackpot, as well as time-saving entry effects such as counting down the number of changes until the time-saving state is triggered.

Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination," a "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set in the low-probability game state, triggered by the display of a predetermined special symbol combination. The "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" can be implemented in the low-probability state by combining the effects of whether or not a jackpot has been won, such as the display of a specific symbol like "1-2-3" or "7-8-7," with other time-saving entry effects such as the reach or other time-saving entry effects.

(Winning by getting the game ball into the starting slot)
In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that when a game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side of the game area, it is possible to win a prize in the second start opening 115, which is opened based on the result of a winning lottery for ordinary symbols, which is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 112 or the ordinary symbol activation gate 113b. In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that when a game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side of the game area 106, it is possible to win a prize in the second start opening 115, which is opened based on the result of a winning lottery for ordinary symbols, which is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 112 or the ordinary symbol activation gate 113b.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, when a game ball is launched into the right-hand area of the game area 106, it is easier for the ball to pass through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than when it is launched into the left-hand area of the game area 106. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state" (specific game state) of the embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second start opening 115 is more easily controlled to open than in the "non-time-saving game state." In this state, aiming to enter the second start opening 115 by launching the game ball into the right-hand area of the game area allows the player to progress through the game more advantageously without consuming game balls, compared to launching the game ball into the left-hand area of the game area.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 100, the entrance to the warp device opens on the left side of the decorative frame, and a first starting opening 112, into which the game ball can always be entered, is provided directly below the stage where the game ball guided by the warp device rolls. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving game state" (normal game state), when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b and the second starting opening 115 is less easily controlled than in the "time-saving game state," aiming to launch the game ball into the left side of the game area 106 and have it enter the first starting opening 112 allows the player to progress through the game more advantageously without consuming game balls, compared to launching the game ball into the right side of the game area 106.

Thus, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is designed so that the player gains or loses an advantage depending on whether they shoot into the left or right side of the game area. Therefore, it is preferable to switch the shooting area of the game area according to the game state. In other words, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment requires the player to aim for entry into the starting holes 112 and 115 according to the game state. However, since the decision of whether to shoot into the right or left side of the game area 106 is left to the player's shooting operation, there is a risk that the player may aim for the wrong starting hole 112 or 115.

Furthermore, even in both the "non-time-saving game state" and the "time-saving game state," while the game machine only requires the player to launch the game ball into the same area of the game area (for example, the left area), the player's launching operation determines whether the ball is launched into the right or left area of the game area. Therefore, there remains a risk that the player may mistakenly aim for the wrong starting holes 112 and 115.

(Example of a performance technique 1)
Figures 80 and 81 show specific examples of the following effects: expectation level display, hold icon change effect, lamp change effect, notification sound effect, movable member operation effect, and consecutive予告 (preview) effects using these. Various effects that make the player expect to win a jackpot are sometimes called win-hinting effects.

As shown in Figure 80(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the losing animation symbol 70a for "728" is displayed.

Subsequently, when the variation effect begins, as shown in Figure 80(b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first sequence of the continuous予告演出 (preview sequence) begins when a blue effect image EF is displayed around the performance symbol 70a that initiates the variable display. The display mode of the first hold icon, which is shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2, changes to a blue character icon, initiating the hold icon change sequence. Simultaneously, the start lamp changes from an off state to a blue blinking state, initiating the lamp change sequence. Furthermore, an operation sequence in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is performed for a predetermined period. Note that the operation sequence of the first movable member 73 in its weak operation mode begins before the performance symbol 70a starts to vary and stops before the performance symbol 70 scrolls rapidly (for example, before the preparation operation).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 80(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, the zone performance (normal zone performance) is started on the first image display device 70. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling horizontally is displayed, and zone BGM is output. After the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 80(d), the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and then the "259" loss performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

Subsequently, when the variation effect begins, as shown in Figure 80(e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 70a that initiates the variable display, starting the second sequence of the continuous予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence. The hold icon change sequence, lamp change sequence, and zone sequence continue. Furthermore, an action sequence in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is performed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in Figure 80(f), the effect image EF displayed around the animation symbol 70a is erased, and the animation symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. After the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 80(g), the animation symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and then the "753" loss animation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

Subsequently, when the variation effect in question begins, as shown in Figure 80(h), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 70a that starts the variable display, initiating the third consecutive予告演出 (preview)演出. However, the effect image EF is displayed in red, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE changes to a color that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than before. The hold icon change演出 continues to be displayed. Furthermore, the start gate lamp changes from a solid blue state to a flashing red state, executing a lamp change演出 that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than a solid blue state. Also, an action演出 is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves in a strong action mode, falling from the top of the first image display device 70 to the front of the first image display device. At this time, an action演出 is executed in which the second movable member 74 moves in a weak action mode, vibrating diagonally, for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the pre-notifications executed in the variable display are displayed in a way that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than those executed previously. Here, the rainbow effect is more likely to be executed when the movable members 73 and 74 are operated in a strong operation mode than when they are operated in a weak operation mode.

Then, as shown in Figure 81(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is stopped. Note that the zone performance is displayed with zone background B, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in Figure 81(j), the first image display device 70 displays a mini-character MCB, and an effect is performed to heighten anticipation, for example, by having the mini-character MCB move across the screen.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 81(k), for example, the dialogue window displayed on the first image display device 70 shows the dialogue "CHANCE!" spoken by an ally, and the voice output device 331 displays the corresponding voice "A chance has come!", thereby executing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出).

Then, as shown in Figure 81(l), a reach animation (normal reach) is executed in which the "3" animation symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display symbol 70a that was previously displayed, while the animation symbol 70a is displayed in a variable display area in the center. At this time, the display mode of the first reserve icon, which is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, changes to a red character icon, executing a reserve icon change animation that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the blue character icon animation. Furthermore, the start gate lamp changes from a red light to a multi-colored (rainbow) light, executing a lamp change animation that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red light light animation.

Subsequently, when the game progresses to an SP Reach, as shown in Figure 81(m), the SP Reach animation begins, the animation symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first reserve icon display area 70B and the second reserve icon display area 70D are erased. The reduced-size animation symbol 70a changes from its normal display configuration, which consists of a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG representing part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the character's background, to a simple reduced-size display configuration consisting only of the identification area.

Then, when the game progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in Figure 81(n), the SPSP reach animation begins, and the icon display area 70C, along with the icon, is erased.

Subsequently, when the execution period of the SPSP reach sequence, which results in a jackpot, ends (the sequence control board 320 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 81(o), the jackpot sequence symbol 70a with the designation "333," which indicates the type of jackpot game (in this case, the first jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) before being stopped, and the fluctuating sequence ends.

Furthermore, even if the start gate lamp remains off during the display of SP and/or SPSP reach, the lamp change animation may continue, or the start gate lamp may be illuminated in a lighting pattern not used in the lamp change animation (i.e., white illumination) that does not indicate the probability of winning a jackpot.

(Specific example of staging 2)
Here is a second example of how to display fluctuations.

(Display of special variation 1 in normal game state)
Using Figures 82 and 83, the special symbol 1 variation display in normal gameplay will be explained. As shown in Figure 82, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserve number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 83(a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LEDs on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change. However, the performance symbol 70a begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations, such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or expansion/contraction of the whole or part, as in this embodiment (see Figure 83(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 83(c)).

At timing P3, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 83(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P4, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 83(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see Figure 83(f)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol indicator 60 (120) begins displaying the variation of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as icon TH. Finally, the display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol begins, and after performing preparatory actions, scrolling begins (see Figure 83(g)).

At timing P7, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one reserved icon T1 is added to the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 83(h)).

Subsequently, at timing P8, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect action). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect action) (see Figure 83(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 83(j)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

From this point onward, the Special 1 variation display will be performed during normal gameplay according to the flow described above.

While we have explained the Special 1 variation display in normal gameplay, the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 variation display in normal gameplay and the Special 2 variation display in specific gameplay states (time-saving gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state).

Specifically, the following should be replaced with the following: 1st Reserved Number, 1st Special Symbol, 1st Special Symbol Indicator 60 (120), 1st Special Symbol Reserved Indicator 63 (123), Sub-1st Variable Indicator 81, Sub-1st Reserved Indicator 83, 1st Reserved Number Display Area 70E, 1st Reserved Icon Display Area 70B, 1st Lamp Symbol, and 1st Start Port 112, respectively.

(Special 1 fluctuation display for specific game state)
Using Figures 82 and 84, the special 2 variation display in a specific game state will be explained. As shown in Figure 82, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the second start opening 115, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the second reserve number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second hold number U2, indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second hold number U1, indicated by the LED on the sub-second hold indicator 84, changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is added to the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 84(a)).

Next, at timing P1, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the display of the second special symbol variation begins. Also, the second reserve number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second reserved number U1, indicated by the LED on the sub-second reserved indicator 84, changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icon T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the second lamp symbol on the sub-second variable indicator 82 begins to change. However, the performance symbol 70a, as in this embodiment, begins scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the movement of a part of its decorative section or the expansion or contraction of the whole or a part thereof (see Figure 84(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 115, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the second reserve number U2, indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second hold number U2, indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second hold number U1, indicated by the LED on the sub-second hold indicator 84, changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is added to the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 84(c)).

At timing P3, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 115, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the second reserve number U2, indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the second hold number U2, indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is added to the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 84(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P4, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 84(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the second special symbol display unit 62 (122). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see Figure 84(f)), and the second lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the second special symbol indicator 62 (122) begins displaying the variation of the second special symbol. Also, the second reserve number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the second reserve number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the second reserved number U2, indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the reserved icon T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shifts towards the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation sequence, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. Finally, the display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol begins, and after preparatory operations, scrolling begins (see Figure 84(g)).

At timing P7, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 115, the second reserve number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the second reserve number U2, indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserve indicator 64 (124), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the second hold number U2, indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated 1-frame sequence. Also, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is added to the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing in size from a very small size) (see Figure 84(h)).

Subsequently, at timing P8, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a sway slightly up and down to their predetermined stopping positions (swaying display), and the bar-shaped image SG and symbol effect image ZE that constitute the effect symbols 70a also sway (effect movement). Furthermore, the hold icon T and the corresponding icon TH are in a state of rotation (effect movement) (see Figure 84(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the second special symbol display unit 62 (122). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped animation symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at its designated position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 84(j)), and the second lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing state (for example, off).

From this point forward, the Special 2 variation display will be performed in the specific game state according to the flow described above.

(Special 1 fluctuation display for specific game state)
Using Figures 85 and 86, the special 1 variation display in a specific game state will be explained. As shown in Figure 85, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated frame. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 86(a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "1" to "0" in a non-animated frame. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B (it is not shifted). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begin to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 86(b)).

At timing P2, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1, indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, changes from "0" to "1" in a non-animated frame. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 86(c)).

At timing P3, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the reserved icon T1 is not added to the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 86(d)).

Subsequently, at timing P4, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 86(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display symbol 70a remains stationary. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see Figure 86(f)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol indicator 60 (120) begins displaying the variation of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variation performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol begin to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains stationary (see Figure 86(g)).

At timing P7, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 112, the first reserved ball count U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved ball count U1, indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved ball indicator 63 (123), changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in a non-animated one-frame sequence. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the reserved icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 86(h)).

Subsequently, at timing P8, once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a remain in a stopped state (see Figure 86(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display unit 60 (120). Furthermore, the performance control board 320 performs processing to terminate the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display symbol 70a remains stationary, but the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see Figure 86(j)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off).

From this point forward, the special variation display will be performed in the specific game state according to the flow described above. Note that in the example above, the effect symbol 70a does not change, but it may change if the effect symbol 70a does.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of performing a specific variation display in which, during a specific game state, the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display. In this embodiment, the special variation display does not perform the change of the performance symbol 70a. On the other hand, in a normal game state, the aforementioned specific variation display is not performed from the start to the end of the special variation display. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 112 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 112 and 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of performing a specific variation display in which, during a specific game state, the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special variation display 1. In this embodiment, the performance symbol 70a does not change during the specific variation display. On the other hand, during a specific game state, the aforementioned specific variation display is not performed from the start to the end of the special variation display 2. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special variation display 2.

In this way, even if a player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 112 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 112 and 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the specific variation display, at least one of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can vary. For example, both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may vary, the performance symbol 70a may vary while the special symbol TZ does not, or the special symbol TZ may vary but the performance symbol 70a is not displayed.

In this embodiment, during normal gameplay, the reserve icon and reserve number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 112. In contrast, during a specific gameplay state, the reserve icon can be displayed in a specific manner, different from the predetermined manner, showing only the reserve number in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 112.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 112 and 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, during a specific game state, the reserve icon and reserve number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 115. In contrast, during a specific game state, the reserve icon can be displayed in a specific manner, different from the predetermined manner, in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 112, displaying only the reserve number.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 112 and 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display, information regarding the number of reserved balls is displayed using reserved icons, reserved numbers, and indicators. In contrast, in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display, it is displayed using reserved numbers and indicators. In other words, the total number of types of information regarding the number of reserved balls is smaller in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display than in the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display. Furthermore, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) information regarding the number of reserved balls in the specific gameplay state's Special 1 variation display than in the normal gameplay state's Special 1 variation display or the specific gameplay state's Special 2 variation display.

Furthermore, in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state, it is not limited to not displaying the reserved (relevant) icon; it may also be displayed. Also, in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state, even if the reserved (relevant) icon is not shifted based on the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, it may be displayed in a different manner from the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, such as by not activating the reserved (relevant) icon. In other words, while shifting the reserved icon is possible in the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, the execution of shifting the reserved icon can be restricted in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state. Furthermore, while the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner in the Special 1 variation display for a normal game state or the Special 2 variation display for a specific game state, the execution of displaying the reserved icon in a predetermined manner can be restricted in the Special 1 variation display for a specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly shoots to the left in a specific game state, just as in a normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to enter the first starting opening 112. This guides the player to aim for the second starting opening 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting openings 112 and 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the advantages of each game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(When a specific function is activated during the special 1 variation display in normal gameplay mode)
In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the conditions for activating a specific function are met, and when the specific function activation flag is set, the first image display device 70 or the like executes a notification of the activation of the specific function (see Figure 87). For example, this can be done by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that displays a text image notifying that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended, with the image display devices 70 and 71 almost entirely darkened.

Subsequently, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol 70a, the customer-waiting animation does not begin, and the specific function activation notification continues to be executed.

(When a specific function is activated in the special 2 variation display of a specific game state)
When a game ball enters the second start opening 115 in a specific game state, the conditions for operating a specific function are met, and the specific function activation flag is set. In this case, the first image display device 70 or the like executes a notification of the specific function activation (see Figure 88). For example, this can be done by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that darkens almost the entire area of the first image display device 70 and displays a text image that notifies that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended.

Subsequently, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol 70a, the customer-waiting animation does not begin, and the specific function activation notification continues to be executed.

(When a specific function is activated in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state)
When a game ball enters the first start opening 112 in a specific game state, the conditions for operating a specific function are met, and the specific function activation flag is set. In this case, the first image display device 70 or the like executes a notification of the specific function activation (see Figure 89). For example, this can be done by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting an audio notification (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that darkens almost the entire area of the image display devices 70 and 71 and displays a text image that notifies that the specific function has been activated and that the game has ended.

Subsequently, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol 70a, the customer-waiting animation does not begin, and the specific function activation notification continues to be executed.

Thus, even if a ball enters the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry in a specific game state, the specific function will activate if the prize balls resulting from this entry satisfy the activation conditions for the specific function. Furthermore, even if prize balls are generated as a result of a variation performance based on the activation conditions established by a ball entering the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry in a specific game state, the specific function will activate if these prize balls satisfy the activation conditions for the specific function. In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this disclosure allows the specific function to activate even if a ball enters the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry in a specific game state.

Even if a ball enters the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry, during a specific game state, the prize ball resulting from this entry can set a flag for preparing to activate a specific function, and based on this flag, a pre-notification of the activation of the specific function can be performed. Furthermore, even if a prize ball is generated as a result of a variation performance based on the activation conditions established by a ball entering the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry, during a specific game state, this prize ball can set a flag for preparing to activate a specific function, and based on this flag, a pre-notification of the activation of the specific function can be performed. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of this disclosure allows for the execution of a pre-notification of a specific function even if a ball enters the first start port 112, which is not intended for ball entry, during a specific game state.

In a specific game state, the display of the reserve icon based on a ball entering the first start port 112 can be restricted, and if a specific function is activated based on this entry, the display of the reserve icon can be continuously restricted. In a normal game state, the display of the reserve icon based on a ball entering the first start port 112 can be performed, and if a specific function is activated based on this entry, the display of the reserve icon can be stopped and restricted. In a specific game state, the display of the reserve icon based on a ball entering the second start port 115 can be performed, and if a specific function is activated based on this entry, the display of the reserve icon can be stopped and restricted.

In a specific game state, the display of the reserved memory based on entry into the first start port 112 can be restricted as a reserved icon, but the reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on entry into special 1, the display of the reserved icon can be continuously restricted, and the display of the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) can be restricted.

In a specific game state, the display of the hold memory based on entry into the first start port 112 can be restricted as a hold icon. However, if there is a hold memory based on entry into the second start port 115, this hold memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the hold numbers, sub-second hold indicator 84, or second special symbol hold indicator 64 (124). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 entry, the display of the hold icon based on entry into the first start port 112 can be continuously restricted, and the display of the hold memory based on entry into the second start port 115 can be restricted in one or more (including all) of the hold icon, hold numbers, sub-second hold indicator 84, or second special symbol hold indicator 64 (124).

In normal gameplay, the reserved memory based on winning into the first start slot 112 can be displayed as a reserved icon, and the reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special first win, the display of the reserved icon can be restricted without continuing to display it, and the display of the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) can also be restricted.

In normal gameplay, the reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 112 can be displayed as a reserved icon. However, if there is a reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115, this reserved memory can be displayed using one or more (including all) of the reserved icons, reserved numbers, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special win, the display of the reserved icon based on a win at the first start port 112 can be continuously restricted, and the display of the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 can be restricted using one or more (including all) of the reserved icons, reserved numbers, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124).

In a specific game state, the reserved memory based on entry into the second start port 115 can be displayed as a reserved icon, and the reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on entry into special 1, the display of the reserved icon based on entry into the second start port 115 can be restricted without continuing the display, and the display of the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) can also be restricted.

In a specific game state, it is possible to display the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 as a reserved icon. However, if there is a reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 112, this reserved memory can be displayed using one or more (including all) of the reserved icons, reserved numbers, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special first win, it is possible to restrict the display of the reserved icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and to restrict the display of the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 using one or more (including all) of the reserved icons, reserved numbers, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124).

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, in a specific game state, a right-shoot notification image 260, which guides the player to shoot to the right to indicate the direction in which to launch the game ball, is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, in a specific game state, if the ball enters the first starting opening 112, a right-shoot warning image 261, which reminds the player that the starting opening to aim for is the second starting opening 115, is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In a specific game state, if the ball enters the second starting opening 115, the right-shoot warning image 261, which reminds the player that the starting opening to aim for is the second starting opening 115, is not displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. The right-shoot notification image 260 is displayed continuously throughout the entire duration of the specific game state. The right-hand shooting warning image 261 is displayed for a predetermined period shorter than the duration of the specific game state, starting from the moment a ball enters the first start opening 112 during the specific game state. It is displayed repeatedly each time a ball enters the first start opening 112 during the specific game state. As shown in Figure 62, neither the right-hand shooting notification image 260 nor the right-hand shooting warning image 261 are displayed during normal gameplay.

The gaming machine 100 of this disclosure can execute a first predetermined notification (a small right-hand arrow notification during advantageous play), exemplified by a right-hand play notification image 260, and a second predetermined notification (please return to right-hand play), exemplified by a right-hand play warning image 261, when the first start condition is met by entering the first start opening 112 in a specific game state. On the other hand, when the first start condition is met by entering the first start opening 112 in a normal game state, or when the second start condition is met by entering the second start opening 115 in a specific game state, the execution of the second predetermined notification (please return to right-hand play), exemplified by a right-hand play warning image 261, can be restricted. Furthermore, when a specific function is activated in a normal game state or a specific game state, a specific notification can be executed, exemplified by a specific function activation notification (specific function activation image 205). Furthermore, when a specific function is activated in a specific game state, such as when a game ball enters the first start opening 112 and the first start condition is met, the display of the right-hand shooting notification image 260 (first predetermined notification) and the right-hand shooting warning image 261 (second predetermined notification) can be restricted, and the display of the specific function activation image 205 (specific notification) can be performed. This reduces player confusion when the specific function is activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The specific details of each rainbow effect can be applied as described separately.

The embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention have been described above, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 100 according to the above embodiment, an error notification image, such as a magnetic detection error notification image, was given as an example of an image with higher priority than the screen indicating that a specific function is operating. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may set other images as images with higher priority than the screen indicating that a specific function is operating.

For example, after a specific function is activated, menu selection buttons or similar elements may be displayed on a layer above the screen showing the function in operation, allowing the user to open the menu screen after the function is activated. Alternatively, the system may be designed to accept predetermined operations, such as menu selection buttons, and display a "Pachi Log image" that allows game history and other data to be saved on the player's terminal device.

Furthermore, after a specific function is activated (for example, when displaying a "Pachi Log image"), the sound effects may be made audible. Specifically, after a specific function is activated, the fader value of the variable channel used for sound effects may be amplified (the volume may be reset). In other words, the sounds to which the fader value is set to "0" after a specific function is activated may be only some of the sounds (the sounds to which the volume limit is applied may be only some of the sounds).

For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a managed gaming machine (a so-called smart pachinko machine). That is, the gaming machine of the present invention may store information about the game value (game balls) (such as the number of balls dispensed) on a predetermined information medium (such as a card) (the card may also store information about the number of balls held).

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling the activation of a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value. The secondary control means, when there is no information about the activation of the specific function at power-on (no specific function activation flag), can execute a specific rainbow-colored light emission performance (rainbow-colored performance) using performance means (image display devices 70, 71, panel lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start condition is met (period during which the customer waiting performance can be executed). When there is information about the activation of the specific function at power-on (specific function activation flag present), the execution of the specific light emission performance by the performance means can be restricted during the predetermined period.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling the activation of a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value. The secondary control means is capable of executing a specific rainbow-colored light emission performance (rainbow performance) in a predetermined game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, etc.) different from a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, if the state where the starting condition is not met (a state where no game balls enter the starting openings 112, 115) continues for a predetermined period. Furthermore, in the predetermined game state, if the specific function is activated, the execution of the specific light emission performance (rainbow performance) can be restricted even if the state where the starting condition is not met continues for a predetermined period.

◆ To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling the activation of a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value. The secondary control means is capable of notifying abnormalities (such as power restoration, RAM clearing, magnetic errors, radio wave errors, impacts, and door opening) using notification means (image display devices 70, 71, sound output device 331, panel lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.) based on the detection of predetermined abnormalities. Furthermore, the notification means can notify abnormalities even when the specific function is activated.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting openings 112 and 115). The machine can display the held memory based on the fulfillment of the starting condition using a held display means (image display device 70, first special symbol held display 63, second special symbol held display 64, sub-first held display 83, sub-second held display 84, etc.). It can control a specific function to restrict the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value. Furthermore, when the specific function is activated, the held display means can restrict the updating of the held memory even if a game ball enters the starting opening.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting openings 112 and 115). The machine is characterized in that the reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the starting condition can be displayed by a reserved display means (image display device 70, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, sub-first reserved display 83, sub-second reserved display 84, etc.), a specific function that restricts the progress of the game can be controlled to activate at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and if there is no information on the operation of the specific function at power-on (no specific function operation flag), the reserved memory can be displayed by the reserved display means if it is stored, and if there is information on the operation of the specific function at power-on (specific function operation flag present), the reserved memory can be restricted from being updated by the reserved display means even if it is stored.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (winning a game ball in the starting openings 112 and 115), wherein the reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions can be displayed by the reserved display means (image display device 70, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, sub-first reserved display 83, sub-second reserved display 84, etc.), and the performance display means (information display 302c) can display information related to the game value, and a specific value derived based on the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value. This system allows control to activate a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing. If there is no information about the activation of the specific function at power-on (no specific function activation flag), and the hold memory is stored, the hold display means can display the hold memory, and the performance display means can display information from before power-off. If there is information about the activation of the specific function at power-on (specific function activation flag present), and the hold memory is stored, the hold display means can restrict the display of the hold memory, and the performance display means can display information from before power-off.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means displays performance symbols based on the reserved memory stored in the display means (image display device 70) when the starting condition is met (game balls enter the starting openings 112, 115) The variable performance described in (70a) can be executed, and when the specific function is activated, the reserved memory stored before the activation of the specific function can be retained. If there is information indicating the activation of the specific function when the gaming machine is powered on after a power outage following the activation of the specific function (specific function activation flag present), the reserved memory stored before the activation of the specific function can be retained, but the execution of the variable performance based on the reserved memory can be restricted. If there is no information indicating the activation of the specific function when the gaming machine is powered on after a power outage following the activation of the specific function (specific function activation flag absent), the execution of the variable performance based on the reserved memory can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a subordinate control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the subordinate control means, in a display means (image display device 70), The system is characterized in that, based on the occurrence of a predetermined requirement (entry of a game ball into the starting openings 112 and 115), the system can execute a variation effect of the performance symbols (70a) based on the stored reserve memory, which is then stored upon the fulfillment of the starting condition (systematically the entry of a game ball into the starting openings 112 and 115). Furthermore, when the specific function is activated, the execution of the variation effect can be restricted. And when the specific function is activated, even if a new predetermined requirement occurs (entry of a game ball into the starting openings 112 and 115), the storage of new reserve memory based on that predetermined requirement can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means can activate a specific function at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition occurs (game balls enter the starting openings 112, 115) Based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions (the systematically achieving the entry of game balls into the starting openings 112 and 115), the display means (image display device 70) can execute a variation effect of the performance symbols (70a). If there is no information on the operation of the specific function at power-on (no specific function operation flag), a new hold memory can be stored upon the occurrence of a new predetermined requirement. If there is information on the operation of the specific function at power-on (specific function operation flag present), even if a new predetermined requirement occurs, the storage of a new hold memory can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling a specific function to restrict the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value. The secondary control means is capable of executing a predetermined performance including an action performance by a movable component (movable member 73) and a specific rainbow-colored light emission performance (rainbow-colored performance) using performance means (image display device 70, panel lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.). The invention is characterized in that, if the specific function is activated during the period in which the action performance is being executed in the predetermined performance, the action performance can be continued, while the continuation of the specific light emission performance in the predetermined performance can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and controls a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state (specific game state such as a time-saving game state or a probability-changing game state). It is possible, and the control means is capable of executing a first predetermined notification (right-hand shooting notification image 260) and a second predetermined notification (right-hand shooting warning image 261) when the first starting condition is met in the second game state (game ball entering the first starting opening 112). It is also capable of executing a specific notification (specific function in operation image 205) when the specific function is activated in the first or second game state. Furthermore, when the specific function is activated while the first starting condition is met in the second game state, it is possible to execute the specific notification while restricting the execution of the first and second predetermined notifications.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a subordinate control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the subordinate control means displays a pre-notification (pre-notification image 202) that notifies in advance of the operation of the specific function. The system is executable by a means (image display device 70), and the pre-display can be displayed at a position different from the first information (reserved numbers, special symbols TZ, etc.) and the second information (performance symbols 70a) that differs from the first information displayed on the display means. When a rainbow effect is executed at a first timing (decisive effect, cut-in, etc.) on the display means, the pre-display can limit the area of the rainbow effect. When a rainbow effect is executed at a second timing (reserved change, etc.) on the display means, the pre-display does not limit the area of the rainbow effect.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) comprising a main control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) for executing performances based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means can be controlled to activate a specific function that restricts the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means can execute a rainbow performance in a first performance means (image display device 70), and can also execute a second performance means (a lighting device for the game board 34a, a lighting device for the frame 34b, etc.) that is different from the first performance means. The system is capable of executing a rainbow-colored effect, and can execute a first notification (pre-notification image 202) relating to the specific function and a second notification (specific function operation image 205) relating to the specific function that is different from the first notification. When the first notification is executed, it is possible to execute either the rainbow-colored effect by the first effect means or the rainbow-colored effect by the second effect means, or both. When the second notification is executed, it is possible to restrict either the rainbow-colored effect by the first effect means or the rainbow-colored effect by the second effect means, or both.

◆To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine (100) that can switch between game states, including a first game state (a normal game state other than a jackpot or a time-saving game state) and a second game state different from the first game state (a jackpot game), and can control a specific function to activate at a predetermined timing to restrict the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value given and used reaches a predetermined value, and a first condition (a condition for performing a variation effect) that is established based on predetermined requirements (game balls entering the start openings 112, 115) that occur at the first prize-winning means (start openings 112, 115), and a second prize-winning means (jackpot opening) that has predetermined requirements There is a second condition (such as round progression or payout) that is met based on the event (winning a prize ball in the big prize slot), and the following characteristics are present: If the specific function is activated in the first game state (the specific function activation flag is set), even if the predetermined requirements occur in the first prize-winning means, the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted; if the specific function is activated in the second game state (the specific function activation flag is set), the second condition can be fulfilled if the predetermined requirements occur in the second prize-winning means during a predetermined period after the activation of the specific function (the period until the big win game ends); and even if the predetermined requirements occur in the first prize-winning means, the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted.

[Variations]
The gaming machine 100 described in each of the above embodiments may be configured as follows.
The gaming machine 100 can perform a waiting-for-customers performance (waiting-for-customers demo performance) when the display of variations is not being executed. Furthermore, even if the player presses an operating means such as the performance button 17 or the sword handle unit 135 while the waiting-for-customers demo performance is being executed, the LEDs of the performance button 17 or the sword handle unit 135, as well as any other light-emitting means, may be configured not to display a rainbow light.

In variable animations where the animation symbols change, it is possible to initiate the animation based on the operation of the aforementioned control means (such as the animation button 17). For example, possible animation patterns include: a rainbow light display when the control means is pressed upon the success of a variable animation's decisive animation; a rainbow-colored icon being displayed when the control means is pressed during an animation suggesting the operation of the hold button; a rainbow light display when the control means is pressed during development to an SP reach; and a rainbow light display during an SP reach when a specific operation (such as pressing a hidden button or holding it down) occurs without any suggested operation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 includes, as an example of operating means, a first operating means (such as a performance button 17) and a second operating means (a launch handle device 103). The rainbow light display in the waiting-for-player performance can be terminated by the occurrence of a starting win (fulfillment of the starting condition) based on the operation of the launch handle device 103. On the other hand, the rainbow light display in the variation performance may be configured not to terminate by pressing the performance button 17 (termination based on operation of the first operating means is restricted). Also, the rainbow light display may be configured not to start even if an operating means such as the performance button 17 is pressed during the execution of the waiting-for-player demo performance (starting may be restricted).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 may have more light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light display for a second light-emitting mode (rainbow light display during a customer-waiting demo) with different starting conditions than for a first light-emitting mode (e.g., rainbow light display during a variation effect) which can be started based on the operation of the control means. For example, during a customer-waiting demo effect, the machine may be configured to execute/multiply the rainbow color effect without using the LEDs of the main display device 131, the upper and lower mechanism units 154 and 156, or the effect buttons. On the other hand, during a variation effect, the machine may be configured to execute the rainbow color effect using, for example, the LEDs of the main display device 131, the upper and lower mechanism units 154 and 156, the effect buttons, or the launch handle device 103.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 may be capable of executing a first rainbow-colored effect (rainbow light emission during a variation effect) in which a specific effect using the operating means (such as a vibration effect of the effect button 17 or the sword handle unit 135) is performed, and a second rainbow-colored effect in which no specific effect using the operating means is performed. In this case, the number of light-emitting means capable of displaying the rainbow light may be greater for the first rainbow-colored effect than for the second rainbow-colored effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, the rainbow-colored effect that signals a jackpot (such as a successful outcome effect) may be configured to use more colors for illumination compared to the rainbow-colored effects performed in customer waiting effects,予告 effects, and reserve change effects. For example, when using white light for flashing, the number of colors increases by the amount of white light.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute a first sequence from the start of the variation sequence until the start of the final sequence, and a second sequence from the start of the final sequence until the confirmed stop. The rainbow effect may be more likely to occur with the special variation display for a win in a normal game state or the special variation display for a win in a specific game state than with the special variation display for a win in a specific game state. In this case, in the first sequence described above, the rainbow effect may be more likely to occur with the special variation display for a win in a normal game state or the special variation display for a win in a specific game state than with the special variation display for a win in a specific game state. In other words, the rainbow flashing display due to a pre-announcement sequence or similar may be less likely to occur in the first sequence.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can notify the result of a determination of whether or not to execute a special game at a predetermined timing in the variation performance (for example, a decisive performance). When this notification is executed, it may be possible to execute a first performance (for example, a rainbow effect display by the main display device 131) that causes the first light-emitting means to display a rainbow light, and a second performance (for example, a frame lamp, a panel lamp, a movable mechanism, a performance button, etc.) that is different from the first light-emitting means to display a rainbow light. In this case, the timing of the end of the first performance and the end of the second performance may be different. For example, the end of the first performance may be later. Alternatively, the end of the first performance may be earlier.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can display multiple types of images (instruction displays) that prompt the player to shoot to the right during the execution of a special game. For example, it can perform both a large and a small right-hand shoot, and may display either one or both. Here, the main display device 131 may be configured to more easily display a rainbow light when only one instruction display is executed (for example, when only a small right-hand shoot is executed) than when other cases are displayed (for example, when a large right-hand shoot is displayed), or it may be configured to display more types of rainbow light displays on the main display device 131. It may also be configured to display the rainbow light display on the main display device 131 for a longer duration.

The gaming machine 100 can display, on its display means (image display device 70), the number of game values expected to be awarded in a special game (first information), the number of game values awarded during a special game, the cumulative number of game values awarded when special games occur consecutively, the cumulative number of awarded game values reaching a predetermined number, and information such as the cumulative number of game values awarded displayed in the results (second information). The likelihood of the rainbow display being executed may differ between the first information and the second information.
For example, when a winning combination is confirmed, the number of winnings may be displayed in rainbow colors. Also, when a revival is confirmed in the results screen, the number of winnings may be displayed in rainbow colors. Furthermore, for example, in a slot machine, when an additional +300 is added, the display device may show a rainbow color.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 may be capable of executing two special games (jackpot games): a first special game (a 4-round jackpot corresponding to a specific stopping symbol) and a second special game (a 10-round jackpot corresponding to another specific stopping symbol). It may also be capable of pre-notifying the activation of a specific function that restricts the game's progress when the aforementioned specific value reaches a predetermined value. The image display device 70 can display first information related to the first special game ("〇△ Bonus" display) and second information related to the second special game ("Super 〇△ Bonus" display). Here, the display of the first information may be restricted from being displayed in rainbow colors, but the display of the second information may be possible in rainbow colors. Furthermore, if pre-notification is executed while the second information is being displayed in rainbow colors, the rainbow display of the second information may be configured not to terminate due to the execution of the pre-notification.

The present invention has been described above based on embodiments and modifications. However, the embodiments described above are intended to facilitate understanding of the invention and do not limit it. The present invention can be modified and improved without departing from its spirit or claims, and equivalents thereof are included.

17: Operation button 70: First image display device 71: Second image display device 34a: Panel lighting device 34b: Frame lighting device 63: First special symbol hold indicator 64: Second special symbol hold indicator 70a: Performance symbol 73: Movable member 83: Sub-first hold indicator 84: Sub-second hold indicator 100: Gaming machine 103: Launch handle device 112: First start port 115: Second start port 131: Main display device 132: First side display device 133: Second side display device 134: Upper display device 135: Sword handle unit 141: Stage back display device 154: Upper mechanism unit 156: Lower mechanism unit 180: Upper unit 181: Light guide plate panel unit 260: Right-hand shooting notification image 261: Right-hand shooting warning image 205 Image 202 showing specific function in operation; Image 300 showing prior notification; Main control board (main control means)
320: Performance control board (subordinate control means)
331: Audio output device

Claims (1)

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A subordinate control means controls the game's presentation based on a signal from the main control means,
A first light-emitting means provided in the first region and capable of performing light-emitting display based on a signal from the subordinate control means,
A second light-emitting means is provided in a second region different from the first region and is capable of performing light-emitting display based on a signal from the subordinate control means,
It includes an operating means that can be operated by the player,
The game has a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state.
The system includes a game execution means that, based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, acquires judgment information, evaluates the judgment information to perform a change in the display symbols, and when the change occurs in a predetermined manner, a special game can be executed.
Based on the amount of game value awarded and used, a specific value is derived, and when that value reaches a predetermined level, a specific function that restricts the progress of the game can be controlled to activate at a predetermined timing.
The display means is capable of executing specific character displays, specific effects where the aforementioned effect symbols are enlarged, or instruction effects that instruct the player to perform specific operations.
When the aforementioned variation is not performed, the customer waiting animation or customer waiting demo display can be executed.
The system includes a rainbow effect means that includes multiple light-emitting means capable of performing a rainbow light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors,
The aforementioned rainbow effect means is
A light-emitting means including the first light-emitting means, the second light-emitting means, or the display means, and capable of performing the rainbow light-emitting display using one or more of the light-emitting means,
The first effect involves using the rainbow effect means to perform the rainbow light display in a specific manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, using the plurality of light-emitting means.
The rainbow effect means can perform a second effect, which is a rainbow light display in a predetermined manner that appears to have different rainbow colors than the first effect.
The number of light emission patterns for the rainbow light display in the rainbow effect means can be configured such that the number of light emission patterns differs depending on whether the performance symbol is in a first state, from when it stops on a first stop symbol until the next spin begins, or in a second state, from when it stops on a second stop symbol until the next spin begins.
The aforementioned visual effects are
The aforementioned variation can be displayed in a first form when it starts, and can be displayed in a second form that is smaller than the first form during the reach animation.
In the aforementioned specific performance, the performance symbols can be displayed larger than in the first embodiment .
The aforementioned specific performance is,
This is performed when it is indicated that the special game will be performed, and an enlargement effect can be performed in which at least one of the multiple performance symbols is enlarged in the area of the image display area by the display means that is larger than that of the other performance symbols.
When the aforementioned specific effect is being performed, the rainbow light display can be performed ,
In the aforementioned customer waiting animation, it is possible to display a volume control image that shows the volume level.
In the aforementioned customer waiting animation, when the volume adjustment image corresponding to the operation of the operating means is displayed, the rainbow light display is not executed.
A gaming machine that can display the volume control image during the aforementioned fluctuation, and can perform the rainbow light display when the volume control image corresponding to the operation of the operating means during the fluctuation is displayed .